Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 1152

Technical guide 2012

BTicino SpA reserves at any time the right to modify the contents of this booklet and to
communicate, in any form and modality, the changes brought to the same.

MY HOME

AD-ITMH12GT - Edition 04/2012

BTicino SpA
Via Messina, 38
20154 Milano - Italia
www.bticino.it

MY HOME

DESIGN
AND INSTALLATION
GUIDE

INTRODUCTION Project guidelines

Radio System

AUTOMATION

Burglar alarm

Energy management Temperature Control Air Conditioning


Consumption Display Load control management
Sound system

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

Structured cabling system for the home sector

System integration and control

SOFTWARE AND SERVICES CATALOGUE

TECHNICAL SHEETS - GLOSSARY

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
MY HOME - Build on it. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The MY HOME system technologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
An interface for every need. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Select the look that meets your taste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MY HOME functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
MY HOME WEB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Project guidelines
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Functional diagram of a MY HOME system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Creation of the home automation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
YouProject software for the sizing of MY HOME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Devices configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Virtual configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Additional functions that can be performed with the virtual configuration. . . 26
Virtual Configurator software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

System layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installation of a BuS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Type of wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Selection and positioning of the electric distribution board. . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MY HOME flatWall for all basic or advanced system needs. . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Aesthetic and functional value with minimum space requirements. . . . . . . . 44
MY HOME flatWall 240 - 270 switchboard composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
MY HOME FLATWALL 150 switchboard composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Installation heights for every need. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Device-holder supports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Installation solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Electric distribution board position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Plug-in boxes position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

General Contents MY HOME

Indications for the installation of aXOlutE EtrIS device holder boxes . . . . . 56


Local control device position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Grouping cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Selection of the cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Selection of the conduits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Positioning of conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Radio System
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Wireless freedom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
The functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Installation features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Control devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Actuators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configuration - general rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
How to modify the configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Configuration of the functions: the main control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuration of the functions: the scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100


Distances and maximum number of devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102


Application examples and wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

AUTOMATION
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Introduction to the Automation system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actuator devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire Automation extension with ZigBee radio devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

120
122
132
142
143

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
General concepts. . . . . . . .
Addressing levels. . . . . . . .
Main operating modes . . . .
Examples of configuration. .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

144
148
151
153

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154


Maximum distances and absorptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Maximum number of devices which can be configured. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Logical expansion of the addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164


Lighting management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Management of different loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window and shutter management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Management of dimmer lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting and shutter management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

164
166
167
168
169

Burglar alarm
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Professional safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

MY HOME General Contents

Advanced functions: the safety of the home and of people . . . . . . . . . . . .


Advanced functions: integration with other MY HOME functions . . . . . . . .
System devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control and protection devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices for radio expansion and technical alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System selection criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

176
178
179
180
181
182

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187


Project approach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example: apartment burglar-alarm system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example: apartment burglar-alarm system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of modular devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modular power supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central unit with display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IR detectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Various sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

187
188
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
202

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
General concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of the Youproject program for the configuration of the system . . . . . . .
Technical alarms: shop burglar-alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical alarms: anti-panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical alarms: flooding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical alarms: gas leak alarm with burglar-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical alarms: telephone signalling of the tripping of the
general circuit breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced applications: switching on the lights because of an alarm. . . . . .
Advanced applications: remote assistance request with telephone call . . . .

203
205
206
207
208
209
211
213
214
215

Start-up and testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216


Start-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming of 4050 infrared remote controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming of 3530S and 3540 transponders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming a remote control or a transponder for several systems . .
System activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System test: two line contact interfaces check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration or system modifications - Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

216
218
219
220
222
223
224
225

Energy management
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Saving energy has never been this easy.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
To ensure energy efficiency with MY HOME is easy.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Energy efficiency management devices overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Temperature control
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
MY HOME temperature control can be used:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Device selection criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

General Contents MY HOME

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244


Maximum number of devices, maximum distances and absorptions. . . . . .
Combining with other functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correct mode of installation for 4 zone control unit, probes and
magnetic contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposition of solenoid valves and actuators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

244
246
247
248

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249


Legend of symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 zone villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 zone villa - Climaveneta fan-coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 zone villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 zone villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 zone villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sector, 12 zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Several homes, 4 zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

249
250
256
262
270
274
278
282

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
General concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Air Conditioning
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
MY HOME integration devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

consumption display
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Instantaneous power, water and gas consumption data . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying consumptions and the production data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement and display devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Energy data logger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

292
294
296
298
299

Load control management


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
The end of the black-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Device selection criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308


Load control management and consumption display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Load control management and consumption display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Load control management and consumption display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314


Display of electricity, water and gas consumptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of electric consumptions on several lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of produced and consumed energy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of produced and consumed energy in exchange mode on location. . . .
Display of the consumption of thermal power/hot water by individual home. . .
Load control management with total consumption display. . . . . . . . . . . .
Load control management with total display, of loads and diagnostics. . . . .
Three-phase and one-phase load control management. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MY HOME General Contents

314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321

Sound system
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Sound system 2 wire stereo HI-FI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..324
Wide range of solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Integration with other MY HOME applications and the 2 wire video
door entry system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Installing a system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Installation examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344


Maximum distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
System consumption calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
General rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358


Residential sector - apartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residential sector - small house 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residential sector - villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sector - doctors surgery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sector - restaurant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sector - supermarket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sector - hotel room 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sector - hotel room 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residential sector: villa with automation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residential sector: villa with 2 wire video door entry system. . . . . . . . . . . .
System expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

358
360
364
366
368
370
372
374
376
378
380

Video door entry and home video


surveillance system
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
System composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simple installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1 - Villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2 - Villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 3 - Apartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 4 - Complexes of small houses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

388
390
391
394
396
398
400
402

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408


System composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of entrance panels, handsets and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

408
413
416
418
419

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422


One-family system with 1 EP and 5 intercommunicating video handsets. . . . 422
Two-family systems with 1 EP, 3 handsets per home
and intercom between apartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
One-family system with 2 EP and 2 outdoor cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

General Contents MY HOME

One-family system with 5 video handsets in simultaneous switching on. . . . . . 425


One-family system with max 16 cameras or entrance panels. . . . . . . . . . . 426

Structured cabling system


for the home sector
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
What is the structured cabling system for the home sector?. . . . . . . . . . . .
The devices for the distribution of data, telephone and tv . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application examples: telephone, data, TV/SaT, iPTV and
video door entry system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application examples: telephone, data and integration
with MY HOME for local and remote function control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling structure and components for the home sector. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling structure and components for the home sector. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling structure and components for the home sector. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

430
432
434
436
438
442
444

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446


Main requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creation of the communication area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning of the user sockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User socket wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

446
447
448
449

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450


System with 3 active telephone jacks and 4 active data sockets . . . . . . . . .
System with 6 active telephone jacks and 6 active data sockets . . . . . . . . .
System with Gateway access, 6 telephone jacks, 4 data sockets,
1 IPTV jack, and 6 TV/SAT jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System for distribution of telephone system, data network, TV/SAT signal. . .
System with Wireless router modem external to the distribution
board for the management of 4 data sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of the data and telephone system network
with the MY HOME system, for local or remote function control. . . . . . . . .
Expansion of the number of data sockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

450
451
452
454
456
457
458

System integration and control


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
System integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode of integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration and interfacing devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration among MY HOME systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration between MY HOME and systems with different protocols. . . . . .
System control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MY HOME WEB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MY HOME WEB - Installer Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MY HOME WEB - Customer Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System layout for the use of the MY HOME WEB services. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MY HOME WEB - Creation and configuration of the Customer Area. . . . . . .
MY HOME WEB - Creation of the customer area: operations to be
performed in the Installer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MY HOME General Contents

460
461
462
463
469
470
472
486
498
499
500
502
504
505

MY HOME WEB - Creation of the customer area: operations to be


performed on the control devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Open WEB nET language and MY OPEn Community. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510


Integration of the Automation system with the
Temperature Control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of the Video door entry system with the Sound system . . . . . . . .
Integration of the Burglar-alarm system with the Automation
and Temperature Control systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of the Burglar-alarm system with the Video door entry
system and the Sound system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of the Automation system with the Video door entry system
(with Web server for remote control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total integration of the MY HOME systems with remote function control . . .

510
511
512
513
514
516

Software and services


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
YouProject preparing estimates and designing MY HOME
home automation systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YouDiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTicino responds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

520
522
523
524

RADIO SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AXOLUTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIVINGLIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mtix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLATWALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

527
531
559
587
607

CATALOGUE

TECHNICAL SHEETS
Technical sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Burglar alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Load control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
Temperature control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Sound system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Video door entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Structured cabling system for the home sector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
Control and integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108

GLOSSARY
Extended descriptions and operating modes of Automation devices
with virtual configuration.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126

General Contents MY HOME

Progressive index of items


ITEM
502NPA
502PA
3440
3442
3444
3445
3448
3455
3456
3456
3457
3470
3475
3476
3477
3479
3480
3480V12
3481
3482
3483
3484
3485
3485B
3486
3495
3496
3499
3501/....
3504
3505/12
3506
3507/6
3508BUS
3508U2
3508U3
3510
3510M
3510PB
3511
3512
3513
3514
3515
3516
3518
3518/50
3518/150
3519

552
552
544
544
544
544
544
546
546
599
546
538
538
535
544
546
543
544
544
541
541
533
541
533
548
532
550
552
552
545
545
545
547
547
547
543
543
543
543
543
543
543
551
543
543
543
543
543

CATALOGUE
579
604
579
604
572
572
572
572
572
574
574

TECHNICAL SHEET

862
864
867
870
873
972
976

574
566
566
563
572
574
571
572
572
569
569
541
569
541
576
549
577
579
579
573
573
573
575
575
575
571
571
571
571
571
571
571
578
571
571
571
571
571

592
592
590
598
599
597
598
598
595
595
561
595
561
601
560
602
604
604
598
598
598
600
600
600
597
597
597
597
597
597
597
603
597
597
597
597
597

MY HOME General Contents

668
670
671
672
875
877
881
885

887
890
892
1010
1011

895
895
895
895
895
895
897
898
899
899
899
899

ITEM
3522
3523
3526
3526/10
3526/16
3527N
3528N
3528N
3529
3530S
3540
3545
3549
3550
3559
3571
3572
3573
3574
3575
3576
3577
3578
3579
3581
3750
3751
3756
3757
3759
3761
3771
3785
3786
3787
3788
3789
3790
3791
3792
3793
3794
3795
3796
3797
3798
3799
3801
3802

547
547

530
530
530
536
535
535
551
542
546
551
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
608
608
608
609
609
609
609
609
609
608
608
608
608
609
609
609
609
609
609
609
609
609
608
608

CATALOGUE
575
600
575
600

564
563
563
578
570
574
578

590
590
590
603
596
599
603

TECHNICAL SHEET
958
677
677
677
678
681
629
682

978
630
631
632
633
634
635
639
641
643
646

ITEM
3803
3804
3805
3823
3825
3828
3829
3831
4050
4070
4072A
4072L
4911TDM
32754
32871
32872
335919
335919
336904
336982
336983
336984
336985
339213
339223
339313
342170
342200
342550
342560
342991
342992
343001
343002
344082
344163
344165
344400
344401
344411
344412
344413
346000
346020
346030
346230
346250
346260
346830

CATALOGUE
608
608
608
608
609
608
609
608
545
573
545
545
562
555
555
555
551
603
552
577
577
577
602
558
558
558

TECHNICAL SHEET

573
573
545

902
598
545

903
903

583
583
583
578
579

604

1028

1029
1032
1033
1034
1036
1036
1038
1038
1040
1050
1052
585
585
585
585
585
551
533
548

548

578
578
576

576

603
603
601

601

1053
1054
1055
1061
1063
1064
1067

ITEM
346833
346841
346850
346851
348200
347400
348201
348202
348203
348204
348205
348206
348220
348402
349140
349210
349211
349212
349310
349311
349312
349313
349320
349321
349340
349414
349415
349418
391647
391648
391649
391657
391658
391659
391661
391662
391663
391670
A5006
A5460
A5765
AM4890
AM5006
AM5052H
AM5064VH
AM5460
AM5658
AM5659
AM5731/12

CATALOGUE
550
550
550
558

577
577
577

602
602
602

TECHNICAL SHEET
1068
1070
1071
1073
1075

558
558
558
558
558
558
542
558
558
557
557
557
557
557
557
557
557
557
550
550
550
585
585
585
585
585
585
557
557
557
606
606
606
588
606
606
606
606
591
591
598

570

905
1078

1082
1084
1084
1084
1086
1086
1088

1090
1090
1090
1090
1090
1090
1092

838
843

General Contents MY HOME

ITEM
AM5732/12
AM5740
AM5742
AM5765
AM5783/8
AM5785
AM5786
AM5787
AM5787/4
AM5790
AM5791
AM5791B
AM5831M2
AM5832/2
AM5832/3
AM5834
AM5851/1
AM5851M2
AM5872
AM5875
AM5911
AM5911/2
AM5911/2AF
AM5911/2AG
AM5911/2AH
AM5911/2AI
AM5911AF
AM5911AG
AM5911AH
AM5911AI
AM5911BE
AM5911BF (*)
AM5915/2AA
AM5915/2AB
AM5915/2AC
AM5915/2AD
AM5915/2BA
AM5915/2BB
AM5915/2BC
AM5915/2BD
AM5915/2BE
AM5915/2BF
AM5915/2BH
AM5915AA
AM5915AB
AM5915AC
AM5915AD
AM5915BA
AM5915BB

CATALOGUE
598
601
601
606
595
596
595
590
590
596
596
596
590
590
590
590
592
592
599
599
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605

TECHNICAL SHEET
1017
1020

596
595

933
936
937
940
938
946
949
952

601

602

MY HOME General Contents

794
797
829
799
801
993
1002

ITEM
AM5915BC
AM5915BD
AM5915BE
AM5915BF
AM5915BH
BMDI1001
BMSE1001
BMSE2001
BMSE2002
BMSE2003
BMSE2004
BMSE2005
BMSW1001
BMSW1002
BMSW1003
C9451
E46ADCN
E47/12
E47ADCN
E49
F80AL
F80CMD
F115/8A
F115/8B
F400A
F411/1N
F411/1NC
F411/2
F411/2NC
F411/4
F413N
F414
F415
F416U1
F417U2
F420
F422
F425
F426
F428
F429
F430/2
F430/4
F441
F441M
F454
F461/2
F462
F481

CATALOGUE
605
605
605
605
605
540
537
537
537
537
537
537
539
539
539
533
551
551
551
551
578

568
565
565
565
565
565
565
567
567
567
561
578
578
578
578

TECHNICAL SHEET

594
591
591
591
591
591
591
593
593
593
589
603
603
603
603

684
687
692
698
704
710
716
722
725
728
731
907
908

918
552
552
578
539
539
539
539
539
540
540
540
540
540
533
532
535
532
535
532
546
546
548
548
533
533
533
544

579
579

604
604

567
567
567
567
567
568
568
568
568
568
561
560
563
560
563
560
574
574
576
576
561
561
561
572

593
593
593
593
593
594
594
594
594
594
589
588
590
588
590
588
599
599
601
601
589
589
589
598

732
734
735
738
739
742
745
745
748
752
755
756
766
767
772
983
987
1093
1094
1112
1113
1116
909

ITEM
F482
F482V12
F483
F500N
F502
F503
F520
F521
F522
F523
F524
F550C6
F551
F552
F553
F555
F558
H4372V230H
H4548
H4549
H4562
H4570
H4586
H4587
H4588
H4590
H4591
H4592
H4593
H4594
H4595
H4648
H4649
H4651M2
H4652/2
H4652/3
H4671/1
H4671M2
H4678
H4687
H4890
HA4572
HA4572SB
HA4589
HA4596
HA4597
HA4598
HA4599
HA4619

543
543
544
548
577
548
547
547
547
547
547
555
555
555
555
555
555
556
556
556
548
550
528
528
528
528
528
528
528
528
528
556
556
534
534
534
538
538
538
532
532

528
528
528
528
528
544

CATALOGUE
571
571
572
576
601
577
575
575
575
575
575
583
583
583
583
583
583

577

597
597
598
601
601
600
600
600
600
600
589

602

1020
1016
647
648
650
651
652
653
654
655
786
786
788
794
797
799
801
806

549

560

TECHNICAL SHEET
911
913
916
1012
1013
1014
960
962
965
778
969
1098
1100
1102
1103
1105
1107

588
1122
808
810
649
659
660
661
662
922

ITEM
HA4690LTK
HA4690VBB
HA4690VNB
HA4690VSW
HA4690XC
HB4572
HB4572SB
HB4589
HB4596
HB4597
HB4598
HB4599
HB4619
HC4033
HC4070
HC4177
HC4202D
HC4210D
HC4214D
HC4269F
HC4279C6A
HC4511/12
HC4512/12
HC4547
HC4560
HC4563
HC4563
HC4563/2
HC4565
HC4575
HC4577
HC4578
HC4601
HC4603/4
HC4603/8
HC4604
HC4605
HC4606
HC4607
HC4607/4
HC4608
HC4610
HC4611
HC4611B
HC4613
HC4618
HC4653/2
HC4653/3
HC4654

CATALOGUE

TECHNICAL SHEET

532
532
532
532
532
808
810
649
659
660
661
662
922

528
528
528
528
528
544
556
545
556
555
555
555
555
555
544
544
556
548
535
549
549
550
546
528
541
545
541
545
542
541
535
535
541
542
542
542
542
544
534
534
536

929

1017
815

1018
817

542
541

549
550

665
920
932
933
934
936
937
940
938
944
946
949
954
956
827
827
829

General Contents MY HOME

ITEM
HC4657M3
HC4657M4
HC4658
HC4659
HC4672N
HC4673
HC4680
HC4690
HC4692
HC4692FAN
HC4693
HC4695
HC4891
HC4911
HC4911/2
HC4911/2AF
HC4911/2AG
HC4911/2AH
HC4911/2AI
HC4911/2BA
HC4911/2BC
HC4911/2BE
HC4911AD
HC4911AF
HC4911AG
HC4911AH
HC4911AI
HC4911BA
HC4911BC
HC4911BE
HC4915
HC4915/2
HC4915/2AA
HC4915/2AB
HC4915/2AC
HC4915/2AD
HC4915/2BA
HC4915/2BB
HC4915/2BC
HC4915/2BD
HC4915/2BE
HC4915/2BF
HC4915/2BG
HC4915/2BH
HC4915AA
HC4915AB
HC4915AC
HC4915AD
HC4915BA

534
534
536
536
547
547
535
532
546
546
546
546
532
553
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
553
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554

CATALOGUE
549
549

MY HOME General Contents

TECHNICAL SHEET
833
833
838
843
811
848
1118
993
996
999
1002
851

ITEM
HC4915BB
HC4915BC
HC4915BC
HC4915BE
HC4915BF
HC4915BG
HC4915BH
HC4915BL
HC4915BL
HC4915DD
HC4915DD
HC4915M2BL
HC4915M2BL
HC4915MR
HC4915MR
HC4919
HC4921BL
HC4921DD
HC4921MR
HD4033
HD4070
HD4177
HD4202D
HD4210D
HD4214D
HD4269F
HD4279C6A
HD4511V12
HD4512V12
HD4547
HD4560
HD4563
HD4563M2
HD4565
HD4575
HD4577
HD4578
HD4601
HD4603/4
HD4603/8
HD4604
HD4605
HD4606
HD4607
HD4607
HD4607/4
HD4608
HD4610
HD4611

CATALOGUE
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
556
554
556
554
556
554
556
544
556
556
556
556
545
556
555
555
555
555
555
544
544
556
548
535
549
550
546
528
541
545
541
545
542
541
535
542
535
541
542
542

TECHNICAL SHEET

929

549

1017
815
1018
817
665
920
932
933
934
936
937
940

541

938
944
946
949

ITEM
HD4611B
HD4613
HD4618
HD4653M2
HD4653M3
HD4654
HD4657M3
HD4657M4
HD4658
HD4659
HD4672N
HD4673
HD4680
HD4690
HD4692
HD4692FAN
HD4693
HD4695
HD4891
HD4911
HD4911AD
HD4911AF
HD4911AG
HD4911AH
HD4911AI
HD4911BA
HD4911BC
HD4911BE
HD4911M2
HD4911M2AF
HD4911M2AG
HD4911M2AH
HD4911M2AI
HD4911M2BA
HD4911M2BC
HD4911M2BE
HD4915
HD4915AA
HD4915AB
HD4915AC
HD4915AD
HD4915BA
HD4915BB
HD4915BC
HD4915BD
HD4915BE
HD4915BF
HD4915BG
HD4915BH

CATALOGUE
542
542
544
534
534
536
534
534
536
536
547
547
535
532
546
546
546
546
532
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554

TECHNICAL SHEET
954
956
827
827
829
833
833
838
843
818

549
550
549
549

848

546

549

993
996
999
1002
851

ITEM
HD4915BL
HD4915DD
HD4915M2
HD4915M2AA
HD4915M2AB
HD4915M2AC
HD4915M2AD
HD4915M2BA
HD4915M2BB
HD4915M2BC
HD4915M2BD
HD4915M2BE
HD4915M2BF
HD4915M2BG
HD4915M2BH
HD4915M2BL
HD4915M2BL
HD4915MR
HD4915MR
HD4919
HD4921BL
HD4921DD
HD4921MR
HS4033
HS4070
HS4177
HS4202D
HS4210D
HS4214D
HS4269F
HS4279C6A
HS4511/12
HS4512/12
HS4547
HS4560
HS4563
HS4563/2
HS4565
HS4575
HS4577
HS4578
HS4601
HS4603/4
HS4603/8
HS4604
HS4605
HS4606
HS4607
HS4607/4

554
554
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
556
554
556
544
556
556
556
556
545
556
555
555
555
555
555
544
544
556
548
535
549
550
546
528
541
545
541
545
542
541
535
535

CATALOGUE
556
556

TECHNICAL SHEET

929

549

1017
815
1018
817

542
541

665
920
932
933
934
936
937
940
938

General Contents MY HOME

ITEM
HS4608
HS4610
HS4611
HS4611B
HS4613
HS4618
HS4653/2
HS4653/3
HS4654
HS4657M3
HS4657M4
HS4658
HS4659
HS4672N
HS4673
HS4680
HS4690
HS4692
HS4692FAN
HS4693
HS4695
HS4891
HS4911
HS4911/2
HS4911/2AF
HS4911/2AG
HS4911/2AH
HS4911/2AI
HS4911/2BA
HS4911/2BC
HS4911/2BE
HS4911AD
HS4911AF
HS4911AG
HS4911AH
HS4911AI
HS4911BA
HS4911BC
HS4911BE
HS4915
HS4915/2
HS4915/2AA
HS4915/2AB
HS4915/2AC
HS4915/2AD
HS4915/2BA
HS4915/2BB
HS4915/2BC
HS4915/2BD

CATALOGUE
541
542
542
542
542
544
534
534
536
534
534
536
536
547
547
535
532
546
546
546
546
532
553
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
553
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554

TECHNICAL SHEET
944
946
949
954
956
827
827
829
833
833
838

549
550
549

811

546

549

MY HOME General Contents

848
1118
993
996
999
1002
851

ITEM
HS4915/2BE
HS4915/2BF
HS4915/2BG
HS4915/2BH
HS4915AA
HS4915AB
HS4915AC
HS4915AD
HS4915BA
HS4915BB
HS4915BC
HS4915BC
HS4915BE
HS4915BF
HS4915BG
HS4915BH
HS4915BL
HS4915BL
HS4915DD
HS4915DD
HS4915M2BL
HS4915M2BL
HS4915MR
HS4915MR
HS4919
HS4921BL
HS4921DD
HS4921MR
HW4890
L4033
L4177
L4202D
L4210D
L4214D
L4269F
L4279C6A
L4373H
L4380/B
L4380/B
L4511/12
L4512/12
L4546
L4547
L4560
L4561N
L4562
L4563
L4565
L4566

CATALOGUE
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
556
554
556
554
556
554
556
544
556
556
556
532
584
584
583
583
583
583
583
584
545
573
572
572
606
584
576
548
577
563
577
550

TECHNICAL SHEET

1122

576

601

576
577

602

1017
1019
1020
815
1018
1022

ITEM
L4566/10
L4567
L4568
L4569
L4572
L4572SB
L4575N
L4575SB
L4576N
L4577
L4578N
L4589N
L4596N
L4597N
L4598N
L4599N
L4600/4
L4601
L4603/4
L4603/8
L4604
L4605
L4606
L4607
L4607/4
L4608
L4610
L4611
L4611B
L4613
L4618
L4619
L4630
L4630
L4651M2
L4652/2
L4652/3
L4654N
L4658N
L4659N
L4664
L4665L20
L4665L40
L4665L40
L4668BUS/35
L4668BUS/60
L4669
L4669/500
L4669HF

550
550
550
550

574
529
529
529
529
529
529
573
569
573
569
573
570
569
563
563
569
570
570
570
570
572
572
573
545
562
562
562
564
564
564
555
555
555
583
548
548
552
552
552

CATALOGUE
577
577
577
577

602
602
602
602

570
569

TECHNICAL SHEET
1021
1023
1024
1025
808
810
817
821
826
992
665
649
659
660
661
662
930
920
932
933
934
936
937
940
938
944
946
949
952
954
956

598
576

788
794
797
829
838
843

577

583
583

577
577
579
579
579

601
601
604
604
604

858
858
859

ITEM
L4669S
L4671/1
L4672N
L4673
L4678
L4680
L4692
L4692FAN
L4693
L4695
L4891
L4911ADN
L4911AFN
L4911AGN
L4911AHN
L4911AIN
L4911BFN
L4911M2AFN
L4911M2AGN
L4911M2AHN
L4911M2AIN
L4911M2N
L4911M2TN
L4911N
L4911TN
L4915AN
L4915BN
L4915DD
L4915DN
L4915FN
L4915KIT
L4915KIT1
L4915M2ADN
L4915M2AN
L4915M2BN
L4915M2DN
L4915M2FN
L4915M2N
L4915M2TN
L4915MR
L4915MR
L4915N
L4915SETBL
L4915SETBL
L4915TN
L4915TN
L4919
LN4548
LN4549

552
566
575
575
566
563
574
574
574
574
560
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
582
581
582
580
580
580
580
580
582
582
580
580
580
580
580
580
582
580
584
580
582
584
582
584
572
584
584

CATALOGUE
579
604

574

576

TECHNICAL SHEET
924
799
811
806
848
993
996
999
1002
851

584

General Contents MY HOME

ITEM
LN4586
LN4587
LN4588
LN4590
LN4591
LN4592
LN4593
LN4594
LN4595
LN4648
LN4649
LN4671M2
LN4890
LN4890A
MH200N
MHKIT10N
MHKIT85N
MHVISUAL
N4033
N4070
N4177
N4202D
N4210D
N4214D
N4269F
N4279C6A
N4373H
N4511/12
N4512/12
N4547
N4560
N4563
N4565
N4575SB
N4576N
N4577
N4575N
N4577
N4578N
N4589N
N4596N
N4597N
N4598N
N4599N
N4600/4
N4601
N4603/4
N4603/8
N4604

CATALOGUE
529
529
529
529
529
529
529
529
529
584
584
566
560
560
533
563
570
532
584
573
584
583
583
583
583
583
584
572
572
584
576
563
577

TECHNICAL SHEET
647
648

561

589

596
560

588

598

576
602

574
529
529
529
529
529
529
573
569
573
569
573

MY HOME General Contents

650
651
652
653
654
655
786
786
801
1122
1122
1124

929

1017
815
1018
821
826
992
817
665
649
659
660
661
662
930
920
932
933
934

ITEM
N4605
N4606
N4607
N4607/4
N4608
N4610
N4611
N4611B
N4613
N4618
N4640
N4640B
N4654N
N4658N
N4659N
N4672N
N4673
N4680
N4692
N4692FAN
N4693
N4695
N4891
N4911ADN
N4911AFN
N4911AGN
N4911AHN
N4911AIN
N4911BFN
N4911M2AFN
N4911M2AGN
N4911M2AHN
N4911M2AIN
N4911M2N
N4911M2TN
N4911N
N4911TN
N4915AN
N4915BN
N4915DD
N4915DN
N4915FN
N4915KIT
N4915KIT1
N4915LN
N4915M2ADN
N4915M2AN
N4915M2BN
N4915M2DN

CATALOGUE
570
569
563
563
569
570
570
570
570
572
542
542
564
564
564
575
575
563
574
574
574
574
560
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
582
581
582
580
580
580
580
580
582
582
580
580
580
580
580

570
569

570
570

574

584

596
596

576

TECHNICAL SHEET
936
937
940
938
944
946
949
952
954
956
925
925
829
838
843
811
848
993
996
999
1002
851

ITEM
N4915M2FN
N4915M2LN
N4915M2TN
N4915MR
N4915MR
N4915SETBL
N4915TN
N4919
NT4033
NT4070
NT4177
NT4202D
NT4210D
NT4214D
NT4269F
NT4279C6A
NT4373H
NT4511/12
NT4547
NT4560
NT4563
NT4565
NT4575N
NT4575SB
NT4576N
NT4577
NT4578N
NT4600/4
NT4601
NT4603/4
NT4603/8
NT4604
NT4605
NT4606
NT4607
NT4607/4
NT4608
NT4610
NT4611
NT4611B
NT4613
NT4618
NT4654N
NT4658N
NT4659N
NT4672N
NT4673
NT4680
NT4692

CATALOGUE
580
580
582
580
584
582
582
572
584
573
584
583
583
583
583
583
584
572
584
576
563
577

574
529
573
569
573
569
573
570
569
563
563
569
570
570
570
570
572
564
564
564
575
575
563
574

TECHNICAL SHEET

584
584

929

576

570
569

577

1017
815
1018
817
821
826
992
665
930
920
932
933
934
936
937
940
938
944
946
949
952
954
956
829
838
843
811

ITEM
NT4692FAN
NT4693
NT4695
NT4891
NT4911ADN
NT4911AFN
NT4911AGN
NT4911AHN
NT4911AIN
NT4911BFN
NT4911M2AFN
NT4911M2AGN
NT4911M2AHN
NT4911M2AIN
NT4911M2N
NT4911M2TN
NT4911N
NT4911TN
NT4915AN
NT4915BN
NT4915DD
NT4915DN
NT4915FN
NT4915KIT
NT4915KIT1
NT4915M2ADN
NT4915M2AN
NT4915M2BN
NT4915M2DN
NT4915M2FN
NT4915M2N
NT4915M2TN
NT4915MR
NT4915N
NT4915SETBL
NT4915TN
NT4919

CATALOGUE
574
574
574
560
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
582
581
582
580
580
580
580
580
582
582
580
580
580
580
580
580
582
580
580
582
582
572

574

576

TECHNICAL SHEET
996
999
1002
851

584

584
584
584

848
993

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME

Introduction

CONTENTS

MY HOME INTRODUCTION
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Introduction MY HOME

GENERAL FEATURES

MY HOME - Build on it
MY HOME is the BTicino home automation system, the solution for the design of the electric system of the house.

ADVANCED ELECTRIC SYSTEMS

SELECTION OF
THE FUNCTIONS

Thanks to the MY HOME technology,


it is possible to design electric

A system made using MY HOME

systems with new, and more

can be expanded at any time,

advanced features in new or existing

with minimum, cost effective

buildings.

interventions: during the design


stage, one can select which functions
shall be included immediately, and
which ones at a later date.

COMFORT

SAFETY

ENERGY MANAGEMENT

AUDIO VIDEO

Light automation

Burglar alarm

Temperature control

COMMUNICATION

Management of shutters

Technical alarms

Air conditioning

Digital video door entry system

Remote assistance

Load management

Video handset answering

Automatic rearming

Consumption display

and automations

Scenario activation

Sound system

after black-out

Video monitoring systems

MY HOME

Introduction

machine

Integrated telephone system

tem

2 TECHNOLOGIES
Simple design and installation,
thanks to radio or digital BUS

AN OPEN SYSTEM
MY HOME is an open system allowing

communication among the


components.

both integration with products of


other brands, and communication
with the outside world using the
TCP/IP protocol.

LOOK CAPABLE OF
MEETING ALL TASTES
MY HOME is available is several
finishes: AXOLUTE, AXOLUTE ETRIS,
LIVINGLIGHT and MATIX.

MY HOME portal

INTEGRATION AND CONTROL

Function integration through the Touch Screen user interface

Local management through PC

Remote management using the


MY HOME WEB service

Introduction MY HOME

The MY HOME system technologies


BUS technology
TYPE OF DEVICES

L
N

Control

Actuator

SCS BUS

FEATURES
The SCS BUS technology is based on the use of devices connected to each other by a cable (BUS) with two conductors,
used for the transfer of information and the low voltage (27 Vdc) power supply.
Using appropriate interfaces, MY HOME BUS systems can be easily integrated to BUS systems with different communication
protocols, like Konnex and DALI standards, etc., and extended using ZigBee control devices.

Lighting

Shutter automation

Scenario management

Burglar alarm

Technical alarms (gas and/or water leak)

Sound system

FUNCTIONS

Temperature control

Load management and consumption display

Video door entry system

Home structured cabling

Local and remote control of one or more


integrated functions

WHEN SHOULD IT BE USED When there is the possibility of installing a new system, or refurbishing an old one with BUS wiring

TV/SAT

DEVICE
CONFIGURATION

Web Server
TV/SAT

IPTV

Ethernet cable

automazione

diffusione sonora

antifurto

Configuration
using thecontrollo
programming
videocitofonia
software

termoregolazione

automazione

lan

controllo carichi

energia

BUS cable

MY HOME

Introduction

luci

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

Physical configuration using plug-in


www
irrigazione
devicestvcccalled configurators.

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

Radio ZigBee technology


L
N

Radio control

Actuator

FEATURES
The Radio Zigbee technology is based on the use of battery powered control devices, and actuator devices powered by the
electric power supply, and connected to the load to be controlled, communicating via radio signals at a 2.4 GHz frequency.
Thanks to these features, it is possible to realise with extreme easy new electric systems, or to modify existing ones, with
reduced cable connections and minimum masonry wall interventions. Using a specific interface, ZigBee radio control
devices can be integrated to a BUS technology system (i.e. the Automation system).

Lighting

Shutter automation

Scenario management

Technical alarms (gas and/or water leak)

When it is not possible to extend/modify a system with BUS wiring

Push and Learn mode; without using tools and software

Legrand is a
member of
the executive
board

Introduction MY HOME

An interface for every need


A wide range of controls providing the most suitable solution for each need.
From basic controls to scenario controls, from room controls to local and remote
supervision.

TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLS


To control all the MY HOME functions
from one single point, in a simple and
logic manner.

TOUCH CONTROLS
A simple touch will activate any
actuation or regulation function.

WEB SERVER
For remote control of all home automation
functions, using a PC or a hand-held computer,
through internet and WEB pages.

MY HOME

Introduction

DIGITAL CONTROLS
A simple click for function control.

VIDEO HANDSETS
Video handsets also become versatile
control and management multimedia
stations of the MY HOME system.

MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREEN


It can be used to control and display the
MY HOME system on the screen, with a
simple touch of the icons shown on the
large 10 display.
It can also act as a video handset, and
enables monitoring the rooms through
the cameras installed around the home.
The device is also capable of reading
and displaying multimedia contents
available through WEB connections or
saved in USB Pen drives, or SD cards.

Introduction MY HOME

Select the look that meets your taste


A wide range of finishes, to dress the MY HOME system with colours and finishes to ones personal taste .
The MY HOME devices are completed with the colours and materials of
the cover plates of the AXOLUTE, NIGHTER AND WHICE, AXOLUTE ETERIS,
LIVINGLIGHT AND MTIX, civil series, available in all modularities.

LIVINGLIGHT

MTIX

MY HOME

Introduction

AXOLUTE
WHITE SOLUTION

AXOLUTE

AXOLUTE
NIGHTER E WHICE

AXOLUTE ETRIS

Introduction MY HOME

MY HOME functions
TOUCH SCREEN, to intuitively
activate, using an icon
menu, all home automation
functions.

COMFORT
MY HOME improves and simplifies
the quality of domestic living.
For example, it provides automation

LOCAL DISPLAY
Touch screen control for the
simultaneous control of 4 functions:
Scenarios, Temperature control,
Sound system, Consumption
display, and Load management

of curtains and shutters, light control


centralisation, centralised sound
system control for the whole house,
temperature control, watering and
activation of several automations.

ENERGY SAVING

TOUCH SCREEN configured for real time


display and management of electricity, gas
and water consumption levels.

MY HOME pays a lot of attention


to the respect of the environment
and the intelligent use of energy
resources.

Temperature control central unit


for zone control of the various
temperatures inside the home.

It enables monitoring consumption


levels and managing the air
conditioning system across the whole
house, adjusting the temperature
according to the zone.

CENTRAL UNITS
For the management of the burglar alarm system.
Various solutions available, for each and every type
of requirement: from the one-bedroom apartment
to the villa.

SAFETY
MY HOME makes the home
safer and more protected, even
when the owner is out. It helps
preventing intrusions and protecting
against domestic dangers and
inconveniences, such as gas leaks,
flooding, electric power cuts,
activating any countermeasures as
necessary.

10 MY HOME

Introduction

FLUSH MOUNTED CAMERA


For video monitoring across
the home.

NIGHTER E WHICE HANDSETS

Large 8 colour display

8 mm thick glass surface

Touch control keypad, a simple touch of the


icon will activate the function.

COMMUNICATION
MY HOME can be used to manage
images, data, and music inside the
home. It ensures valid video handset
call reception and forwarding
solutions, facilitating access control,

VIDEO DISPLAY

2.5 colour display

Icon menu

CONTROL AND INTEGRATION


The BTicino MY HOME Control system

and provides local video monitoring.

INTERFACES
Devices for the integration of the various MY HOME functions with
SCS technology, and for the integration of the MY HOME system
with standard DALI systems

provides supervision and monitoring


of the home in total safety and
discretion.
Control can be local and remote.
Local using a simple control, or an
advanced device like MULTIMEDIA
TOUCH SCREEN, or an iPad with
the My Home BTicino application
installed, which can be downloaded
free of charge from iTunes. Remote
control is through a PC, hand held
computer, telephone or mobile
phone, using the Internet connection

MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREEN


Video handset and control device for all the MY
HOME functions.
It also works as a multimedia station with
USB port, SD card reader connector, and WEB
connection for RSS, IP radio and webcam

and the potentialities of the Web


Platform.

IPAD
iPad with My Home BTicino application for
local function control.

Introduction MY HOME 11

MY HOME WEB
MY HOME Web is a virtual platform

Customer area:

In order to take advantage of the MY

designed by BTicino, divided into two

solely intended for customers

HOME WEB services, the system of

areas:

interested in the remote

the customer must be fitted with at

Installer area:

management of their system.

least one of the following:

intended for the My Home

This service, active since 2003,

Web server, for FLAT type ADSL

installers which can register their

enables remote control of all the

line communication, using the

own systems. Following customers

home automation functions of

BTicino router modem;

request, it is also possible to

the MY HOME system, making

activate the Remote Assistance

available exclusive services that

communicator, for connection to

service, which gives the possibility

are only possible through the web

the public telephone network.

of remotely monitoring the home

portal (danger notifications, web

of the customer, and receive real

scenarios, etc.).

Burglar alarm central unit with

time notifications in case of faults.


Burglar-alarm
central unit

Web server
ADSL modem

12 MY HOME

Introduction

CONNECTION SAFETY AND


PROTECTION
In developing the MY HOME WEB

Integrity: safeguard of the

portal, BTicino has paid special

accuracy and completeness of the

attention to ensuring high levels of

information;

protection of the data transferred

Accessibility: guarantee that both

through the network from unwanted

data and information will be

access.

available when required.

In particular, stringent protection

For the described features, BTicino

measures have been implemented

has obtained the ISO27001

to ensure high levels of protection in

Information technology Security

terms of:

management systems certification.

Privacy: protection of data from


unauthorised access;

PSTN

ADSL

Internet

Mobile access

Voice and SMS


message access

Introduction MY HOME 13

14 MY HOME

Project guidelines

CONTENTS

MY HOME Project guidelines


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Project guidelines MY HOME 15

GEnEral fEaturES

functional diagram of a MY HOME system


the creation of a MY HOME

the home converge in a general

automation BuS (grey cable) is the

automation system does not entail

distribution board that contains the

same as for the Energy management

many changes when compared with

usual system sectioning devices, the

and temperature control systems

a traditional system the energy,

BuS power supplies for the various

the burglar-alarm BuS (red cable), is

telephone/data line and Video door

systems, and all DIn modularity

the same as the one for the technical

entry system sources that reach

devices the lights/shutter

alarms

TV/SAT

TEMPERATURE CONTROL
ENERGY SUPPLY
FLATWALL

automazione

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

Telephone line

TV/SAT
REMOTE

videocitofonia

controllo

Grey cable (BUS)

IPTV

TV/SAT

IPTV

CONTROL

one
zione

videocitofonia
diffusione sonora

controllo
antifurto

lan
controllo carichi
termoregolazione
videocitofonia

ADSL line
(Internet)

energia
controllo

TV/SAT

luci

tvcc
controllo carichi

lan

IPTV

www
energia

irrigazione

Red cable (BUS)


luci

tvcc

www

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
SYSTEM

arichi

energia

luci

tvcc

www

irrigazione

Video door entry system call

automazione

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

White cable (BUS)

LAN

16 MY HOME

Project guidelines

tvcc

ww

the 2 wire video door entry system

or can be integrated with each other

BuS (white cable) is the same as the

using specific interfaces lOCal

one for the sound system, and offers

COntrOl devices enable centralising

the possibility of implementing the

the supervision and the control of the

video surveillance system function

systems from one single point of the

the systems can be set individually,

home

TV/SAT

IPTV

TV/SAT

IPTV LIGHT/SHUTTER AUTOMATION

ENERGY MANAGEMENT

TV/SAT
automazione

termoregolazione
controllo carichi videocitofonia
energia

mazione

rto

lazione

controllo luci

lan

tvcc

controllo carichi
www

diffusione sonora

energia
irrigazione

antifurto

luci

TV/SAT

termoregolazione

IPTV

videocitofonia

controllo

LOCAL CONTROL

tvcc

www

irrigazione

IPTV

BURGLAR ALARM
automazione

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

TV/SAT

controllo carichi

IPT

TECHNICAL ALARMS
diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

TV/SAT
VIDEO DOOR

controllo

automazione

lan

diffusione sonora

controllo carichi

antifurto

IPTV

energia

termoregolazione

luci

videocitofonia
TV/SAT

controllo

tvcc

www

IPTVlan

controllo

SOUND SYSTEM

ENTRY SYTEM

TV/SAT

IPTV

LOCAL CONTROL
termoregolazione

automazione
controllo

videocitofonia

TV/SAT

diffusione sonora
antifurto
lan
controllo carichi

termoregolazione
energia

videocitofonia
luci

tvcc controllo

TV/SATvideocitofonia

controllo

lan

www

lan

controllo carichi
irrigazione

energi

IPTV

DATA NETWORK
automazione

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

IPTV

controllo carichi

energia

LOCAL CONTROL
videocitofonia

automazione

controllo

diffusione sonora

lan

controllo carichi

antifurto

termoregolazione

energia

videocitofonia

luci

controllo

tvcc

lan

www

controllo carichi

irrigazione

energia

luci

tvcc

Project guidelines MY HOME 17

GEnEral fEaturES

System integration
In order to ensure advanced home
automation functions and enable the
central management of the
MY HOME system, the BuS of the
various systems are integrated with
1

each other using particular interfaces

that can be installed inside the


flatWall distribution board, near
other DIn modularity devices (power
supplies, actuators, etc )
the following image shows the main
4

devices for the above setup

6
7
Video door entry system entrance panel

10

18 MY HOME

Project guidelines

TV/SAT

IPTV

IPTV Light/shutter automation

LEGEND
3. f422 interface for the integration

1. E46aDCn power supply for


automazione

controllo carichi

energia

diffusione sonora

antifurto

TV/SAT

luci

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

the poweringIPTV
of the automation,

tvcc

Temperature control

IPTV

Energy management

termoregolazione

lan

controllo carichi

Video door automazione


entry sytem

videocitofonia

controllo

Burglar alarm

energia
TV/SAT

luci

antifurto

4. f422 interface for the integration

2. E46aDCn power supply for the

of the video door entry system and

powering of the burglar-alarm

the automation system


5. f454 web IPTV
server for local and

TV/SAT

lan

controllo carichi

energia

controllo

remote control
internet
tvcc using thewww

luci

luci

tvcc

irrigazione

and the lan network of the home


tvcc

www

IPTV

irrigazione

termoregolazione

automation functions
6. 346000 power supply for the
powering of the video door entry

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

system and the sound system


IPTV
7. f441M audio/video multichannel
matrix for the distribution of the

Sound system
videocitofonia

energia

management systems

TV/SAT

rmoregolazione

controllo carichi

of the burglar-alarm and automation


systems

SCS/DALI interface
diffusione sonora

lan

temperature
control and Energy
www
irrigazione

system
antifurto

controllo

signals of the video door entry


lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

www

irrigazione

system and the sound system


8. f551 switch for the distribution
of a data line to four different rJ45

automazione

TV/SAT

diffusione sonora

IPTV

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

sockets

controllo carichi

energia

luci

9. f552 power supply for the

SCS/Konnex interface

powering of the switch


10. aDSl modem/router for the

Telephone line

connection to the internet network of


the MY HOME system using the web
server item f454
controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

www

In addition to the devices described,

irrigazione

the MY HOME system can also be


integrated with systems of a different
technology and communication
protocol, such as Konnex and EIB,

IPTV

using the devices shown for more


Data network

details refer to the section SYStEM

ADSL line (Internet)

IntEGratIOn anD COntrOl" of this

TV/SAT
controllo carichi

antifurto

energia

termoregolazione

luci

videocitofonia

tvcc

controllo

guide

IPTV

www

lan

irrigazione

controllo carichi

energia

luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
MY
HOME
Project
guidelines
19

GEnEral fEaturES

Creation of the home automation system


the creation of the MY HOME

SYSTEM DESIGN AND

automation system follows the

CONFIGURATION OF THE

following stages:

DEVICES:
for this operation Bticino provides

1. 1. DEFINITION OF THE

two tools:

REQUIREMENTS

this technical Guide with technical

Definition of the home automation


functions to implement inside the

sheets

the Youproject software for

home, based on the requirements of

preparing the necessary estimates

the user

and designing the integrated


home automation system

2. PROJECT

the application is preset to

selection of the types of devices

automatically perform all the

needed, configuration, operation

size and electrical calculations, as

mode, and development of the

well as the configuration of the

electric diagram

products, giving the installer full


freedom to make the necessary

3. INSTALLATION

changes and customisations

wiring of the devices inside their

at the design stage for more

conduits and the distribution board,

information see the section

with operational test

"Software and Services"

20 MY HOME

Project guidelines

YouProject software
for the sizing of MY HOME
WHEN AND WHY SHOULD YOU
USE YOUPROJECT
YouProject is an extremely useful and

from the design to the installation

the diagram below shows the

versatile software that Bticino has

of the system (system absorption

range of information generated by

designed to simplify and speed up

check, number of DIn modules,

YouProject during the three different

the sizing of a MY HOME system in

dissipated power, map of physical

stages required for the realisation of

order to:

and logic links for the installation,

the system:

Produce an estimate of the

confi

DEfInItIOn Of rEQuIrEMEntS

guration, Cat service report)

DESIGn

offer (General description and


advantages, bill of quantities, list of

InStallatIOn

items required);
1st STAGE DEFINITION OF REQUIREMENTS

Entering of the data for the definition of the functions

2nd STAGE - DESIGN


Report:
- General description and advantages,
- Bill of quantities;
- List of Items required;
- Time estimate;
- System absorption check;
- Number of DIN modules and dissipated power.

TiPre
Software for preparing
estimates
YouProject

3rd STAGE - INSTALLATION


XML file

Report:
- Map of physical and logic installation links;
- Configuration;
- CAT service report
Multimedia Touch Screen

Device configuration software:


- TiDisplay
- Virtual configurator
- TiMH200N
- MHVisual
- TiMultimediatouch

My Home Web services


MY HOME portal

Touch Screen

Project guidelines MY HOME 21

GEnEral fEaturES

YouProject software
for the sizing of MY HOME
If the MY HOME system is not

the filled system booklet will then

designed using YouProject, it will

become a useful and necessary

Screen, Multimedia touch Screen,

be necessary to fill at least a system

document for the installer, as it

MH200n scenario programmer,

Booklet (1) in Excel format, with the

represents the ID card of the system

using the corresponding

description and configuration of the

installed

programming software etc

systems (automation, temperature

Having a booklet in Excel format will

control, burglar-alarm, etc )

be useful to create the XMl file to:

Configure devices such as touch

activate the My Home Web


services
the file is created using the
YouProject software, by importing
the xls file of the system booklet

YouProject
Installation

File XML

Multimedia Touch Screen

Device configuration software:


- TiDisplay
- Virtual configurator
- TiMH200N
- MHVisual
- TiMultimediatouch

My Home Web services


MY HOME portal

MH200N

NOTE (1): the file in Excel format of the System booklet and the YouProject software are available with the CD supplied with the present guide, or by visiting the Installers
area of the MY HOME section of the www.BTicino.it website.

22 MY HOME

Project guidelines

Devices configuration
Based on the type of products, this
operation may be performed in three
Example of main screen of the
software for the definition
of the scenarios using the
TiMH200N program

different ways:

Device configuration using the


programming software:
devices such as Wen server,
Scenario programmer, touch
screen, Video station, Multimedia
touch screen etc , are supplied
with appropriate software for the
configuration of the operating
parameters and the management
of the web pages or graphic icons
of the MY HOME functions

Physical configuration:

Flush mounted device configuration

this is done by connecting to the


appropriate socket of each device,
using pliers, special activation
components (3501/ ) called
configurators Each configurator is
identified with its number, letter,
colour or graphic

Virtual configurator:
In automation and temperature
control systems with several
devices, it is possible to greatly

to the system through the Web

the VIrtual COnfIGuratOr

simplify the configuration

server thanks to the virtual

software installed in the PC; this

operations using the virtual

configuration, it is possible to

solution is particularly suited

configuration, as an alternative to

configure each device without

to large systems, where the

the physical configuration

using the standard alphanumerical

configuration may be changed

the virtual configuration is

configurators

at any time without the need

performed using a PC connected

the address and the operating

for manual intervention on each

mode of the device are set using

individual device

Virtual configuration

TV/SA
Web Server
Ethernet cable

BUS
automazione

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

PC with Virtual Configurator 2.1 software

Project guidelines MY HOME 23

contro

GEnEral fEaturES

Virtual configuration
It is possible to greatly simplify

configurators With the virtual

4. Obtain the diagnostics of the

the configuration operations

configuration it is possible to:

automation and temperature

using, as an alternative to the

1. Create a new device

control systems: in this way the PC

physical configuration, the Virtual

configuration: to assign the address

interrogates all the devices of the

Configuration software (Virtual

and the mode of operation of each

system and supplies a summary of

Configurator), which manages the

system device

the status of each of them, using

addresses and the operating modes

2. Change the pre-existing

three different colours:

of the devices

configuration: to change the address

green for correct operation

the software installed in the PC

and the operating mode of each

yellow when the device is not

communicates with the system

system device already virtually

present, or has not been detected

through the new 3503n Kit,

configured

by the system

connected to the BuS, or using the

3. Test the actuators: it enables

red for faulty device

web server; the Virtual configuration

driving an already configured

5. Knowing the status of a single

is therefore particularly useful as

actuator directly from the PC to

device: it is possible to individually

it offers new modes and gives

ensure that it is operating correctly

interrogate all the system devices to

the possibility of changing the

(for example switching on a light

check that they are working correctly

configuration at any time, without

point controlled by the actuator)

using the normal alphanumeric

PC with VIRTUAL
CONFIGURATOR program

Ethernet cable

24 MY HOME

Project guidelines

there are two possible types of


virtual configuration:

THE VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION

THE PROJECT&DOWNLOAD

that can be applied to all types

CONFIGURATION

of automation and temperature


control systems, both in the case
of individual systems or systems

Dedicated for the lighting


Management system

new modes of configuration

integrated with each other in

(ID COnfIGuratIOn +

logical expansion mode this

COnfIGuratIOn WItH XMl) for

follows the addressing laws, with

more information see the lighting

the corresponding limits as shown

Management System technical

in the diagrams of the following

guide for BuS systems

sections

new virtual configuration


procedures through extended
description (1) and extended
addresses

new functions available: contacts


and CEn PluS
NotE 1): For more information of the extended
descriptions, see the Glossary section of this Guide.

TV/SAT

BUS connector
automazione

diffusione sonora

automazione
antifurto

diffusione
sonora
termoregolazione

antifurto
videocitofonia

termoregolazione
controllo

Power supply
connector

Project guidelines MY HOME 25

General features

Additional functions that can be performed


with the virtual configuration
In some critical cases, the virtual

status of a contact and has been

different types of pressures

configuration enables exceeding the

conceived for the management of

(short pressure, start of extended

existing addressing limits, thanks to

the integration among different

pressure, extended pressure,

the use of virtual addresses, which do

systems (e.g. if a window is

release after extended pressure).

not use any of the addresses of the

opened, the central heating goes

The devices can be configured

automation system.

off ). Using the virtual configuration

with virtual address from 0 to

The functions enabling the use of

software, it is possible to configure

2047, an address from 0 to 31

virtual addresses are:

the contact function with

can be associated to each device

CONTACTS (available for the

addresses from 1 to 201.

pushbutton.

PLUS SCENARIOS: function

contact interface, Item F428 and

CEN PLUS: the function enables

3477): the function enables the

configuring the device as CEN

only intended for the Lighting

transmission of information on the

control, capable of managing

Management System.

LIST OF TEMPERATURE CONTROL DEVICES PRESET FOR VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION


Item

Description

F430/2

2 DIN relay actuator

F430/4

4 DIN relay actuator

HC/HS4695 L/N/NT4695 AM5874

4 zone temperature control central unit

HC/HS4692 L/N/NT4692 AM5872

probe with selector

HC/HS4693 L/N/NT4693

probe without selector

HC/HS4692FAN L/N/NT4692FAN

probe with selector for Fan-Coil

34561)

splitter management interface

Note 1): the management of the device is only possible when using version 2.2 or later of Virtual Configurator.

LIST OF AUTOMATION DEVICES PRESET FOR VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION


Item

Description

3476

basic actuator

3477

basic contact interface1)

BMSE1001

passive IR ceiling sensor1)

BMSE2001

wide band wall/ceiling sensor1)

BMSE2002

narrow band wall/ceiling sensor1)

BMSE2003

sbidirectional narrow band wall/ceiling sensor1)

BMSE2004

one-way narrow band wall/ceiling sensor1)

BMSE2005

double technology wall/ceiling sensor1)

BMSW1001

230 Vac 1 DIN relay actuator 1)

BMSW1002

230 Vac 2 DIN relay actuator 1)

BMSW1003

230 Vac 4 DIN relay actuator 1)

F411/1N

1 DIN relay actuator 1)

26 MY HOME

Project guidelines

LIST OF AUTOMATION DEVICES PRESET FOR VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION


Item

Description

F411/1NC

1 DIN NC relay actuator 1)

F411/2NC

2 DIN NC relay actuator 1)

F411/2

2 DIN relay actuator 1)

F411/4

4 DIN relay actuator 1)

F413N

DIN ballast dimmer 1)

F414

1000 VA DIN dimmer 1)

F415

DIN electronic transformer dimmer 1)

F416U1

DIN multi load 1000 W dimmer 1)

F417U2

DIN multi load 2x400 W dimmer 1)

F429

DIN SCS/DALI interface1)

HD/HC/HS4563 L/N/NT4563

Knob control

HD/HC/HS4575 L/N/NT4575N

Receiving radio interface

F420

DIN scenario module

F422

SCS-SCS interface

F425

DIN memoty module 1)

HD/HC/HS4657M3 HC/HS4657M4

NIGHTER and WHICE control

HD/HC/HS4891 L/N/NT4891

Local Display

HD/HC/HS4575SB L/N/NT4575SB

Receiving radio interface

HD/HC/HS4576 L/N/NT4576N

Receiving radio interface

HD/HC/HS4680 L/N/NT 4680

Scenario control 1)

H/L4651M2 AM5831M2

2 module special control 1)

H/L4652/2 AM5832/2

2 module base control 1)

H/L4652/3 AM5831/3

3 module base control 1)

H/L4671/1 AM5851/1

2 module 1 relay actuator

H/LN4671M2 AM5851M2

2 module 2 relay control/actuator

H/L4678

ferromagnetic transformer dimmer

HC-HS4653/2 - HD4653M2

Soft Touch control

HC-HS4653/3-HD4653M3

Soft Touch control

HD/HC/HS4654 L/N/NT4654N AM5834

IR receiver

BMDI1001

Dimmer 1/10 V actuator1)

F428

DIN contact interface 1)

Note 1): the devices show an extended description of the function and are identified in the software with the message Virtual Advanced.
These item also have extended addresses (A=0-10, PL=0-15), and ID solely intended for the Lighting Management System.

Project guidelines MY HOME 27

GEnEral fEaturES

Virtual Configurator software


the Virtual Configurator Software

for more information refer to the

select the operating mode, using

had been designed to be used on a

software user manual

numbers and letters (following the

PC with Windows Xp 32 bit, Windows

Below are some screenshots of

logics of the physical configurators),

Vista 32 bit, and Windows 7 32 bit

Virtual Configurator Depending on

or through an extended description

operating system

the devices, it will be possible to

of the function

Single device configuration screen

Device description

Device item

Configurator
selection window

actuator test screen

Actuator test action selection window

28 MY HOME

Project guidelines


Summarisation screen listing the devices installed in the system

Device item
Device state
Configuration set in the device

Below some screenshots relating to the automation system, where it is possible


to select the operating mode through an extended Description of the function

Single device configuration screen


Function selection window

Mode selection window

Project guidelines MY HOME 29

GEnEral fEaturES

Virtual Configurator software

Screen for the identification of the devices in the system

Project name

List of devices

Single device screen

Device description

Device item
Device with
advanced functions

Pushbutton for accessing


the device configuration

30 MY HOME

Project guidelines

Below are some examples of

the connection may also be

connections between the PC and the

completed without using the

system to be configured using the

configuration kit, provided that the

3504 kit

Web Server, item f454, is installed in


the system

TV/SAT
IPTV

TV/SAT

IPTV

AUTOMATION/TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM WITH KIT 3504

Temperature
control central unit

diffusione sonora
termoregolazione

antifurto
videocitofonia

Shutter
control

termoregolazione
controllo

videocitofonia
lan

controllo
controllo
carichi

Dimmer
control

lan
energia

Shutter
control

controllo
lucicarichi

OK
3

ABC

GHI

JKL

MNO

YUV

WXVZ

DEF

OFF

DIN dimmer

DIN actuator

DIN actuator

L
1 2 3 4

T5H 250V

Flush mounted
actuator

PQRS

luci
www

Probe with
selector

CLEAR

ON

Power supply

energia
tvcc

1 2 3 4

ART. F411/2

ART. F411/2

0245 06

C1

C2

C1

C2

F414
230V~

50Hz

60 1000VA

A PL M G

Kit 3504

SCS AI

SCS AV

WiFi

BUS

PC
ETHERNET

automazione
antifurto

ETHERNET

diffusione sonora

230 Vac
SCS AI

SCS AV

BUS connector
Power supply
connector

Project guidelines MY HOME 31

irriga

Virtual Configurator software


TV/SAT
IPTV

TV/SAT

IPTV

AUTOMATION/TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM WITH WEB SERVER

diffusione sonora

automazione
antifurto

diffusione sonora
termoregolazione

antifurto
videocitofonia

termoregolazione
controllo

videocitofonia
lan

controllo
controllo
carichi

lan
energia

controllo
lucicarichi

Temperature
control central unit

Shutter
control

Dimmer
control

Shutter
control

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

7
PQRS

8
YUV

WXVZ

OFF

DIN dimmer

DIN actuator

DIN actuator

L
T5H 250V

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

ART. F411/2

ART. F411/2

024506

C1

C2

C1

C2

F414
230V~

50Hz

60 1000VA

A PL M G

Flush
mounted
actuator

Crossed cable
Ethernet

PC
Web Server
F454

SCS AI

32 MY HOME

Project guidelines

SCS AV

Probe with
selector

OK
CLEAR

ON

Power supply

ETHERNET

GEnEral fEaturES

energia
tvcc

luci
www

INTEGRATED SYSTEMS
Configuration of the devices of all the

Warning: remember that in order to configure all the

M position and configuring the address of position

systems belonging both to the Local

devices of the system it is necessary to configure

I4 using configurators from 1 to 9.

BUS and the Main riser. this can be

the F422 interfaces for logic expansion"

ensured by connecting the Kit or the

operating mode, connecting configurator no. 2 to the

Web Server to the main riser


Local BUS
Automation system No. 1

Main raiser
Interface
F422

PC for the configuration


of the devices of the
system.

Crossed cable
Ethernet

OUT
OUT
ART.F422

Local BUS

IN

Automation system No. 2

Web Server
F454

ETHERNET

Interface
F422

OUT

OUT
ART.F422

SCS AI

SCS AV

IN

If on the other hand, the

local BuS, only the devices of that

must be disconnected from the riser

configuration kit or the Web Server

system can be configured In this

by removing the connection to the

are connected to one of the two

case the system to be configured

corresponding f422 interface

Local BUS
Automation system No. 1
Main
raiser

Crossed
cable
Ethernet

OUT

Local BUS

OUT
ART.F422

Automation system No. 2


PC for the configuration
of the devices of system no. 2

Interface
F422

IN
Web Server
F454

ETHERNET
SCS AI

SCS AV

BUS
cable

cable
disconnected

OUT
OUT
ART.F422

Interface
F422

IN

Project guidelines MY HOME 33

General features

The installation of a ZigBee radio system


RADIO SYSTEM
The installation of a Zigbee radio

installation of a domestic electric

system does not have any special

system, and with the instructions of

requirements; It is enough to comply

this page.

with the current regulations for the

Actuator

Junction box

All the actuator devices are connected to the electric power line; for their installation, the installation requirements of
traditional devices apply.

All the radio controls are battery powered and are independent from the electric wiring. They can therefore be installed
anywhere, in flush mounted or wall mounted boxes.

34 MY HOME

Project guidelines

Switch
Junction box

The existing electric system can be easily modified by adding radio devices, using already existing junction boxes and
conduits.

Radio control
Radio
actuator

Radio
control

Junction box

Project guidelines MY HOME 35

SYStEM laYOut

Installation of a BuS system


WARNING:
The design and installation of the MY HOME system must only be performed by qualified personnel, in accordance with
current local regulations. BTicino SPA rejects all responsibility for any consequence resulting from the non-compliance
with such regulations.
the first step towards the installation

different from that of a traditional

In a traditional system, all the control

of a home automation system is

electric power system, particularly in

devices are connected to the user

to design and ensure a good basic

terms of:

load using a more or less complex

installation setup

the selection and position of the

wiring setup

In fact, an accurate setup of cables,

Each function therefore requires

distribution boards;

trunking, boxes, equipment rooms

the position of the junction boxes;

electric connection; the more

and control points, enables to follow

the position of plug-in boxes;

functions are included in the system,

in a much simpler way the evolution

the definition and position of

the more the circuits and the

of the devices already installed inside

complexity of the wiring

loads/users

the home and include new ones in

In creating a home automation

as an example, shown here is the

the future

system it will be necessary to take

electric diagram of an electric circuit

Irrespective of the type of system

into account other factors based on

used for switching on a lamp using 4

and the required home automation

the installation features of a BuS

control devices (two 4 way switches

applications, it is necessary that the

system, such as the Bticino MY HOME

and two 2 way switches) as it can be

layout of the house and a general

system:

seen, rather simple functions require

furniture plan, are made available to

the layout of the conduits;

a complex type of wiring, difficult

the installer

the type of wiring;

to modify over the time without

It is also important that a check is

the coexistence of cables inside

having to rewire most of the circuit

carried out, to ensure that the initial

(for example in order to reach a new

the same conduit

estimate is in line with the actual site:

In order to understand these

number of rooms and their use (living

requirements, extensively outlined in

room, bedroom, bathroom etc )

the following pages, it is important to

On a design and installation point

understand the difference between a

of view, the installation of a home

traditional and a BuS type system

control point)

automation system is not much

Two-way
switch

Four-way
switch

Four-way
switch

Two-way
switch

L
T
N
Junction box

36 MY HOME

Project guidelines

Junction box

Junction box

Junction box

In a BUS system, the power line for

this system configuration offers clear

changing the position of the

the powering of the load is separated

advantages:

control points through the

from the control line, which is also

an important simplification of the

connection of the device in any

independent from the functional

wiring of the various control points

wiring

offered by the use of one single

With reference to the diagram shown

cable (pair);

4 way switches, we have electronic

L
T
N

devices connected to actuator


devices for the control of the lamp

a simplification of the installation


of the conduits for the powering of
the loads

the possibility of adding or

here, instead of traditional 2 way and

point of the BuS;

Switchboard actuators
Lamp

through a telephone pair (BuS line)


In the diagram the actuators are
shown inside an electric distribution

BUS

board of the apartment, although


they can also be positioned inside
junction boxes, or, for some types,

Control
device

can also be installed inside the device

Control
device

Actuator

Junction box

Junction box

holder boxes, together with the


control devices

BUS

By sharing the same BuS pair, some

of the temperature control system

system without requiring specific

MY HOME systems can perform

and the automation system; the

additional wiring

different functions based on common

central unit and the probes connect

also the actuator for the control of

wiring this is the case, for example,

to the BuS line of the automation

the heating system solenoid valve is


connected to the automation BuS

L
T
N

and shares the house switchboard


Temperature control central unit

Switchboard actuators

with the other actuators of the home


automation system
Lamp

BUS

Control
device
Sonda
Temperature control

Control
device

Actuator

Junction box
Junction box

Project guidelines MY HOME 37

SYStEM laYOut

type of wiring
Systems may be installed using two

FREE STRUCTURE WIRING

different types of structures or modes

this type of wiring is normally used

of distribution:

in traditional distribution systems

these for the sheathed BuS pair

free structure

However, in order to integrate MY

supplied by Bticino, characterised

Star structure

HOME systems, it will be important

by an insulation voltage of 300/500

the choice is based on installation

to take into account the following

V In general, the conduits must be

needs, functions required

indications during the design stage:

selected with a suitable diameter to

(installation of the applications;

the BuS path may be the same as

meet any current and future system


requirements

lighting, automation, burglar-alarm,

the power line, using traditional

video surveillance system, etc ),

covered trunking, surface mounted

wall limitation, and whether we are

trunking, under floor systems, or

installation of junction boxes,

talking of refurbishments or new

trunking installed behind the false

which must be sized and placed in

buildings With these modes it is

ceiling "

positions that facilitate parallel

possible to cover and create all the

this solution provides a reduction

connection of the pair in more

types of MY HOME systems

of both installation times and

sections of the system In case of

masonry works If the building

motorised windows and shutters,

already has power system conduits

ensure that the power services

with diameter of no less than

and the automation BuS pair also

20 mm, it will be possible to use

reach the shutter boxes

the indications also apply to the

Device
Junction box
Power supply

38 MY HOME

Project guidelines

STAR STRUCTURE WIRING


this wiring is recommended when
there is a requirement for integration
of the data transmission system,
video door entry system, video
surveillance system, sound system,
telephone system, and tV/Sat
system inside one single conduit
the structure of the star wiring
consists of a central point called star
centre to which all the peripheral
branches of the various wiring
systems converge as a rule, the star
centre is made using a switchboard,
a flush or wall mounted distribution
board that groups all the active and
passive devices for the management
of the services, which, from the urban
and building networks are taken
inside the apartment

the sizing of the star wiring system


must take into account the following:

In accordance with the structure


of the building, position the star
centre in the barycentre position
in relation to the system If
possible, install the switchboard
in an appropriate service room or
inside a storage, in order to avoid
compromising the look of the room

Install the conduits with junction


boxes every 10 metres, for pulling
the cable or for installing any
required signal amplifiers
for the power system use
dedicated conduits, the EDP/
telephone/tV services may share
the same conduits, which must
have a minimum internal diameter
of 18 mm (recommended 20 mm)

Device
Junction box
Power supply

Project guidelines MY HOME 39

SYStEM laYOut

Selection and positioning of the electric distribution board


the integration of the various MY

Bticino offers a wide range of

the calculation of the dissipated

HOME systems in the building entails

switchboards suitable for types of

power, all Bticino switchboards

the need for grouping in one central

needs, with different capacities and

and distribution boards meet

point all the active (power supplies,

installation solutions (flush mounted,

the requirements of CEI 23-51

interfaces, telephone switchboards,

or wall mounted)

standards

etc ) or passive devices for the control

a useful selection criteria in terms of

and the management of all the

installation of the MY HOME system is

new buildings and apartments

functions

the following:

where an equipment room for

this location is effectively the "brain"

for one-floor or multi-floor

the integration of the MY HOME

for installation in one floor

of the whole home automation

installations in new or existing

system is not available, Bticino

system of the building Its size shall

(refurbished) buildings where an

offers MY HOME flatWall, an

be defined taking into account the

equipment room will be installed

innovative solution for central

following general requirements:

for the electric distribution board

installation of electric and

allow for extra space for expansion

of the home, it is possible to select

electronic devices and user

using new devices that may be

among the various wall mounted

interfaces in full respect of the

needed for future requirements

or flush mounted distribution

decor of the home

install the power supplies in the

board or switchboard solutions

lower position of the switchboard

belonging to the Multiboard and

in order to facilitate thermal

Idroboard series for the integration

dissipation;

of the MY HOME system for

the switchboard must be capable


of dissipating a power higher than
the sum of the powers dissipated
by all the devices it will hose

40 MY HOME

Project guidelines

Overview of wall mounted and flush


mounted switchboards

available in two versions:

MY HOME flatWall meets two

- with variable height from 240 cm

types of installation requirements:

to 270 cm

- inside the homes, as innovative

- with height 150 cm

centralised installation solution for

this type of unit can contain up

all electric and multimedia services

to 288 DIn modules, and features

in harmony with the decor of the

sections that can only be accessed

home

by the installer (e g actuators and

MY HOME FLATWALL 240 - 270

- on the building riser, as a solution

power supplies, for maintenance/

for the distribution of the main

updating purposes), as well as

wiring of the whole building

sections that can be accessed by


the final user (burglar-alarm central
unit, flush mounted video handset,
etc )

MY HOME FLATWALL 150

Project guidelines MY HOME 41

SYStEM laYOut

MY HOME flatWall
for all basic or advanced system needs
1. SWITCHBOARD TYPE SOLUTION

2. ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION BOARD TYPE SOLUTION

Configuration providing interaction with the My Home

Configuration ensuring the containment of all DIn

system through room control (touch Screen), video

actuators and power supplies of the My Home system,

handset (Video Display) and burglar-alarm central unit

making them easily accessible

It also enables intervention on the earth leakage and


thermal magnetic electrical safety and protection devices
inside the corresponding switchboard
MY HOME FLATWALL 150
Switchboard type solution

EXAMPLE OF FLATWALL H150 INSTALLATION:


small households or home automation systems with basic functions.

2
1

Electric distribution board type solution

42 MY HOME

Project guidelines

MY HOME FLATWALL 240 - 270


Switchboard type solution

3. FLOOR RISER TYPE SOLUTION

Building floor crossing configuration, for distribution using


common service cables (only possible with flatwall 240270)

All these solution can be fully integrated with the room design thanks to the finishing
panels, supplied in white, and which can be painted using standard masonry paints.

EXAMPLE OF FLATWALL 240 - 270 INSTALLATION

1
2

Electric distribution board type solution

Floor riser type solution

Project guidelines MY HOME 43

SYStEM laYOut

aesthetic and functional value with minimum space requirements


MY HOME flatWall features a sophisticated design and

thanks to the protrusion from the wall, 2 cm only, the

extreme functionality of all its components the type of

paintable front cover panels, and the side surround plates

accessibility to the devices installed depends on their use:

in anodised aluminium, MY HOME flatWall provides

some sections are only accessible to the installer, to

maximum integration with the residential environment

perform the required maintenance operations on the


installed devices;

other sections are accessible to the end user for


interaction with the system

MY HOME FLATWALL 240 - 270

MY HOME FLATWALL 240270


available in the switchboard, distribution panel, and floor
riser version, it offers management of the distribution for all
electric services inside modern houses
It can be installed in both masonry walls (supporting and
partition walls) and in plasterboard walls

MY HOME FLATWALL 150

MY HOME FLATWALL 150


MY HOME flatWall 150 is the ideal solution for containing together all the devices required for a basic home automation system (up to 180 DIn modules) with minimum
space requirement the aesthetic and functional features
of the new version are similar to the well-known flatwall
240-270 version Most of the complements and accessories
used are the same for the two versions, with the exception
of the cable entry in the bottom section, which does not
require a conduit securing place, therefore allowing more
space for housing devices
Installation is possible in both masonry and plasterboard
walls

44 MY HOME

Project guidelines

new in the flatwall range, is a box for the installation

this results in a further concentration of electric devices,

of multimedia devices (router, modem, etc ) used in

and the disappearance from around the home of the

Home network systems, promoted by all main telephone

unsightly cables needed for connecting these kinds of

providers

devices Bticino offers its own range of Home network

the new flatwall accessory creates a dedicated area for

devices, and the flatwall multimedia box is one of its

multimedia devices

integral parts

Dedicated box for the installation of multimedia devices like ADSL


modems or routers. The installation requires a 36 DIN module support
(3787).

Devices for interaction with the MY HOME system that can be operated by
the end user (Touch Screen, burglar alarm central unit, Video Display).

Switchboard for electrical safety and protection devices accessible to the


end user. Available in three versions (glass, metal and plastic), featuring
installation reversibility. The hinged side can in fact be attached to the
right or the left, so that the door can be opened from the most suitable
and functional side.

Zone accessed by the installer only, housing power supply risers,


actuators and other DIN devices (up to 288 modules), for the operation
of the MY HOME system. The installation is completed by the white front
cover panels.

Project guidelines MY HOME 45

SYStEM laYOut

MY HOME flatWall 240 - 270 switchboard composition


MY HOME flatWall consists of:
1. ONE TELESCOPIC BASE MODULE

2. A SERIES OF MODULAR DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS

(adjustable on two heights: 270 and 240 cm), which

for the installation of all types of DIn electric devices, with

constitutes the metal back to be fitted in the wall; the

plastic trunkings fitted on the sides, for easy passage and

adjustable feet provide better positioning of the back

securing of wiring cables


the supports can also accept appropriate brackets for the
installation of MY HOME devices

1 INSTALLATION OF

BASE MODULE

Bracket with
adjustable feet

2 INSTALLATION OF

DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS

Upper
cover

Back of
telescopic module

Device-holder
support with
DIN rails
Back of base
module

Bracket with
adjustable feet

Duct fastener plate


Concrete mesh

46 MY HOME

Project guidelines

3. FRONT COVER PANELS AND SURROUND PLATES


Meeting design and functional requirements
the panels are available with a white finish (ral 9003)
to meet the design requirements of the user they can be
painted with standard masonry paints

3 INSTALLATION OF

FINISHING ELEMENTS
Upper
end cap
Brackets for
MY HOME devices and
video door entry system

Front cover panel


for the installation
of MY HOME devices
and video door entry
system h 120 cm

Switchboard
for DIN devices
h 30 cm

Blanking module
h 90 cm
Multimedia box to
be completed with
F496/MF clips and
3829 cover

Side surround plates with


opening handle (pair)

Lower
end cap

Project guidelines MY HOME 47

SYStEM laYOut

MY HOME flatWall 150 switchboard composition


MY HOME flatWall consists of:
1. A BASIC MODULE

2. A SERIES OF MODULAR DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS

metal, 150 cm high, flush mounted inside masonry and

for the installation of all types of DIn electric devices, with

plasterboard walls Differently from flatwall 240 270,

plastic trunkings fitted on the sides, for easy passage and

there is no conduit securing plate

securing of wiring cables

In case of need, remove the first DIn guide in the bottom

the supports can also accept appropriate brackets for the

section, to make cable entry easier

installation of MY HOME devices, and specific accessories


such as the multimedia box dedicated to the installation of
modems, routers, etc

2 INSTALLATION OF

1 INSTALLATION OF

DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS

BASE MODULE

Device-holder
support with
DIN rails
h 60 cm

Back of base
module

Device-holder
support with
DIN rails
h 30 cm

Concrete mesh

48 MY HOME

Project guidelines

3. FRONT COVER PANELS AND SURROUND PLATES


Meeting design and functional requirements
the panels are available with a white finish (ral 9003)
to meet the design requirements of the user they can be
painted with standard masonry paints

3 INSTALLATION OF

FINISHING ELEMENTS

Brackets for
MY HOME devices and
video door entry system

Upper
end cap

Front cover panel


h 30 cm

Front cover panel for


the installation of MY
HOME devices and video
door entry system
h 30 cm
Switchboard
for DIN devices
h 30 cm

Blanking module
h 90 cm

Multimedia box to
be completed with
F496/MF clips and
3829 cover

Side surround plates

Side surround
plates

Project guidelines MY HOME 49

SYStEM laYOut

Installation heights for every need


the flatwall 150 solution, specifically designed for small

thanks to its exclusive sliding hooxking adjustment system,

households, gives the possibility of installing up to 180 DIn

flatwall 240-270 makes it possible to adjust on <site the

modules (a capacity higher than the average number of

height of the column based on the height of the room

devices used in a basic home automation system)

It can be used for installing up to 288 DIn modules (capacity normally higher than the number of devices used
in a whole home automation system), centralising all the
devices within one single location of the home By using
the appropriate accessory, it is possible to use MY HOME
flatWall as riser for apartment complex services, or inside apartments and villas on several floors

150 cm flush mounted back

adjustable flush mounted back, 240 or 270 cm


Max. 252 DIN modules

Max. 288 DIN modules

240 cm

270 cm

150 cm

Max. 180 DIN modules

56 cm

56 cm

50 MY HOME

Project guidelines

56 cm

Device-holder supports
three types of device-holder supports are available,

Irrespective of the MY HOME flatWall solution chosen,

offering the advantage that they can be wired in the

the front cover panels are always secured to the device-

workshop and then taken to the installation site, where

holder supports with screws

they are secured to the metal back already installed in the

Therefore, when assembling MY HOME FLATWALL, it is

wall, making the whole installation process much simpler

always necessary to install the device-holder supports

and quicker for the installer

across the whole height of the unit.

72 MODULES

36 MODULES

CABLE FIXING

3787

3788

3789

Height: 60 cm

Height: 30 cm

Height: 30 cm

Max capacity: 72 DIn modules

Max capacity: 36 DIn modules

Holes for fixing the cables with

DIn rails and side trunkings for

DIn rails and side trunkings for wiring*

wiring*
to be used in switchboard

Holes for fixing the cables with clamps


Holes for brackets for the

and electric distribution board

installation of non modular GSM

solutions

burglar-alarm and temperature

Note: DIN rails and PVC trunkings are fixed and


cannot be removed.

control units
to be used in switchboard

clamps
Holes for the installation of the
vertical partition (3804)
It can be equipped with DIn kit
and trunkings (3790)
to be always used in the floor
riser type solution or as universal

and electric distribution board

plate for free installation in other

solutions

configurations

required for the installation of the


multimedia box
Note: DIN rails and PVC channels can be removed,
providing maximum configuration flexibility

* Side trunkings for wiring, sizes 60 x 60 mm, subject to CEI-64-8 Standard for compliance with a 50% fill factor.

Project guidelines MY HOME 51

SYStEM laYOut

Installation solutions
the small thickness of the flush mounted back, only 8.5 cm,

workshop and then installed inside the metal back already

makes MY HOME flatWall suitable for installation using

fitted in the wall

the same procedure as for sliding doors

In order to preserve integrity, the finishing elements can be

When installed while the wall is being built, the metal back

installed after the completion of masonry operations

also ensure savings in building materials

the page on the side shows a typical installation in a

the device-holder supports can be assembled at the

masonry wall

Partition walls

Plasterboard walls

Supporting walls

Note: For installation inside supporting walls, a 60 cm wide recess must be obtained in the wall from the floor to the ceiling. For partition or plasterboard walls leave an
opening of approximately 60 cm during the construction of the wall.

52 MY HOME

Project guidelines

Area for accessible and visible


devices operated by the end
user
Side entry for corrugated ducts

Dedicated box for the installation of multimedia devices (routers, modems, etc.). The metal
basket, which can only be fitted on 36 module device holder supports, has cut-out marks on
all sides, providing flexibility during the management of the cable passage areas. Supplied
as standard are 4 rubber cable glands, required for ensuring the protection of data and
power cables. For multimedia device installations requiring a large number of cables, a
specific kit with 8 cable glands is also available (3831). The installation of the devices is
completed using appropriate clips (F496/MF). *

Wall fixing bracket


Area intended for protection
devices (stop&go, thermal
magnetic devices etc.)

Area for My Home


devices

Duct fastener plate


In order to facilitate the entry of cables, MY HOME FLATWALL (for the 240-270 h version)
has been designed to allow the entry of several corrugated ducts, both through the bottom
section, where they can be easily secured thanks to the duct fastener plate, and from the
sides, through knockout holes. This operation is not required for the Flatwall h150 version.

* The Flatwall metal structure screens the Wi-Fi signal. Therefore, the installation of an external antenna must be allowed for at the design stage.

Project guidelines MY HOME 53

SYSTEM LAYOUT

Electric distribution board position


The positioning of the electric distribution board(s) must be decided based on the type of building. The most suitable position of the distribution
board should be agreed with the installer (unless already preset).

SERVICE SECTOR

More than 3 rooms + bathroom &

BUILDING ON SEVERAL FLOORS

Install a dedicated distribution board

kitchen

Install the main distribution board

inside an equipment room for the

only include one distribution board,

in an equipment room, or under the

centralisation of all the devices on

at a central position.

stairs. Install another distribution

DIN rail.

Part of the DIN rail devices will be

board on each floor, in a barycentre

installed on the board, while part of

position. DIN rail devices will

them will be distributed.

be partly centralised, and partly

ONE FLOOR BUILDING


1, 2 or 3 rooms + bathroom &

distributed.

kitchen: arrange only one distribution


board in a barycentre position, for the
centralisation of all DIN devices.
Service sector

Several floor building


Flush mounted
device

Distribution
board

Distribution
board

1
1

2
2

038 42

C1

C2

3rd FLOOR

Equipment
room

One floor building: 1, 2, or 3 rooms + bathroom & kitchen

2nd floor

Flush mounted
device

Distribution
board

1st FLOOR

One floor building: more than 3 rooms + bathroom & kitchen


Distribution
board

1
1

2
2

038 42

C1

DIN modularity
device

Equipment
room

1
1

2
2

038 42

C1

C2

C2

Flush mounted
device

1
1

2
2

038 42

C1

54 MY HOME

C2

Project guidelines

Flush mounted
device

Plug-in boxes position


the positioning and the quantity of plug-in boxes needed must be assessed based on the type of home let's now consider
the following types of homes:

1 FLOOR APARTMENT

APARTMENT ON SEVERAL

SERVICE SECTOR

1, 2 or 3 rooms + bathroom &

FLOORS

Install plug-in boxes in the false

kitchen: minimum number of

Install one plug-in box under each

ceiling, or under the floor

plug-in boxes, for cable joints only

electric distribution board, as well as

all DIn devices are centralised

all DIn devices are centralised

other boxes distributed around the

more than 3 bedrooms +

system, to house the DIn devices of

bathroom & kitchen: plug-in boxes

the home automation system

are used also for housing the DIn

DIn devices are both centralised and

devices of the home automation

distributed

system DIn devices are both

as an alternative, where appropriate,

centralised and distributed

install MY HOME flatWall, for the

Main plug-in box

30 cm

centralisation of all DIn devices

Note: For the installation of the boxes refer to the CEI 64-50 guide.
The Guide recommends a minimum height of 17.5 cm from the floor. We suggest a height of 30 cm approximately.

Installation:

It is also recommended that the

Plug-in boxes should be installed,

boxes are nOt positioned:

based on the floor plan, including the

behind large pieces of furniture or

possible distribution of the furniture:

in easily accessible locations, for


maintenance purposes;

in passage areas (e g hall) or areas

wardrobes;

behind flush mounted appliances;

in particularly visible areas

Solenoid valve
actuator

1 2 3 4
1

2 3

1 2 3 4
1

2 3

ART.F430/2

C1 C2

1 2 3 4
1

2 3

ART.F430/2

C1 C2

1 2 3 4
1

2 3

ART.F430/2

C1 C2

ART.F430/2

C1 C2

Plug-in box

that are not used very often (e g


storage rooms);

nearby the hydraulic collector of

Hydraulic
collector

the temperature control system


(see drawing)

Zone solenoid
valve
Box

Project guidelines MY HOME 55

SYStEM laYOut

Indications for the installation


of aXOlutE EtrIS device holder boxes
to combine the MY HOME system
with the new cover plates of the

New dedicated flush


mounted boxes

aXOlutE EtrIS series, it will be


necessary to use dedicated flush

New dedicated supports

mounted boxes, supports and cover


plates
for more information refer to the

AXOLUTE devices
already listed in the
catalogue

aXOlutE Catalogue

FEATURES OF THE NEW


DEDICATED BOXES FOR
AXOLUTE ETRIS

2 new modularities (2 and 8 mod );

New dedicated cover plates

More depth to ensure minimum


protrusion of the light point from
the wall;

Can be installed in masonry walls


and plasterboard/cavity walls
Deeper than traditional boxes

PLASTERBOARD WALLS
Screw sockets reinforced
with steel blades

(10 to 45 mm thick boards)


8 modules

2 modules

Mortar protection cover included


(for flush mounted boxes)

MASONRY WALLS
8 modules
The covers are fitted with appropriate
spirit level housings.

2 modules

Note: Etris boxes are deeper than standard boxes. When designing the system, ensure that their positioning is adapted to the type of wall.
E.g. with standard partition walls with thicknesses of approx. 10 cm, it will not be possible to install 2 boxes opposite to each other (one each side of the wall) because the
overall space required of 12 cm would exceed the thickness of the wall.

56 MY HOME

Project guidelines

Example with 2 and 3 module devices

Example with several 2 module devices

Example with 2 module control

Example of vertical configuration

Depending on needs and look

Once the installation is completed,

requirements, Etris can be used to

the cover plates will be perfectly

create a light point using several 2

aligned and joined

module boxes joined together

Example of horizontal configuration

JOINING THE BOXES TOGETHER


this operation is performed both for

Coupler (502WA)

masonry and plasterboard boxes,


using the appropriate coupler (item
502Wa) the boxes will be perfectly
joined and level with each other,
making the subsequent steps much
easier

Cable
entry space

Cable entry knockouts


to be removed

Project guidelines MY HOME 57

SYStEM laYOut

local control device position


In addition to the controls for the
individual loads, further devices may
be included for centralised control of
the MY HOME functions for correct
positioning follow the indications
below
6
5
4
3
1

Scenario control

2. SCENARIO CONTROL
It is recommended that this device is
installed nearby the main house entrance,
and at the points from where the whole
house must be controlled from. For
example, installation in the bedroom
makes it easy to lower all shutters and
switch all lights off before going to bed.

NIGHT AREA control


(switches all bedroom lights on or off)
Local Display

1. LOCAL DISPLAY
Depending on the configured
operating mode, the device
controls the lights, the sound
system, or the scenarios;
therefore, it can be placed in any
zone of the home.

58 MY HOME

Project guidelines

3. GROUP
CONTROLS
Group controls may be used to
control a range of actuators.
They should be installed by
the entrance of the room to be
controlled.

Multimedia Touch Screen

6. VIDEO HANDSETS AND


MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREENS.
It is recommended that video handset are installed in areas
of the home that can be easily reached, both during the day
and the night. They have a double function, as they enable
receiving calls from the entrance panels and also control of the
MY HOME applications installed inside the home.

Touch Screen

5. TOUCH SCREEN
The TOUCH SCREEN must be installed in a central position, so
that it is visible and easily accessible from any room of the
house. The TOUCH SCREEN provides control and management
of all MY HOME applications.

Shutter general controls

4. GENERAL CONTROLS
It is preferable to install the general controls
for SHUTTERS and LIGHTS nearby the main
entry of the house, so that lights may be
switched on and off, and shutters may be
opened or closed, from a single point, before
going out, or when returning to the house.

Project guidelines MY HOME 59

SYStEM laYOut

Grouping cables
although the construction of

refurbishment, the cables for some

the following table shows the

the cables guarantees 300/500V

applications may be installed inside

systems/MY HOME applications for

electric insulation, it does not

the same conduits or pipes of the

which the cables may be grouped

however guarantee immunity from

traditional electric power supply

in the same conduits as the power

disturbances that may occur if

system this solution results in

supply lines (however, under no

they are installed inside the same

important SaVInGS, both in terms of

circumstances they should be

conduits as the 230V power supply

masonry work and costs

installed in the same conduits as 380

cables This type of installation is not

Vac power supply cables)

recommended However, in case of

mY Home AppLIcAtIon
Comfort

Sicurezza
Risparmio
Comunicazione

GroUpInG WItH poWer cABLes


Lighting / Automation

YES

Sound system

NO

Burglar alarm

YES

Video surveillance system

*1

Energy management

YES

Video door entry sytem

*1

Integrated telephone system/ Data network

NO

Note: * If the recommended cables are used for these systems, i.e. BTicino items, SAFETY is guaranteed in terms of electrical insulation. However, no guarantee is
provided for correct operation, due to possible disturbance that may occur if the MY HOME system cable is grouped with the electric power cables.

CABLE L4669

CABLE 336904

the light automation, shutters

the separation of electric power

automation, temperature control,

supply cables from signal cables

and energy management l4669 (or

MuSt also be ensured inside the

l4669Hf and l4669/500) GrEY BuS

junction boxes and the electric

MaY be placed in the same conduit

distribution board

as the l4669S rED BuS of the burglar

attention must therefore be paid

alarm system (in lEVEl 1 classified

when presetting the conduit

systems) together, they can also

entrances of the junction boxes and

share the same conduits and boxes as

the electric distribution board

the electric power cables


the video door entry system and
sound system 336904 WHItE BuS
may be placed in the same conduit
with the data transmission, telephone
system and tV-Sat signal cables, but
must be separated from the electric
power supply cables

60 MY HOME

Project guidelines

Selection of the cable


BTICINO CABLE 336904

BTICINO CABLE L4669, L4669HF

BTICINO CABLE L4669S

for video systems, Btcino produces

AND L4669/500

this cable has been specifically

a dedicated cable, 336904, made

this cable has been designed for the

designed for the installation of MY

of two twisted conductors with

installation of BuS systems for the

HOME burglar-alarm systems

a section of 0 50 mm2 each this

following applications:

this cable can be used for the

cable ensures the best performance

automation, Energy management

distribution of power supplies and

of the video system (greater

and temperature control this cable

operating signals When using the

distance between Entrance Panel

can be used for the distribution

300/500 insulated BuS cable, and the

and Handset, when compared to

of power supplies and operating

clamp protection cover, with which

other cables) In addition, contrarily

signals When using the 300/500

all devices are fitted, Bticino systems

to standard cables, which are not

insulated BuS cable, and the clamp

may also be installed in the same

suitable for underground installation,

protection cover, with which all

boxes and conduits as the electric

item 336904 may be installed

devices are fitted, Bticino systems

power supply lines (230 Vac) lEVEl 1

underground in suitable conduits,

may also be installed in the same

classified systems

as it complies with CEI 20-11

boxes and conduits as the electric

Technical features

standards on cables for underground

power supply lines (230 Vac)

SCS sheathed pair made up of

installation

Item l4669Hf is a low toxicity cable

2 flexible conductors, sheathed,

Technical features

without halogens, to be used in

twisted, unshielded for burglar-

SCS sheathed pair made up of

rooms where more attention to

alarm system

2 flexible conductors, sheathed,

safety is required in case of fire

Insulation voltage: 300/500 V

twisted, unshielded

Technical features

Compliant to CEI 46-5 and CEI 20-

Insulation voltage: 450/750V

Compliant to En60811, En50289,


En60228, 50265-2-1, En50395,
En50396

Coil length: 200 metres

SCS sheathed pair made up of


2 flexible conductors, sheathed,

20 standards

Coil length: 100 metres

twisted, unshielded

Insulation voltage: 300/500 V

Compliant to CEI 46-5 and CEI 2020 standards

Coil length: - 100 metres ( l4669) 500 metres (l4669/500) 200 metres (l4669Hf)

GREY CABLE
L4669
L4669/500

RED CABLE

L4669S
WHITE CABLE
336904

Project guidelines MY HOME 61

SYStEM laYOut

Selection of the cable


MY HOME APPLICATIONS
the following table enables selecting the right cable based on the MY HOME application
mY Home AppLIcAtIons
comFort

TV/SAT

IPTV

sAFetY
TV/SAT
IPTV
IPTV

TV/SAT
TV/SAT

IPTV

sAVInG
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
IPTV

controL

commUnIcAtIon
TV/SAT
IPTV

TV/SAT
IPTV
IPTV
IPTV

IPTV

TV/SAT
TV/SAT

IPTV
IPTV

controllo
controllo

tvcc
irrigazione
controllo
energia
irrigazione
energia
luci irrigazione
tvcc
tvcclantvcc
wwwcarichi
wwwwww
irrigazione

Data network

termoregolazione
termoregolazione videocitofonia
videocitofonia

TV/SAT

antifurto
antifurto

Integrated
telephone system

diffusione
diffusione
sonora
sonora

Video door entry


sytem

(*)

automazione
automazione

Energy
management

(*)

Video surveillance
system

(*)

Wire burglar
alarm

automazione
diffusione
sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan controllo
controllo
carichi
energia
termoregolazione
lan sonora
controllo
videocitofonia
carichi
energia
controllo
luci
lan
controllo
tvcc
carichi
www
energia
irrigazione
luci
tvcc
automazione
diffusione
sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
www
irrigazione
diffusione
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo
carichi
luci www
tvcc
www
automazione
diffusione
sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lanirrigazione
controllo
carichi
termoregolazione
automazione
automazione
videocitofonia
diffusione
diffusione
sonora
sonora
controllo
antifurto
antifurto
termoregolazione
lantermoregolazione
controllo
videocitofonia
carichi
videocitofonia
energia
controllo
controllo
luci lan
lan energia
tvcc
controllo
carichi
carichi
www
energia
energia
irrigazionecontrollo
luci
luci luci

Sound system

videocitofonia

videocitofonia
diffusione
controllo
antifurto
luci
tvcc
diffusionesonora
sonora automazione
antifurto

Temperature
control

termoregolazione

termoregolazione
automazione
energia
automazione

Automation

antifurto

diffusione
sonora controllo antifurto
lan
carichi

Lighting

diffusione sonora

automazione
controllo

lan lan

controllo
controllo
carichi
carichi

BTicino 336904
(white)
(*)

(*)

BTicino L4669,
L4669HF and
L4669/500
(grey)
BTicino L4669S
(red)

BTicino L4668CM
UTP 5
BTicino C9881U/5E
C9882U/5E UTP 5E
multi-pair

Telephone pair

RG6 cable

Cables recommended by BTicino(in accordance with installation regulations).


NOTE (*): Compulsory for the underground sections of the individual systems

62 MY HOME

Project guidelines

Cables that may be used (for each system, the current installation regulations must be checked).

Web Server video

TV/SAT

energia
energia

luci

luci luci

www

tvcc
irriga

tvcc tvcc

Selection of the conduits


Inside the home, cables must be

REQUIREMENTS OF THE CEI 306-

placed inside protective conduits

2 STANDARDS (*)

made of insulating material,

In the planning and sizing of the

2. 1 piping with minimum diameter

embedded in floors, walls or ceilings

conduits the CEI 306-2 standards

of 18 mm for the conduits connecting

for garages and cellars, due to

recommend to allow for any future

the star centre to the device holding

the difficulty in embedding the

requirements of advanced wiring

boxes In the case of "exposed"

components in the walls (garage walls

systems

conduits, trunkings of similar capacity

normally made of solid concrete, and

for the realisation of conduits to

may also be used

often less than 10 cm wall thickness

and from the star centre the said

3. 1 piping of suitable diameter for

in cellars), it is preferable to leave

Standards recommend that the

the installation of 1 cable for the

conduits and boxes exposed the path

following is installed :

terrestrial tV system and up to 8

of the conduits must take into account

1. 1 piping with minimum diameter

cables for the connection of the star

the possibility of cables connecting

38 mm for the connection of the

centre to the terrestrial tV antennas

different systems for the installation

Star centre to the infrastructure of

and satellite tV dishes

of flush mounted components,

the common section of the building,

corrugated tubes of different colours

or the access point of the various

should be used this will make

services (telephone system, power

installation and individuation of the

supply, central tV antenna)

system easier It is recommended

that only conduits with a minimum

38 mm

diameter of 25 mm are used


Automation
Energy
Temperature control
Energy management

Energy

Telephone system
TV

Star centre distribution board

Burglar alarm

2
18 mm
Telephone system

Data network
TV/SAT
Video door entry sytem
Sound system

Star centre distribution board

3
Data network
TV/SAT

Note (*): CEI 306-2. Guide for telecommunication


and multimedia distribution wiring inside residential
buildings.

TV

Star centre distribution board

Project guidelines MY HOME 63

SYStEM laYOut

Positioning of conduits
this electric SYStEM laYOut is

as far as the conduits are concerned,

3. any exposed wires may follow the

defined by marking the walls with

irrespective of the type of MY HOME

shortest path

the paths of the connection conduits

application , it is recommended

4. any wires installed inside ceilings

these paths shall be vertical or

that the following requirements are

or under the floor may follow the

horizontal

complied with:

shortest path

Diagonal paths must be avoided

1. the bending radiuses of the main

unless they follow an inclination of

paths must be such that all risks of

the wall or ceiling Inside the ceiling

damage to conduits and cables are

and under the floor, conduits may be

avoided

installed as desired

2. all conduits embedded in the walls

the distribution between junction

must be horizontal, vertical or parallel

boxes and loads/users depends on

to the wall edges Diagonal path are

the type of room and the type of load

only allowed for VErY short sections

to be connected

OK
OK
NO

NO

OK
OK
OK

64 MY HOME

Project guidelines

OK

DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN
DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND
PLUG-IN BOXES
the distribution between the electric

use a number of conduits suitable

Install additional conduits, even if

distribution board and the plug-in

for the systems / services being

empty, for future system expansions

boxes must be of the star type

distributed

It is recommended that 32 mm
conduits are used

DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN PLUG-IN


BOXES AND WALL MOUNTED BOXES
the distribution between plug-in boxes

use a number of conduits suitable

conduits with a diameter of at least

and junction boxes must be of the free

for the systems / services being

20 mm are used

system type

distributed It is recommended that

Project guidelines MY HOME 65

SYStEM laYOut

Positioning of conduits
LIGHT AUTOMATION SYSTEM
Comply with the following

2. if a load with light intensity

4. in case of a load connected to

installation requirements:

adjustment is required (DIMMEr),

a controlled socket (e g bedside

1. if the requirement for the room

the actuator will be positioned in the

cabinet lamp or floor lamp in the

is that the load is controlled from

electric distribution board and the

living room) with Basic actuator, the

one point only (flush mounted

conduit will be as above

conduit will go through the actuation

actuator with control), the conduit

3. if the requirement for the room is

and control junction boxes

will be directed from the junction box

that there should be various loads

towards the load

controlled from several points (DIn


actuator in plug-in box or distribution
board

Light automation system


2

Power cable
Dimmer actuator in the
electric distribution board

Power and Automation


BUS cables
Power and Automation
BUS cables

Power and Automation


BUS cables

BUS
Automazione

Control box
Actuation box

66 MY HOME

Project guidelines

SHUTTER AUTOMATION SYSTEM

ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SOUND SYSTEM

If a shutter automation system is

for the connection of nOn-flush

for the connection of a flush

required, the conduit will go from the

mounted appliances, install the

mounted DIn amplifier, allow for two

junction box to the load

flush mounted actuator for the

separate dedicated conduits

management of the load at the side


of the power socket the conduit will

RESIDENTIAL STRUCTURED

go from the junction box and the

CABLING

nearest junction

allow for star wiring between the


switchboard or electric distribution
board of the communication area

Shutter automation system

Energy management system

Power and Automation


BUS cables

Power and Automation


BUS cables

Sound system

Power and Automation


BUS cables

Residential structured cabling

Electric
distribution
board
Bus
Sound system
Power
cable

It is recommended that power sockets are ALWAYS installed near data


transmission sockets.

Project guidelines MY HOME 67

SYStEM laYOut

Positioning of conduits
BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM
Comply with the following
installation requirements:
1. for the connection between the

2. for the connection of the burglar-

3. for the connection of the

electric distribution board (burglar-

alarm central unit to the telephone

magnetic contacts (windows), install

alarm power supply) and the outdoor

communicator install two separate

separate conduits going to separate

siren install a dedicated conduit

conduits, one for the burglar-alarm

boxes where the contact interface

BuS and the other for the telephone

must be housed (DIn or BaSIC)

cable

Burglar-alarm system
2

Outdoor
siren

Electric
distribution
board

Telephone cable

Burglar-alarm
BUS

68 MY HOME

Project guidelines

Burglar-alarm BUS

Flush mounted contact interface

3
2 pair cable for
magnetic contacts
2 pair
cable for
magnetic contacts

Burglar-alarm BUS

DIN contacts
interface

BASIC contact
interface

Project guidelines MY HOME 69

70 MY HOME

Radio system

contents

MY HOME Radio System


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Radio system

MY HOME 71

GeneRAL FeAtURes

Wireless freedom
MY HOME radio system: for simple and flexible
home automation systems
The MY HOME radio system, available with AXOLUTE and
LIVINGLIGHT looks, gives the possibility of very easily
creating advanced electric systems to manage:
Lighting;
The automation of lights and shutters;
The protection of the home from gas leaks and
ooding.

Thanks to the radio transmission and the battery


powering of controls, the devices easily integrate with the
infrastructure of the traditional electric system, without the
need for any additional wiring
The use of the ZigBee technology for the communication
of devices makes it possible to use the MY HOME system
also in large spaces with obstacles and partition walls

ACTUATORS
Devices connected to the load to
manage and the power line
L
N

Dimmer actuator

Dimmer radio control


RADIO CONTROLS
Battery powered devices
communicating via radio with the
actuators

72 MY HOME

Radio system

Shutter actuator

Scenario radio control

Shutter radio control

mazione

THe AdVANTAGeS IN A NeW SYSTeM:

THe AdVANTAGeS oF INTeGrATIoN:

Creation of new systems with home automation functions


using the infrastructure of the traditional electric system

Use of radio control devices to extend the BUS Automation


system to rooms without twisted pair

THe AdVANTAGeS IN THe reFurBISHMeNT:


Evolution of a traditional electric system: from the
addition of a new control system without the need
for masonry walls, to the realisation of basic home
automation functions

BuS AuToMATIoN SYSTeM

Light control
ON/OFF
actuator

Power supply
SCS/ZigBee interface

TV/SAT

IPTV

Light actuator
Light radio control
diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

Radio system

tvcc

MY HOME 73

www

GeneRAL FeAtURes

The functions
Lighting and shutter automation
Lighting control with ON/OFF mode and Dimmer
Shutter control with Preset setting (recalling of a
preset position)

LIGHTING

energia

luci

tvcc

www

irrigazione

L
N

Light radio control

Light actuator

Dimmer actuator

Dimmer radio control

TV/SAT

IPTV

SHuTTer AuToMATIoN

automazione

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

L
N

Shutter radio control

74 MY HOME

Radio System

Shutter actuator

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

ffusione sonora

MANAGING SceNArIoS
Simultaneous activation of several loads (lamps and shutters) for the creation of comfort situations
Example: lamp on and shutter half way down for watching the TV; diffused light and shutter fully open for
reading

L
N

Dimmer actuator

Shutter actuator

TV/SAT

IPTV

Radio remote
control

Scenario radio control

TecHNIcAL ALArMS

antifurto

Home safe from water or gas leaks The system will notify the danger event, and automatically intervene to
limit any damage (e g closing the gas or water mains)
termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

www

Solenoid valve
Gas detector

Radio interface

Radio actuator

Radio system

MY HOME 75

irrigazion

GeneRAL FeAtURes

Installation features
The devices
The range is split into:

Devices for the control of the load, integrated in the


electric system;

Shutter actuator

Battery powered control devices, installable in any


location in full freedom;

Devices for interfacing with the MY HOME BUS and the


management of technical alarms
Shutter control

automazione

L N

The use of radio devices greatly simplifies the installation


of the electric system; all the control devices are in fact
battery powered, and independent from the wiring

In addition, some actuator devices do not require the


neutral conductor for their operation, and can therefore be
easily installed in existing systems, in place of traditional
devices
N

Traditional wiring

diffusione sono

Wiring with MY HOME radio system


L
N
N

N
L

L
L
L

N
L N
L

L
N

N
L
N

Actuator devices
Radio control devices

76 MY HOME

Radio System

PROCEDURE FOR THE INSTALLATION OF ZIGBEE DEVICES


INSTALLATION

SUPPORT

DEVICE

KEY COVER

COVER PLATE

Installation with box

Actuator

(*)

Adapter
LN4588
H4588
Wall installation

Control without
original
support

Control with support

(*) Note: The device is sold inclusive of mounting support. For installation in flush mounted boxes, the control device must be removed from its support and
attached to the LN4588 - H4588 adapter.

Radio system

MY HOME 77

GeneRAL FeAtURes

Control devices
The range includes the following products:

SINGLE AND DOUBLE


ON/OFF LIGHT CONTROLS
For the management of one, two, or a
group of light actuators

Double control

Single control

DIMMER LIGHT CONTROL


For the management of one, or a
group of Dimmer actuators

Shutter radio control

Dimmer radio control

SHUTTER CONTROL
For the management of one, or a
group of shutter actuators

SCENARIO CONTROL
For the management of up to 4
scenarios
Scenario 1

Scenario 2

Scenario 3

Scenario 4

Note: these devices require one module key covers.


See the following pages for more information.
Scenario radio control

78 MY HOME

Radio System

RADIO REMOTE CONTROLS


Available with 4 and 5 pushbuttons,
to recall the scenarios saved by the
scenario Control device

Radio remote control

INFRARED CONTROL (IR)


It can be used to activate one or more actuators
when someone walks in the area monitored by
the IR sensor of the device
The device also includes a light sensor that
enables operation during the evening hours, or
when the light levels are too low

Fresnell lens
with IR sensor

IR control

TEMPERATURE PROBE
Wall installation device with temperature
sensor with measurement range from -10 to
+40 C
When the two temperature thresholds set are
reached (minimum and maximum), the probe
activates the two corresponding scenarios

Radio system

MY HOME 79

GeneRAL FeAtURes

Control devices
MY HOME - Build on it
Devices preset for:

The integration of traditional devices with the ZigBee


radio system, for the Automation and Safety functions
(technical alarms);
Extending a BUS Automation system using radio control
devices

TRANSMITTER AND ACTUATOR


FOR TECHNICAL ALARMS
The transmitter for technical alarms can be used to
generate and send to the radio system a danger signal,
generated by safety devices, like the gas, smoke, or
water detectors connected to its clamps

Transmitting interface and gas detector

The device must be used with one or more actuators for


the activation of the alarm signal (siren and/or flashing
unit), and for ensuring the safety of the room (e g :
activation of solenoid valve to close the water and gas
mains)

CONTACT INTERFACE

Actuator

Featuring two contacts for the connection of two


switches, or one two-way switch, this device can
be used to control two groups of light actuators,
or one group of shutter actuators
The interface has basic modularity for flush
mounted box installation
Contact interface

TV/SAT

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

80 MY HOME

controllo

Radio System

IPTV

lan

controllo carichi

Solenoid valve

energia

luci

tvcc
automazione

diffusionewww
sonora

irrigazione
antifurto

termoregola

SCS/ZIGBEE INTERFACE FOR THE EXTENSION


OF THE BUS AUTOMATION SYSTEM
This device is required for the extension of the BUS
Automation system using ZigBee radio control devices
To be used for easy reach of one or more wired system
control points, in positions that cannot be reached by
the BUS wiring
The interface ensures the transfer of information
between the radio control devices and the Bus
automation system actuators; it is not possible to
manage the actuator of the ZigBee radio system using
Automation BUS control devices

Ligth control

Power supply

Light actuator

IPTV

ontrollo carichi

SCS/ZigBee interface

OPEN/ZIGBEE INTERFACE
This particular device also belongs to the interface
group; it is used to interface the radio system
to a Personal Computer to be used for central
function management through the Open Web Net
communication protocol
energia

luci

tvcc

www

irrigazione

Radio system

MY HOME 81

GENERAL FEATURES

Control devices
Selection of the device based on the functions to manage
LIGHTING AND ON/OFF LOADS
TYPE OF CONTROL

AXOLUTE

KEY COVERS

LIVINGLIGHT

KEY COVERS

SINGLE RADIO CONTROL

HA4596
HB4596

HC/HD/HS4915BA

L4596N
N4596N

L/N/NT4915AN

DOUBLE RADIO CONTROL

HA4597
HB4597

2 x HC/HD/HS4915BA

L4597N
N4597N

2 X L/N/NT4915AN

TRANSMITTER FOR TECHNICAL ALARMs

H4586

LN4586

CONTACT INTERFACE

3577

wall movement sensor

3579

lighting with adjustment (DIMMER)


TYPE OF CONTROL

AXOLUTE

KEY COVERS
HA4598
HB4598

dimmer SINGLE RADIO CONTROL

HC/HD/HS4915BA +
HC/HD/HS4911AD

LIVINGLIGHT
L4598N
N4598N

KEY COVERS
L/N/NT4915AN +
L/N/NT4911ADN

lighting with adjustment (DIMMER)


TYPE OF CONTROL

AXOLUTE

radio CONTROL FOR SHUTTERS

82 MY HOME

Radio System

KEY COVERS
HA4599
HB4599

HC/HD/HS4911AH
+ HC/HD/HS4915

LIVINGLIGHT
L4599N
N4599N

KEY COVERS
L/N/NT4911AHN +
L/N/NT4915N o N4915LN

Actuators
Powered by the electric power line and connected to the
load to manage, these devices process the information
received by the control devices and operate as repeaters,
forwarding the radio signal to other actuators belonging
to the ZigBee network The range includes flush mounted

devices, to be completed with key covers, and devices


for installation in shutter boxes, junction boxes, and false
ceilings

ON/OFF actuator without neutral


Flush mounted device for the control of a group of
lamps and generic loads with maximum power 300 W
This device is the ideal solution to replace traditional
system devices like switches and two way switches,
as its operation does not require connection to the
neutral conductor

N
L

ON/OFF actuator without neutral

ON/OFF actuator for false


ceiling installation
Device for the control of one, or one
group of lamps and generic loads with
maximum power 2500 W

ON/OFF actuator
Actuator for two groups
of lamps

ON/OFF actuator for one or two


groups of lamps
Actuator for one group of lamps

Flush mounted devices for the control of lamps and


generic loads with maximum power:
2500 W for the management of a group of lamps;
2x1000 W for the management of two groups of
lamps

Radio system

MY HOME 83

GeneRAL FeAtURes

Actuators

ON/OFF actuator for one or two


groups of lamps

Local control
pushbutton

ON/OFF mobile socket

Conceived as a mobile socket, with German standard


plug and socket, for the connection to a power socket
of the system, this actuator is suitable for the control
of lamps and generic loads with maximum absorption
10 A

Power socket

Dimmer actuators for


light automation
Flush mounted devices available in the following
versions:
for the control of lamps and generic loads with
maximum power 400 W;
for the control of 0-10 V ballasts with maximum
power 1000 W
N
L
Ballast actuator

Ballast

84 MY HOME

Radio System

Dimmer actuator for false


ceiling installation
Available in the following versions:

for the control of lamps and generic


loads with maximum power 600 W;

for the control of 0-10 V ballasts with


maximum power 1000 W
Dimmer mobile socket

Local control
pushbutton

Mobile dimmer actuator


False ceiling mounted
dimmer actuator

Also this device has German standard plug


and socket, for connection to a power
socket of the system
Suitable for dimmer control of lamps and
generic loads with maximum power 500 W

SHUTTER AUTOMATION
ACTUATORS
Available in two versions, for the control of
motorised shutter and shutter motors with
maximum power 500 VA:
ush mounted
for installation inside shutter boxes
In both cases the shutter position can be
saved, and then recalled using the appropriate
control device
Shutter box actuator
Flush mounted actuator

Radio system

MY HOME 85

GENERAL FEATURES

Actuators
Device selection table

TYPE OF ACTUATOR

AXOLUTE

KEY COVERS

LIVINGLIGHT

KEY COVERS

300 W ON/OFF

H4590

HC/HD/HS4915BA

LN4590

L/N/NT4915AN

2500 W ON/OFF

H4591

HC/HD/HS4915BA

LN4591

L/N/NT4915AN

2 x 1000 W ON/OFF

H4592

2 x HC/HD/HS4915BA

LN4592

L/N/NT4915AN +
L/N/NT4915AN

2 x 300 W ON/OFF

H4593

HC/HD/HS4915BA +
HC/HD/HS4911AD

LN4593

L/N/NT4915AN +
L/N/NT4911ADN

Dimmer FOR 0-10 v ballast

H4594

HC/HD/HS4915BA +
HC/HD/HS4911AD

LN4594

L/N/NT4915AN +
L/N/NT4911ADN

ON/OFF FOR TECHNICAL ALARMs

H4587

LN4587

LN4595

L/N/NT4911AHN +
L/NT4915N o N4915LN

2500 W ON/OFF

3571

600 W DIMMER

3572

DIMMER FOR 0-10 v ballast

3573

500 w dimmer mobile socket

3574

2500 w on/off mobile socket

3575

FOR SHUTTERS

H4595

FOR SHUTTERS

86 MY HOME

HC/HD/HS4911AH +
HC/HD/HS4915
3576

Radio System

Table of loads (1)


INCANDESCENT
LAMPS

HALOGEN LAMPS

FLUORESCENT
LAMPS

FERROMAGNETIC
TRANSFORMERS

ELECTRONIC
TRANSFORMERS

COMPACT
FLUORESCENT
LAMPS

LED LAMPS

MOTORS

(2)

60 400 W

60 400 W

60 400 W

60 400 W

2500 W

2500 W

1250 W

2500 W

2500 W

1250 W

1250 W

250 VA

2 x 1000 W

2 x 1000 W

2 x 500 W

2 x 100 VA

2 x 1000 W

2 x 500 W

2 x 500 W

2 x 100 VA

60 300 W

60 300 W

60 300 VA

60 300 W

1000 W (3)

2500 W

2500 W

2500 W

2500 VA

2500 W

2500 W

1250 W

2500 VA

2500 W

2500 W

2500 W

2500 VA

2500 W

1250 W

1250 W

250 VA

60 600 W

60 600 W

60 450 VA

60 600 W

1000 W (3)

50 500 W

50 500 W

60 500 VA

60 500 VA

2500 W

2500 W

1250 W

2500 VA

2500 W

1250 W

1250 W

500 VA

500 VA

Note (1): for system with 110 Vac power line supply, the maximum power values
listed are halved.
Note (2): For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60% higher than
their rated power must be connected.
For the calculation of the controllable power take into account the efficiency of
standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency of 0.78
=> power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)
Note (3): 0-10 V ballast for fluorescent lamps

Radio system

MY HOME 87

GENERAL FEATURES

Configuration - general rules


Structure of the MY HOME radio system
The MY HOME radio system is based on a network of
devices that communicate using a radio signal with
frequency of 2.4 GHz and the ZigBee protocol, defined by
international standard IEEE 802-15 4.
As shown in the drawing below, the information sent by
a control device reaches the recipient actuator passing
through other devices on the network.

This particular mode of transmission ensures high reliability


and efficiency; in fact, if the signal path is interrupted by
a faulty device, the other existing devices will create an
alternative path for the signal to reach its destination.

Interruption

Device that sends the


command

Recipient actuator
Control device

Signal path

Router actuator

Path with communication problems

Coordinator Actuator (*)

New alternative path

The MY HOME radio system can be used in any type of room or home none of the system devices interfere with wireless
devices present, like burglar alarm, computer, Wi-Fi data network, etc.

88 MY HOME

Radio System

How is the ZigBee radio network installed


The international IEEE 802 15 4 standard defines the
interconnection protocol between radio communication,
and the type of devices that constitute a ZigBee network
With reference to the drawing in the previous page, in a
ZigBee network it is possible to identify 3 types of devices:

DESCRIPTION

FUNCTION

NETwORK DEVICE

Battery powered control devices, remote controls, contact interfaces, and


technical alarm transmitters

Control device

Forwarding of the radio signal for actuators

router device

Actuation of the control intended for same, and forwarding of


Actuator devices, connected to the electric power line
the radio signal to other network devices

Coordinator device

Control and management of communication within the


network and actuation of the control intended for the same

Only one actuator device of the system, selected and defined during the
configuration of the network.
if the ZigBee network is integrated with the BUS Automation system,
the coordinator function must be assigned to the SCS/ZigBee interface
device

Simple and quick system configuration


The system configuration does not require tools or
software To include and associate all the devices
of the ZigBee network, a simple pressure of the
appropriate pushbutton on the front of each device
itself is enough

Note : Zigbee Certified Product - Manufacturer Specific Profile.

Radio system

MY HOME 89

CONFIGURATION

Configuration - general rules


The configuration of radio ZigBee devices is performed in
three stages:

1 - Selection of the coordinator device and


network creation

1. Selection of the coordinator device and network creation

This is the first operation that must be completed after


wiring the devices. After its definition, the coordinator will
store all information relating to all the devices making up
the network, and will manage the transfer of information
among the devices.

2. Adding the devices to the network


3. Association of the devices
To help the reader, below is a legend of the symbols used
in the next pages to indicate the status of the LEDs of the
devices.

ProcedurE:
1. Remove any key covers present.
2. Select the actuator device that will act as a Coordinator,
and press the corresponding network key for 4 seconds.

LED status
OFF
ON STEADY
FLASHING SLOWNLY (1 s)

4s
FLASHING QUICKLY (0.25 s)
FLASHING (60 ms)
FLASHING 3 TIMES (3 s)
Coordinator

LEDS AND KEYS REQUIRED FOR THE CONFIGURATION

3. The NETWORK LED (yellow) will come on steady, and


after a few instants will start flashing quickly.

NETWORK key

NETWORK
indicator LED

LEARNING key

LEARNING
indicator LED
Coordinator
ON/OFF control
key

90 MY HOME

Radio system

4. Create the network by setting the devices that will be


included, as indicated in the following page.

2 - Adding the devices to the network


3. To complete the procedure press the NETWORK
KEY of the Coordinator device; the corresponding
NETWORK LED will FLASH THREE TIMES, while the
NETWORK LEDs of all other devices will switch off.

1. Press the NETWORK KEY of the first device to include.


The NETWORK LED (yellow) turns on steady during
the network search stage. Once the stage has been
completed, it will start flashing slowly.

Coordinator

3s

Device

2. Repeat the above procedure for all devices to include


in the network.

Device

CHECKING THE DEVICES BELONGING TO THE NETWORK


To check the devices belonging to a common network
press the NETWORK KEY of any actuator device, or the
NETWORK KEY of the Coordinator device: the NETWORK
LED (yellow) of the Coordinator device will flash slowly,
while the NETWORK LEDs (yellow) of the other Actuator
devices will flash quickly.

The radio control must be checked individually.


Press the NETWORK KEY of the first Control: the NETWORK
LED (yellow) of the Control will flash slowly, while the
NETWORK LEDs (yellow) of all the actuators in the system
will flash quickly. Repeat the operation also for the other
radio controls.

Device

Coordinator

Device

PL

Device

Radio system

MY HOME 91

CONFIGURATION

Configuration - general rules


3 - Association of the devices
After installing the Zigbee system, the actuator devices must be associated to the corresponding control devices.

HOW TO ASSOCIATE A CONTROL DEVICE TO AN


ACTUATOR
1. If fitted, remove the key covers of the involved devices.
2. Press the learning Key of the rAdio conTrol, the
leArning led (green) will flash slowly.

5. Press the ON KEY on the ACTUATOR. The load


connected turns on, the LEARNING LED (green) change
flashing mode, from slow to quick.

PL

Control

Actuator

3. Wait at least 1 second, press then the ON KEY; the


LEARNING LED (green) will flash quickly.
Note: repeat the procedure described at points 2 and 3 for each command to be
associated to the actuator.

6. Press the LEARNING KEY on the RADIO CONTROL.


The LEARNING LEDs (green) of all associated devices will
go off

PL

Control

Control

4. Press the ACTUATOR to associate to the LEARNING KEY.


The LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.

Actuator

Actuator

92 MY HOME

Radio system

PL

7. The devices are now associated: to check that the


configuration procedure has been performed correctly
press the OFF KEY on the radio control; the load
connected to the actuator should go off Otherwise
repeat the association procedure described

PL

Control

Actuator

HoW To ASSocIATe AN AcTuATor To ANoTHer


AcTuATor
The procedure described for associating the control device
to the actuator can also be used to associate an actuator to
another actuator This gives the possibility of controlling
loads connected to several actuators from one actuator
only, like in the example shown below
1. Press the ON KEY on actuator no 1, to activate the load
connected to this actuator

Actuator No.1

2. Press the ON KEY on actuator no 2 to activate the load


connected to this actuator, and also to send via radio a
switch on command to actuator no 1

Actuator No.2

Radio system

MY HOME 93

CONFIGURATION

Configuration - general rules


HOW TO ASSOCIATE A RADIO CONTROL TO A NEW
ACTUATOR
1. If fitted, remove the key covers of the involved devices.
2. Press the ON KEY of the Radio control, the
associated loads come on.
3. Press the leArning Key of the radio conTrol, the
learning led (green) will flash slowly.

PL

Control

Actuator

4. Press the ON KEY on the Radio control, the


LEARNING LED (green) will start flashing quickly.
Also the LEARNING LEDs (green) of the associated
actuators will flash quickly.

6. Press the ON KEY on the new ACTUATOR. The LEARNING


LED (green) will flash quickly and the load switches on.

PL

Control

Actuator

Actuator

94 MY HOME

5. Press the LEARNING KEY of the new actuator to


associate, il LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.

Radio system

7. Press the LEARNING KEY ont the rAdIo coNTroL


The LEARNING LEDs of all devices will go off

PL

Control

Actuator

8. Press the ON KEY on the radio control, the associated


devices will go off

PL

Actuator

Control

Actuator

Each individual actuator manages the corresponding load connected, while the radio control is capable of managing both
actuators at the same time

Radio system

MY HOME 95

CONFIGURATION

How to modify the configuration


It is possible to change at any time the system configuration, by removing the current association between the Radio
control and one or more actuators, to create new associations.

HOW TO REMOVE THE ASSOCIATION BETWEEN A


RADIO CONTROL AND AN ACTUATOR
1. If fitted, remove the key covers of the involved devices.
2. Press the LEARNING KEY on the radio CONTROL, the
LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.

5. Press the LEARNING KEY on the Radio control, all


LEARNING LEDs (green) will go off.

PL

PL

Control

Control

3. Now press the ON KEY, the LEARNING LED (green) will


start flashing quickly.
At the same time, also the LEARNING LEDs (green) of
all the actuators associated to the radio control will start
flashing quickly.

6. Check that the Radio control is disconnected from


the ACTUATOR. When the ON key of the radio control
is pressed, the load connected to the disconnected
actuator must not activate. Otherwise repeat the
described procedure.

HOW TO REMOVE A DEVICE FROM THE NETWORK


1. Press the NETWORK KEY on the device to be removed.
The corresponding NETWORK LED (yellow) will start
flashing quickly.

PL

Control

4. Identify the actuator to disconnect and press the


corresponding LEARNING KEY. The LEARNING LED
(green) will go off.
Device

2. Press the NETWORK KEY again. The NETWORK LED


(yellow) will switch off for 10 seconds, and then will start
flashing slowly.
3. Remove the device from the system.

Actuator

96 MY HOME

Radio system

Configuration of the functions: the main control


1. If fitted, remove the key covers of the involved devices.
2. Select the radio control that will manage all the
actuators. Press the LEARNING KEY; the LEARNING LED
(green) will flash slowly.
A

5. Press the ON KEY on the ACTUATORS, the load activates,


the LEARNING LED (green) will go from flashing slowly to
flashing quickly.

PL

PL

Control
Actuator

3. Press the ON KEY on the Radio control, the


LEARNING LED (green) will start flashing quickly.
6. Press the LEARNING KEY on the radio CONTROL, the
learning LEDs (green) of all devices will go off.
A

PL

PL

Control

4. Press on all the ACTUATORS the LEARNING KEY. All the


LEARNING LEDs (green) will flash slowly.

Control

Actuator
Actuator

Radio system

MY HOME 97

CONFIGURATION

Configuration of the functions: the scenario


The scenario consists of the simultaneous activation of several loads, with the objective of creating a specific comfort
situation. As an example, below is a description of the procedure for creating a scenario for switching ON a light point in
dimmer mode, and open a shutter.

ProcedurE:
1. If fitted, remove the key covers of the involved devices.
2. Press the LEARNING KEY on the scenariO CONTROL,
the LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.

5. Press the ON KEY on the Dimmer actuator.


To set the brightness at the desired level, use the + and
keys. The LEARNING LED (green) will flash quickly.

Scenario control

3. Press KEY 1; the LEARNING LED (green) will start flashing


quickly.

Dimmer actuator

6. Press the LEARNING KEY on the SHUTTER ACTUATOR,


the LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.

Scenario control

4. Press the LEARNING KEY on the DIMMER ACTUATOR,


the LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.

Shutter actuator

7. Press the UP KEY of the Shutter actuator, the


LEARNING LED (green) will flash quickly.

Dimmer actuator
Shutter actuator

98 MY HOME

Radio system

8. Press the LEARNING KEY on the SCENARIO CONTROL.


The LEARNING LED (green) of the Dimmer actuator,
of the SHUTTER ACTUATOR and of the SCENARIO
CONTROL will go off.

Dimmer actuator

Scenario control

Shutter actuator

9. Check the created scenario using key No. 1 of the


SCENARIO CONTROL. At the same time as the light
switches on in dimmer mode, also the shutter will open.
Otherwise repeat the described procedure.

Radio system

MY HOME 99

GeneRAL RULes FoR InstALLAtIon

Distances and maximum number of devices


The installation of a Zigbee radio system does not have any special requirements; it is enough to comply with the current
regulations for the installation of a domestic electric system, and with the instructions of this page

MAXIMuM NuMBer oF deVIceS


TV/SAT
IPTV
The maximum number of devices
that can be
configured as part of a network is 65000

TV/SAT

IPTV

MAXIMuM dISTANceS
The maximum distance between 2 device is:

150 metres on free eld

automazione

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

15 metres for closed areas (the presence of masonry or

luci

automazione
tvcc

www

irrigazione
antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

metal walls greatly reduces the signal strength)


N

Wall
150 metres
15 metres

Radio control

Actuator

Radio control

dISTANceS eXceedING THe PerMITTed LIMIT

Actuator

TV/SAT

TV/SAT

IPTV

IPTV

If the distance among the devices exceeds the permitted limits, the network will use the Router function of the actuators,
which will then receive the command and send it to other similar devices, until it reaches the destination
The maximum number of actuators that can be used wit the Router function is 30
automazione

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

automazione
controllo

antifurto
controllo
carichi

lan

termoregolazione
energia

videocitofonia
luci

controllo
tvcc

lan
www

controllo
carichi
irrigazione

energia

luci

tvcc

Example: in the room shown, the signal sent by the light control device (A) is unable to reach the corresponding actuator (B)
if this is installed at a distance of 30 m or more
N
L

Wall

Wall

Light control

Shutter actuator

Signal

TV/SAT

IPTV

Light actuator

TV/SAT

IPTV

30 metres

The shutter actuator (C), installed in an intermediate position, operates as a Router, receiving the signal from the control
device (A), and sending it to the light actuator (B)
automazione

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

automazione
controllo

lan

antifurto
controllo
carichi

termoregolazione
energia

videocitofonia
luci

N
L

Wall

Signal

Light control

Radio system

Signal

Light actuator

Shutter actuator
15 metres

100 MY HOME

Wall

15 metres

controllo
tvcc

lan
www

controllo
carichi
irrigazione

energia

luci

tvcc

CONTENTS

APPLICATION EXAMPLES AND WIRING DIAGRAMS


1. Adding a light point for lighting control . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Managing the lighting from 3 positions . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Addition of a third light point and dimmer management
of the lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Automatic switching on of the light in the night zone . .
5. Central shutter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Simplified shutter and lighting system . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Light control with scenario management . . . . . . . . . .
8. Methane gas leak with automatic isolation of the pipes
and optical-acoustic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . 102
. . . . . . . . 104
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

106
108
110
112
114

. . . . . . . . 116

Radio system

MY HOME 101

WIRInG DIAGRAMs

Application examples and wiring diagrams


1. ADDING A LIGHT POINT FOR LIGHTING CONTROL
Without performing expensive masonry work, or any wiring operations, the user wants to add a new light point for the
management of the lighting inside the room

Switch

The standard switch is replaced by a radio actuator; this


operation is carried out without any modifications of the
wiring, because the device operation does not require the
use of the neutral conductor (see wiring diagram)

The new light point consists of a control installed on the


wall surface
It is possible to add to this device one or more controls,
providing a more flexible control of the lighting from other
areas of the room

Actuator

Radio control

102 MY HOME

Radio system

WIRING DIAGRAM

Actuator

Radio control

MATERIAL
description

item

quantitY

AXOLUTE

LIVINGLIGHT

Actuator

H4590

LN4590

Radio control

HA/HB4596

L/N4596N

Note: complete the devices with support, 2 module cover plate and key covers,
depending on the desired finish (see the specific catalogue).

Radio system

MY HOME 103

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Application examples and wiring diagrams


2. MANAGING THE LIGHTING FROM 3 POSITIONS
The lighting system of the bedroom shown consists of a ceiling light fitting controlled by a switch at the entrance of the
room, and two table lamps connected to two power sockets.
The idea is to modify the system to make it possible to manage all lights from the bed.

Switch

Socket

Socket

Without any changes to the current system, the traditional


switch at the entrance of the room is replaced with a radio
actuator. Two mobile sockets for the management of the
two table lamps are connected to the power sockets.

Radio control

Mobile socket

104 MY HOME

Radio system

The management of the lamps is ensured by fitting on


the side of the bed two radio controls configured for the
management of the radio actuator and the two mobile
sockets.

Radio control

Mobile socket

Actuator

WIRING DIAGRAM

230 Vac
socket

230 Vac
socket

Mobile socket

Mobile socket

Actuator

Radio control

Radio control

MATERIAL
description

item
AXOLUTE

quantitY
LIVINGLIGHT

Actuator

H4590

LN4590

Radio control

HA/HB4597

L/N4597N

Mobile socket

3575

3575

Note: complete the devices with support, 2 module cover plate and key covers,
depending on the desired finish (see the specific catalogue).

Radio system

MY HOME 105

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Application examples and wiring diagrams


3. ADDITION OF A THIRD LIGHT POINT AND DIMMER MANAGEMENT OF THE
LIGHTING
In the room shown, the lamp is controlled by two two-way switches. The user wants to manage the lamp from a third control
point and wants to be able to adjust the light intensity using the dimmer function.

Two-way switch at the


entrance of the room

To achieve what described, a simple modification of the


electric system is required. The two-way switch connected
to the lamp is replaced by a dimmer radio actuator. Two
radio controls are then installed; the first one to replace
the two-way switch at the entrance of the room, and the

Two-way switch

second in the most comfortable position for use. Using the


pushbuttons of the three new devices, it will be possible to
switch the lamp on and adjust its intensity.

Dimmer radio control

Dimmer actuator

Dimmer radio control

106 MY HOME

Radio system

WIRING DIAGRAM

Dimmer actuator

Dimmer radio control

Dimmer radio control

MATERIAL
description

item

quantitY

AXOLUTE

LIVINGLIGHT

Dimmer actuator

H4593

LN4593

Dimmer radio control

HA/HB4598

L/N4598N

Flush mounted box


adapter (*)

H4588

LN4588

Note: complete the devices with support, 2 module cover plate and key covers,
depending on the desired finish (see the specific catalogue).
(*) Accessory required for the installation of the radio control in the flush mounted
box, instead of the two-way switch.

Radio system

MY HOME 107

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Application examples and wiring diagrams


4. AUTOMATIC SWITCHING ON OF THE LIGHT IN THE NIGHT ZONE
The automatic switching on of the lighting during the
night, when the user crosses the area, is without any doubt
a useful function.
This function can be realised easily in both new systems
and in systems being refurbished, thanks to infrared radio
controls, and without any wiring operations.
The drawing shows the night zone of a home with a
lighting system consisting of control devices and radio
actuators (see wiring diagram).

The automatic switching on of the lighting is performed


by two infrared controls, located respectively in the room,
near the floor beside the bed, and in the hallway.
During the night and when there is no light, the infrared
controls will automatically switch on the lights of the two
rooms when the user gets up to reach the bathroom.
The lights are then switched off manually using the
corresponding actuators and radio controls.

BEDROOM

Radio control
Actuator

IR radio control

HALLWAY

Actuator

IR radio control

108 MY HOME

Radio system

WIRING DIAGRAM

IR radio control

IR radio control

Actuator

Actuator
Hallway lamp

Hallway lamp radio control

Actuator
Bedroom lamp

Bathroom lamp

Bedroom lamp radio control

MATERIAL
description

item

quantitY

AXOLUTE

LIVINGLIGHT

300W actuator

H4590

LN4590

Single radio control

HA/HB4596

L/N4596N

IR radio control

3579

3579

Note: complete the devices with support, 2 module cover plate and key covers,
depending on the desired finish (see the specific catalogue).

Radio system

MY HOME 109

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Application examples and wiring diagrams


5. CENTRAL SHUTTER CONTROL
The room shown has three motorized shutters, individually controlled by the corresponding traditional control devices.
The user wants to add a general control at the entrance, to manage all shutters at the same time, without carrying out any
masonry work, or wiring modifications.

Changeover switch

Changeover switch

Changeover switch

To achieve what described, the traditional devices are easily replaced by radio actuators, without changing the existing
wiring system. The new general control consists of a surface mounted radio control located at the entrance of the room.

Shutter actuator

Shutter actuator

Shutter actuator
Shutter radio control

110 MY HOME

Radio system

WIRING DIAGRAM

Motorised shutter

Motorised shutter

Actuator

Actuator

Motorised shutter
Actuator

MATERIAL
description

General radio control

item

quantitY

AXOLUTE

LIVINGLIGHT

Shutter actuator

H4595

LN4595

Shutter radio control

HA/HB4599

L/N4599N

Note: complete the devices with support, 2 module cover plate and key covers,
depending on the desired finish (see the specific catalogue).

Radio system

MY HOME 111

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Application examples and wiring diagrams


6. SIMPLIFIED SHUTTER AND LIGHTING SYSTEM
By using false ceiling mounted actuators and reduced
size actuators instead of similar flush mounted devices, it
is possible to obtain a lighting and shutter management
system with extreme ease, without the need for wiring, or
flush mounted device holding boxes.
Thanks to their reduced sizes, these actuators can be
installed near the loads to be controlled, or inside the

shutter boxes, and are connected to the power network,


required for operation of the load.
The drawing shows an example of the electric system for
the management of lights and shutters, using both the
devices described and radio controls.

Light
actuator

Shutter
actuator

Shutter
actuator

Shutter
radio control

Shutter
radio control

Light radio control

MATERIAL
DESCRIPTION

ITEM

QUANTITY

AXOLUTE

LIVINGLIGHT

Shutter actuator

3576

3576

Light radio actuator

3572

3572

Shutter radio control

HA/HB4599

L/N4599N

Light radio control

HA/HB4596

L/N4596N

Note: complete the devices with support, 2 module cover plate and key covers,
depending on the desired finish (see the specific catalogue).

112 MY HOME

Shutter
actuator

Radio system

Shutter
radio control

WIRING DIAGRAM

Motorised shutter
Shutter actuator

Light actuator

Light radio control

Shutter radio control

Motorised shutter
Shutter actuator

Motorised shutter
Shutter actuator

Shutter radio control

Shutter radio control

Radio system

MY HOME 113

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Application examples and wiring diagrams


7. LIGHT CONTROL WITH SCENARIO MANAGEMENT
The living room shown contains three lamps managed by
dimmer actuators. Without any wiring intervention, it is
possible to integrate the scenario control with the system.
This will be useful for setting, by pressing the control key,
the ambiance scenario of the room, based on particular
situations and on the life style of the user, like:

TV WATCHING SCENARIO

Scenario radio
control

TV watching scenario: when selected, the main ceiling


light and the table lamps are switched off , and the stem
lamp is switched on at 30% of its power;
Reading scenario: when selected, the main ceiling light
and the stem lamp are switched off , and the table lamps
are switched on.
The scenario control is capable of saving up to 4 scenarios
maximum.

Dimmer actuator

Dimmer actuator

Remote control for the


management of scenarios

Dimmer actuator

READING SCENARIO

Scenario radio
control

Dimmer actuator

Dimmer actuator

Remote control for the


management of scenarios

In the system described it is also possible to add a remote control, for easier management of the scenarios.

114 MY HOME

Radio system

Dimmer actuator

WIRING DIAGRAM

Ceiling light

Ceiling light

Dimmer actuator

Ceiling light
L

Dimmer actuator

Dimmer actuator

Scenario radio control

Radio remote control

MATERIAL
description

item

quantitY

AXOLUTE

LIVINGLIGHT

Dimmer actuator

H4593

LN4593

Scenario radio control

HA/HB4589

LN4589N

Radio remote control

3528N

3528N

Note: complete the devices with support, 2 module cover plate and key covers,
depending on the desired finish (see the specific catalogue).

Radio system

MY HOME 115

WIRInG DIAGRAMs

Application examples and wiring diagrams


8. METHANE GAS LEAK WITH AUTOMATIC ISOLATION OF THE PIPES AND
OPTICAL-ACOUSTIC ALARM
As it is well known, the protection of the home from gas
leaks can be easily obtained by integrating a methane gas
detector with the electric system
The highest protection level can be obtained by combining
the gas detector with a radio interface, and an actuator
connected to a solenoid valve

In case of danger, the gas detector will emit an audible


signal; at the same time, the interface will transmit a signal
to the actuator that will order the solenoid valve to seal the
gas conduit
The operating principle also applies for protection against
flooding, by replacing the gas detector with a water sensor,
and using the actuator to control the water conduit

Transmitting interface
and gas detector

Siren or
flashing device

Radio actuator

Solenoid valve
Radio actuator

116 MY HOME

Radio system

WIRING DIAGRAM

Technical alarm transmitter

Actuator

Aux2 Aux1

Siren and/or flashing


device

Actuator

Solenoid valve

12 Vac/dc

MATERIAL
description

item

quantitY

AXOLUTE

LIVINGLIGHT

Methane gas detector (*)

HD4511V12
HC/HS4511/12

L/N/NT4511/12
L/N/NT4512/12

Technical alarm transmitter

H4586

LN4586

Actuator

H4587

LN4587

Note: complete the devices with support, 2 module cover plate and key covers,
depending on the desired finish (see the specific catalogue).
Note*: ensure that the detector is powered by a power supply with 12 Vac/dc
output voltage.

Radio system

MY HOME 117

118 MY HOME

Automation

CONTENTS

MY HOME Automation
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Automation

MY HOME 119

GEnErAl fEAturEs

introduction to the Automation system


the MY HOME Automation system

a programmable logic and are

if it is not possible to achieve a Bus

allows you to manage functions in

connected in parallel with a

system or if you want to expand a

a simultaneous and integrated way

2-conductor Bus cable for sending

pre-existing system without any

to date, these functions have been

information and with low voltage

masonry work, the Automation

performed with special and complex

(27V d c ) electric power there are

system can be expanded with special

electrical devices such as:

two types of devices in the system:

wire/radio interfaces and radio

lighting control

controls, connected only to the

control devices characterised by high


installation flexibility

Bus cable;

control for shutters and/or electric

actuators, connected both to

curtains, fans, exhausters, etc


Compared to the devices

the Bus cable and to the 230V

of a conventional electrical

a c power line for managing the

system, Automation devices

connected load

have an electronic circuit with

Wire system
Basic contact
interface

General
control

Touch control
(SOFT TOUCH)

Local Display

Traditional
device
Power supply

230 Vac
TV/SAT

DIN module
actuator
TV/SAT automazione

diffusione sonora

IPTV

DIN module
dimmer actuator

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

TV/SAT

automazione

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

Shutters

controllo carichi

energia

lan

IPTV

controllo carichi

energia

automazione
luci

diffusione
tvcc
sonora

antifurto
www

termoregolazione
irrigazione

IPTV

luci

Light

tvcc

www

irrigazione

Shutters

The MY HOME Automation system devices are IMQ certified, as they comply with the CEI EN 50428 standard non-automatic control devices for fixed electrical home
installations and similar uses.

120 MY HOME

Automation

TV/SAT

Shutter actuator
IPTV
control

TV/SAT

videocitofonia

controllo

When the Automation system

it is also possible to carry out special

control device or by using the touch

devices are configured properly, it

functions - which can hardly be

screen menu if the Automation

is possible to manage the load as

achieved with conventional electrical

system is integrated with the 2 wire

follows:

systems

sound system and temperature

Control for a single load (lamp,

these functions are called scenarios,

control system, the scenario can also

which consist of a set of simultaneous

set up a room with background music

controls used for arranging the room

and with the required temperature

shutters, etc );

Control for one or more load


groups (for example, only the

according to the users lifestyle

shutters on the first floor, north

An example of a scenario can be

side, etc );

represented by the simultaneous


activation of lights, shutters, etc ,

simultaneous management of
all loads (for example, general

which can be set by the user after

deactivation of all lamps in the

getting home by using one single

house and/or closing of all rolling


shutters)

radio/wire interfaces

Local control

radio system
Radio
control

SCS/ZigBee GATEWAY
radio interface

Touch Screen

Radio remote control

Basic
actuator

TV/SAT

TV/SAT

automazione

IPTV

TV/SAT

controllo carichi

energia

IPTV

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

IPTV

luci

tvcc

www

irrigazione

IPTV

luci

Light

tvcc

Shutter
actuator
control

www

irrigazione

Shutters

Automation

MY HOME 121

GEnErAl fEAturEs

Control devices
Control devices allow you to control

is separated from the mechanical

two types of keys and key covers can

the state of the actuators, thus

operating part so that one can

be used:

executing different functions: On,

choose the type, number and size of

1 function key cover, one or two

Off, timing, etc , which depend

the control pushbuttons

modules, to be used with the grey

on the functioning mode that has

the device can be modular, thus

control key;

been assigned to them through an

meeting the different installation

appropriate configuration

requirements and different functions

modules, to be used with the black

the electronic part of these devices

required by the user

control key;

2 function key cover, one or two

Upper pushbutton
Lower pushbutton
LED

Control key

Key cover
1 function
1 module

Key cover
2 functions
1 module

Control key

Key cover
1 function
2 modules

Control key

Key cover
2 functions
2 modules

The control with the single key cover can become integrated

The double key cover (tilting) can become integrated with a traditional exchanging contact.

with a traditional closing contact (pushbutton or switch).

NOTE: control keys are supplied with the device as standard.

122 MY HOME

Automation

lowered controls

speciAl control

these devices are consist of two

in addition to the standard functions

lowered flush mounted modules

it also enables performing all

this reduces depth, leaving more

the special functions, normally

room inside the box for the housing

performed by three different controls:

of cables, or for basic modularity

the special function control, the

devices

extended control, and the timer


control

lowered 2 Module control

the special control features 4

the single and double load control

pushbuttons and 2 green/red

control stAtus indicAtors

performs the same functions of the

bicolour lEDs (in the liVinGliGHt

All the controls feature lEDs, which

previously released item the only

and MtiX version) or 4 blue/red

indicate their status (enabled or

differences are:

bicolour lEDs (AXOlutE version)

disabled), and make them easier to


find in the dark the intensity of the

it has been lowered to reduce the

selected load status signalling lED

size inside the box;

it features two green/red bicolour

may be adjusted or turned off using

lEDs (in the liVinGliGHt and

the pushbutton on the control itself

MtiX version), or 4 blue/red


bicolour lEDs (AXOlutE version)

Lowered 2 module
control
Special control

Upper pushbutton

more space available

LED
Lower pushbutton

Automation

MY HOME 123

GEnErAl fEAturEs

Control devices:
controls/key covers - quick matching guide
aXolUTe

Key-coVers
WiThoUT silK-screen prinTing

1 ModUle
1 Function

liVinglighT
2 ModUles

2 Functions

1 Function

2 Functions

1 ModUle
1 Function

2 ModUles

2 Functions

1 Function

2 Functions

Controls for 3
independent loads

Controls for 2
independent loads

Special control

conTrols

H4651M2
L4651M2
AM5831M2

HD4915
HC4915
HS4915

HD4911 HC4911
HS4911

HD4915M2
HC4915/2
HS4915/2

HD4911M2
HC4911/2
HS4911/2

L4915N
N4915LN
NT4915N

L4911N
N4911N
NT4911N

L4915M2N
N4915M2N
NT4915M2LN

L4911M2N
N4911M2N
NT4911M2N

H4652/2
L4652/2
AM5832/2

HD4915
HC4915 HS4915

HD4911 HC4911
HS4911

HD4915M2
HC4915/2
HS4915/2

HD4911M2
HC4911/2
HS4911/2

L4915N
N4915LN
NT4915N

L4911N
N4911N
NT4911N

L4915M2N
N4915M2N
NT4915M2LN

L4911M2N
N4911M2N
NT4911M2N

H4652/3
L4652/3
AM5832/3

HD4915
HC4915 HS4915

HD4911 HC4911
HS4911

HD4915M2
HC4915/2
HS4915/2

HD4911M2
HC4911/2
HS4911/2

L4915N
N4915LN
NT4915N

L4911N
N4911N
NT4911N

L4915M2N
N4915M2N
NT4915M2LN

L4911M2N
N4911M2N
NT4911M2N

HD = WHITE, HC = TECH, HS = ANTHRACITE, L = ANTHRACITE, N = WHITE, NT = TECH

aXolUTe

Key-coVers
WiTh silK-screen prinTing*

1 ModUle
1 Function

2 Functions

liVinglighT

2 ModUles
1 Function

2 Functions

1 ModUle
1 Function

2 Functions

2 ModUles
1 Function

2 Functions

Controls for 3
independent loads

Controls for 2
independent loads

Special control

Controls

H4651M2
L4651M2
AM5831M2

HD4915...
HC4915...
HS4915...

HD4911...
HC4911...
HS4911...

HD4915M2...
HC4915/2...
HS4915/2...

HD4911M2...
HC4911/2...
HS4911/2...

L4915... N4915...
NT4915...

L4911... N4915...
NT4915...

L4915M2...
N4915M2...
NT4915M2...

L4911M2...
N4915M2...
NT4915M2...

H4652/2
L4652/2
AM5832/2

HD4915...
HC4915...
HS4915...

HD4911...
HC4911...
HS4911...

HD4915M2...
HC4915/2...
HS4915/2...

HD4911M2...
HC4911/2...
HS4911/2...

L4915... N4915...
NT4915...

L4911... N4915...
NT4915...

L4915M2...
N4915M2...
NT4915M2...

L4911M2...
N4915M2...
NT4915M2...

HD4915...
HC4915...
HS4915...

HD4911...
HC4911...
HS4911...

HD4915M2...
HC4915/2...
HS4915/2...

HD4911M2...
HC4911/2...
HS4911/2...

L4915... N4915...
NT4915...

L4911... N4915...
NT4915...

L4915M2...
N4915M2...
NT4915M2...

L4911M2...
N4915M2...
NT4915M2...

H4652/3
AM5832/3

L4652/3

HD = WHITE, HC = TECH, HS = ANTHRACITE, L = ANTHRACITE, N = WHITE, NT = TECH


* Complete the Key cover code with the letters corresponding to the required screen printing (see table). For the complete range of LIVINGLIGHT key covers see the Catalogue section.

124 MY HOME

Automation

selecTion of Key coVers WiTh silK- screen prinTing

MTiX
1 ModUle
1 Function

AM5911

2 Functions

AM5911

AM5911

AM5911

AM5911

2 ModUles

AM5911

1 Function

AM5911/2

AM5911/2

AM5911/2

aXolUTe
MaTiX

2 Functions

AM5911/2

AM5911/2

AM5911/2

MTiX

1 Function

AM5915...

AM5915...

AM5915...

2 Functions

AM5911...

AM5911...

AM5911...

2 ModUles
1 Function

AM5915/2...

AM5915/2...

AM5915/2...

AM5911/2...

AM5911/2...

silK-screen prinTing
descripTion

DD

DO NOT DISTURB

BN

STAIRCASE LIGHT

MR

MAKE THE ROOM

AA

OFF

AB

ON

AC

GEN

AD

ADN

DIMMER

BA

AN

LIGHT

BB

DN

BELL

BC

EXHAUST FAN
FN

KEY

BE

TREBLE CLEF

BF

NURSE

BG 1)

ROOM

BH

ALARMS
2 FUNCTIONS

2 Functions

AM5911/2...

silK-screen
prinTing
1 FUNCTION

BD

1 ModUle

liVinglighT

AF

AFN

ON/OFF/GEN

AG

AGN

ON/OFF

AH

AHN

UP/DOWN

AI

AIN

ON/OFF DIMMER

BA 1)

LIGHT

BC 1)

EXHAUST FAN

BE 1)

TREBLE CLEF

BF 2)

BFN
ADN

SOUND SYSTEM FUNCTION

+
-

+ UP
- DOWN

1) Key cover not available for the MTIX series


2) Key cover not available for the 1 and 2 module AXOLUTE series, and for the 2 module MTIX, LIVINGLIGHT series

Automation

MY HOME 125

GEnErAl fEAturEs

Control devices
2 module Soft Touch control

two or three Module


Axolute soft touch
controls
this device is capable of sending
actuation and adjustment commands
for the automation, sound system
and video door entry system
functions, with the simple touch of
the control

Axolute nighter, whice And


white glAss controls

Each zone corresponding to a key is

the nighter and Whice control

marked at the centre by a light blue

this effect gives the user the feeling

is a control where the traditional

lED

of activating the control using the

pushbuttons are replaced by

When the user moves a finger close,

appropriate configurator it is possible

capacitive sensors

its intensity increases sensibly, and

to select different intensity levels

Moving the finger close to a sensor is

remains so until the finger is moved

the same as pressing a pushbutton

away again

the device can therefore be used to


control single or group loads (e g
lights and shutters), sound system,
scenarios, and basic video door entry

Nighter 3 module control

system functions
its produced in the versions with 3
and 4 flush mounted modules, with 6
and 8 keys respectively

Whice 4 module control

126 MY HOME

Automation

infrAred controls
ir receiver and new ir remote

intended for 1 relay actuators for

control:

single loads, 2 relays actuators for

With the receiver, the manual control

double loads (shutter motor etc ), for

can be complemented or replaced by

the management of scenarios, as well

a remote control, using the infrared

as manage both sound systems and

remote control unit, 3529

video door entry systems

IR receiver

to the remote control pushbuttons,


it is possible to associate controls

IR remote control

MoVeMent And lighting


sensors
thanks to the new Green

Comfort and wellbeing

switch sensors and the lighting

the new sensors also allow

Management system sensors, it is

increasing the level of comfort

possible to manage, in a My Home

of the users, with the automatic

system, the lighting depending on

switching on of the light when

the presence of people, and the level

entering the room, and the

of natural light, ensuring:

preservation of the desired

Energy eciency

lighting level based on external

With the new sensors it is possible

conditions

to eliminate energy waste through


an intelligent management of
the lights, ensuring the necessary
lighting levels, at the right time
and in the right place the various
operating modes that can be set
with the configuration enable the
user to obtain dierent levels of
energy eciency

Automation

MY HOME 127

GEnErAl fEAturEs

Control devices
scenArio MAnAgeMent
systeMs

a certain level, and positioning some

scenario that can be set using

these devices can be used to create

shutters for watching the television,

the various integrated MY HOME

particular and advanced comfort

or reading a book, following the life

systems is the activation of a certain

situations called scenarios, for

style of the user

background music, the setting of the

example, by activating some lights to

Another example of an advanced

temperature and the light level of the


house, when entertaining friends

Multimedia Touch Screen

automazione

Lighting/movement sensor

diffusione sonora

antifurto

Scenario programmers MH200N

Touch Screen

TV/SAT

Nighter & Whice control


automazione

128 MY HOME

Automation

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

the described scenarios are managed

2 Din modules f420 scenario

MH200n scenario programmer for

from particular devices capable of

module for saving 16 scenarios

the creation and management of

saving in the memory all the Controls

for automation, sound system,

advanced scenarios, also linked

that define the scenario, and which

temperature control, and video

to time events, system status, and

the user can recall simultaneously by

door entry applications

more

pressing one single pushbutton


the devices capable of saving and
programming these functions are the
following:

automazione

TV/SAT

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

IPTV

lan

controllo carichi

Special control

energia

luci

tvcc

Video Station (*)

Scenario module F420

Soft Touch control

Local display

IPTV

controllo carichi

Protected scenario control with transponder (*)

energia

luci

tvcc

www

irrigazione

Scenario control

NOTE (*): at the moment these devices cannot activate scenarios managed by the MH200N scenario programmer.

Automation

MY HOME 129

GEnErAl fEAturEs

Control devices
control selection BAsed on the function to Be MAnAged
Type of conTrol

on/off lighTing and loads


aXolUTe

liVinglighT

lighTing WiTh adJUsTMenT (diMMer)


MTiX

aXolUTe

liVinglighT

MTiX

2/3 module single and double load


control (*)

H4652/2
H4652/3

L4652/2 L4652/3

AM5832/2 AM5832/3

H4652/2
H4652/3

L4652/2 L4652/3

AM5832/2 AM5832/3

2 module special control (*)

H4651M2

L4651M2

AM5831M2

H4651M2

L4651M2

AM5831M2

HD4563
HC4563
HS4563

L4563
N4563
NT4563

HD4654
HC4654
HS4654

L4654N
N4654N
NT4654N

AM5834

Knob control

Infrared receiver + IR remote control

HD4654
HC4654
HS4654

L4654N
N4654N
NT4654N

AM5834

Scenario control

2/3 module Soft Touch control

HD4653M2 HD4653M3
HC4653/2 HC4653/3
HS4653/2 HS4653/3

HD4653M2 HD4653M3
HC4653/2 HC4653/3
HS4653/2 HS4653/3

3/4 module Nighter and Whice controls

HD4657M3 HD4657M4
HC4657M3
HC4657M4
HS4657M3
HS4657M4

HD4657M3 HD4657M4
HC4657M3
HC4657M4
HS4657M3
HS4657M4

Touch Screen - Local display

H4890
HW4890

LN4890
LN4890A

AM5890

H4890
HW4890

LN4890
LN4890A

AM5890

Green Switch control and PIR sensor

HC4659
HC4658
HD4659
HD4658
HS4659
HS4658
H4648
H4649

L4659N
L4658N
N4659N
N4658N
NT4659N
NT4658N
LN4648
LN4649

AM5659
AM5658

HC4659
HC4658
HD4659
HD4658
HS4659
HS4658

L4659N
L4658N
N4659N
N4658N
NT4659N
NT4658N

AM5659
AM5658

Key card switches

* To be completed with key cover

130 MY HOME

Automation

MANAGEMENT OF AUTOMATISMS (E.G. CURTAINS AND SHUTTERS)


AXOLUTE

LIVINGLIGHT

SCENARIO MANAGEMENT USING F420 AND MH200N

MTIX

AXOLUTE

LIVINGLIGHT

MTIX

H4652/2
H4652/3

L4652/2
L4652/3

AM5832/2
AM5832/3

H4651M2

L4651M2

AM5831M2

H4651M2

L4651M2

AM5831M2

HD4654
HC4654
HS4654

L4654N
N4654N
NT4654N

AM5834

HD4654
HC4654
HS4654

L4654N
N4654N
NT4654N

AM5834

HD4680
HC4680
HS4680

L4680
N4680
NT4680

HD4653M2
HD4653M3
HC4653/2
HC4653/3
HS4653/2
HS4653/3
HD4657M3
HD4657M4
HC4657M3
HC4657M4
HS4657M3
HS4657M4
H4890
HW4890
HC4891
HD4891
HS4891

LN4890
LN4890A
L4891
N4891
NT4891

AM5890

HC4659
HC4658
HD4659
HD4658
HS4659
HS4658
H4648
H4649

L4659N
L4658N
N4659N
N4658N
NT4659N
NT4658N
LN4648
LN4649

AM5659
AM5658

HD4657M3
HD4657M4
HC4657M3
HC4657M4
HS4657M3
HS4657M4
H4890
HW4890

LN4890
LN4890A

AM5890

Automation

MY HOME 131

GEnErAl fEAturEs

Actuator devices
these devices execute direct controls

flush-Mounting ActuAtor

and control the connected load in the

with 2 Modules

same way as an electromechanical

they are available with 1 and 2

relay

interlocked relays: control for 1 single

for this reason, they must be

load (lamp or motor) or 1 double load

connected to the Bus cable using the

(motor for shutters)

removable terminals as well as to the

these actuators can be

230V a c supply line of the load

advantageously used as a control

there are different types of actuators:

point, as they are provided with

they can differ by shape, size,

control pushbuttons at the front side

installation features and by their

operated by key covers

Shutters up-down

TV/SAT
automazione

diffusione sonora

controlled power
the range includes:

Example of installation of a flush mounted


actuator (with 2 interlocked relays) for the
control of the shutters.

flush mounted two module


actuators;

Basic modularity actuators with


reduced profile;

Din module actuators

Upper pushbutton
Lower pushbutton
LED

Control key

Key cover
1 function
2 modules

NOTE: the control keys are supplied with the device as standard.

132 MY HOME

Automation

Control key

Key cover
2 functions
2 modules

antifur

BAsic Module ActuAtor


Basic actuators are characterized
by extremely compact dimensions:
width = 40 5 mm, height = 40 5 mm,

Example of installation in flush mounted box


Side-by-side
Basic items

Box

depth = 18 mm these dimensions


allow the actuators to be installed
in junction boxes or inside the load
to be controlled (for example in the
bowl of a chandelier, in the structure
of a lampstand, etc )
it is also possible to place the
control for two light points with
their Basic actuators in a 503E
box; the installation can otherwise
be achieved with a 504E box or
by finding new spaces for the

BUS

BUS

Input for
traditional
devices

Support
Control

positioning of the actuators

new flush Mounted


ActuAtor/control

Flush mounted
actuator/control

this device is fitted with 2


independent relays for the
management of:
- 2 loads or 2 groups of loads,
independent;
- 1 single load (rolling shutter motor)
the actuator may also be configured
for the management of the
connected load, whilst at the same
time operating as a control device
for the management of one or more
remote actuators, with operating
modes typical of control device item
H/l4652/2

Light
management
actuator key
cover

Remote actuator control


key cover

Automation

MY HOME 133

GEnErAl fEAturEs

Actuator devices:
controls/key covers quick matching guide
aXolUTe

Key-coVers WiThoUT
silK-screen prinTing

2 ModUles
1 Function

liVinglighT
1 ModUle

2 Functions

1 Function

2 Functions

2 ModUles
1 Function

1 ModUle

2 Functions

1 Function

2 Functions

Dimmer actuator

Actuator/control with
2 interlocked relays

Actuator with 1 relay

acTUaTors

H4671/1
L4671/1
AM5851/1

HD4915M2
HC4915/2
HS4915/2

HD4911M2
HC4911/2
HS4911/2

H4671M2
L4671M2
AM5851M2

L4915M2N
N4915M2N
NT4915M2LN

HD4911M2
HC4911/2
HS4911/2

H4678
L4678

HD4915M2
HC4915/2
HS4915/2

HD4915
HC4915
HS4915

L4911M2N
N4911M2N
NT4911M2N

HD4911 HC4911
HS4911

HD4911M2
HC4911/2
HS4911/2

L4911M2N
N4911M2N
NT4911M2N

L4915M2N
N4915M2N
NT4915M2LN

L4915N
N4915LN
NT4915N

L4911N
N4911N
NT4911N

L4911M2N
N4911M2N
NT4911M2N

HD = WHITE, HC = TECH, HS = ANTHRACITE, L = ANTHRACITE, N = WHITE, NT = TECH

aXolUTe

Key-coVers WiTh
silK-screen prinTing*

2 ModUles
1 Function

2 Functions

liVinglighT
1 ModUle

1 Function

2 Functions

2 ModUles
1 Function

2 Functions

1 ModUle
1 Function

2 Functions

Dimmer actuator

Actuator/control with
2 interlocked relays

Actuator with 1 relay

acTUaTors

H4671/1
L4671/1
AM5851/1

HD4915M2...
HC4915/2...
HS4915/2...

H4671/1
L4671/1
AM5851/1

H4678
L4678

HD4911M2...
HC4911/2...
HS4911/2...

HD4911M2...
HC4911/2...
HS4911/2...

HD4915M2...
HC4915/2...
HS4915/2...

L4915M2
L4915M2
NT4915M2

HD4915...
HC4915...
HS4915...

HD4911M2...
HC4911/2...
HS4911/2...

HD = WHITE, HC = TECH, HS = ANTHRACITE, L = ANTHRACITE, N = WHITE, NT = TECH


* Complete the Key cover code with the letters corresponding to the required screen printing (see table).

134 MY HOME

Automation

HD4911...
HC4911...
HS4911...

L4911M2
N4915M2
NT4915M2

L4911M2
N4915M2
NT4915M2

L4915M2
N4915M2
NT4915M2

L4911M2
N4915M2
NT4915M2

L4915... N4915...
NT4915...

L4911... N4915...
NT4915...

selecTion of Key coVers WiTh silK-screen prinTing

MTiX
2 ModUles
1 Function

AM5911/2

aXolUTe
MaTiX

1 ModUle

2 Functions

1 Function

AM5911

AM5911

silK-screen
prinTing

DD

DO NOT DISTURB

BN

STAIRCASE LIGHT

MR

MAKE THE ROOM

AA

OFF

AB

ON

AC

GEN

AD

ADN

DIMMER

BA

AN

LIGHT

BB

DN

BELL

BC
BD

MTiX
2 ModUles
1 Function

AM5915/2...

2 Functions

1 ModUle
1 Function

AM5915...

EXHAUST FAN
FN

KEY

BE

TREBLE CLEF

BF

NURSE

BG 1)

ROOM

BH

ALARMS
2 FUNCTIONS

2 Functions

AM5911/2...

AM5911/2...

silK-screen prinTing
descripTion

1 FUNCTION

2 Functions

AM5911/2

AM5911/2

liVinglighT

AM5911...

AF

AFN

ON/OFF/GEN

AG

AGN

ON/OFF

AH

AHN

UP DOWN

AI

AIN

ON/OFF DIMMER

BA 1)

LIGHT

BC 1)

EXHAUST FAN

BE 1)

TREBLE CLEF

BF 2)

BFN
ADN

SOUND SYSTEM FUNCTION

+
-

+ UP
- DOWN

1) Key cover not available for the MTIX series


2) Key cover not available for the 1 and 2 module AXOLUTE series, and for the 2 module MTIX, LIVINGLIGHT series

Automation

MY HOME 135

GEnErAl fEAturEs

Actuator devices
din Moduel ActuAtors
these devices are suitable for

cover so as to reduce the overall

centralised installations in boards

dimensions, thus allowing them to

and switchboards (2 Din modules)

be installed in raceways, junction

Available in versions with 1, 2 and 4

boxes, false ceilings, boxes for rolling

relays for controlling single loads or

shutters, etc

double loads (motor for shutters);

With centralised installations, for

these devices are also provided with

example, Din switchboards E215/ ,

load control keys for carrying out an

MultiBOX or with the innovative

operational test

installation solution MY HOME

these actuators are characterised by

flAtWAll*, the Din adapter and the

having the advantage of removing

front cover enable you to align the

the rear Din adapter and the front

profile of the adapter to that of the

Switchboard installation example

other Din modular devices


DIN actuator
for installation in switchboards
Load
connection
terminals

Load control
pushbutton

Example of installation
inside a junction box

Configurator
housing

Removable adapter
for installation on DIN rail
in switchboards

Removable
front cover

136 MY HOME

Automation

ActuAtors And diMMers

4 relay actuator in
DIN module BMSW1003

with power line supply


new actuators and dimmers, part
of the lighting Management offer
range, which, thanks to the power
supply from the power line, provide

Multi load dimmer actuator in


DIN module with one output F416U1

control of the load connected even


when no power is received from the
Bus in this case, control is ensured
using the keys found on the device
itself in this case, control is ensured
using the keys found on the device
itself; they also absorb an extremely
limited amount of current from
the power supply of the Bus, and

new ActuAtors

therefore only have a marginal

some devices of the Energy

the exception of the management

impact on the maximum number of

Management offer may also be used

of the shutters the connection with

devices that may be installed on the

in the automation system

the power line enables zero crossing,

Bus itself

DIN actuators:

which makes the devices compatible

the catalogue offers actuators in

two actuator devices capable

with the new energy saving lamps

the 1, 2, and 4 relay versions with

of performing both energy

(compact fluorescent and lED)

independent outputs for lighting

management and automation

Flush mounted actuator:

devices only;

functions; one in the basic version

Actuator conceived for installation

the power supply enables zero

and one fitted with an integrated

in liVinGliGHt and AXOlutE flush

crossing and allows them to

current sensor for the measurement

mounted supports, intended for

be particularly suitable for the

of the consumption of the controlled

the automation and/or energy

management of the new energy

load (instantaneous consumption

management functions

saving lamps, such as compact

and 2 energy totalizers that can be

fluorescent lamps and lED lamps

reset independently)

there are also dimmers with 0/10

Configured in automation mode, they

V output, and two new multi load

enable performing all the operations

dimmers with 1 or 2 outputs, which

available on the Control devices, with

can control any type of load (with the


exception of compact fluorescent

DIN actuator

Flush mounted
actuator

and lED lamps), and which enable


the user to install the dimmer on the
system, postponing the selection of
the lamp to a later date

Automation

MY HOME 137

GEnErAl fEAturEs

Actuator devices
ActuAtor selection BAsed on the function to Be MAnAged
on/off lighTing and loads
Type of acTUaTor
aXolUTe

liVinglighT

Flush mounted 2 module (*) 1 relay actuator

H4671/1

L4671/1

Flush mounted, 2 relays, 2 MODULES (*), actuator/control

H4671M2

L4671M2

Flush mounted 2 MODULE (*) dimmer actuator

Basic actuator

3475

Basic Actuator/Control

3476

1, 2, 4 relay DIN actuators

F411/1N (1 relay)
F411/2 (2 independent relays)
F411/4 (4 independent relays with one common clamp)
F411/1NC
F411/2NC
BMSW1001
BMSW1002
BMSW1003

DIN Dimmer actuators

* To be completed with key cover

138 MY HOME

Automation

MTiX
AM5851/1

AM5851M2

LIGHTING WITH ADJUSTMENT (DIMMER)

AXOLUTE

LIVINGLIGHT

MANAGEMENT OF AUTOMATISMS (E.G. CURTAINS AND SHUTTERS)

MTIX

AXOLUTE

H4671M2

H4678

LIVINGLIGHT

LN4671M2

MTIX

AM5851M2

L4678

F411/1N (1 relay - e.g.to control a solenoid valve) -)


F411/2 (2 relays - ex. for 230 Vac motors -)
F411/4 (4 independent relays with one common clamp)

F413N (for electronic ballasts and LED lamps)


F414 (for 60 - 1000 VA resistive loads and ferromagnetic transformers)
F415 (for 60 - 400 VA Electronic transformers)
F416U1
F417U2
BMDI1001

Automation

MY HOME 139

General features

Actuator devices:
selection of the actuators depending on the type of load
The table allows identification of the actuator device depending on what it is to be used for, the electrical features of the load
to be controlled and the installation features.
Warning: Unless otherwise specified in the instruction leaflet, a 10 A thermal magnetic protection must be fitted on the power line to the actuators.
Table of the loads
Actuators

Modules

Power supply
of the device

Controllable loads

Incandescent and halogen


lamps

LED lamps

Linear fluorescent Compact


lamps 1)
fluorescent
lamps
-

Electronic
transformers 3)

Ferromagnetic
transformers 2) 3)

Reducer motor for


shutters 4)

2 A cos 0.5
460 VA @ 230 Vac
220 VA @ 110 Vac

3475
3476

Basic

BUS SCS

2A
460 W @ 230 Vac
220 W @ 110 Vac

40 W @ 230 Vac
20 W @ 110 Vac
1 lamp maximum

F411/1N

2 DIN

BUS SCS

10 A
2300 W @ 230 Vac
1100 W @ 110 Vac

500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A


250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac

500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A


4 A cos 0.5
250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac 920 VA @ 230 Vac
10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac 440 VA @ 110 Vac

F411/2

2 DIN

BUS SCS

6A
1380 W @ 230 Vac
660 W @ 110 Vac

250 W @ 230 Vac 1 A


120 W @ 110 Vac 230 W @ 230 Vac
4 lamps maximum 110 W @ 230 Vac

250 W @ 230 Vac 1 A


2 A cos 0.5
120 W @ 110 Vac 230 W @ 230 Vac 460 VA @ 230 Vac
4 lamps maximum 110 W @ 230 Vac 220 VA @ 110 Vac

2A
460 W @ 230 Vac
220 W @ 110 Vac

F411/4

2 DIN

BUS SCS

2A
460 W @ 230 Vac
220 W @ 110 Vac

70 W @ 230 Vac
0.3 A
35 W @ 110 Vac
70 W @ 230 Vac
2 lamps maximum 35 W @ 110 Vac

70 W @ 230 Vac 0.3 A


35 W @ 110 Vac 70 W @ 230 Vac
2 lamps maximum 35 W @ 110 Vac

2 A cos 0.5
460 VA @ 230 Vac
220 VA @ 110 Vac

2A
460 W @ 230 Vac
220 W @ 110 Vac

F413N

2 DIN

BUS SCS

F414

4 DIN

BUS SCS

F415

4 DIN

BUS SCS

H/L4671/1
AM5851/1

2 flush BUS SCS


mounting

40 W @ 230 Vac 20 W @ 110 Vac 1 lamp maximum

2A
460 W @ 230 Vac 5) 220 W @ 110 Vac 5)
MAX. 10 ballast
type T5, T8, compact
or driver for LED

0.25 4.3A
60 1000 W @ 230 Vac - 50 Hz 0.25 3.5A
60 800 W @ 230 Vac - 60 Hz

0.25 4.3A
60 1000 VA @ 230 Vac - 50 Hz 0.25 3.5A
60 800 VA @ 230 Vac - 60 Hz

0.25 1.7A
60 400 VA
@ 230 Vac - 50 Hz

6A
1380 W @ 230 Vac
660 W @ 110 Vac

150 W @ 230 Vac 0.65 A


70 W @ 110 Vac
150 W @ 230 Vac
3 lamps maximum 70 W @ 110 Vac

150 W @ 230 Vac 0.65 A


2 A cos 0.5
70 W @ 110 Vac 150 W @ 230 Vac 460 VA @ 230 Vac
3 lamps maximum 70 W @ 110 Vac 220 VA @ 110 Vac

H/LN4671M2 2 flush BUS SCS


AM5851M2 mounting

2A
460 W @ 230 Vac
220 W @ 110 Vac

70 W @ 230 Vac
0.3 A
35 W @ 110 Vac
70 W @ 230 Vac
2 lamps maximum 35 W @ 110 Vac

70 W @ 230 Vac 0.3 A


35 W @ 110 Vac 70 W @ 230 Vac
2 lamps maximum 35 W @ 110 Vac

2A
460 W @ 230 Vac
220 W @ 110 Vac

F411/1NC

2 DIN

BUS SCS

10 A
2300 W @ 230 Vac
1100 W @ 110 Vac

500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A


250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac

500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A


4 A cos 0.5
250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac 920 VA @ 230 Vac
10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac 440 VA @ 110 Vac

F411/2NC

2 DIN

BUS SCS

6A
1380 W @ 230 Vac
660 W @ 110 Vac

H/L4678

2 flush BUS SCS


mounting

140 MY HOME

0.25 1.30 A
60 300 W @ 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz -

Automation

0.65 A
150 W @ 230 Vac
70 W @ 110 Vac

2 A cos 0.5
460 VA @ 230 Vac
220 VA @ 110 Vac

0.65 A
1 A cos 0.5
150 W @ 230 Vac 230 VA @ 230 Vac
70 W @ 110 Vac 110 Vac @ 110 Vac
0.25 1.3 A
60300 VA @ 230 Vac50/60 Hz

Table of the loads


Actuators Modules

Power supply of the


device

Controllable loads

Incandescent and halogen


lamps

LED lamps

Linear fluorescent
lamps 1)

Compact
fluorescent
lamps

Electronic
transformers 3)

Ferromagnetic
transformers 2) 3)

Reducer motor
for shutters 4)

F522

1 DIN

BUS SCS

10 A
2300 W @ 230 Vac
1100 W @ 110 Vac

500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A


250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac

500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A


250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac

4 A cos 0.5
920 VA @ 230 Vac
440 VA @ 110 Vac

F523

1 DIN

BUS SCS

10 A
2300 W @ 230 Vac
1100 W @ 110 Vac

500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A


250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac

500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A


250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac

4 A cos 0.5
920 VA @ 230 Vac
440 VA @ 110 Vac

HD/HC/
HS/L/N/
NT4672N

2 flush BUS SCS


mounting

10 A
2300 W @ 230 Vac
1100 W @ 110 Vac

500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A


250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac

500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A


250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac

4 A cos 0,5
920 VA @ 230 Vac
440 VA @ 110 Vac

F416U1

6 DIN

100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 4.3 A


40 1000 W @ 230 Vac
40 500 W @ 110 Vac

4.3 A
4.3 A
40 1000 W @ 230 Vac 40 1000 VA @ 230 Vac 40 500W@110Vac 40 500 VA @ 110 Vac

F417U2

6 DIN

100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 1.7 A


40 400 W @ 230 Vac
40 200 W @ 110 Vac

1.7 A
1.7 A
40 400 W @ 230 Vac 40 400 W @ 230 Vac 40 200 W @ 110 Vac 20 200 W @ 110 Vac

BMDI1001 6 DIN

100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 4.3 A


1000 VA @ 230 Vac
500 VA @ 110 Vac

BMSW1001 4 DIN

100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 16 A


3680 W @ 230 Vac
1760 W @ 110 Vac

BMSW1002 4 DIN

BMSW1003 6 DIN

4.3 A
1000 VA @ 230 Vac
500 VA @ 110 Vac

4.3 A
1000 VA @ 230 Vac 500 VA @ 110 Vac

2.1 A
4.3 A
5A
16 A
500 VA @ 230 Vac 10x(2x36 W) @ 230 Vac 1150 VA @ 230 Vac 3680 VA @ 230 Vac
250 VA @ 110 Vac 5x(2x36 W) @ 110 Vac 550 VA @ 110 Vac 1760 VA @ 110 Vac

16 A
3680 VA @ 230 Vac
1760 VA @ 110 Vac

100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 16 A


3680 W @ 230 Vac
1760 W @ 110 Vac

2.1 A
4.3 A
5A
16 A
500 VA @ 230 Vac 10x(2x36 W) @ 230 Vac 1150 VA @ 230 Vac 3680 VA @ 230 Vac
250 VA @ 110 Vac 5x(2x36 W) @ 110 Vac 550 VA @ 110 Vac 1760 VA @ 110 Vac

16 A
3680 VA @ 230 Vac
1760 VA @ 110 Vac

100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 16 A


3680 W @ 230 Vac
1760 W @ 110 Vac

2.1 A
4.3 A
5A
16 A
500 VA @ 230 Vac 10x(2x36 W) @ 230 Vac 1150 VA @ 230 Vac 3680 VA @ 230 Vac
250 VA @ 110 Vac 5x(2x36 W) @ 110 Vac 550 VA @ 110 Vac 1760 VA @ 110 Vac

16 A
3680 VA @ 230 Vac
1760 VA @ 110 Vac

Notes:
1) fluorescent lamps with corrected power factor, energy saving lamps, discharge lamps.
2) it is necessary to consider the efficiency of the transformer in order to calculate the effective power of the actuator load. For instance, if you connect a dimmer to a 100VA
ferromagnetic transformer with efficiency 0.8, the effective power of the load will be 125VA.
3) the transformer must be loaded at its rated power and, in any case, never below 90% of that power. It is recommended to use one transformer rather than several transformers in
parallel. For instance, it is preferred to use one 250VA transformer with 5 50W spotlights connected rather than 5 50VA transformers in parallel, each with a 50W spotlight.
4) the
symbol shown of the actuators refers to a reducer motor for shutters.
5) only compatible with the selected lamps with Ballast 1/10 V.

Automation

MY HOME 141

GEnErAl fEAturEs

interfaces
contAct interfAce in din

contAct interfAce in BAsic

Module

Module

With this device it is possible to

the essential feature of this

connect traditional devices to the Bus,

device, due to the reduced overall

such as switches and pushbuttons,

dimensions, is the rear-device

thus extending the use of the Bus to

installation mode As a result, it is

traditional pre-existing systems

possible to install the interface in a

it is also possible to interface

503E box right behind the traditional

thermostats, control devices, humidity

devices (e g switch, pushbutton) or

detectors, wind detectors etc

behind electronic shallow devices


(e g controls, detectors)
it is also possible to interface
thermostats, humidity detectors,
wind detectors etc this installation
solution simplifies the conversion of
traditional electric systems into home

DIN module contact


interface

automation systems, as it makes it


possible to keep the existing flush
mounted boxes, without the need for
masonry work

Basic module
contact interface

External devices

142 MY HOME

Automation

Prestige switch
(reuse of historical devices)

Wire Automation extension


with ZigBee radio devices
the wired automation system

controlling the users from positions

moving walls and with false ceiling

described in the previous pages

that cannot be reached by the Bus

mounted Bus actuators, the radio

can be expanded at any time by

wiring the wireless connection

controls are the ideal solution for

extending the wiring or adding new

among these devices and the wired

installing flexible light points, easy to

control devices

ones is ensured by a special radio

reposition in case of modification in

However, this is not always easy

interface connected to the Bus

the arrangement of the offices, or the

to do; in some buildings, either

the integration between the two

furniture

historic and/or valuable buildings,

technologies, radio and wired,

for more information and for the

the extension of the system entails

enables therefore the installer to

range of control devices see the

unavoidable and costly interventions

select each time the best solution

specific radio system chapter of this

on the building work

that meets the requirements of

guide

these problems can be easily

the customer, both in terms of

resolved using the radio controls

functionality, and in relation to the

possiBle functions

included in the ZigBee radio system

homes

shutter and rolling shutter

range; being battery powered and

this solution can also be extended,

independent from the system wiring,

with some advantages, to new

lighting

these devices give the possibility of

buildings; for example in offices with

scenario management

Light
control

automation

Radio control for


the management
of lights

Shutter
control

Power supply

SCS/Zigbee
gateway
TV/SAT

230 Vac

TV/SAT
Light
actuator

TV/SAT

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

automazione

energia

IPTV

Shutter
actuator

IPTV

TV/SAT

termoregolazione

IPTV

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

www

irrigazione

IPTV

luci

Lights

tvcc

www

irrigazione

Radio Remote control


for the management
of scenarios

Shutters

Automation

MY HOME 143

Configuration

General concepts
This chapter describes the general

Actuator address -

concepts for the physical and

Physical Configuration

virtual configuration of the MY

The address of each actuator is

positions (G1, G2 and G3) as they can

HOME automation devices. For

defined uniquely by assigning the

belong to several different groups at

each item, the Technical Sheets

numeric configurators 1 to 9 in

the same time.

chapter describes the functions that

positions A (Room) and PL (Light

can be realised depending on the

Point inside the Room).

Example: The actuator configured with A = 1, PL = 3

configurators used.

A maximum of 9 addresses can be

and G = 4 is device 3 of room 1 belonging to group 4.

defined for each room; a maximum of

Actuators:

9 rooms can be defined in a system.

address and type of

The group of belonging is defined by

control

inserting a third numeric configurator

To understand the addressing logical

in the housing identified with G

it is useful to define some terms

(Group).

which will occur frequently in this

Some actuators have several G

guide.

Physical Configuration

Room (A)
Set of devices belonging to a logical
area (in a home, for example, the

ROOM 9

living room, the bedroom, etc.).


Light Point (PL)
Numeric identification of the single
actuators inside the Room.

A =9
PL = 1

A =9
PL = 2

A =9
PL = 1

A =9
PL = 2

A =9
PL = 2

A =9
PL = 9

Group (G)
ROOM...

Set of devices also belonging to


different rooms but which must be
controlled at the same time (e.g. the
rolling shutters of the North side of
the home, the lighting of the day

ROOM 2
19

ROOM 1
A =1
PL = 1

A =1
PL = 1

A =1
PL = 2

A =1
PL = 9

A =1
PL = 2

A =0
PL = 9

GROUP 1

19

A = GR
PL = 1

144 MY HOME

Automation

19

GROUP 9

area, etc.).
A =1
PL = 1

A =9
PL = 9

Actuator address -

logical extension

Virtual configuration

For special applications such as

A maximum of 16 addresses can be

extended systems in houses or

defined for each room(PL=0-15);

service/industrial rooms, where the

a maximum of 16 rooms can be

use of many devices may exceed

defined in a system. (A=0 -10).

the configuration limits mentioned


above, interface F422 can be used,
configured in the logical expansion
mode.
This mode can make an extended
system made up of several individual
systems (see General rules for
installation section).

Virtual configuration
ROOM 10
A = 10
PL = 0

A = 10
PL = 1

A = 10
PL = 0

A = 10
PL = 1

A = 10
PL = 1

A = 10
PL = 15

A = 10
PL = 15

ROOM ...
ROOM 1

A =0
PL = 1

A =0
PL = 1

A =0
PL = 1

A =0
PL = 15

A =0
PL = 2

A =0
PL = 15

GROUP 1

1 15

A =0
PL = 2

GROUP 255

0 15

ROOM 0

A = GR
PL = 1

1 255

Automation

MY HOME 145

COnfiGurAtiOn

General concepts
controls: Address And type
of control
the control devices also have

configurators with graphics which

positions A and Pl to define the

enable the device to send the control

addresses of the devices which

with the various ways listed in the

receive the control (actuators)

table below

for these positions there are numeric

Mode for addressing the devices using the Physical Configuration


Type of conTrol

Mode for addressing the devices using the Virtual Configuration


Type of conTrol

conTrol deVice

conTrol deVice

configurator socket

value of the configurator

Configurable address

Configuration

Point-point

A
PL

1-9
1-9

Point-point

A
PL

0-10
0-15

Room

A
PL

AMB
1-9

Room

A
PL

AMB
0-10

Group

A
PL

GR
1-9

Group

A
PL

GR
1-255

General

A
PL

GEN
-

General

A
PL

GEN
-

146 MY HOME

Automation

exAMples of configurAtion
Point-point control

Group control

if the no 3 control is configured with

if the no 7 control is configured

identified with G = 1 (thus belonging

A = 2 and Pl = 3, this device sends

with A = Gr and Pl = 1, this device

to group 1)

the control to the actuator identified

sends the control to the actuator

with A = 2 and Pl = 3
poinT-poinT
conTrol
2

A = 1
PL = 2

A = 1
PL = 1

groUp conTrols

rooM
conTrols

A = 1
PL = 3

A = 2
PL = 1

A = AMB
PL = 1

A = AMB
PL = 2

general
conTrols

A = GR
PL = 1

A = GR
PL = 2

A = GEN
PL =

BUS
actuators

= Point-point control

A = 1
PL = 1
G = 1

A = 1
PL = 2
G = 1

A = 1
PL = 3
G = 2

A = 2
PL = 1
G = 2

A = 2
PL = 2
G = 1

A = 2
PL = 3
G = 1

= Group control

Automation

MY HOME 147

COnfiGurAtiOn

Addressing levels
for a better understanding of the

Example: control for a single load (lamp, fan, rolling shutter, etc.)

concepts described in the previous

rooM 1

page, the four addressing modes are

rooM 2

described below
the control devices (senders) can
activate the actuators (receivers) with
A = 1
PL = 1

the following modes

A = 1
PL = 2

A = 1
PL = 3

A = 2
PL = 1

A = 2
PL = 2

A = 2
PL = 3

A = 2
PL = 1

A = 2
PL = 2

A = 2
PL = 3

point-point control
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
Direct control
to one actuator
IPTV

TV/SATIPTV

IPTV

TV/SAT

TV/SAT
IPTV

IPTV

identified by a room number and a


light point number

A = 1
PL = 1

A = 1
PL = 2

A = 1
PL = 3

Control device:

A = n*

Pl = n*

Actuator:

A = n*

Pl = n*

rooM control
Direct control to all the actuators

Example: control for all the lamps of a room

identified by the same room number


rooM 1

rooM 2

A = 1
PL = 1

A = 1
PL = 2

A = 1
PL = 3

A = 2
PL = 1

A = 2
PL = 2

A = 2
PL = 3

A = 1
PL = 1

A = 1
PL = 2

A = 1
PL = 3

A = 2
PL = 1

A = 2
PL = 2

A = 2
PL = 3

A = AMB
PL = 1

n* = any numeric configurator from 1 to 9

148 MY HOME

Automation

A = AMB
PL = 2

Control device:

A = AMB Pl = n*

Actuator:

A = n*

Pl = n*

group control
Direct control to all the actuators
which perform particular functions
even if they belong to different
rooms and are identified by the same
group number
Example: control of all the lamps of a floor, on the North side of the building

rooM 1

rooM 2

A = GR
PL = 1
A = 1
PL = 1

A = 1
PL = 2

A = 1
PL = 3

A = 2
PL = 1

A = 2
PL = 2

A = 2
PL = 3

A =1
PL = 1
G =1

A =1
PL = 2
G =1

A =1
PL = 3
G =2

A =2
PL = 1
G =2

A =2
PL = 2
G =1

A =2
PL = 3
G =1

A = GR
PL = 2

A = AMB
PL = 1

Control device:

A = Gr

Pl = n*

Actuator:

A = n*

Pl = n*

A = AMB
PL = 2

G = n*

Automation

MY HOME 149

COnfiGurAtiOn

Addressing levels
generAl control
Direct control to all the system actuators
Example: control of all the lamps of the building
rooM 1

A = 1
PL = 1

rooM 2

A = 1
PL = 2

A = 1
PL = 3

A = 2
PL = 1

A = 2
PL = 2

A = 2
PL = 3

A = GR
PL = 1

A = GR
PL = 2

A =1
PL = 1
G =1

A =1
PL = 2
G =1

A =1
PL = 3
G =2

A =2
PL = 1
G =2

A =2
PL = 2
G =1

A = GEN
PL = -

A = AMB
PL = 1

Control device:

A = GEn Pl = /

Actuator:

A = n*

150 MY HOME

Automation

Pl = n*

A = AMB
PL = 2

G = n*

n* = any numeric configurator from 1 to 9

A =2
PL = 3
G =1

Main operating modes


The devices in the automation system

The function performed, i.e. what the

are flush mounted). The table below

can perform different functions, such

device must do, is defined by putting

lists the various operating modes as a

as setting the brightness, switching

configurators into the housings

function of the configurator and type

lamps on/off or opening/closing

marked with M of the control devices

of key cover used in the device.

rolling shutters.

and completing the devices with


keys and key covers (if the devices

Control TABLE
Key covers

Configurator value (M)

Function performed

1 function
M

Cyclical ON-OFF control


Repeatedly pressing the relay actuators device key cover, ON and OFF controls will be sent in a cyclical way.
M
M
With dimmer actuators, keep the pushbutton pressed to adjust the load power.

no configurator
M

ON

M
SPE

14

M
M
M

14

M
SPE

18
18

14

M
SPE

18
18

14

M
M
SPE

configurator ON

OFF

18
OFF

ON

18

SLA

O/I
M
configurator
OFF

OFF

O/I

PUL

M
M
configurator
PUL
M
O/I

SLA
SLA
18

PUL

M
M

SLA

PUL

PUL

2 FUNCTIONS

Bistable controlMwith hold (UP-DOWN for rolling shutters)


M
UL
Pressing the key cover (lower
or Pupper)
sends the UP-DOWN control to the rolling shutter motor. After the control has been sent, press the lower or upper key cover again, to stop the rolling shutter in the required position.

M
configurator
ON

M
SPE

OFF

M
SPE

14

14

18
18

Monostable control (UP-DOWN for rolling shutters)


The device sends an UP-DOWN control for a rolling shutter motor as long as the lower or upper key cover is
pressed. When the key cover is released, the motor STOPS.

configurator
ON

M
M
M

SLA
M
Monostable ON-OFF control
(pushbutton)
This mode can perform an ON/OFF control similar to the control of a traditional point-point pushbutton, thus
intended just for one address.

O/I

18

18
OFF control
18
18
When pressing the corresponding
key cover, the device sends the OFF control.
M

OFF

M
O/I

OFF

ON

18
ON14control
M
18
SPE
When pressing the corresponding
key
cover, the device sends the ON control.
M
M

ON

18
18
ON

18

18
18

ON/OFF control
Used with relayMactuators, when the upper key cover is pressed the device sends an ON control; when the lower
key cover is pressed the device sends an OFF control.With dimmer actuators, pressing the upper and lower key
cover adjusts the load power.
SLA

OFF

O/I

18

configurator O/I

PUL

M
M

O/I

SLA

Automation

MY HOME 151

Configuration

Main operating modes


Cen operating mode

with the CEN configurator in the M

AM5831M2, by pressing the T1

This particular mode is used to

position. The key (upper or lower) of

(upper) and T2 (lower) pushbuttons.

manage scenario programmer

the control device and the scenario

For the correspondence between

devices MH200N.

to be activated are linked through

the control keys and the scenarios to

As described in the pages of this

the TiMH200 program written to

activate see the table:

guide, the device can manage

create the scenarios and then saving

even complex scenarios activated

them in the MH200N device.

automatically after events in the

For example, two independent

system or manually by pressing a

scenarios can be activated using

key of a control device configured

the special control H/L4651M2,

Type of control
Special control
H/L4651M2 and AM5831M2

Configuration
A=09; PL=09; M=CEN; LIV1/AUX=0; LIV2=0; SPE=0; I=0

Basic control for 2 independent loads


H/L4652/2 and AM5832/2

A1=09; PL1=09; M1=CEN; A2=0; PL2=0; M2=0

Identification of scenario activation keys

T1

T2
T1

T2

Basic control for 3 independent loads


H/L4652/3 and AM5832/3

A1=09; PL1=09; M1=CEN; A2=0; PL2=0; M2=CEN

T1 T2

A1=09; PL1=09; A2=0; PL2=0; A3=0; PL3=0; M=CEN

T3 T4
T1 T2 T3

T4 T5 T6
M

Main actuator operating modes


The actuators can be configured for the following operating modes:
M

14

14

ON

M
SPE
M
SPE

18
18
18
18

ACTUATOR TABLE

Configurator value (M)

M
M
M

14

Function performed

M
SPE

18
18

18
18

Special functions
This mode can perform special functions (OFF delayed, STOP timed) on the basis of the type of actuator used (single or double) and the numeric
configurator inserted.

configurator 14

OFF

SLA

SLA

18

Slave
This mode can perform a control with two or more actuators. In practice the actuators with the SLA (Slave) configurator repeat the function
performed by another actuator which acts as Master.
The actuators must have the same addresses and must be of the same type (either all light actuators or all rolling shutter actuators).

configurator SLA
O/I

PUL

PUL

SLA

PUL
The device does not operate with the Room and General controls.

configurator PUL
M

152 MY HOME

PUL

Automation

Examples of configuration
the drawing shows a system for

Group control

receiving the control (one only, a

the management of three lamps

Group control 7 marked with A=Gr

group or several room actuators) and

and three shutters Each actuator is

and Pl=1, controls actuators 1 and 2

from the configurators in position

identified by three numbers: room

marked with G=1

M to define the function (On/Off or

number (A), device progressive

General control

On/DOWn)

number (Pl for light actuators and

the devices identified A=GEn and

Pl1 and Pl2 for shutter actuators)

Pl= - (no configurator) send a general

control operAting Mode

and Group (G) of belonging

control to all the actuators, for the

the configurator inserted in position

defining the Addresses

lights and for the shutters, in the

M of each control device identifies

Point-point control

system

the operating mode


the O/i configurator specifies a lamp

Control 1 (A = 1, Pl = 1) controls
actuators 1 (A = 1, Pl = 1 and G = 1)

NOTE: The actuators which manage the shutters,

switching on control which is given

in the same way control 2 (A = 1,

unlike those for the lights, are configured in the same

by pressing the upper key cover (On)

Pl = 2) controls actuator 2 (A = 1,

way in the two positions PL1 and PL2.

and the lower key cover (Off)

Room control

the control devices are instead

the configurators

room control 8 (A=AMB, Pl=2)

distinguished from the configurators

position M instead specify a control

controls actuators 4 and 5 marked

in positions A and Pl which specify

to manage the rolling shutters

with A=2

the addresses of the actuators

intended for actuators 4, 5 and 6

Pl = 2 and G = 1) etc

poinT-poinT
conTrol

groUp
rooM
conTrols conTrols

A =1
PL = 1
M = O/I

A =1
PL = 2
M = O/I

A =1
PL = 3
M = O/I

A =2
PL = 1
M = M

A =2
PL = 2
M = M

A =3
PL = 1
M = M

and

M in

general
conTrols

A = GR
PL = 1
M = O/I

A = AMB
PL = 2
M = M

A = GEN
PL =
M = O/I

10

A = GEN
PL =
M = M

BUS

actuators

A = 1
PL = 1
G = 1

A = 1
PL = 2
G = 1

A = 1
PL = 3
G = 2

A = 2
PL = 1
G = 1

A = 2
PL = 2
G = 2

A = 3
PL = 1
G = 1

Automation

MY HOME 153

GEnErAl rulEs fOr instAllAtiOn

Maximum distances and absorptions


this chapter outlines the details for

for the purpose of the above

availability of current according to

ensuring a correct realisation of a MY

calculations, refer to the tECHniCAl

the length of the cable

HOME automation system:

DAtA shown in the technical sheets

When setting up, please observe the

selv classification

chapter

following rules:

Maximum distances and

When calculating the absorptions,


it is also necessary to consider the

absorptions

Maximum number of devices


which can be configured

selV clAssificAtion
the automation system is sElV

1 The connection between the power supply and the furthest away device must not be longer than 250m.
Power supply

Device

Junction box

(safety Extra low Voltage) classified


due to the fact that it is powered
using double safety insulation
independent devices, not connected
to the earth, and with maximum
operating voltage of 27 Vdc, nonundulated, in accordance with CEi En
600065 it is therefore comparable
to a sElV source as described in
point 411 125 of CEi 64-8-4 the
conformity to sElV classification
is only guaranteed subject to full
compliance with current installation
regulations, and with the general
rules for installation for each single

2 The total length of the connections must not be more than 500 metres (extended cable).

device and cable making up the


system recommended by Bticino

MAxiMuM distAnces of the


Bus cABle And ABsorptions
the maximum number of devices
that can be connected to the Bus
depends on their total absorption
and on the distance between the
connection point and the power
supply the power supply unit can
deliver up to 1200 mA or 600 mA;
ihence, the maximum number of
devices will be determined by the
sum of the absorptions of the single
devices you need to install

154 MY HOME

Automation

Power supply

Device

Junction box

3 For optimum division of the currents on the BUS line power supply should be positioned in the middle.

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

PRI

E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

E46ADCN

SCS

E49
1
1

2
2

C1

3
4

C2

C3

C4

2
2

C1

3
4

C2

C3

C4

With Power supply E46ADCn:

With Power supply E49:

= 250 m max

= 250 m max

= 250 m max

= 250 m max

A + B = 500 m
Maximum current supplied from
the power supply 1200 mA

A + B = 500 m
Maximum current supplied from
the power supply 600 mA

NOTE: If a UTP5 cable is used instead of a BUS L4669 cable, distances must halved.

Automation

MY HOME 155

GEnErAl rulEs fOr instAllAtiOn

Maximum distances and absorptions


MAxiMuM distAnces for the
connection of ActuAtors

Example of connection with F411/1N

depending on the loAd

in order to manage some types of

loads correctly, it is necessary to


observe the installation specifications
for all actuators used

fluorescent lamps: the length of


the connecting cable between the

F411/1N

L N
MIN 3 m

C1

actuator and the load must not


be less than 3m Do not connect
more than 15 actuators controlling
this type of lamp on the same line

Metallic iodide and sodium-

Warning: Refer to the technical data shown on the technical sheets for each actuator

vapor lamps: in addition to


the indications given for the
fluorescent lamps, please pay
attention to the operating
instructions of these lamps (for
example, avoid switching on when
hot), do not connect dimmers to
the same line of these lamps, keep
the bus line and the power line of
these lamps separated from each
other (at least 1 metre)

three-phase networks: when using


three-phase networks, check the
balance of the phases as well as

Maximum distances for connecting the contact interface


50 m

the quality of the network


non-compliance of the above
regulations may affect proper

A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE

operation of the devices


PL1

MAxiMuM distAnce for


interfAce
interface (basic or Din module) and
the traditional type device must not
exceed 50 metres in length several
pushbuttons may be connected to
the interface inputs

156 MY HOME

Automation

Prestige switch
(reuse of historical
devices)

connecting the contAct


the connection between the

PL2

BUS

ABSORPTIONs, SIZE AND DISSIPATIONS


Item

Description

3475
3476
3477
E46ADCN

actuator
control actuator
contact interface
power supply

E49
F411/1N 1)
F411/2 1)

mini power supply


1-relay actuator
2-relay actuator

F411/4 1)

4-relay actuator

F412 1)
F413N 1)
F414

1-relay NC/NA actuator


output 1 to 10 for ballast
DIN dimmer

F415
F522
F523
F420
F422

DIN dimmer
actuator 16A with current sensor
actuator 16A
scenario module
SCS/SCS interface

F425
F426
F427
F428
F429
H/L4651M2 AM5831M2

memory module
SCS/EIB interface
OPEN KNX interface
contact interface
SCS/DALI interface
special control

H/L4652/2 AM5832/2
H/L4652/3 AM5832/3
H/L4671/1 AM5851/1
H/LN4671M2 AM5851M2
H/L4678
H/L4684
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4607
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4607/4
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4610
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4611
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4672N
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4680
BMSE1001
BMSE2001
BMSE2002
BMSE2003
BMSE2004
BMSE2005
F416U1
F417U2
BMDI1001
BMSW1001
BMSW1002
BMSW1003

control for 2 actuators


control for 3 actuators
1-relay actuator
control/actuator
flush-mounting dimmer
colour Touch Screen
SB receiving radio interface
protected control
protected scenario control
fixed IR detector
swivel IR detector
16 A flush mounted 2 module actuator
scenario control
passive infrared ceiling sensor
wide band wall/ceiling sensor
narrow band wall/ceiling sensor
two-way narrow band wall/ceiling sensor
one-way narrow band wall/ceiling sensor
double technology band wall/ceiling sensor
dimmer actuator1000W TC
dimmer actuator1000W 2x400 W TC
dimmer actuator1000W 1/10 V
1-relay 230 Vac actuator
2-relay 230 Vac actuator
4-relay 230 Vac actuator

Absorption from Bus


(power supply 27 Vcc)
13 mA
13 mA
3.5 mA

22 mA
28 mA (single loads)
15.5 mA (interlock)
40 mA (single loads)
22 mA (interlock)
20 mA
30 mA
9 mA
9 mA
30 mA
10 mA
20 mA
IN: 25 mA
OUT: 2mA
5 mA
30 mA
9 mA
5 mA
6 mA for H4651M2
8.5 mA for L4651M2 and AM5831M2
9 mA
9 mA
16.5 mA
14 mA
9 mA
80 mA
33 mA
15 mA
12 mA
4.5 mA
4.5 mA
10 mA
9 mA
10 mA
12 mA
12 mA
12 mA
12 mA
17 mA
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA

Size

Dissipation
Dissipated power
Max. load
with max. load

Basic module
Basic module
Basic module
8 DIN modules
2 DIN modules
2 DIN modules
2 DIN modules

11 W
6W
5.3 W
1.5 W
1.7 W

2 DIN modules

3.2 W

2 DIN modules
2 DIN modules
4 DIN modules

1.5 W
0.5 W
11W
5W
11 W

4 DIN modules
1 DIN module
1 DIN module
2 DIN modules
2 DIN modules

1.2 A
0.5 A

1000W
500W
400W

0.6 W
1W

2 DIN modules
6 DIN modules
6 DIN modules
2 DIN modules
6 DIN modules
2 flush-mounting mod.
2 flush-mounting mod.
3 flush-mounting mod.
2 flush-mounting mod.
2 flush-mounting mod.
2 flush-mounting mod.
3+3 flush-mounting mod.
2 flush-mounting mod.
2 flush-mounting mod.
2 flush-mounting mod.
2 flush-mounting mod.
2 flush-mounting mod.
2 flush-mounting mod.
2 flush-mounting mod.
l=75/p=40/h=20
l=115.86/p=69.6/h=91
l=115.86/p=69.6/h=92
l=115.86/p=69.6/h=93
l=115.86/p=69.6/h=94
l=115.86/p=69.6/h=95
6 DIN modules
6 DIN modules
6 DIN modules
4 DIN modules
4 DIN modules
6 DIN modules

0.1 W

0.2 W

0.9 W
3W

300 W

8W
8W

1000 W
2 X 400 W

1.2 W
1.7 W
2.8 W

NOTE:
1) the power dissipated indicated is that corresponding to the device with all the relays loaded at the load maximum. If the load is less the dissipated power is less and may be calculated
by means of the following formula: P[mW]=140+400*N+10*[I12+I22+...IN2]
P: dissipated power in mW,
N: no. of loaded relays
IN: load current corresponding to the N relay.
Install the items with greater dissipated power (in special power supplies and dimmers) in lower positions in the switchboard for easier heat dissipation.
Do not place devices which dissipate a power greater than 5W side by side, but leave an empty module between them.

Automation

MY HOME 157

General rules for installation

Maximum distances and absorptions


If the absorption of the whole system

PHYSICAL EXPANSION MODE

Positions I3 and I4 shall be configured

is less than 600 mA, the E49 compact

Limit systems shall be applied to

according to the configuration of

power supply can be used. If the

each bus in terms of absorption and

the Automation devices in the two

absorption is between 600 and 1200

maximum wiring distance, as shown

systems connected to each other.

mA, use the E46ADCN power supply.

in the previous page. Therefore, it

With reference to the picture, let us

For extended systems with current

is not possible to supply a system

suppose, for example, that I3=2, I4=7:

absorption over 1200 mA or 600

consisting of two or more buses with

on the input bus (IN), the addresses

mA powered by power supplies

only one power supply unit E46ADCN

of Automation devices No. 1 must

E46ADCN and E49, it will be

or E49, connected to each other by

be between A=1 / PL=1 and A=2 /

necessary to split the system into

interfaces configured in physical

PL=6;

several lines, each powered by its

expansion mode even if the number

own power supply and connected

and type of components connected

addresses of Automation devices

to each other using interface F422

to the system do not exceed the set

No. 2 must be between A=2 /

configured in Physical expansion

maximum absorption (1200 mA).

PL=8 to the address of the next

on the output bus (OUT), the

interface.

mode.

A/PL = 28 53

230 Vac
F422

OUT
OUT

F422
OUT

F422

I1 =
I2 =
I3 = 2
I4 = 7
MOD = 1

F422

IN

IN

IN

230 Vac

230 Vac

A/PL = 11 26

158 MY HOME

I1 =
I2 =
I3 = 5
I4 = 4
MOD = 1

Automation

A/PL = 55 99

Installation rules
When setting up the system, consider

It is possible to use up to 4

the following recommendations:

interfaces in series, which divide

The buses, connected to the

the system into 5 separate

interface input and output, must


be supplied with their own power

sections.

The F420 scenario module, the

supply unit; additionally, the

F425 memory module, and the

system limits apply for each of

devices that can be configured

them, in terms of absorption and

using the self-learning mode must

maximum distance.

be installed on the bus section

Therefore, it is not possible to

corresponding to their own

supply a system consisting of

local address. For example if the

two or more buses with only one

scenario module is configured

power supply unit (E46ADCN or

as A=0 (no configurator), PL=1, it

E49) connected to each other

will have to be placed on section

by various interfaces configured

1 of the system. The energy

in physical expansion mode

management system central unit

even if the number and type of

F421 and the control panel N4682

components connected to the

must be installed on the BUS with

system do not exceed the set

the highest addresses (system no.

maximum absorption (1200 mA).

3 in the example).

It is not possible to connect two


interfaces in parallel to the same
BUS

Automation

MY HOME 159

GEnErAl rulEs fOr instAllAtiOn

Maximum number of devices which can be configured


physicAlly configured
single systeM
A single system can manage up to 9

points (Pl), for a total of 81 addresses

it is also possible to have several

rooms (A) for each room, it will then

to these addresses, any inclusion in

devices with the same address

be possible to manage up to 9 light

one or more groups must be added

A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE

Power supply

Shutter
control

Dimmer
control

3 31

81 addresses MaX.

Basic contact
interface

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ART. 3477

PL1 PL2

BUS cable

230 Vac

DIN
dimmer

3 31

A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE

ART. 3477

Flush-mounting
actuator

T5H 250V

Basic
actuator

0245 06

F414
50Hz

230V~

60 1000V A

A PL M G

PL1 PL2

VirtuAlly configured
single systeM
light points (Pl=0-15), for a total of

rooms (A=0-10) for each room it will

175 addresses (the address A=0, Pl=0

then be possible to manage up to 16

is not permitted)
Basic contact
interface
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE

Power supply

Shutter
control

3 31

175 addresses MaX.

A single system can manage up to 11

Dimmer
control

230 Vac
Web server

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Extra
power supply

ART. 3477

PL1 PL2

F453

Ethernet
cross-over cable

230 Vac

3 31

A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE

ART. 3477

Flush-mounting
actuator

T5H 250V

Basic
actuator

0245 06

F414
50Hz

230V~

60 1000V A

A PL M G

PL1 PL2

Automation

PRI: 220 240 V~


175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

BUS cable
DIN
dimmer

160 MY HOME

Pc

logical expansion of the addresses


VirtuAlly configured
extended systeM with one
f422 interfAce
in larger homes, or in the service

using interface f422 configured in

sector, there might be the need for

the logic expansion mode: with

Automation systems with a higher

configurator n0 2 in position M, and

number of functions than the above

no 1 in i4

in this case, it is possible to create

Power supply

Basic contact
interface
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE

Shutter
control

3 31

Fan
control

Dimmer
control
ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Shutter
control

ART. 3477

PL1 PL2

230 Vac

DIN
actuator

Power supply

0245 06

A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE

3 31

A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE

1
1

2
2

AR T.F470/2

F414
50Hz

230V~

ART. 3477

60 1000V A

ART. 3477

Interface
F422

A PL M G

PL1 PL2

Flush-mounting
actuator

Basic
actuator
Basic contact
interface

Shutter
control

3 31

A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE

PL1 PL2

Basic
actuator

DIN
dimmer
Dimmer
control

Fan
control

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

I1
I2
I3
I4
M

Shutter
control

=
=
=
=1
=2

ART. 3477

PL1 PL2

OUT
OUT

AR T.F422

IN

230 Vac

L
1

AUTOMATION
SYSTEM NO. 1
(MAIN RISER)

A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE

2
2

AR T.F470/2

DIN
actuator

3 31

T5H 250V

1
0245 06

3 31

A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE

F414
50Hz

230V~

ART. 3477

60 1000V A

ART. 3477

A PL M G

PL1 PL2

Basic
actuator

PL1 PL2

Flush-mounting
actuator

DIN
dimmer

Basic
actuator

Web server

230 Vac Extra


power supply

Pc
ETHERNET

174 addresses MaX.

AUTOMATION
SYSTEM NO. 2
(Local BUS)

3 31

T5H 250V

349 addresses MaX.

175 addresses MaX.

an extended Automation system

PRI: 220 240 V~


175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

SCS AI

SCS AV

Ethernet Cross-over Cable

Automation

MY HOME 161

GEnErAl rulEs fOr instAllAtiOn

logical expansion of the addresses


VirtuAlly configured

If you need to control and execute the centralised

extended systeM with

management of the system with Web Server,

seVerAl f422 interfAces

Touch screen and Energy Management Control

if three or more systems (up to a

Unit, these devices will have to be installed in the

maximum of 9) must be combined,

main riser.

these must be connected by means


of interfaces f422 with a common

Main riser
166 addresses MaX.

call riser, on which the control,

LOCAL BUS

activation and management (for

174 addresses MaX.

Automation system No. 1

174 addresses MaX.

bus, which from now on we will

Automation system No. 2

example touch screen) devices can


also be installed because they belong
to the Automation system the riser
cannot be made, for example, with
a Burglar-alarm or 2 wire Video door

I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 =
M=

1
2

OUT
OUT
ART.F422

Interface
F422
IN

entry system the f422 interfaces


LOCAL BUS

logic expansion mode, connecting


configurator no 2 to the M position
and configuring the address of
position i4 with configurators from
1 to 9, as per the following diagram
for each of the 9 systems there will
be 174 configuration addresses
address, as well as 166 addresses on
the riser, for a total of 1732 addresses

Warnings:

=
=
=
=
=

2
2

OUT
OUT
ART.F422

Interface
F422
IN

LOCAL BUS

174 addresses MaX.

available, excluding the interface

I1
I2
I3
I4
M

Automation system No. 3


I1
I2
I3
I4
M

=
=
=
=
=

3
2

OUT
OUT
ART.F422

Interface
F422
IN

In the main riser it is possible to install control


devices configured to send GROUP or GENERAL
the single systems and in the same main riser.

POINT-POINT controls generated inside each


single system and on the main riser can reach
the actuators situated in the whole system only
if they are sent from the appropriately configured

174 addresses MaX.

controls to some or all of the actuators situated in

LOCAL BUS
Automation system No. 4
I1
I2
I3
I4
M

situated on the main riser or on one of the single

162 MY HOME

Automation

4
2

OUT
OUT
ART.F422

Interface
F422
IN

SPECIAL control device H/L4651M2, AM5831M2


systems (max 9) connected.

=
=
=
=
=

Automation system No. 9

addresses MaX.: 174x9+166 (Main riser) = 1732

are configured for operation in

extended systeM with


interfAce f422 And weB
serVer
special systems for which the

using one or more Web servers f454

case the extended system is made up

availability of more than 1739

and a lAn network which forms the

of two or more systems for each of

addresses is required can be made

connection infrastructure

which a maximum of 1739 addresses

referring to the picture below, in this

can be configured the centralised


control of the functions is obtained
through Personal Computer,

LOCAL BUS
Main riser
OUT

Control

ART.F422

LOCAL BUS

connecting directly to the Web server

OUT
Interface
F422
IN

fixed iP address and working on Web


pages with preconfigured icons

Automation system No. 2


OUT
ART.F422
1 2 3 4

ART. F411/2

C1

C2

OUT
Interface
F422
IN

Web Server
F454

ETHERNET

1739 addresses MaX.

Automation system No. 1

SYSTEM 1
SCS AI

SCS AV

BUS

PC

LOCAL BUS
Main riser
OUT

Control

ART.F422

OUT
Interface
F422
IN

LOCAL BUS
Automation system No. 2
OUT
ART.F422
1 2 3 4

ART. F411/2

C1

C2

OUT
Interface
F422
IN

Web Server
F454

ETHERNET

1739 addresses MaX.

Automation system No. 1

SYSTEM 2
SCS AI

LAN
network

SCS AV

BUS
LOCAL BUS

Control

ART.F422

OUT
Interface
F422
IN

Main riser

LOCAL BUS
Automation system No. 2
OUT
ART.F422

1 2 3 4

ART. F411/2

C1

SYSTEM 3

OUT

C2

OUT
Interface
F422
IN

Web Server
F454

ETHERNET

1739 addresses MaX.

Automation system No. 1

SCS AI

SCS AV

BUS

Automation

MY HOME 163

Wiring diagrams

Lighting management
Diagram 1 SWITCHING ON/OFF OF 2 LAMPS FROM 4 LIGHT POINTS WITH GENERAL ON/OFF CONTROL
230 Vac

N
L

L4671/1

ON

E46ADCN
OFF

A
PL
M
G1
G2

=
=
=
=
=

L1

1
1
O/I

L4671/1

ON

OFF

A
PL
M
G1
G2

=
=
=
=
=

BUS

230 Vac

L4652/2

GEN

BUS

L4652/2

A = GEN
PL1 =
M = O/I

ON

L2

1
2
O/I

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

A
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M

=
=
=
=
=
=

To other devices

1
1
O/I
1
2
O/I

Diagram 2 automatic switching on of the light with passive infrared ceiling sensor
N
L

3475

E46ADCN

L1

1 1

230 Vac

ART. 3475
230V
2A cos = 0,6
2A

A
PL
M
G

=
=
=
=

1
1

230 Vac

BUS

BMSE1001

A
PL
M
S
T

=
=
=
=
=

1
1

1
6

L4652/2
A1 = 1
PL1 = 1
M1 = O/I

ON

To other devices

For other
functions

OFF

The device controls the load with the address indicated in A and PL. When a movement is detected, if the lighting level is lower than the set level, the device switches the assigned load on,
and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected to T expires. The PIR movement sensor sensitivity is set with the configurator connected to S. For correct operation the
sensor Lighting set point must be defined (see procedure). If the user switches the light off manually with a control device, the movement sensor is disabled until a presence is detected, for
a time set in T.

164 MY HOME

Automation

diAgrAM 3 switching on And off of one lAMp And rolling shutter control using An ActuAtor control

230 Vac

N
L
L1
A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2

E46ADCN

=
=
=
=
=
=

1
1

1
2
O/I

A
PL
M
G1
G2

M
L2

=
=
=
=
=

L2

1
2
O/I

ON

OFF

L4671/1

L4671M2(*)
230 Vac

BUS
To other
devices

*Complete the device with key covers as per the drawing:

ON

Shutter
control

Light
control
OFF

diAgrAM 4 wire systeM extension with rAdio control to MAnAge two lAMps
230 V ac

N
L

F411/1N
E46ADCN

F411/1N

C1

A
PL
M
G1
G2
G3

=
=
=
=
=
=

1
1

F411/1N

L1

F411/1N

C1

A
PL
M
G1
G2
G3

=
=
=
=
=
=

1
2

L2

To other
devices of the
Wire Automation
system

230 Vac

L4578 (*)

L4597N

A = 9
PL = 8
M =

A =1
PL1 = 1
PL2 = 2

Note: Replacing actuator F411/1N with actuator dimmer F414 and F414/127 the lamp brightness can be adjusted as well
Note (*): assign an address not used for other Automation devices. The interface can manage up to 36 radio control devices.

Automation

MY HOME 165

Wiring diagrams

Management of different loads


Diagram 5 SWITCHING-ON control for bathroom light and fan with delayed SWITCHING-OFF
230 Vac

N
L

M
Bathroom
light

F411/1N
1

F411/1N

E46ADCN

C1

A
PL
M
G1
G2
G3

=
=
=
=
=
=

F411/1N

3
1
2

F411/1N

C1

A
PL
M
G1
G2
G3

=
=
=
=
=
=

Bathroom
fan

3
1
SLA

230 Vac
BUS

L4652/2

The ON control turns on the light and the fan at the same time.
The OFF control turns off the light whereas the fan turns off after 2
minutes (configurator in M=2 of the Master actuator)

To other
devices

A = 3
PL = 1
M = O/I

ON

OFF

Diagram 6 motor control in direct current for motorised curtains (example 24 V d.c.)

24 Vdc

+
F411/2
1 2 3 4

ART. F411/2

C1

E46ADCN

A
PL1
PL2
G
M

=
=
=
=
=

3
1
1

C2

F411/2
1 2 3 4

ART. F411/2

C1

A
PL1
PL2
G
M

=
=
=
=
=

3
1
1

SLA

C2

230 Vac

BUS

230 Vac

To other
devices

L4652/2

It is possible to use direct current motors with other features (12 - 24 - 48 V d.c.) by replacing
the compatible power supply unit with the features of the motor (voltage and current), thus
verifying the absorptions of the motor with the actuator relay capacity (F411/2).

166 MY HOME

Automation

A = 3
PL = 1
M =

For other
functions

Window and shutter management


Diagram 7 motor control in alternated current for rolling shutters, curtains or motorised shutters
230 Vac

L1-N = clockwise rotation


L2-N = anticlockwise rotation

M1

L1
F411/2

M = AC motor
with 2 windings

1 2 3 4

ART. F411/2

E46ADCN

C1

A
PL1
PL2
G
M

=
=
=
=
=

N
L2

M2

L1
F411/2

2
1
1

1 2 3 4

ART. F411/2

C2

C1

A
PL1
PL2
G
M

=
=
=
=
=

2
2
2

N
L2

L1
F411/2
1 2 3 4

ART. F411/2

C2

C1

230 Vac

M3
A
PL1
PL2
G
M

=
=
=
=
=

L2
2
3
3

C2

BUS

L4652/3

A
PL1
A2
PL2
A3
PL3
M

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

2
1
2
2
2
3

To other
devices

L4652/2
GEN

A = GEN
PL =
M =

Diagram 8 motor control in alternated current for opening/closing motorised shutters

M1

230 Vac

N
L

Ap C

M2

Ch

Ap C

F411/4
1 2 3 4 5

E46ADCN

ART. F411/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

Ch

A
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
M

=
=
=
=
=
=

2
1
1
1
1
1

230 Vac

motor controlling the internal rabbet shutter


M1 =
motor controlling the external rabbet shutter
M2 =
PL1 and PL2 = contacts: must be interlocked to each other and must always be fitted to
the internal rabbet shutter
PL3 and PL4 = contacts: must be interlocked to each other and must always be fitted to
the external rabbet shutter

BUS

L4652/2

To other
devices

For other
functions

A = 2
PL = 1
M =

Automation

MY HOME 167

Wiring diagrams

Management of dimmer lamps


Diagram 9 SWITCHING ON AND OFF AND brightness ADJUSTMENT OF fluorescent lamps

By means of the ballast


N

N
L

230 Vac

+
F413

Ballast

A
PL1
M
G

1 2 NC 3 4
-+
0-10V

N L - +

=
=
=
=

2
1

ART. F413N

C1

E46ADCN

230 Vac

To other
devices

BUS

L4652/2
A1 = 2
PL1 = 1
M1 = O/I

For other
functions

ON

OFF

Diagram 10 SWITCHING ON AND OFF AND brightness ADJUSTMENT OF incandescence lamps,


halogen and ferromagnetic transformers
N
L
DIN
dimmer
actuator
E46ADCN

Incandescence lamps,
halogen and ferromagnetic
transformer

L
T5H 250V

230 Vac

0245 06

F414
230V~

50Hz

60 1000VA

A PL M G

230 Vac

A
PL
M
G

=
=
=
=

1
2

To other
devices

BUS

L4652/2
A1 = 1
PL1 = 2
M1 = O/I

168 MY HOME

Automation

ON

OFF

For other
functions

Lighting and shutter management


Diagram 11 LIGHTING AND SHUTTER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 100 M2 HOME
The following pages give a

Functions performed by the system:

description of an Automation

Light general control.

system used for lighting and

Shutters general control.

shutter management in a home of

Control of light points in each

approximately 100 m2, consisting of


living room, kitchen, two bedrooms

Dimmer light control point in the


living room and the bedrooms.

room.

Central control using the Touch


Screen installed in the living room.

Recalling of scenarios with Local

Control of shutters in each room.

Display in the two bedrooms.

and two bathrooms.


Distribution components in the single rooms
Hall
Corridor
KITCHEN

LIVING ROOM

BATHROOM 1

ROOM 1

ROOM 2

ITEM

1 lighting general control (1)


1 shutter general control (2)
1 ceiling light point controlled by flush mounted actuator (3)
1 control (4) for the corridor light point
2 ceiling light points controlled by flush mounted actuator and 8 other points (4 - 6 - 7 - 9 - 13 - 22 - 28)
1 ceiling light point controlled from one point (7) and by
a 1 relay actuator in the DIN module (*)
1 motorised shutter controlled from 1 point (8) and by
a 2 relay actuator in the DIN module (*)
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (11) with light intensity adjustment and by
1 dimmer actuator in DIN module (*)
1 ceiling light point controlled from two points (9 - 11) and by
a 1 relay actuator in the DIN module (*)
1 motorised shutter controlled from 1 point (10) and by
a 2 relay actuator in the DIN module (*)
1 Touch Screen (12)
1 ceiling light point controlled from one point (13) and by
a 1 relay actuator in the DIN module (*)
1 motorised shutter controlled from 1 point (14) and by
a 2 relay actuator in the DIN module (*)
1 ceiling light point controlled from 3 points (16 - 17 - 18) with light intensity adjustment and by
1 dimmer actuator in DIN module (*)
1 motorised shutter controlled from 1 point (15) and by
a 2 relay actuator in the DIN module (*)
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (17)
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (18) and by
a 2 relay actuator in the DIN module (*)
1 control (20) for the Corridor Light Point
1 Local Display (19)
1 ceiling light point controlled from 3 points (22 - 23 - 24) with light intensity adjustment and by
1 dimmer actuator in DIN module (*)
1 motorised shutter controlled from 1 point (21) and by
a 2 relay actuator in the DIN module (*)
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (23)
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (24) and by
a 2 relay actuator in the DIN module (*)
1 control (26) for the Corridor Light Point
1 Local Display (25)

H4652/2
H4652/2
H4671/1
H4652/2
H4671/1
H4652/2
F411/1N
H4652/2
F411/2
H4652/2
F415
H4652/2
F411/1N
H4652/2
F411/2
H4890
H4652/2
F411/1N
H4652/2
F411/2
H4652/2
F415
H4652/2
F411/2
H4652/2
H4652/2
F411/2
H4652/2
HS4891
H4652/2
F415
H4652/2
F411/2
H4652/2
H4652/2
F411/2
H4652/2
HC4685

NOTE: All the controls must be completed with support, cover plate and key covers for the desired civil series. These can be found in the BTicino General Installation catalogue.

For this specific example products of the AXOLUTE civil series have been used.
NOTE (*): All the actuators in DIN module are installed on the 54 module home automation panel in the hall.

Home automation panel

DIN MODULES
1 SCS power supply
12 DIN actuators

8
24

Home automation panel

DIN MODULES
3 DIN dimmer
1 scenario module

12
2
Total 46

Automation

MY HOME 169

WirinG DiAGrAMs

lighting and shutter management


HALL

CORRIDOR

KITCHEN

L
N

F420

F411/1N
A1 =
PL = 1

E46ADCN

H4671/1
A1 = 1
PL = 1
M1 = O/I

ON

ART.F420

H4671/1

OFF

ON

OFF

A = 3
PL = 1

ART.F411/1

A1 = 2
PL = 1
M1 = O/I

230 Vac

H4652/2
ON

GEN

H4652/2

A1 = GEN
M = O/I

H4652/2

A = GEN
M =

OFF

OFF

H4652/2

A1 = 2
PL1 = 1
M = O/I

ON

ON

OFF

H4652/2

A1 = 2
PL1 = 1
M = O/I

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2

=
=
=
=
=
=

ROOM 2
L
N

F415
L
ART.F415

F411/2

A = 8
PL = 1

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2

H4652/2
ON

OFF

26

H4652/2

A = 2
PL1 = 1
M = O/I

25

A =
PL1 =
M =
FUN =

H4652/2

1
4
1

NOTE: for the configuration of bathroom 2 refer to bathroom 1, configuring for all the devices room A=6

170 MY HOME

Automation

ON

OFF

24

ON

OFF

A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2

F411/2

A = 8
PL1 = 2
PL2 = 3

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2

H4652/2
=
=
=
=
=
=

8
3
O/I
8
1
O/I

ON

OFF

23

ON

OFF

A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2

A = 8
PL1 = 4
PL2 = 4

H4652/2
=
=
=
=
=
=

8
2
O/I
8
1
O/I

ON

OFF

22

H4652/2

A = 8
PL1 = 1
M1 = O/I

A = 8
PL1 = 4
M1 =

21

3
1
O/I
2
1
O/I

KITCHEN

LIVING ROOM

BATHROOM
L
N

F411/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2

F411/1N

A = 3
PL1 = 2
PL2 = 2

ART.F411/1

H4652/2

F415

A = 4
PL = 1

ART.F415

H4652/2

A1 = 3
PL1 = 2
M =

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2

F411/2

A = 4
PL = 2

4
1
O/I
2
1
O/I

1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2

A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

11

10

ART.F411/1

H4890

H4652/2

A1 = 4
PL1 = 3
M =

F411/1N

A = 4
PL1 = 3
PL2 = 3

1 2 3 4

H4652/2
=
=
=
=
=
=

=
=
=
=
=
=

4
2
O/I
4
1
O/I

F411/2

A = 5
PL = 1

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2

H4652/2
ON

ON

OFF

OFF

13

12

A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2

A = 5
PL1 = 2
PL2 = 2

H4652/2
=
=
=
=
=
=

5
1
O/I
2
1
O/I

A1 = 5
PL1 = 2
M =

14

ROOM 1
L
N

F415

F411/2

A = 7
PL = 1

L
ART.F415

1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2

H4652/2
ON

OFF

20

HS4891

A1 = 2
PL1 = 1
M = O/I

19

A =
PL1 =
M =
FUN =

F411/2

A = 7
PL1 = 2
PL2 = 3

1 2 3 4

H4652/2

1
4
1

ON

OFF

18

ON

OFF

A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2

H4652/2
=
=
=
=
=
=

7
3
O/I
7
1
O/I

ON

ON

OFF

17

OFF

A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2

A = 7
PL1 = 4
PL2 = 4

H4652/2
=
=
=
=
=
=

7
2
O/I
7
1
O/I

ON

OFF

16

H4652/2
A = 7
PL1 = 4
M1 =

A = 7
PL1 = 1
M1 = O/I

15

Automation

MY HOME 171

172 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

CONTENTS

MY HOME Burglar alarm


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Start-up and testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 173

GEnEral fEaturES

Professional safety
the MY HOME burglar-alarm

as for all the MY HOME system, the

RADIO EXPANSION

system is a safe and effective alarm

wiring of the of the burglar-alarm

By integrating the radio interface

system for the protection of people

system is based on BuS technology

with the BuS system it is possible to

and their belongings, capable of

all the devices are therefore

expand the burglar-alarm system

detecting any intrusions, promptly

connected using a non-polarised 2

with radio detection and control

notifying the event by means of

wire cable this features allows to

devices a range of optional functions

sound and visual alarms, and by

share information with the other MY

also become available:

sending telephone messages the

HOME BuS functions, and obtain

technical alarms - using a specific

system includes a central unit that

advanced applications

can be programmed for control

flood control of the room

and supervision of the system,

WIDE RANGE OF SOLUTIONS

management and control devices,

Central unit with integrated PStn

volumetric sensors (ir technology

or GSM communicator, managing

or dual ir+MW technology), for the

up to 72 sensors in 8 areas

internal protection of the house, and

transponder connectors, radio

perimeter sensors for the protection of

wave connectors, infrared and

doors and windows

numeric code connectors

By integrating special devices, the

Wired or radio devices

system can also perform "safety"

technical alarm management

functions, such as remote assistance

ademco Contact iD communication

for old people, and the protection of

sensor, it is possible to perform

remote assistance - to assure


peace of mind and prompt
assistance for people in difficulties

radio control it is also possible to


integrate a radio remote control, for
radio arming and disarming

protocol management

the house from gas or water leaks

Outdoor siren

Central unit with PSTN or gSM communicator

Power supply

230 Vac

BuS

IR+MW sensor

174 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

IR sensor

Basic contact
interface

Magnetic
contacts

INTEGRATION WITH OTHER MY


HOME SYSTEMS
using a special interface, the burglar-

RADIO DEVICES

BuS MY HOME SYSTEM

Remote control

Automation

alarm system can be easily integrated


with other MY HOME systems, to
obtain the following:

advanced applications resulting


from the synergy among the
individual systems (for example
automatic switch-on of the lights

Video door entry system

Radio perimeter
detector

following a burglar-alarm event);

local central management or


remote central management via
the internet, using the MY HOME
WEB portal of the system

IMQ ALARM CERTIFICATION FOR


LEvEL 2 DEvICES
the Bticino burglar-

Central management
Radio volumetric
presence detector

alarm system
offers solutions for each protection
requirement: from the minimum
protection limit required in an
apartment, to the most stringent
levels offered by professional systems
Keypad connector with display

Radio receiver
SCS/SCS
interface

BuS
To any other systems
Key ring badge
transponder

Badge transponder

Transponder connector

Keypad connector

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 175

GEnEral fEaturES

advanced functions: the safety of the home and of people


the burglar-alarm system

WATER OR GAS LEAK ALARM

REMOTE ASSISTANCE

represents the basic infrastructure

Water or gas leak detection with

Forwarding of assistance request by

for alarm management, but the

message forwarding and immediate

calling personal numbers.

set of applications which can

shut-off of the water or gas piping.

Old, disabled or recovering people

be implemented can easily be

By integrating a water or gas sensor

may send an assistance request

expanded in fact the burglar-alarm

with the burglar-alarm system,

using a portable remote control

system can be used to ensure the

in case of such a danger event

the signal transmitted is detected

protection of people and their

occurring, the burglar-alarm system

by a radio receiver connected to the

belonging from dangerous events

activates a solenoid valve that orders

burglar-alarm system, which activates

such as gas leaks, flooding, etc with

the shutting-off of the water or gas

an indoor siren, and the telephone

alarm notifications (also remotely

distribution network at the same

communicator of the central unit,

through telephone messages)

time an indoor siren will be activated,

which forwards the assistance

Below are some examples:

while a burglar-alarm central unit

request to the set number(s)

communicator will forward a


telephone alarm message

TV/SAT
WATER OR gAS LEAK ALARM

REMOTE ASSISTANCE

TV/SAT

IPTV

Indoor siren
automazione

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

automazione
controllo

diffusione sonora
lan

Indoor siren
(optional)

controllo
antifurto carichi

termoregolazione
energia

videocitofonia
luci

Relay actuator

Radio receiver

Radio receiver

Flooding
detector

Radio control for


remote assistance

176 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

controllo
tv

PANIC ALARM

ANTI-BURGLARY ALARM

in case of suspected noises inside

in case of danger, it is possible to

the home, the owner can manually

activate the burglar-alarm system

activate the burglar-alarm system

for sending a remote assistance

to generate an alarm signal if the

request through the central unit

system is armed all the sirens will

communicator the activation does

activate to confuse any intruders

not generate a sound alarm, thus

at the same time, the telephone

allowing the police force to surprise

communicator of the central unit will

the burglar, who is not aware that the

also send a remote assistance request

call has been made

if the system is not armed only the


indoor siren will activate (if present),
while the communicator will forward
the request for assistance

ANTI-BuRgLARY ALARM

TV/SAT

IPTV
Indoor siren (optional)

PANIC ALARM

TV/SAT

Technical alarm
interface
automazione

Technical alarm
interface

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

automazione

diffusione sonora

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo carichi

energia

controllo

lan

IPTV

luci

controllo carichi

tvcc

energia

N.C. pushbutton
N.C. pushbutton

STOP & GO: TELEPHONE


SIGNALLING OF TRIPPING OF
THE GENERAL CIRCUIT BREAKER
By connecting SalVaVita StOP&GO

the SalVaVita StOP&GO device

the burglar-alarm system will no

to the burglar-alarm system using a

automatically closes the tripped

longer try to reinstate the power

special interface, it is possible to receive

circuit breaker, reinstating the power

supply, but will forward a message

a telephone message in case of tripping

supply in fully safe conditions

of the circuit breaker due to storm,

However, if the fault remains, due to

electric disturbance, or system fault

an insulation defect or line overload,

TV/SAT

STOP & gO

diffusione sonora

Technical alarm
interface

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

Stop & go circuit breaker

IPTV
Control interface

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

Burglar alarm

tvcc

www

MY HOME 177

GEnEral fEaturES

advanced functions:
integration with other MY HOME functions
By sharing the same means of

therefore be managed also using a

the house in practice, when the

information transmission (BuS pair),

remote PC and the internet Below

doors or windows of a room are

the MY HOME applications can be

are some examples:

opened, the heating system of

easily integrated with each other to

By integrating the burglar-alarm

the temperature control zone of

optimise functions and to generate

system to the automation system

that room is automatically turned

new ones, thus meeting new

it is possible to automatically

off the opening and closing of

requirements

switch on all the lights of the home

doors and windows is detected by

in this respect, the Burglar-alarm

following an intrusion event

the burglar-alarm system contact

automatic disabling of the heating

system can be easily integrated with

interface, which reads the status

the automation or Video door entry

system

of the nC contact installed on the

system using a special interface f422

By integrating the burglar-alarm

door or window, and sends the

Of course by using several interfaces

system with the heating system,

information to the temperature

it will be possible to create fairly

it is possible to set a particularly

control system for the appropriate

complex systems, through the

useful function, which can bring

actions

integration of the burglar-alarm

in important energy savings, by

system with other systems with

avoiding unwanted dispersion of

different functions (sound system,

heat to the outside, for example

temperature control, etc ), which can

when changing the air inside

AuTOMATIC DISABLINg OF THE HEATINg


TV/SAT
IPTV SYSTEM

COuRTESY LIgHTS MANAgEMENT

Magnetic contact

diffusione sonora

Interface
termoregolazione

antifurto

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

TV/SAT
Opening of
TV/SAT
window

automazione

automazione

diffusione sonora

antifurto

diffusione sonora

termoregolazione

antifurto

videocitofonia

termoregolazione

controllo

irrigazione

IPTV

IPTV

Interface
videocitofonia

lan

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

TV/SAT

general
light control

www

controllo carichi

energia

energia

luci

tvcc

IPTV

Control interface
automazione

178 MY HOME

diffusione sonora

Burglar alarm

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

System devices
the pages that follow show the main

Customisation of users

Managing scenarios

devices making up the MY HOME

the central unit can be programmed

it is possible to define up to 16

burglar alarm system for the full list,

to allow access inside the house

scenarios to activate, with one single

refer to the Catalogue section

based on two criteria that can be

operation, the burglar-alarm system

customised by the user; by time

for the areas of the home that need

BURGLAR-ALARM CENTRAL UNIT

band, and by type of area

protecting

available in two versions:

time band: access in protected areas

it is also possible to associate a

With telephone communicator,

is only allowed at certain times for

certain scenario to each individual

example, the maid is given a key that

key

PStn or PStn/GSM;

Without telephone
communicator

disables the burglar-alarm system


each tuesday between 9 00 o'clock

this is the device at the heart of

and 12 00 o'clock

the burglar-alarm system, capable

area: access inside the house is

of managing up to 72 sensors in 8

only permitted in some areas for

areas, and recognise up to 50 keys

example, the gardener is given a key

for the arming/disarming of the

that only gives him access to the tool

system using the large display, the

room

Base central unit

user can control the system status,


set advanced operating modes,
such as user customisation, scenario
management and activation of

Central unit with PSTN or gSM telephone communicator

advanced functions resulting from

Protected areas

the integration with other MY HOME


systems
it's also preset for the ademco
Contact iD function, for forwarding
telephone messages to vigilance
bodies following a burglar-alarm or

System state

technical alarm event

Night scenario: total protection of the day area and perimeter protection of the house.

Work scenario: complete protection of the house.

LEgEND
Perimeter protection
Day area IR protection
Night area IR protection

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 179

GEnEral fEaturES

Control and protection devices


ACTIvATORS

Keypad connector with display

these devices can be used to arm/


disarm the system by entering a
numeric code or using a transponder
key
using the keypad connector with

Transponder key reader

display it is also possible to select


the areas of the house that need
protecting (separation), and to
know the system status through the
information shown on the display

Radio remote control with built-in


transformer

CONTACT INTERFACES
for the connection to the burglaralarm system of normally closed (nC)
or normally open (nO) magnetic
contacts for the protection of doors
and windows
DIN contact
interface

IR SENSOR

IR barriers

for the protection of the areas of the


house
BASIC contact
interface

available in two versions:

With ir sensor

With ir sensor and MW


(microwave) sensor
for the protection of doors and
windows, ir barriers are also
available, in lengths between 0 5
and 2 metres

Note: For the full list of all the available devices refer to the Catalogue section.

180 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

IR+MW sensor

Devices for radio expansion and technical alarms


IR SENSOR AND RADIO
MAGNETIC CONTACT

Window-breaking
radio detectors

Battery powered, these devices can


be used to protect rooms where no
BUS wiring is present.

Radio IR sensor

WIRE-RADIO INTERFACE

Wire-radio
interface

It allows integration with the wired


burglar-alarm system of radio
technology devices, such as the radio
remote control in the previous page,
and the devices listed below.

DEVICES FOR TECHNICAL


ALARMS
This family includes devices such as:
The radio control, to send an
assistance request;
The radio sensor, to detect the

Radio control
for Remote assistance

presence of water;
The Auxiliary channel interface, for
integrating gas and water sensors

Radio water sensor

with the burglar-alarm system;


The Basic module contact
interface.

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 181

GEnEral fEaturES

System selection criteria


today the wire burglar-alarm system

of structure to be made safe and the

area to be protected

can satisfy any installation needs in

functions required

alarm modes

the home the criteria should thus be

four factors are to be considered

Protections

indicated for a correct choice of the

when choosing a system

System control

components, depending on the type


AREA TO bE PROTECTED
AVAILAbLE
FUNCTIONS

CENTRAL UNIT WITH PSTN CENTRAL UNIT WITH PSTN/


COMMUNICATOR
gSM COMMUNICATOR

bASE CENTRAL UNIT

L/N/NT4600/4
Polyx Alarm
3485B

Polyx Alarm
3485

HC/HD/HS4601
L/N/NT4601

3486

Maximum number of
sensors

36

36

36

72

72

Maximum division
into zones (areas)

SYSTEM CONTROL
WITH RADIO REMOTE CONTROL

WITH IR REMOTE CONTROL (ONLY WITH


WITH TRANSPONDER
CENTRAL UNIT L/N/NT4600/4 AND 3486)

HC/HD/HS/L/N/
NT4618
Radio receiver

348220 Radio remote


control

HC/HD/HS4604, L/N/
NT4604
Activator

WITH NUMERIC CODE

HC/HD/HS4607, L/N/
NT4607, AM5787
Transponder reader

HC/HD/HS4603/4
L/N/NT4603/4
IR divider

HC/HD/HS4607/4
L/N/NT4607/4
AM5787/4
Divider transponder

4050
Remote control

3530S, 3540
Badge, key-ring

HC/HD/HS4606, L/N/
NT4606, AM5786
Keypad connector

HC/HD/HS4608
L/N/NT4608
Keypad connector with
display

182 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

PROTECTIONS
AREA CONTROL
Fixed sensitivity

PERIMETER CONTROL
Variable sensitivity

Sensors + Barriers

Detectors

3510 FLUSH mounted magnetic


detector
Swivel IR
(distance 6 m)
L/N/NT4611B
AM5791B

Fixed IR (distance 3 9m)


HC/HD/HS4610
L/N/NT4610
AM5790

3516 Window breaking detectors

3514 Cable detector for shutters

3511 Visibly
magnetic detector

3513 Magnetic detector for metal


main doors

Wall mounting IR
(distance 6 m)
N4640B

Wall mounting IR
(distance 3
9 m)
N4640

Wall mounting
IR (distance 4
12 m)
3440

3444 Window-breaking radio


detectors

3445 Cable radio detector for rolling


shutters

3512 Magnetic detector for swing


doors

3510M Brass FLUSH mounted


magnetic detector
Dual-technology (distance 10 m)
HC/HD/HS4613
L/N/NT4613

Swivel IR (distance 3 9 m)
HC/HD/HS4611
L/N/NT4611
AM5791

3518, 3518/50, 3518/150, 3519


IR barriers for windows

3442 Radio opening detector

Brass FLUSH mounted magnetic


detector 3510PB

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 183

GEnEral fEaturES

System selection criteria


ALARM MODES
OPTION1 back-up battery in the outdoor siren
POWER SUPPLY

Option2 - back-up battery in the switchboard

OUTDOOR SIREN

INDOOR SIREN

POWER SUPPLY

HC/HD/HS/
N/NT4070

E47ADCN

4072L

E46ADCN

OUTDOOR SIREN

INDOOR SIREN

4072A

HC/HD/HS/
N/NT4070

Only outdoor siren


Outdoor and Indoor siren
Only indoor siren
Central unit with
communicator

No siren

3486

Polyx Alarm
3485

Warning: if both internal and external sirens are installed, tampering with the system when disarmed will only cause the indoor siren to go off.

ACTIVATION OF THE ALARM DEVICES DEPENDINg ON THE STATUS OF THE SYSTEM AND THE DANgER EVENT
SYSTEM ARMED
Alarm event

Indoor siren

Outdoor siren 4072A


(without internal back-up
battery)

Outdoor siren 4072L


(with internal back-up
battery)

Relay actuator 3479 and


F481 (1)

Telephone communicator of Internal relay of the 3485B


the 3485 and 3486 central and L/N/NT4601 central
units
units (2)

Burglar

Rings

Rings

Rings

Activates

Calls

Activates

Tamper

Rings

Rings

Rings

Activates

Calls

Activates

Tamptest

Rings

Rings

Rings

Activates

Calls

Activates

Anti-panic

Rings

Rings

Rings

Activates

Calls

Activates

Silence (burglar alarm)

Does not ring

Does not ring

Does not ring

Does not
activate

Calls

Does not
activate

Note (1): configure the device in MOD=0 (siren status repetition) to enable the operation described in the table.
Note (2): The relay contacts can be used to connect a third party optical/luminous alarm diffuser, or a telephone communicator.

184 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

SYSTEM DISARMED

Alarm event

Indoor siren

Outdoor siren 4072A


(without internal back-up
battery)

Outdoor siren 4072L


(with internal back-up
battery)

Relay actuator 3479 and


F481 (1)

Telephone communicator of Internal relay of the 3485B


the 3485 and 3486 central and L/N/NT4601 central
units
units (2)

Tamper

Rings

Does not ring

Does not ring

Activates

Forwarding of event
notification message

Activates

Tamptest

Does not ring


Notification

Does not ring


Notification

Does not ring


Notification

Does not activate

Forwarding of event
notification message

Does not activate

in central units with display, in central units with display, in central units with display,
or LED notification in central or LED notification in central or LED notification in central
unit L/N/NT4601
unit L/N/NT4601
unit L/N/NT4601

Tampering (disconnection
of the central unit from the
system)

Rings

Does not ring

Does not ring

Activates

Forwarding of event
notification message

Activates

Tampering (disconnection of
the siren from the system)

Rings

Rings

Does not ring

Does not activate

Forwarding of event
notification message

Does not activate

Anti-panic

Rings

Does not ring

Does not ring

Activates

Forwarding of assistance
request message

Activates

Silence (burglar alarm)

Does not ring


Does not ring
Does not ring
Does not activate
It rings if the L/N/NT4600/4 It rings if the L/N/NT4600/4 It rings if the L/N/NT4600/4
central unit is installed
central unit is installed
central unit is installed

Forwarding of assistance
request message

Does not activate

Note (1): configure the device in MOD=0 (siren status repetition) to enable the operation described in the table.
Note (2): The relay contacts can be used to connect a third party optical/luminous alarm diffuser, or a telephone communicator.

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 185

GEnEral fEaturES

System selection criteria


CENTRAL UNIT FUNCTION
in addition to the criteria explained in

entrusted with a key, which during

AUTOMATION WITH CENTRAL

the previous pages, the selection of

UNIT 3486 OR 3485. Switching on

the above times deactivates the

the central unit can be made taking

of all home lights. if the burglar-

burglar-alarm system of the cellar

into account the possible available

alarm system is integrated with the

all other areas of the house are still

functions, such as:

automation system, it can be set

protected by the burglar-alarm

KEYS ONLY OPERATING DURING

in such a way that if burglar-alarm

system, armed by the owner when

CERTAIN TIME BANDS

event occurs, some or all the lights

leaving the home for work

Enabling for the cleaning staff in

of the house will come on, inducing

order to be able to do her job, the

the burglar to leave

maid has been given a key for the

AUTOMATION WITH CENTRAL


UNIT 3485B. Activation of
division scenario. Each time the

KEYS ONLY OPERATING IN

disarming of the burglar-alarm

CERTAIN AREAS. Enabling access

key is used (transponder, radio

system across the whole house,

for the gardener. the cellar is

remote control or numeric key)

but only between 9 00 oclock and

used to store gardening tools and

to activate the system, a specific

12 00 oclock, on normal working

is made accessible by the owner

division scenario will be activated

days During all other times and

of the house every tuesday from

holidays the key does not operate

2 00 to 6 00 pm in order to do
his job, the gardener has been

CENTRAL UNIT FUNCTION


AVAILAbLE
FUNCTIONS

4 ZONE

FLUSH-MOUNTED CENTRAL UNIT

CENTRAL UNIT WITH PSTN CENTRAL UNIT WITH PSTN/


COMMUNICATOR
gSM COMMUNICATOR

Polyx Alarm
3485B

Polyx Alarm
3485

L/N/NT4600/4

HC/HD/HS4601
L/N/NT4601

3486

Max. no. of keys that


can be saved (1)

30

20

50

50

Key constraints (day/


zone/time) (2)

NO

NO

SI

SI

Max. no. of scenarios

NO

16

16

Max. no. of
automations

NO

10 (see note 4)

20 (see note 3)

20 (see note 3)

PC programming with
software

NO

TiSecurity Basic for firmware update

TiSecurity POLYX for the


programming of parameters and
firmware update

TiSecurity GSM for the


programming of parameters and
firmware update

NOTE: (1) Keys are any control devices such as IR remote control, radio remote control, transponder key, and numeric key. (2) Each key can be set to only operate certain days of
the week, in certain areas, or during certain time bands. (3) If the system is integrated with other MY HOME systems, for example lights automation, it is possible to switch all
the lights of the house on, if a burglar-alarm system event occurs. (4) Of the 10 possible automations, one is activated using an auxiliary relay inside the central unit. The other
9 are combined to Arming, disarming, Date and Time events.

186 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION

Project approach
The project of setting up a new MY

ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS

HOME BURGLAR-ALARM system can

Once the above information is

Division into zones

be completed in two ways:

available, the following must be

For a better management of the

Functional this is a good

agreed:

sensors needed to protect the

compromise between cost and

Selection of the protection:

property, it is recommended that the

safety. The main priority is selecting

Volumetric protection is normally

system is divided in at least 2 ZONES:

which functions to include, and

the basic protection. This decision

a perimeter and a volumetric zone

the possibility of making the

must be made taking into account

(up to 9 sensors per zone)

system ready for future expansion

various aspects, with the main

is also taken into account. This

one being the actual location of

the system should be divided into at

solution includes, for example,

the property. For properties on

least 4 ZONES:

both volumetric and perimeter

the ground or 1st floor, perimeter

2 Perimeter ZONES (day/night areas) 2

protection. Advantages: high level

protection and/or protection of the

Volumetric ZONES (day/night areas)

of flexibility and increase in the

rolling shutters, is recommended.

value of the property.

Perimeter protection is also

or in villas, the system should be

recommended if external access

divided into 4 ZONES or more.

Economical based on an

In properties with more than 2 rooms,

In properties with several rooms,

economic, low cost installation It

points near balconies are also

If the system does not include an

does not exclude the use of the

present (e.g. rain water pipes,

external burglar-alarm arming /

different features offered by the

gutters, nearby balconies or

disarming device, a time delay

system, although it only calls for

terraces). With perimeter protection,

should fitted on the sensors

the use of one type of protection

the system can also be armed when

protecting the main entry.

(volumetric), and does not take into

people or animals are inside the

Otherwise, the entrance area

account future system expansions.

property.

should be kept as part ZONE 1, on

Advantages: low cost installation.

which a time delay can be set as

In order to ensure a good work setup,


the following elements are needed:

standard.
Example of house split into 4 zones

Planimetry (absolutely necessary),


of the living unit, so that the
locations where the system

Zone 4 - bedroom

elements are to be installed can be


defined beforehand. It would also
be appropriate to have a furniture
plan.

Definition of the protections,


necessary to define which system

Zone 3 - living room

devices to include (volumetric,


perimeter or combined protection),
and check that the protecting
devices actually cover the
appropriate areas.

Zone 2 - kitchen

Zone 1 - entrance

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 187

General rules for installation

System measurement
MAXIMUM REACHABLE
DISTANCES
The maximum number of devices

availability of current based on the

that can be connected to the BUS

length of the cable.

connections between the two

depends on the total absorption of

During sizing ensure that the

furthest-away devices must not be

the same and the distance between

following rules are complied with:

more than 175 metres.

the point of connection and the

When two outdoor sirens are

The maximum length of the

The maximum length of the

power supply.

installed the connection lines

connections must not be more

The power supply can supply up to

between siren and power

than 350 metres

1.2 A (E46ADCN) or 1 A (E47ADCN);

supply must be separate and the

the maximum number of devices will

maximum length of each should

therefore be determined by the sum

not be more than 100 metres,

of the absorptions of the individual

while the sum of the two should

devices to be installed.

not be more than 175 metres.

In calculating the absorptions it will


also be necessary to consider the

MAXIMUM BUS CABLE LENGTHS


A = 100 m max
B = 100 m max

A+ B

= 175 m max

A+C

= 175 m max

A + B + C = 350 m max

+ - C1 COM C2
12V

C1

C2

A
B

Note: During this check do not consider the connection between NC (normally closed) contacts and the corresponding interface module.

188 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

SYSTEMS WITH AND WITHOUT


Outdoor siren
Traditional burglar-alarm systems -

The power supply unit and the

which require an outdoor siren as it

battery are installed in wall mounted

is equipped with the back-up battery

enclosures F115/8A and F115/8B

of the whole system - can sometimes

which guarantee protection against

cause inconvenience to neighbours

tampering attempts thanks to special

in case of an alarm, especially in

self-protection systems.

condominium flats. BTicino gives

The outdoor siren is now considered

you the opportunity to avoid this

optional: However, if you want to

drawback by using a specific power

install it, use siren 4072A.

supply unit instead of the power

Warning: in order to install the devices and assure

supply E46ADCN. This power supply

level 2 protection according to CEI 79-22 standard

unit can be used for connecting a

use wall mounted boxes fitted with tampering and

back-up battery (not supplied). It

tearing protection devices(to prevent units being

is easily available and necessary to

pulled away).

power the system in case of power

These boxes are also needed when installing

failure from the mains. The battery

contact interfaces F482, or batteries with sizes not

to be used with it must have the

compatible with switchboards F115/8A.

Power supply
E47ADCN

following features: 12 V, 7,2 24 Ah.

TYPE OF SYSTEM

+
WITH OUTDOOR SIREN
REQUIRED
Power supply E46ADCN
Siren 4072L

Battery inside the siren


3505/12

+
WITH OUTDOOR SIREN
OPTIONAL
Power supply E47ADCN
Siren 4072A

Battery 12 V
7.2/12/24 Ah

Note: the table summarises the combinations implement based on the type of system to create.

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 189

General rules for installation

System measurement
CHECK ELECTRICAL
CONSUMPTIONS

if you use the E46ADCN power

if you use the E47ADCN power

connections, it is necessary to

supply unit and the absorption

supply unit, you will only need

determine the sum of the total

is less than 150mA, you will only

to install a 7.2 Ah, 12 Ah or 24

currents absorbed by the devices

need to install a siren 4072L; if the

Ah battery. The following chart

installed. This verification will

absorption is higher than 150mA,

indicates the maximum absorption

determine whether it is necessary to

it will be necessary to install 2

required by the system, according

equip the system with 1 or 2 outdoor

sirens 4072L; However, the total

to the battery installed and to

sirens or the type of battery to use.

absorption must not exceed

the level of autonomy required.

This is necessary in order to provide

300mA. For both cases, a 24 hour

However, the maximum absorption

the most complex system with a

duration is guaranteed.

must not exceed 700 mA. The

After checking the length of the

minimum required autonomy of 24

maximum consumptions of the

hours, at a temperature of 25C in

self-powered devices have already

case of power failure from the mains.

been deducted from the maximum


current that can be supplied by the
power supply unit.

MAXIMUM CURRENT DELIVERED TO THE DEVICES ON THE BUS WITH POWER


SUPPLY E47ADCN

Tables of unit absorptions


DEVICE

Absorbed current

AUTONOMY IN CASE OF
LACK OF NETWORK

4 zone central unit

25 mA

Central unit 3486

50 mA (stand-by) max 120 mA

Central unit 3485

55 mA (stand-by) max 90 mA

Central unit 3485B; HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601

50 mA

Activator

8 mA

Transponder reader

12 mA

Zone divider 1 4; Zone divider 1 to 4 transponder

15 mA

5 - 8 zone expander

10 mA

Disconnector with key

5 mA

Keypad connector with display

28 mA

Keypad connector

5.5 mA

Fixed sensitivity IR detector; Passive IR detector;


Passive IR articulated detector

4.5 mA

Dual-technology detector

5 mA 35 mA **

IR barriers

50 mA

Contact interface

5 mA

Contact interface - 12 V

5 mA *

Contact interface - 2 DIN mod.

6 mA

24 h

Type of battery installed


7.2 Ah

12 Ah

24 Ah

110 mA (*)

190 mA (*)

380 mA

15 h

180 mA

300 mA

600 mA

8h

340 mA

560 mA

700 mA

(*) In this case the system complies with level 2 of the CEI 79-2 standard.

MAXIMUM CURRENT DELIVERED TO 12 V DEVICES WITH POWER SUPPLY E47/12


(This power supply is used, for example, in IR barriers)

AUTONOMY IN CASE OF
LACK OF NETWORK

24 h

Type of battery installed


7.2 Ah

12 Ah

24 Ah

Interface 3480

5 mA

300 mA (*)

500 mA (*)

1A

Relay actuator

20 mA
6 mA

15 h

480 mA

800 mA

1,6 A

Technical alarm interface


Radio receiver

15 mA

8h

900 mA

1.5 A

2A

Indoor siren

8 mA

Outdoor siren 4072A

5 mA

Interface F422

2 mA

(*) In this case the system complies with level 1 of the CEI 79-2 standard.
Note: in order to ensure level 2 performances according to CEI 79-2 standard in case of lack of
network power supply, use batteries capable of ensuring system autonomy for at least 24 hours.

190 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

Note:* Plus the absorption of the detector connected to it


** Consider: - 35mA for the first detector installed; 5 mA for all the others.

Each system can be made up of a minimum and maximum number of devices as shown in the following tables.

CENTRAL UNIT FOR MAX. 36 SENSORS

1
4

2
5

3
6

OK

L/N/NT4600/4, AM4600/4
3485B

HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601
Minimum No.

Maximum No.

Minimum No.

Maximum No.

Minimum No.

Maximum No.

Not managed

Not managed

Not managed

KEYS
IR remote control

Not managed

Radio remote control

Transponder

Numeric code

Keypad connector with display

Keypad connector

Transponder reader or
Divider transponder

IR activator, zone 1-4 divider

9 (in total)

Not managed

Not managed

Not managed

Not managed

Disconnector with key

(IR and contact interface)

9 for each zone 1-4


(total 36)

9 for each zone 1-4


(total 36)

9 for each zone 1-4


(total 36)

Technical alarm interface and actuator relay

Radio receiver

9 for each zone 0-4


(total 45)

9 for each zone 0-4


(total 45)

9 for each zone 0-4


(total 45)

MAX 30 in total

0
MAX 20 in total

MAX 20 in total

Activators and dividers


9 for each zone 0 4
(total 45)

9 for each zone 0 4


(total 45)

9 for each zone 0-4(total


45)

Detectors

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 191

General rules for installation

System measurement

CENTRAL UNIT FOR MAX. 72 SENSORS

OK
CLEAR

1
4
7

Maximum No.

IR remote control

Not managed

Not managed

Radio remote control

Transponder

Numeric code

3
6
9

3486

3485
Minimum No.

2
5
8
0

Minimum No.

Maximum No.

MAX 50 in total

KEYS

MAX 50 in total

Activators and dividers:


Keypad connector with display

Keypad connector

Transponder reader or
Divider transponder

IR activator, zone 1-4 divider


with 5-8 expansion unit

Not managed

Not managed

9 in total

Disconnector with key

(IR and contact interface)

9 for each zone 1 8


(total 72)

9 for each zone 1 8


(total 72)

Technical alarm interface and actuator relay

9 for each zone 1 8


(total 72)

9 for each zone 1 8


(total 72)

9 for each zone 0 8 (total 81)

9 for each zone 0 8 (total 81)

Detectors

NUMBER OF SIRENS

Indoor siren
Outdoor siren
Minimum No.

Maximum No.

Minimum No.

Maximum No.

E46ADCN

Not managed

3 (2 if a central unit with display is


installed)

Not managed

2 ( 4072L)

E47ADCN

3 (1)

2 ( 4072A)

NOTE (1): the total number of internal/outdoor sirens must not exceed 3. Example: 2 indoor sirens and one outdoor siren.

192 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

Example: apartment burglar-alarm system


100 m2 apartment on the ground

through the physical barriers (rolling

to ensure this flexibility, the

floor of an apartment complex, with

shutters/window glass) without

various sensors should be grouped

balcony and continuous vertical

actually opening the door or window

appropriately

protection parapet on one side

in this case, the magnetic detector on

in this case, the system can be

the main entry consists of a door,

the opening would in fact be unable

divided as follows:

while all french windows can be

to generate the alarm

magnetic contact and volumetric

considered as alternative accesses

this type of setup would also give the

these access ways are all controlled

user the possibility to customise the

by magnetic contacts

system to meet personal needs

in view of the position, it is

this gives clear advantages on a

recommended that volumetric

management point of view

detectors are installed in all rooms,

for example:

thus increasing the level of safety

perimeter protection can be used

this will also make the system easier


to manage

detector for the living room: zone 1;

magnetic contacts for doors and


windows: zone 2;

daytime area volumetric detectors


(kitchen, studio): zone 3;

sleeping area volumetric detector


(bedrooms, hallways, service
bathroom); zone 4;

during the night;

volumetric sensors can be armed,

it is recommended that volumetric

whilst leaving perimeter sensors

systems are always installed, as

disarmed, during short absences

the intruder may be able to break

Arrangement of the components and wiring layout

Study

Bedroom
Kitchen

SYMBOL LEgEND
Activator

Bathroom

Hallway

Burglar-alarm central unit


Contact interface

Living room

IR sensor
Balcony

Second
bathroom
Children
bedroom

Magnetic contact
Indoor siren
Outdoor siren

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 193

General rules for installation

Example: apartment burglar-alarm system


The power supply unit can be

disturbed, and will be unable to hear

During the installation of the system,

installed in the area of the electric

the police force approaching.

the job of the installer can be made

distribution board.

An outdoor siren with optic diffuser

easier by filling a system card,

The central u-itnit must be installed in

shall also be installed outside on the

including all the configuration

a protected area, that can be reached

balcony, for easy identification from

information in one document, as well

easily by the user.

the outside, of the system in alarm

as consumptions and positioning

In order to facilitate arming of the

state.

of the devices. The card will also

system, an auxiliary transponder

When positioning the volumetric

be useful after installation should,

arming device should also be

sensors, it will be necessary to check

for example the system need

included.

the coverage area and comply

extending. Detailed information on

If installation of the arming device

with the recommendations of the

the compiling and use of the system

on the outside of the property is not

following pages.

card can be found in the system

possible or desired, the activation of

Using the system diagram, ensure

manuals.

the volumetric sensor of the living

that 24 hour autonomy is guaranteed

room should be delayed. On the

with only one outdoor siren.

other hand, if the arming device


is installed outside, zone 1 will be
activated without delay.
The system will be completed by the
installation of an indoor siren in the
hallway area, so that the intruder will
be confused by the high noise, and

List of Items required


Description

ITEM

Consumption QuantitY

Central unit with dialling device

3486

50 mA

Transponder activator

L4607

12 mA

Transponder

3540

Power supply

E46ADCN

Jointed pass. IR detector

L4611

4.5 mA

Contact interface

3480

5 mA

5 mA

Outdoor siren

4072L

Indoor siren

4070

Outdoor siren storage battery

3505/12

1
1

Indoor siren storage battery

3505/6

Anti-tamper device

L4630

13

Magnetic contact

Configurators

3501K

* item to be selected based on the doors and windows characteristics

194 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

installation of modular devices


IN FLUSH MOUNTED BOXES

IN WALL MOUNTED BOXES

the wire burglar-alarm system is

if the flush mounted box is different

this series of boxes already has a

compatible with systems made using

from the Bticino standard (box with

supporting frame for the devices and

the axOlutE, liVinGliGHt and

reduced depth, less than 52 mm),

the liVinGliGHt boxes have white

Mtix series and therefore uses the

proceed as follows: completely

cover plate When installing modular

same boxes, supporting frames and

remove the tamper rod

devices inside wall mounted boxes or

cover plates When using standard

corner boxes proceed as follows:

flush mounted boxes (depth 52 mm)

remove the cap (A) from the

embedded in the mortar level with

bottom of the devices by rotating

the plaster/tile, or in any case where

it 90;

the maximum depth from the bottom


of the box to the finished wall is less

Do not fit the clear protection


cover (B)

< 52 mm

than 60 mm, cut the tamper rod (1)

fit the devices inside the wall

at the first reference notch, insert it in

mounted (or corner) boxes

the appropriate housing, rotate it 90


and then remove it completely

in this case, the anti-tamper

Place the tip to the bottom of the box

protection (C) is already on the box

without pushing too hard and cut the

Pay attention to ensure that the

rod level with the box insert the rod

tamper rod of the box fits perfectly

(1) protection device (tamper) in the

500 - 503E - 504E - 506L

in the preset hole at the back of the

appropriate housing, rotate 90, and

IMPIANT O

90

52 mm

ON
OF F

device

remove completely

Warning: BTicino wall mounted boxes are suitable

for installation of devices with level 1 performance.


For level 2 performance (CEI 79-2 standard) use the

< 60 mm

90

box 502PA for angle installation.

2
IMPIANT O

However, if the maximum depth from


the bottom of the box to the finished

ON
OF F

< 52 mm

wall plane is 60 mm, insert the

appropriate rod protection device

90

fix the devices to the flush mounted

(tamper) in its housing (1), rotate it

boxes

90, and remove it completely

Warning: the use of the tamper rod for the protection

500 - 503E - 504E - 506L

of FLuSH MOuNTED BOXES devices with BTicino

supports is a necessary requirement to assure level

1
90

IMPIANT O

60 mm

ON
OF F

2 protection in accordance with CEI 79-2 standard.


For the selection of the flush mounted boxes see the
general Installation Catalogue.
Check that there is no damage at the bottom of

the box in the tamper rod working area. Take the


necessary measures to solve any problems.

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 195

General rules for installation

Modular power supplies


All the power supplies are sold with

Installation of power supply E47ADCN -

Installation of power supply E46ADCN

Tamper device against the opening

E47/12

These devices are installed inside

of the switchboard.

These devices are installed inside the

standard flush mounted or wall

Depending on the power supply

switchboard F115/8A.

mounted switchboards.

being used, two types of installations

If required, install the back-up

Warning: In order to assure level 2 performance

are possible.

battery(ies) in the appropriate

in accordance with CEI 79-2 standard, it will be

housing of the 7.2 Ah enclosure

necessary to use flush mounted switchboards with

F115/8B.

opening protection, or wall mounted switchboards

For batteries of higher capacity check

with opening and tear protection. If the power

the compatibility with the F115/8B

supply is installed in switchboards without door,

enclosure. When the N.C. contact is also

ensure that it is not subjected to water sprays.

being used for additional tampering

Ensure that the vents are not obstructed. A two-pole

protection of the battery, connect the

thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact

contact on the F115/8B enclosure to a

separation of at least 3 mm must be used, positioned

tamper line of the system.

near the power supply. The function of the circuit

Warning: for batteries of sizes not compatible

breaker is to disconnect and protect the power

with F115/8B enclosures use the required DIN

supply.

switchboard in the general BTicino catalogue.

NOTE: For more information and for the wiring

In order to assure level 2 performance in accordance

requirements refer to the instructions supplied with

with CEI 79-2 standard, it will be necessary to use

the power supplies.

90
2
1
90

wall mounted switchboards with opening and


tear protection. If the power supply is installed in
switchboards without door, ensure that it is not
subjected to water sprays.

Battery

N.C. contact

196 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

Central unit with display


WALL MOUNTED INSTALLATION
after fixing the base and performing
all connections, install the central

OF F

unit ensuring that the cables are

ON

BUS

arranged in a way that they will not


be damaged NOTE Before installing

the burglar-alarm central unit


ensure that the sliding switch on the
back is in the ON position.

WARNINGS FOR ALL CENTRAL


UNITS

Warning: both in wall mounted


installation and in MultiBOx
switchboards, in order to ensure
compliance with level 2 of CEi 79-2

Wall mounted installation of 3485 or 3485B central units. This same method is also used for the installation of the
3486 central unit.

standard, it will be necessary to use


the 3484 tamper for the protection of
the GSM antenna, as explained in the
installation manual of the central unit

impianto
on

off

PROTECTION OF PSTN CENTRAL


UNITS FROM LIGHTNING

it is good practice to protect the


system from lightning by using surge
protective devices, SPD, belonging to

2
3

class ii

for the protection of burglar-alarm


central units 3485 and 3486 from

surges from the telephone line, the use


of the Plt1 device is recommended,
connecting the corresponding earth
clamp to the "earth" reference of the

impianto

Installation of the 3486 central unit inside a


MuLTIBOX switchboard.

on

off

SPD limiter installed in the apartment


switchboard for further details refer
to the instructions supplied with the
central units or the relevant tECHniCal
SHEEtS
NOTE: the central units are supplied with the tamper line clamps (-/T1) circuited for the use of the local
tamper T1 (wall mounted installation with metal base). This is compulsory to ensure that the central
unit complies with level 2 of CEI 79-2 standards in terms of possible tampering (tear protection). For
installations inside MuLTIBOX boxes ensure the connection of a NC circuit breaker to the -/T1 clamps for
the tamper function. For further information see the central unit installation manual.

Local tamper T1

Tamper line (see note)

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 197

General rules for installation

IR detectors
ADJUSTABLE IR DETECTOR

radio ir detector 3440

HC/HS/L/N/NT4611

IR MINI DETECTOR N4640


AND N4640B

In addition to the indications shown

Two installation modes are possible:

The base of the detector has a

for the installation of modular

Wall mounted installation

particular shape that enables wall

devices, also take into account

Angle installation

mounted installation in 4 different

that before installing the swivel IR


sensor the adjustment fixing screw
(1) at the back of the detector must
be loosened in order to allow the

Before permanently securing the object ensure that


the radio communication with the HC/HD/HS/L/N/
NT4618 receiver is working correctly.

detector to turn.

modes:

Wall mounted installation

Angle installation

Front angle installation

Tilted angular installation

Note: the screw will be tightened after the System


test and protected zone check, thus setting the
central unit in maintenance mode.

Wall mounted installation

Wall mounted installation

molla
tamper

Angle installation

Angle installation

MOD

Note: for other installation modes see the instruction


leaflet.

198 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

Various sensors
LAYOUT FOR MAGNETIC

FLOODING DETECTOR HA/

CONTACTS

HB/L/4619

During the installation of the

Fix the device to the wall using

Place the rope contact preferably

magnetic contacts, if a specific

double sided adhesive tape or screws

in the middle of the rolling shutter

underground conduit is not being

and plugs. After completing the

box and then fasten it. Then fasten

installed, ensure appropriate surface

configuration fit the key covers using

the end of the rope to the rolling

trunking up to the jambs of doors

the spacers supplied.

shutter with a screw. The rope can be

and windows. The wires of the

Note: If the sensor cable needs shortening, cut the

extended up to 3.4 m.

contacts will then have to be run to

excess off and connect to the probe terminals.

NOTE: The rope must be set between the window

DETECTOR FOR SHUTTERS

the point on the door or window,

and the rolling shutter. Check condition of rope and

where the sensor is being installed.

its sliding movement periodically.

The contact wires have a reduced

In order to prevent the rope from rubbing against

section, which will not cause any

a sharp part of the rolling shutter, you can glue a

problems when refitting the jambs.

square (not supplied) using double-sided adhesive


tape.

Magnetic
contacts
Key-cover
L/N/NT4919

Led

Test

Reset

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 199

General rules for installation

Various sensors
piezoelectric window-

RADIO MAGNETIC CONTACT 3442

breaking detector 3516/3444

The device must be installed inside

The detector must be applied to the

the house, on doors and windows,

glazed part to be protected using the

including sliding ones, and similar

special double-sided adhesive tape

openings, as shown in the figure;

(supplied).

the magnetic contact must be

The glazed part must be between 1.5

fixed in place using the appropriate

and 6 mm thick; the diagonal length

position adjustment spacers, in order

must not exceed 3 m (Fig. 1).

to activate the alarm as soon as the


movable part of the door or window
starts to move away.

Reference
tab
2

25 mm
min.
25 mm
min.

3 m to 6
.5
AX
M m1
o
r
f
ss
ne

mm

ick

Th

Note: Clean and dry glasses before applying the detector.

Note: To ensure correct positioning align the reference notches of the magnetic

Press hard to ensure optimum adhesion.

contact of the transmitter

200 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

IR BARRIERS 3518 3518/50


3518/150 3519
the two columns must be installed

Each column consists of:

open (break) the cable passage

one in front of the other (fig 1) in the

aluminium section bar

hole at the base of the unit

same direction (both terminal boards

top terminal (base + cover + screw)

placed at the top side or bottom side)

Bottom terminal (base + cover +

(fig 2); the height must be as close


as possible to the ground or to the
lower part of the window (fig 3), with

the terminal strips can be


temporarily removed to help cable
connection

screw)

4 screws + 4 screw anchors for wall

for the electric connection, refer to


the Connection diagrams section

mounted

no fixed or removable obstructions

installation

WARNINg: Do not use a shielded cable when

that may interfere with the rays

follow the instructions on the

connecting the barriers to the contact interface.

(fig 4) so that the receivers are not

instructions leaflet, taking into

directly exposed to sunrays (fig 5)

account the following requirements:

and are not exposed to the rays of

the cable can be inserted from the

other transmitted, either directly or

bottom (inside the wall), or from

by reflection

the outside (exposed) in this case

fig. 1

fig. 2

fig. 4

fig. 5

fig. 3

RX

Note: for further information see the instruction leaflet supplied with the barriers

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 201

General rules for installation

Outdoor siren
1. Remove the two screws (1) and take

4. Insert the screw plastic plugs into the

7. Put the battery (1) or 12V-12Ah

off the external cover (2).

holes and partly tighten the top screws

battery - into the special housing

(1) and the tamper screw (2).

without connecting the Faston


terminals. Connect the electronic

card as shown in the instruction leaflet

supplied with the siren.


1
2

2. Remove the four screws (1) and pull


out the internal protection cover (2).

5. Adjust the tamper screw by using


the notch (1) on the drilling template,

as shown in the picture.


Warning: If the installation or the adjustment of
the tamper screw is carried out incorrectly, the
2

system will not work.


1

1
TEMPLATE

3. By using the drilling template (1),


position the hole (2) near the wireoutlet pipe and scribe the 5 holes.
NOTE: use a 6 mm bit for drilling the holes.

6. Attach the siren to the two top


screws (1). Tighten the two bottom
screws (2). Tighten the four screws
2

completely.

1
1

202 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

CONFIGURATION

General concepts
Configuring the devices of the

perform special functions such as the

CONNECTION / REMOVAL OF

burglar-alarm system means

management of technical alarms (gas

CONFIGURATORS

assigning them their respective

leaks, floods, etc.) or alarm signalling

Before configuring the devices

addresses and operating modes

by means of auxiliary channels.

remove the clear protection cover (1).

The address allows you to solely

The address of the device is

To facilitate connection or removal of

identify each device within the

determined by assigning a value to

the configurators use the appropriate

system; conversely, the operating

the positions:

tool (2).

modes are the specific functions

Z to specify the number of the

performed by each device (central

assigned zone (compulsory) of the

unit, detectors, sirens, etc.).

device, if this belongs to the group

In addition to the typical functions

of detectors. If the device belongs to

of any burglar-alarm system, such as

the group of connectors, this position

the tripping delay of a detector or the

must not be configured;

management of a balanced contact

N to specify the progressive number

line, it is possible through the

(compulsory) of the device within the

configuration of the operating mode

above-mentioned zone.

to enable the devices in order to

Activator device

Auxiliary devices
ZONE 9

ZONE 0

Z =0
N =1

Central unit

Z =0
N =2

N = 1
AUX = MOD = -

N = 9
AUX = MOD = -

1 9 max

1 9 max
BUS

Sensors

OK
CLEAR

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

ZONE 8
ZONE ...
ZONE 1

Z =1
N =1

Z =1
N =9

72 devices max.
1 9 max

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 203

Z
N
AUX

Configuration

General concepts
Z
N
AUX

Example of IR detector configuration.

AUXILIARY CHANNELS

First sensor belonging to zone 2, with

In addition to the typical functions,

the three lanes and act accordingly,

pulse count function enabled.

the devices of the My Home Burglar-

based on their configuration.

alarm system can also perform a

If the there is any information

range of functions independent

connected to intrusion events, the

VALUE

from the status of the burglar-alarm

devices activate local signallings

system itself (armed or disarmed).

(sirens), or remote signallings

No.

This is possible thanks to a particular

(telephone dialling devices); if on

MOD

communication channel of the

the other hand the information

AUX

none

burglar-alarm and automation

relates to technical alarms, based

bus, called auxiliary channel, used

on the set operating parameters,

Configurator
position
Z
N

AUX

by some devices (such as the

the devices activate to generate

auxiliary channel interface or the

alarm or prealarm signals, or to

radio receiver) for the transmission

reinstate safety within the controlled

of information such as health

environment. Some typical examples

emergency, robbery emergency etc.

are the application for the automatic

In order to better clarify this concept,

shutting off of the gas piping

the burglar-alarm system may be

following the detection of natural

compared to a 3 lane road, with

gas leaks, described in this guide, and

Example of contact interface

the first one used for the transit of

the operation of the burglar-alarm

configuration. Fourth sensor of zone

police cars (information connected

central unit in ADEMCO protocol

3, with balanced protection of the

to intrusions or burglary), while the

mode (forwarding of telephone

contact line.

second is for service cars (information

calls to vigilance bodies following a

connected with the operation of

burglar-alarm or a technical alarm

the system), and the third lane is for

event).

emergency services (information

In this case, when configuring the

connected with auxiliary alarms or

3486 central unit, the use of the

events).

auxiliary channel with the type of

Auxiliary devices are capable of

technical alarm that generates the

handling the sets of information from

call is already set, as shown in the

Z
N
MOD
AUX

Configurator position

VALUE

Z1

N1

MOD1

N.C.

Tamper line

Balance resistance
10 K 5 % 1/4 W

- C1 - C2
AR T .F482

204 MY HOME

following table.

N.C.

C2 C1

Burglar alarm

TYPE OF TECHNICAL ALARM

COMBINED AUXILIARY CHANNEL

Gas leak

Freezer

Flooding

Anti-panico

General technical alarms

5-6-7

Fire

Remote assistance

Configuration example

Zone 2 house perimeter:

the following drawing shows

Zone 4 bedrooms, hallway,

the example of the configuration

protected by magnetic contacts

bathroom: protected by volumetric

of the burglar-alarm system of

on the french windows and the

detectors configured with Z=4 and

the apartment described in the

windows, connected to three

n=1 4

section "GEnEral rulES fOr

interfaces configured with Z=2 and

Devices such as the indoor siren,

inStallatiOn" the configuration of

n=1 - 3;

the transponder connector, and the

Zone 3 Kitchen and studio:

the devices depending on the area to

separator, are only configured in

be protected is the following:

protected by volumetric detectors

the n socket corresponding to the

Zone 1 living room: protected by

configured with Z=3 and n=1, and

number of the device within the

Z=3 and n=2;

system

a magnetic contact with interface


configured with Z=1 and n=2 on
the entrance door and a volumetric
detector configured with Z=1 and
n=1;

Siren

Balcony

4072L

3510

Bedroom
BuS
3510

Z=4
N=2

N=2

Contact
interface

Transponder
activator

Second
IR sensor

bathroom

Z =2
Z=2
N=2

3510

3510

Z =2
Z=2
N=3

L4611
L4607

3511

F482
Z=4
N=1

IR sensor

Z=4
N=3

Z=4
N=4

Children's
bedroom

L4611
L4611

L4611

IR sensor

IR sensor

F482

Hallway
3
6
9

Kitchen

3510

3586

Bathroom

N=1

Z=3
N=2

Indoor siren
IR sensor

L4611

4070

N=1

Study
Z=3
N=1

Z1
Z1=2
=2
N1=1

IR sensor

3510
T

AR T .F482

L4611

L4611

IR sensor

- C1 - C2

C2 C1

L4607

Z=1
N=1

Z1 =1
Z1=1
N1=2

Living room

Transponder
activator

F482

3511

- C1 - C2
AR T .F482

Contact interface

02

C2 C1

F482

Contact interface

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 205

COnfiGuratiOn

use of the Youproject program


for the configuration of the system
the configuration of the system can

the software produces a paper report

be performed using the appropriate

with technical information for the

design program called Youproject,

installation of the system, which also

conceived to automatically perform

includes the configuration, and the

all the specific and predictable

list of the necessary materials

functions inside the home


automation system (placement of
devices, dimensional and electrical
calculation, allocation of addresses,
configuration of tables )

Youproject program screen with the data of the system


to be configured

Report generated by the program with


the configuration and the list of devices

206 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

technical alarms: shop burglar-alarm


if there is a robbery, the assistant can

means of:

local sound alarm, so that the robber

press a hidden pushbutton which

one or more telephone calls

can be surprised, as he does not

activates the burglar-alarm central

one or more sms (using the MY

know that the call has been made

HOME portal)

unit telephone communicator which

Suspend the call by means of the

one or more e-mail (using the MY

sends a request for assistance to the

HOME portal)

My Home Portal this will warn the

TV/SAT
IPTVa
the activation does not generate

owner or people indicated by him, by

remote control on the burglar-alarm


central unit

BURGLAR ALARM
BuS

Burglar-alarm
central unit
diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

TV/SAT

SCS/SCS
videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

Technical
tvcc alarm
interface

luci

IPTV

interface

www

irriga

www

irrig

OUT
ART.F422

OK
CLEAR

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

N.C. pushbutton

Telephone line
termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

www

irrigazione

To any other systems

CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS


technical alarm interface 3481

TV/SAT
IPTV central unit, for coupling with the signalling message of the
NOTE*: the auxiliary channel number 7 must also be entered at
the programming stage, on the burglar-alarm
telephone communicator.

BURGLAR ALARM

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

BuS

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

1 luci

1st AuX devicetvcc

No. of auxiliary channel *

Anti-burglary mode

N.C.
pushbutton

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 207

COnfiGuratiOn

technical alarms: anti-panic alarm

one or more e-mail (using the

if the owner hears strange noises

the burglar-alarm central unit

in the home, he presses a special

telephone communicator sends a

pushbutton to activate all the

request for assistance to the My Home

this function can be activated with

Burglar-alarm system sirens (only

Portal, which warns the owner or

the burglar-alarm system switched on

with the system armed, otherwise

people indicated by him, by means of:

or off and in any division condition

only the indoor siren activates) to

one or more telephone calls;

confuse any intruder with the intense

one or more sms (using the

sound

MY HOME portal)

MY HOME portal);

TV/SAT

Indoor siren
(optional)

IPTV

BURGLAR ALARM
BuS

diffusione sonora

antifurto

SCS/SCS
interface

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

TV/SAT

Burglar-alarm
central unit
controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

IPTV

Technical alarm
interface

www

irr

OUT
ART.F422

OK
CLEAR

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

N.C. pushbutton

Telephone line
termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

www

irrigazione

To any other systems

CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS


TV/SAT
technical alarm interface 3481

indoor siren HC/HD/HS/4070 - n/nt4070


IPTV

BURGLAR ALARM
BuS

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

1st AuX device

controllo carichi

energia

luci

no configurator
N
MOD

N.C.
pushbutton

208 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

anti-panic mode

tvcc

1 Indoor siren
no configurator

N
MOD

www

irri

technical alarms: flooding control


a water pipe leak, or a tap left open,

alarm system, which can activate

request to the MY HOME portal, which

may cause serious damage if not

an actuator that controls a solenoid

will in turn warn the owner, or any

immediately detected With MY

valve in addition, it will also activate

nominated individual, by means of:

HOME, the signal transmitted by

an indoor siren and the telephone

one or more telephone calls;

the sensor is received by a radio

communicator of the burglar-alarm

one or more sms messages;

receiver connected to the burglar-

unit, which sends the assistance

one or more e-mails

TV/SAT

Indoor
siren

IPTV

Radio
receiver

BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
Burglar-alarm
central unit

SCS interface

usione sonora

antifurto

TV/SAT

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

IPTV

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

Relay
actuator

tvcc

www

irrigazione

OUT
ART.F422

OK
CLEAR

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

Flooding
detector

Solenoid valve

Telephone line
videocitofonia

diffusione sonora

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

www

irrigazione

To any other systems

CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS


relay actuator 3479

TV/SAT
IPTV radio receiver. Configuration for manual reset solenoid valve. When
NOTE*: the number 4 of the auxiliary channel is the one shown in the AuX socket of the HC/HS/L/N/NT4618
using a different solenoid valve connect configurator no. 3 to the MOD socket (bistable mode).

BURGLAR ALARM

BuS

1
antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

1st AuX device


tvcc

No. of auxiliary channel *

monostable contact

www

Transformer

Solenoid valve

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 209

irrigazio

ne

ne

COnfiGuratiOn

technical alarms: flooding control


CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS
radio receiver HC/HD/HS/l/n/nt4618
NOTE*: The number of the auxiliary channel must also be indicated during the programming of the burglar-alarm central unit, for coupling to the signalling message of the
telephone communicator, as well as in the configuration of the relay actuator that controls the electrovalve.
The coupling between the flood detector and the radio receiver must be completed before installing the detector itself. To save the detection device see the Configuration section.

Z
N
AUX

TV/SAT

zona 9

1st detector device in zone 9

No. of auxiliary channel *

IPTV

BuS

BURGLAR ALARM
diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

www

indoor siren HC/HD/HS/4070-n/nt4070


in alternative to the radio flood

TV/SAT

detector, contact interface 3480,

IPTV

together with sensor 3482, can also

BURGLAR ALARM

be used
BuS

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

N
MOD

N
MOD

NC
Alarm reset

Tamper line
3482

1st Indoor siren


no configurator

210 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

Z1=

19

Interface address

N1=

19

Interface address

Z2=

No configurator

N2=

No configurator

MOD1=

NO contact technical alarm

MOD2=

No. of auxiliary channel (see note above)

www

technical alarms: gas leak alarm with burglar-alarm system


the application shows the use of the

a technical alarm signal managed

owner or people indicated by him,

methane gas detector combined in

by the burglar-alarm system to close

by means of:

the burglar-alarm system by means

the solenoid valve and at the same

One or more telephone calls;

of an auxiliary channel interface

time, makes a telephone call via the

One or more sms;

central unit/dialling device to the

One or more e-mail

When the detector detects gas, by

TV/SAT
My Home Portal which warnsIPTV
the

means of the interface it generates

BURGLAR ALARM
BuS

diffusione sonora

antifurto

TV/SAT

SCS/SCS
termoregolazione
interface

videocitofonia

Burglar-alarm
lan
central unit

controllo

IPTV

controllo carichi

energia
Technical
alarm
interface

luci

tvcc
Relay
actuator

www

irrig

OUT
ART.F422

OK
CLEAR

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

Bticino

Telephone line
videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

MET ANO

Solenoid valve

Methane gas
detector (*)

tvcc

www

irrigazione

Transformer
12 Vdc

Note: (*) maximum 3 devices with transformer F91/12E


maximum 2 devices with transformer HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4541

CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS


Gas detector HC/HD/HS/l/n/nt4511/12

technical alarm interface 3481

Note: No configuration

Note*: auxiliary channel number 1 must


also be indicated while programming
TV/SAT
IPTV
the burglar-alarm central unit to link it to the telephone communicator signalling
message.

BURGLAR ALARM

automazione

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

To transformer
F91/12E

To the auxiliary channel


interface

videocitofonia

BuS

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

1st AuX device

No. of auxiliary channel *

technical alarm

From methane gas


detector

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 211

CONFIGURATION

Technical alarms: gas leak alarm with burglar-alarm system


CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS
Relay actuator 3479

Indoor siren HC/HD/HS/4070-N/NT4070 (optional)

Note*: the auxiliary channel number 1 is that given in the AUX housing of the

Note*: The audible signal of the indoor siren does not activate for technical alarms.

TV/SAT

technical alarm interface 3481.

This function
IPTV is performed by the natural gas detector.

BURGLAR ALARM

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

Transformer
F91/12E

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

2nd AUX device

No. of auxiliary channel *

monostable contact

energia

luci

N
MOD

tvcc

Burglar alarm

www

1st Indoor siren

1o 5

technical alarm
deactivation *

N
MOD

Solenoid valve
L4525/12NO

212 MY HOME

BUS

irr

technical alarms: telephone signalling of the


tripping of the general circuit breaker
With home switchboards fitted with a

breaker as soon as one of the above

the MY HOME WEB portal, which will

SalVaVita StOP&GO circuit breaker,

problems occur, the SalaVaVita

then send an alarm message by SMS

it is possible to be notified when

StOP&GO device automatically

and/or e-mail

the main circuit breaker trips, due

closes the tripped circuit breaker and

this function is only valid with 3485

to lightning, electric disturbance or

reinstates power supply in full safety

and 3486 central units fitted with

system fault

if however the fault remains, due to

telephone communicator

the main condition for this useful

an insulation defect, or line overload,

function, is that the SalVaVita

the burglar-alarm system will send

StOP&GO device is connected to

an SMS telephone message or a

the burglar-alarm system through

pre-recorded message, to notify the

an interface, for the detection of the

user of the problem the telephone

status of the earth leakage circuit

message can also be forwarded to

b
a
b

ART.3485

_
T1

OFF
ON

BUS

BURGLAR

Central unit

STOP&gO

ALARM
BuS

automazione

Control interface
6

5 4
ART. F80CMD

1 2 3

Technical alarm
interface

diffusione sonora

antifurto

1st AuX device

No. of auxiliary channel *

technical alarm with normally closed contact

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

select mode 3 ( fault


notification) by operating
the selector with a flat head
screwdriver.

NOTA*: auxiliary channel number 3 must


also be indicated in the burglar-alarm central
unit programming to link it to the telephone
communicator signalling message.
Auxiliary channels between 1 and 9 can be selected.

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 213

COnfiGuratiOn

advanced applications: switching on the lights


because of an alarm
an interesting application is the

risk of immediate identification

device devices to dialogue

possibility of automatically switching

will induce the thief to leave this

Obviously the lights can also be

on all the lights, or a group of them,

function is obtained by connecting

switched on and off by means

inside the home, for a preset time

the automation device and burglar-

of the local control device in the

following an intrusion this adds an

alarm systems with an interface

automation system

element of confusion to the sound

which allows the burglar-alarm


IPTV
central unit and the automation

TV/SAT

signal emitted by the siren and the

BURGLAR ALARM
BuS

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

SCS/SCS
tvcc
interface

luci

www

irr

OUT
ART.F422

general control
of the lights

ON
GEN

TV/SAT

IPTV

OFF

AUTOMATION

BuS

automazione

diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS


SCS/SCS interface f422

General control of the lights H/l4652/2


IPTV

TV/SAT

BURGLAR ALARM
BuS

SCS/SCS
diffusione sonora

antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia
interface

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

OUT

I1/I2/I3=
No
Configuration

ART.F422

A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2

AUTOMATION

I4= interfacing mode

MOD= burglar-alarm

www

No configuration

O/I

TV/SAT
1

tvcc

GEN general configurator

IPTV

ON control (upper key)


and OFF control
(lower key)

BuS

automazione

214 MY HOME

diffusione sonora

antifurto

Burglar alarm

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

irr

usione sonora

ermoregolazione

usione sonora

Advanced applications:
remote assistance request with telephone call
Old or disabled people can send

sends the assistance request to the MY

This function can be activated with

an assistance request, using a

HOME portal, which will then warn the

the burglar-alarm armed or disarmed,

portable remote control. The signal

owner or any nominated individuals,

with any type of division.

sent is captured by a radio receiver

by means of:

connected to the burglar-alarm. The

one or more telephone calls;

burglar-alarm activates an indoor siren

one or more sms;

and the telephone communicator of

one or more e-mail.

TV/SAT

the burglar-alarm central unit, which

Indoor siren
(optional)

IPTV

BURGLAR ALARM
BUS

antifurto

termoregolazione

TV/SAT

SCS/SCS
controllo
interface

videocitofonia

Burglar-alarm
central unit

lan

IPTV

controllo carichi

energia

luci

tvcc

Radio receiver

www

irrigazione

OUT
ART.F422

OK
CLEAR

1
4
7

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

Telephone line

energia

Radio control for


Remote assistance
luci

tvcc

www

irrigazione

CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS


Radio receiver HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4618

Indoor siren HC/HD/HS/4070-N/NT4070 (optional)

NOTE*: If the configurator is not present, auxiliary channel no. 9 is allocated

NOTA*: The audible signalling of the indoor siren does not activate for technical

automatically. This auxiliary channel number must be indicated also at the

alarms. This function is performed by the natural gas detector.

programming stage on the burglar-alarm central unit, for coupling with the
signalling message of the telephone communicator.

zone 1

1st receiver device

1
N
MOD

Z
N
AUX

1 Indoor siren
technical alarm deactivation *

No. of auxiliary channel *

TV/SAT

IPTV

N
MOD

BURGLAR ALARM
antifurto

termoregolazione

videocitofonia

BUS
controllo

lan

controllo carichi

energia

luci

Burglar alarm

tvcc

www

MY HOME 215

irrigazione

Start-up and testing

Start-up
Note: this operation must be carried out after

go back to the maintenance menu;

CENTRAL UNIT 3485/B AND HC/

configuring the system.

check the reception level of the

HD/HS/L/N/NT4601

In order to startup the system, all devices must be


connected and installed properly into their supports.

GSM signal;

When the central unit is switched on

program any scenarios as needed;

for the first time, the Maintenance

Program an IR remote control, a

menu is shown; the slide switch on

transponder key, or a Numeric

the back is in OFF position.

CENTRAL UNIT 3486

code as shown in the following

To activate the central unit and make

When the central unit is switched on

pages;

it operational:

for the first time, the Maintenance

enter time and date;

choose the language;

menu is shown; the slide switch on

edit the names of the zones and

use the central unit to start the

the back is in OFF position.

devices and the division scenarios.

system tutorial;

To activate the central unit and make

WARNING: If the central unit battery is exhausted,

move the slide switch to ON;

it operational proceed as follows:

the GSM module does not operate.

press twice to exit the

choose the language;

use the central unit to start the


tutorial;

maintenance menu (1)

Central UNIT l/n/nt4600/4

return to the maintenance menu;

Remove the support from the box

program a transponder key or a

move the slide switch to ON;

(if already installed) and move the

press CLEAR twice to exit the

changeover switch (1) at the back

enter time and date;

of the device to the OFF position

customize zone, device and

maintenance menu;

select Communication - GSM

(maintenance).

division scenario names.

Management menu and enter the

Power the system and check that the

PIN code;

central unit is in maintenance mode.

go to the main screen by holding

numeric code;

This is confirmed by the AUX (2)

down CLEAR, switch off the central

and 24h (3) red LEDs flashing in

unit;

succession.

disconnect the battery;

insert the SIM card;

connect the battery again and


4-zone central unit

switch the central unit back on


again; wait for the battery to fully

ALLARME
ZONA 1

OFF);

make sure there is a line

connection;

IMPIANTO

charge (icon

Central unit 3485 / 3485B

ON

OFF

wait about one minute; during this


icons might

be displayed.

check the PIN code or check if the

AUXON

ALLARME
ZONA
S 1 PROG

After one minute, both icons should


disappear; if they do not disappear,

24h
TEST

IMPIANTO

PIN

time, the ERROR or

OFF

SIM card is disabled by inserting it in


a mobile phone.

Warning: with the system in Maintenance mode, the batteries of the system are not charged. If the system
remains in this mode for an extended amount of time, the batteries may be damaged.

216 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

Common operations for all


central units
Check if the red LED is on the siren

the polarity (red +, black -).

If central unit L/N/NT4600/4 is

control card.

Warning: when there is a

installed, move the changeover

If it is lit, reverse the connection of

connection with an inversion of

switch (3) at the back of the unit to

the Bus pair.

polarity, the card will be protected

the ON position (active).

Warning: Furthermore, make sure

with 4A fuses placed inside the cable

Fit the central unit inside the box

the yellow LED is off; when it is lit, it

(2). Install the two siren protection

correctly.

indicates the alarm condition, hence

covers.

an abnormal condition in the system.

NOTE: in case a second siren is installed, make sure

in this case, eliminate the anomaly.

to repeat the LED check after its installation. The J1

Now connect the two faston terminals

jumper of the second siren must be cut (see the siren

(1) to the battery paying attention to

technical sheet).

Indoor siren card


A

2
1

J1

Yellow LED

Red LED

A = BUS
B = BATTERY (RED+, BLACK -)
C = SOUND SIGNALLER

Burglar-alarm central unit


L/N/NT 4600/4

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 217

Start-up and testing

Programming of 4050 infrared remote controls


Central UNIT 3486, 3485/B

Pairing of RADIO remote

HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601

controls 348220

Programming remote controls is

Press the transmission pushbutton

1. Switch the system to maintenance

facilitated by the information given

(5) and hold it down until the tone is

mode.

by the display (see the installation

emitted.

2. Press the Radio receiver HC/HD/

manual of the central unit supplied

A tone lasting about half a second

HS/L/N/NT4618 programming

with the device).

means that the programming process

pushbutton for five seconds, until the

Flush mounted central

has been executed correctly.

red LED comes on.

units L/N/NT4600/4

NOTE: A tone lasting about 4 seconds means that

3. Press the connection pushbutton for

After putting the batteries into the

the programming process has not been executed

5 seconds.

remote controls, with the central unit

correctly. hence it will be necessary to repeat the

4. If the pairing of the device has been

in maintenance mode (switch on

operation.

performed correctly, the red LED

the back in OFF position), press the

When the remote control

of the radio receiver will go off.If

P pushbutton (1) using a pencil or

programming has been completed,

this does not happen, repeat the

similar object.

repeat the operation for all supplied

procedure from step 3. If the LED

Make sure that the yellow LED

remote controls (maximum 30).

flashes, it means that the device

PROG (2) is lit and that a short tone

NOTE: in this stage, it is possible to program remote

memory is full.

is emitted.

controls for other systems.

5. To save other devices in the radio

Place the remote control

After programming the last remote

receiver repeat step 2.

transmission lens (3) against the

control, press the S pushbutton (6).

6. Perform self learning of the system

central unit receiving lens (4) in order

Make sure the yellow LED PROG (7)

from the central unit.

to keep it perfectly aligned (cover the

is off.

7. Program the remote controls on the

lens in case of interferences with the

central unit, if this is of a type "with

infrared, e.g. due to the direct light of

display.

lamps or spotlights).

8. Exit maintenance mode.

2
4-zone central unit
24h

TEST

PROG

AUX

Arming

1
24h

1
S

4-zone central unit


24h

PROG

AUX

2
3
4

Key-ring

218 MY HOME

AUX

PROG

TEST

TEST

Burglar alarm

Disarming

Programming of 3530S and 3540 transponders


CENTRAL UNIT 3486, 3485/B

Procedure:

DELETING OR ADDING A

HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601

1. With central unit in maintenance

TRANSPONDER

programming transponders is

mode, press the P key and check if

When using central units 3486,

facilitated by the information given

the yellow lED PrOG lights up

3485/B and HC/HD/HS/l/n/nt4601

by the display (see Central unit

2. re-program the ir remote controls

the deletion of transponders is

installer manual)

first (see chapter rEMOtE COntrOl

facilitated by the information given

PrOGraMMinG)

by the display (see Central unit

FLUSH MOUNTED CENTRAL

3. now, move the badges towards the

installer manual)

UNITS L/N/NT4600/4

transponder reader (figure at bottom

in systems with fluSH mounted

the transponder (badge) programming

left)

central units l/n/nt4600/4, a

operation is necessary in order for it

4. Make sure that two short tones are

new programming process is

to work as a normal infrared remote

emitted: the first is emitted from the

required to delete previously stored

control 4050 Please keep in mind that

transponder reader, the second is

transponders or to add new ones

when the transponder-reader is used

emitted from the central unit

follow the procedure described

as a activator, it will almost always be

5. repeat points 3 and 4 for all available

in section rEMOtE COntrOl

installed in places different from the

badges

PrOGraMMinG (of course, during

one in which the central unit is located

6. Whenyouhavefinishedprogramming

this procedure, the badge will have

therefore, it is recommended to

the last badge, press the S pushbutton

to be moved near the transponder

temporarily connect it near the central

on the central unit (the yellow PrOG

reader instead of the central unit)

unit

lED turns off) and move the back

this procedure will delete all stored

the initial programming - which

selector switch to On - dwg a

transponders (partial deletion is not

is carried out when installing the

possible)

transponder reader shall be


carried out with the central unit in
MaintEnanCE mode (selector switch

IMPIANTO

located on the back in Off position)

4-zone central unit


24h

OFF

TEST

PROG

AUX

ON

LUMINOUS AND AUDIbLE INDICATORS

bUZZER

LED

SYSTEM ENABLED

0.5 sec

OFF

SYSTEM DISABLED

0.5 sec

Fixed green

INCORRECT ACTIVATION

4 sec

Flashing green

ALARM OCCURRED

Fixed red

DEACTIVATION AFTER ALARM OCCURRED


(allows you to check the zone in which the alarm occurred)

0.5 sec

Fixed orange

IMPORTANT: the central unit can save up to 30 system arming/disarming devices. If a


transponder is used as a remote control, only 29 devices can be saved. This is because an IR

bip
tra
cod

35

30

HIG

HS

EC

UR

IT Y

remote control (4050) must always be present.


nsp

on

de

r
R

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 219

Start-uP anD tEStinG

Programming a remote control or a transponder


for several systems
CENTRAL UNIT 3486, 3485/B

FLUSH MOUNTED CENTRAL

AND HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601

UNITS L/N/NT4600/4

Programming is facilitated by the

if you have two or more burglar-alarm

it will be possible to program one or

information given by the display

systems with a flush mounted central

more remote controls able to interact

(see Central unit installer manual)

unit (for example, home and office),

with all systems

Remote control
(transponder)
common to the
two system

1ST SYSTEM (OFFICE)


24h

PROG

AUX

24h

TEST

2ND SYSTEM (HOME)

Office remote
control
(transponder)

TEST

PROG

AUX

Home remote
control
(transponder)

Note: carry out these operations with the two systems already activated: both central units with rear selector switch in ON position.

Press the S pushbutton on the

Warning: When programming a newly-purchased

Note: all previously stored codes of the remote

central unit of the second system (2)

remote control, first of all do the programming

controls are now deleted and can no longer be

and hold it down Send an impulse

described in chapter REMOTE CONTROL

recognised by the central unit. Hence, it will be

using a previously-enabled remote

PROgRAMMINg (user manual).

necessary to re-program all remote controls and

control (keep it at a maximum

NOTE: make sure the system is disabled - green LED

transponders which will need to act on this system

distance of 50 cm from the central

(1) on.

by following the descriptions in chapter REMOTE

unit)

CONTROL PROgRAMMINg (user manual).

Make sure the yellow lED tESt (3)


is on Send a second impulse Make
4

sure the yellow lED PrOG (4) is on


release the S pushbutton (2)

24h

a pencil or a similar object


Make sure a short tone is emitted
3

220 MY HOME

Burglar alarm

TEST

Press the P pushbutton (5) by using

4-zone central unit

PROG

AUX

Direct the remote control previously

wait for the beep sound

after completing the programming

programmed on the first system

from now on, the remote control

operations, press the S pushbutton

towards a 1 to 4 zone divider or

code for the first system will also be

(1) and make sure the yellow lED

connector of the second system

recognised by the second system

PrOG (2) is off

Press the remote control pushbutton

When the remote control

as if it were a normal enabling

programming has been completed,

process

repeat the operation for all remote

if a transponder is used, move it

controls requiring this function (30

towards the transponder reader and

altogether)

Activator

Divider zone 1 to 4
max 50 cm

max 50 cm
1

2
4

4-zone central unit


24h

er

nd

tra
0

53

d3

co

o
nsp

IT Y

UR

EC

HS

HIG

transponder
cod3530

TEST

PROG

AUX

HIGH SECURITY

1 2

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 221

Start-up and testing

System activation
SYSTEM WITH central UNIT

SYSTEM WITH central UNIT

3486, 3485/B HC/HD/HS/L/N/

l/n/nt4600/4

NT4601

First of all, set the central unit to

NOTE: if the two LEDs continue to flash, it means

After completing the operation

ON. To activate the system, direct

that the selector switch at the back of the central

described in the chapter "Putting into

the remote control (1) towards the

unit has not been set to ON. If the 24h LED is steadily

operation" of the system, the central

receiving lens (2) of the central unit at

on, it means that one of the devices is producing a

unit becomes operational.

a maximum distance of 50 cm.

24h alarm. Check if the installation has been carried

Perform a system test as described

Activate the remote control by

out properly (see problems/causes/solutions table).

below.

pressing the pushbutton (3) once

Make sure the green LED ~ (7) is on.

or twice with a time interval of 5

In this condition, the system is activated and

seconds between the first and the

disabled.

ON OFF
slide switch

second time, until the green LED (4)


lights up.
Activate the remote control with the

impianto
on

a
b

off

LU

a
b

pushbutton (3), thus making sure


that the green LED (4) turns off.

24h

TEST

Activate the remote control again

1
S

with the pushbutton (3), thus making


Central unit (3486) rear view

1 6

AUX

PROG

2
3
4

sure that the green LED (4) turns on.


Make sure that the red LEDs AUX (5)
T1
Tamper

222 MY HOME

T1
T2

Burglar alarm

and 24h (6) are off.

Now test the system as indicated in the


next pages.

System test
CENTRAL UNIT 3486, 3485/B

TEST PROCEDURE

AND HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601

1. infrared detector check

access the Maintenance menu and

the red lED should light up when

select tESt, as described in the

passing through the area protected

installer manual supplied with the

by the detector

central unit
1. When the system is disabled (led
on) press S and hold it down
2. Press the pushbutton of one of the
enabled remote controls; the TEST lED
turns on, hence you can now release
the S key
3. after carrying out the verifications
described in the following
paragraphs (test procedure), press
S to end the test; Make sure the TEST
lED turns off

2. Contact check
the red lED of the contact interface
should light up when opening the
windows or entrance door

Central units L/N/NT4600/4


24h

PROG

AUX

24h

TEST

PROG

AUX

Warning : when testing, the central unit L/N/

TEST

NT/4600/4 does not recognize the remote controls


When the rolling shutter controlled
by the rope sensor is raised or
lowered, the red lED of the interface
comes on after the number of pulses
set, and will go off again after 4
seconds

Central units L/N/NT4600/4


24h

TEST

PROG

AUX

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 223

Start-up and testing

System test:
two line contact interfaces check
The interfaces 3480 and F482 are

paragraph 4.4); if it stays on, make

equipped with LED indicators for

sure that the contacts of the two

properly start-up the system.

lines are closed (e.g. windows

During the startup procedure, the

closed).

central unit must not be powered. If it


1. Connect the interface to the SCS bus

when the contact is closed (e.g.

and the wires of the contacts and

window closed), the LED must

tamper to their terminals.

be off,
when the contact is open (e.g.

and close again using the transparent

window open) the LED must

shell (interface 3480).

be on.

Tamper.

be off,

4.4 Make sure the LED is on when


opening the various contacts:

3. Close all contacts, including the

when the contact is closed (e.g.


window closed), the LED must

is, it must be in test mode.

2. Insert the required configurators

4.3 Make sure the LED is on when


opening the various contacts:

when the contact is open (e.g.


window open) the LED must
be on.

COMPLETION OF THE TEST


STAGE

3486, 3485/B and HC/HD/HS/L/N/


NT4601 central units

Procedure for 3480

Exit the Maintenance" menu


following the procedure described in

4. Power the item.

the installation manual supplied with

Procedure for F482


Tamper contact,
line 1, line 2 LED
indicator activated

the central unit.

L/N/NT4600/4 central units


Once the checks have been
completed press pushbutton (1),

ART.F482

Tamper contact
LED indicator
activated

C2 C1

Line 2 LED
indicator
activated
Line 1 LED
indicator
activated

4.1 If the LEDs start flashing, check


the configuration and repeat the
startup procedure. If the LEDs
flash quickly, only 5/6 times before
stopping, go on to the following
paragraph.
4.2 If the tamper contact LED is
now off, go on to paragraph 4.3);
if it stays on, make sure that the
tamper line is short-circuited and
then repeat the procedure from
paragraph 4).

4.1 If the LEDs start flashing, check


the configuration and repeat
the startup procedure. If the
LED flashes quickly, only 5/6
times before stopping, go on to
paragraph 4.2).
4.2 If the LED is now off, go on to
paragraph 4.3); if it stays on, make
sure:

check that the TEST LED (2) has


gone off and move the ON-OFF
selector (3) to the OFF position.
Remove the swivel IR detectors
from the box and tighten the screw
locking the adjustments.
4-zone central unit
24h

that the tamper line is shortcircuited and then repeat the


procedure from paragraph 4)

PROG

AUX

well closed and then repeat the

procedure from paragraph 4)


after switching the power off.

ALLARME
ZONA 1

the contacts of the two lines


are closed (e.g. windows
closed) and then repeat the

ON

OFF

procedure from paragraph 4.2)

2 LEDs are now off, go on to


ALLARME
ZONA 1

NTO

Burglar alarm

the enclosure of the interface is

4.3 If the line contact 1 / line contact

224 MY HOME

TEST

IMPIANTO

T - C1 - C2

ON

Configuration or system modifications Maintenance


If it is necessary to modify the
4-zone central unit

configuration of the system after


starting it up, follow the procedure

ALLARME
ZONA 1

IMPIANTO

below after disabling the system:


ON

OFF

Central UNITS 3486, 3485/B


AND HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601

Go to the Maintenance" menu


following the procedure described
in the installation manual supplied
with the central unit;

NOTE: for normal operation of the system, please

Warning: If you are going to install a device next

refer to the guidelines specified in the User

to the central unit, do not place the tamper rod in

manual.

IMPIANTO

Disconnect the power supply from

ALLARME
ZONA 1

the system;

ON

the new device as the system would produce a 24h


alarm. The anti-tampering protection is guaranteed
by the tamper rod installed on the central unit.

OFF

Replace or add the configurators to


the devices;

Connect the power supply;

Ensure that the central unit


performs the system self-learning
procedure;

Perform the system test.

ORDINARY MAINTENANCE OF
THE BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM

Central UNITS L/N/NT4600/4

after disabling the system, remove


the central unit from the box and
set the selector (1) to OFF within
30 seconds, otherwise a 24h alarm
signal will be produced, if the

It is recommended that a test is


performerd regularly to check that
the system i working correctly, that
the system back-up batteries are
charged, as well as the condition of
any radio devices.

tamper rod has been installed;

switch off the system;

replace or add the configurators to


the devices;

switch on the system;

flip the selector switch (1) to ON;

install the central unit in the box;

activate the system by sending one


or two impulses with the remote
control.

Burglar alarm

MY HOME 225

226 MY HOME Energy management

CONTENTS

MY HOME Energy management


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Energy consumption display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Load control management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Energy management MY HOME 227

GENERAL FEATUREs

saving energy has never been this easy


MY HOME, the winning
combination
Displaying information on energy

very much more aware of their

consumption and managing and

energy use, be it to meet their green

controlling energy loads; this is

aspirations or their desire to make

whAT THE NEw My Home solutions

financial savings

deliver to end users - making them

Visibility drives savings


An aware user is one that saves

changing there (bad) routines or

with resulting benefits for the

correcting faults which result in

environment and in reduced costs

savings of 10 to 15%

studies have shown that displaying


energy consumption results in users

228 MY HOME Energy management

My Home enables you to:

Create a living space with


maximum comfort, only using the
necessary energy and heat

Improve the energy class of the


building, and therefore also of its
economic value

Multimedia Touch Screen

Touch Screen

Energy management MY HOME 229

GENERAL FEATUREs

To ensure energy eciency


with MY HOME is easy

BUS-SCS MY HOME

TV/SAT

IPTV

Heating only when


and where needed
Using this function, the user can decide the
antifurto

Zone
temperature
termoregolazione
control

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

temperature of each individual room based on its

energia

luci

tvcc

use and the time of day It is also possible to select


the rooms that are not being used, and therefore
dont need to be heated
The activation of the system also takes into account
the heat produced by the sun

uP to

30%
sAVings

switch lights o, switch


savings on
energia

Light automation
luci
management

Management
of www
lighting depending
on the
tvcc
irrigazione
presence of people and the level of natural light:
this provides maximum visual comfort for the
users and greatly contributing to energy savings
Depending on the space, savings of 55% to 75%
are possible

BUS-SCS MY HOME

230 MY HOME Energy management

uP to

75%
sAVings

www

irrigazione

ne

TV/SAT

IPTV

A complete consumption and energy


production check-up
The user can display on the touch screen not only the
videocitofonia

controllo

lan

controllo carichi

Consumption
energia
display

luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
consumptions
inside their home
(power,
water and gas1)),

but also the energy and hot water ouput obtained using
photovoltaic or solar panels

uP to

15%
sAVings

With a few simple steps, the user can select the type of
consumption that needs to be checked, the type of display
(instantaneous or graphs), and the period (day, month,
year) Extremely useful information, for using ones own
systems at their best, reducing waste and faults

TV/SAT

IPTV

NOTE: 1) subject to type of meters installed for gas and water.

New heading required


This function can be used to manage the maximum
termoregolazione

videocitofonia

controllo

lan

Management
of loads

controllo carichi

power to be used, and automatically disconnect the least


energia

luci

tvcc

www

important appliances in case of overload

irrigazione

Using the Touch screens, the user can check the total
consumption of the individual circuit, and decide if the
priorities need changing
The user can also decide to delay the activation of a
particular load

Energy management MY HOME 231

GENERAL FEATUREs

Energy eciency management devices overview

Splitter

Probe

Local Display

Splitter
management
interface

99 zone central unit


Distribution board

Room-by-room temperature control

Zone temperature control

Probe
99 zone central unit

232 MY HOME Energy management

Air conditioning

Splitter management Splitter


interface
Touch Screen

Washing machine
Photovoltaic
panel

Thermal
solar panels

Microwave

Flush mounted
16A actuator

Bus meter with


toroids

Pulse counter
interface

Pulse counter
interface

Pulse counter
interface

Touch Screen
Water meter
with pulse output
Gas meter
with pulse output

Automatic switching o of heating when windows are


opened

Consumption and production


display

Irrigation management

Load control management

m3/

m3/

KWh/
Touch Screen

KWh
Kcal

Central unit for load management

Energy management MY HOME 233

234 MY HOME Energy management

CONTENTS

MY HOME Temperature control


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Energy management MY HOME 235

GENERAL FEATUREs

MY HOME temperature control can be used:


WHEN THE SYSTEM IS PRESET

Bathroom

FOR ZONE MANAgEMENT


Kitchen

A system is preset for zone

Bedroom

management when the solenoid


valves for the management of
each zone can be installed on the
distribution collector

Hall

Solenoid valve

Living room

A system is divided into Zones with radiant panel heating

Collector

Bedroom
Collector

Kitchen
Bathroom

Living room

Box

WHEN THE SOLENOID vALvES


USED ARE:
The solenoid valves that manage the

The MY HOME temperature

from the MY HOME temperature

zones can be of two types:

control system can also manage

control system; they need an

1. with ON/OFF contacts

the circulation pumps (see Fig 3)

external control unit, supplied by

2. With open/close contacts

WARNING: The proportional mixing

the manufacturer of radiant heating

valves cannot be managed directly

panel systems

YEs YEs YEs

236 MY HOME

IN SYSTEMS WITH:

Radiators

Radiant panels

Fan-coil

WITH SYSTEMS OF:

Heating

Bathroom

Cooling

Both

Kitchen

Bedroom

IN CENTRAL HEATINg
SYSTEMS WITH DISTRIbUTION
COLLECTOR FOR EACH HOME
In central heating systems where
each Home is fitted with its own

Hall

distribution collector, it is possible to:

Living room

by installing a meter on the


collector input, measure the
amount of heat used;

by installing solenoid valves, to


manage the dierent zones of the
Home

Bathroom
Kitchen

Bedroom

Hall

Distribution
collector

Living room

Zone solenoid
valve

Meter

Example of central heating system split into zones, for several apartments.
Main boiler

Energy management MY HOME 237

GENERAL FEATUREs

Devices
The MY HOME temperature control
system consists of the following
devices:

Power supply

Temperature central unit

Probes:

Probes

they must be installed in each zone,

Actuators

so that the temperature of the rooms

Contact interface (OPTIONAL)

can be detected and if necessary


locally changed, in relation to the
temperature set on the control unit

Power supply

99 zone central unit

Power supply:

Temperature control unit:

for MY HOME systems

this is the unit used for system

Zone 1 probe

2 relay
actuator

configuration, program
customisation, and the display of
information This is available in
the catalogue in the 4 zone flushmounting version or in the 99 zone
wall-mounting version

Actuators:
activate the solenoid valves and
the circulation pumps
The number and type of actuators
depends on the type of solenoid
valves installed, and their
positioning within the system

238 MY HOME Energy management

External temperature radio probe:


it measures the external temperature
and sends the information, through
radio waves, to the receiving interface,

Outdoor
radio probe

and therefore to the control unit

Zone 2 probe

External
radio probe
interface

Zone 99
probe

Local
Display
BUS

4 relay
actuator

Contact interface

Actuators:

Contact interface:

For the ON/OFF control of the

this optional device detects the open

are open With this function one can

solenoid valves only one contact is

or closed position of windows and

make the most of each energy saving

used, while for open/close solenoid

doors by assessing the status of their

opportunity, avoiding unwanted

valves the interlocking of two relays

magnetic contact The information

dispersion of heat to the outside,

is used By using the 4 relay actuator,

obtained is then used by the MY

for example when the air inside the

it is possible to control both the

HOME temperature control system to

house is being changed

activation of the fan-coils and the

switch off the zones corresponding to

automatic selection of the 3 speeds

the rooms where windows and doors

Energy management MY HOME 239

GENERAL FEATUREs

Devices
Adjustable probe

TEMPERATURE CONTROL
CENTRAL UNITS
The two temperature control

Local Display

units ensure simple management/


programming of the whole system; in
this way, thanks to a guided menu, it
will be possible to select the operating
mode, display the temperatures of
the various zones, and change the

possibility of managing the

daily and weekly programs Inside the

operating mode (OFF; antifreeze/

4 zone control unit is a probe This

thermal protection, and automatic)

is a zone in itself, and it is therefore

possibility of controlling the speed

possible to connect three more


probes, before the maximum number
of probs that can be managed by the
device is reached
In addition to being able to manage
temperature control systems, both
in heating and cooling mode, the

LOCAL CONTROL

of the FAN-COILs

A probe is installed in each room, for

All these functions may also be

the measurement of the temperature

performed using Local Display,

Probe models fitted with a knob also

a recently launched Oled Touch

provide easy system control:

screen technology control device,

possibility of changing the

connected to a probe

99 zone control unit is also capable,


thanks to the scenarioso mode, of
setting different temperatures in

temperature by 3 C compared
with the value set on the control
unit

PC PROgRAMMINg
TiThermo and TiThermo Basic are

the different zones of the system, by

programs that enable the user to

means of a single control (e g maid

program and configure the control

scenarioso) 16 scenariosos for the

4 zone central unit

units, by setting and customising

winter and 16 scenariosos for the

the parameters connected with the

summer can be set

temperature control system Thanks

99 zone central unit

to a dedicated function, the software


can also be used to update the
firmware of the control unit

Bticino software

240 MY HOME Energy management

Video Station

PERFECT INTEgRATION WITH


THE MY HOME SYSTEM
Example of integration between

(e g weekly mode, external probe

Temperature Control and Automation

scenarioso mode, etc ) For further

The temperature control system

information see the User Manual

can be integrated with MY HOME

supplied as standard with Touch

Automation, for the management

screen IP

of the temperature in the different


zones of the house, using Touch

Touch Screen

screen, Videostation, and Video


Display In particular, using Touch
screen IP it is possible to manage
not only the temperature in the
different zones, but also those
functions that up to now have always
been managed by the control unit

Example of integration between

house is being changed In practical

Alarm system, which reads the

Temperature Control and Automation

terms, when doors or windows of

condition of the NC contact installed

The integration between MY HOME

a room are opened, the heating

on the door or window, and transfers

Burglar-Alarm and Temperature

system of the temperature control

the information to the Temperature

Control systems allows the set-up of

zone corresponding to that room is

Control system for the appropriate

a particularly useful function in terms

automatically turned off

actions

of energy saving, avoiding unwanted

The opening or closing of doors and

escape of energy to the outside,

windows is detected by the contact

for example when the air inside the

interface module of the Burglar-

Magnetic contact

Contact interface

Opening of window

Radiator off

Temperature control unit

Energy management MY HOME 241

GENERAL FEATUREs

Device selection criteria


gUIDE TO THE SELECTION OF
THE CONTROL UNIT
The following table shows the

the number of zones of the hydraulic

functions provided by the two

system Other selection parameters

control units The selection must be

may be the management of magnetic

based on the features of the system

contacts, remote control, etc

It is fundamental that the selection of


the control unit should be based on

available funCtionS

4 Zone Central unit

99 Zone Central unit

HC/HS/L/N/NT4695, AM5875

3550

Maximum number of zones


Remote control
Local control (Touch Screen)
Programming with TiThermo Basic
Programming with TiThermo
Magnetic contacts management
Scenarios
Climaveneta Chiller Management

242 MY HOME Energy management

99

gUIDE TO THE SELECTION OF


THE DEvICES
The following table summarizes
the various types of systems,
and the devices needed for their
management, based on their
features

type of SyStem

aCtuator

probe

HC/HS4692
L/N/NT4692

F430/2

F430/4

Gateway

HC/HS4693
L/N/NT4693

HC/HS4692FAN
L/N/NT4692FAN

HC/HS4685
L/N/NT4685

In conjunction with
probe item HC/
HS4693, L/N/ NT4693,
or with external probe
item 3457

Radiators or Radiant panels

Combined system with radiant panels and fan-coils

Normal Fan-coil

CLIMAVENETA Fan-coil

WARNING: protect the outputs of the relay actuators using a 10 A thermal magnetic circuit breaker, included in the BTDIN catalogue with item no. F881NA/10.

Energy management MY HOME 243

GENERAL RULEs FOR INsTALLATION

Maximum number of devices,


maximum distances and absorptions
A system can manage up to 99 zone

the items and making sure that the

addresses Up to nine addresses

total does not exceed the capacity

dedicated to the actuators can

of the power supply For the

be managed for each zone The

calculations mentioned above, refer

on the BUs line the power supply

maximum number of devices which

to the TECHNICAL DATA listed in the

should be installed in the middle

can be connected to the BUs also

Technical sheets section of this guide

depends on their total absorption

When calculating the absorptions the

and the distance between the

availability of current as a function

connection point and the power

of the length of the BUs cable must

supply The power supply can

also be considered During the sizing

supply up to 1200 mA (E46ADCN)

therefore respect the following rules:

or 600 mA (E49) and the maximum

the connection between the power

the total length of the connections


must not be more than 500m;

for best division of the currents

number of devices which can be

supply and the furthest device

connected to the BUs is determined

must not be more than 250 m long;

by summing the absorption of all

MAXIMUM DISTANCES OF THE bUS CAbLE

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

-3

-2 -1

+1

-2 -1

+1

1
4
7

OF

+3
+2

+3
+2

-3

OK
OF

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

PRI

E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

E46ADCN

SCS

-3

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

-2 -1

+3
+2

-3

E49

OF

1 2 3 4

+1

ART. F430/2

C1

OK

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

With power supply E46ADCN:

With power supply E49:

=250 m max

=250 m max

=250 m max

=250 m max

A + b =500 m
Maximum current supplied
by the power supply: 1200 mA
NOTE: If a UTP5 cable is used instead of a BUS L4669 cable, distances must halved.

244 MY HOME Energy management

A + b =500 m
Maximum current supplied
by the power supply: 600 mA

C2

PHYSICAL EXPANSION MODE


In large systems or systems which

use of the interface itself as indicated

have current absorption greater than

below:

Automation device addresses must

the limit of 1200 mA supplied by the

If a bus system with only

be between A = 1 / PL = 1 and A =

on the input bus (IN) the

power supply E46ADCN or 600 mA

temperature control devices must

supplied by the E49 compact power

be extended, positions I3 and I4 of

supply, split the system into several

the interface must be congured

addresses must be between A = 3 /

sections connected to each other

with addresses I3 = 1 9 and I4 =

PL = 3 and A = 9 / PL = 9 or the

using the F422 interface configured

1 9 completely independent from

address of the next interface. It

in physical expansion mode. It

the Temperature control device

should be stressed that all the

is important to remember that

addresses;

temperature control devices on the

each line must be powered by its

3 / PL = 1;

on the output bus (OUT) the

system section must be congured

If a bus system with Automation

own power supply. To produce the

and temperature control devices

totally independently of the

physical expansion mode interface

must be extended, positions I3

Automation device conguration.

item F422 must be congured by

and I4 must be congured as a

In any case no automation device

inserting numeric congurator 1 in

function of the conguration of

must be congured with the same

the MOD position. Positions I3 and I4

the Automation devices in the two

address (A, PL) as interface F422

of the interface must be congured

connected systems. Referring to

(I3, I4).

as a function of the two modes of

the illustration, let us suppose that


I3 = 3, I4 = 2:

A/PL = 33 53
1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

-2 -1

F422
OUT

+1

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

I1 =
I2 =
I3 = 5
I4 = 4
MOD = 1

-3

AR T.F422

OF

+3
+2

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

A/PL = 11 31

IN

I1 =
I2 =
I3 = 3
I4 = 2
MOD = 1

-3

AR T.F422

-2 -1

+1

OUT
OUT

+3
+2

F422

-3

OK

1
4
7

OF

A/PL = 55 99

Energy management MY HOME 245

General rules for installation

Combining with other functions


The Temperature control function

The above is also valid if the

this document. For systems which

devices can share the same BUS

pre-existing MY HOME system

also have the burglar-alarm function,

cable as other MY HOME automation

has several Automation systems

the Temperature control must not

and emergency management

connected using interfaces item F422

be installed on the same bus as the

applications (grey cable). If there

congured in the logical expansion

burglar-alarm, but there must be

is already a stable cable with the

mode.

an F422 interface between the two

automation or power management

For systems with logical expansion

buses.

BUS the Temperature control items

there is no installation limitation for

can be added at any point in the

the Temperature control devices,

system, after installing a box item

which can be installed at any point

503E for the control units, one or

in the system.Thus, for correct

more boxes positioned at a height

system sizing, one only need check

of 1.5 m for each temperature probe

the length of the connections made

and a unit with enough room for the

with the BUS cable and the total

DIN actuators.

device absorptions as specied in

A/PL = 11
99

OUT
OUT

+1

-3

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

-3

AR T.F422

ZA = 1
ZB = 1

ZA = 1
ZB = 1

I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 = 1
MOD = 2

+1

OK

IN

1
4
7

AR T.F422

-3
F

+1

-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

+1

IN
1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

OUT

OUT

OUT

24h

TEST

PROG

AUX

AR T.F422

IN

246 MY HOME Energy management

I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 = 1
MOD = 4

C2

OF

+3
+2

OUT

ZA = 2
ZB = 1

I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 = 2
MOD = 2

-2 -1

OUT

-3

A/PL = 11
99

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

ZA = 3
ZB = 2

Correct mode of installation


for 4 zone control unit, probes and magnetic contacts
The 4 ZONE CONTROL UNIT and

wall-mounting boxes (LIVING, LIGHT,

with pre-existing BUS systems that

the Probes

LIGHT TECH only); Surface installation

cannot be expanded.

must be installed at a height of

may be useful for resolving issues

approximately 1.5 m, away from areas


that may affect the reading of the

-3

+1

-2 -1

OFF

+1
-3

+3
+2

-2 -1

-3

-2 -1

OFF

-2 -1

OFF

+3
+2

+1

+1

inside standard flush-mounting, or

+3
+2

The probes may be installed both

OFF

+3
+2

windows, fan-coils, or radiators.

-3

room temperature, such as nearby

1,5m

CALIBRATION OF THE 4 ZONE


CENTRAL UNIT AND THE
PROBES
The probes and the 4 zone central

function, which can be found in the

room temperature (e.g. by opening

unit do not normally need calibration;

central unit menu.

or closing windows, doors, etc.)

however, in particular installation

Before performing the calibration

and avoid standing near them;

situations (perimeter walls, north

operation, ensure the following:

or south facing walls, when close to

Leave the probes connected and

for the calibration use a calibrated


sample thermometer, correctly
placed inside the room.

heat sources, etc.), the temperature

powered with the hydraulic system

value measured may be corrected

off for at least two hours. During

For more details on the calibration

using the appropriate calibration

this time, avoid any changes in the

procedure, refer to the central unit


installation manuals.

Magnetic contacts
are generally installed in the upper

protection line generally not used

If the contact interface is correctly

part of the window frames and in

in temperature control. It is mainly

congured it can support both

the point furthest away from the

useful for preventing tampering

applications. When the temperature

hinges. In this way small openings

such as cutting the wires in burglar-

control system is being installed the

cause the magnet to move away

alarm systems. If the same MY HOME

protection line should be installed

from the contact reed and the

system has temperature control and

and wired as well, so that the burglar-

contact itself consequently opens.

burglar-alarm applications the same

alarm can be installed as well.

The models in the catalogue

magnetic contacts can be used for

are of NC type and also have a

both functions at the same time.

For flush-mounting installation 3510, 3510M, 3510PB For visible installation 3511
Magnet

Contact

Magnet

Contact

Magnet
Contact
Contact

Protection
line

NC contact

Magnet

Protection
line

NC contact

Energy management MY HOME 247

GENERAL RULEs FOR INsTALLATION

Disposition of solenoid valves and actuators


The typical installation requires the

Solenoid valve
actuators

positioning of all solenoid valves on

1 2 3 4
1

2 3

1 2 3 4
1

2 3

ART.F430/2

C1 C2

1 2 3 4
1

2 3

1 2 3 4

ART.F430/2

C1 C2

2 3

ART.F430/2

C1 C2

ART.F430/2

Plug-in box

C1 C2

the collector, grouped inside a box


in the boiler room In this case it is
recommended that also all actuators

Hydraulic
collector

are grouped, inside a control unit,


installed nearby the box itself In

Zone solenoid
valve

multi-floor buildings, this solution


may be repeated at every floor

Box

FAN-COIL SYSTEMS
In fan-coil systems, the solenoid valve
may be installed inside the fan-coil

Installation of the solenoid valve inside 2 pipe fan-coils

Installation of the solenoid valve inside 4 pipe fan-coils

itself In 2 pipe systems, the same


solenoid valve is used both for the
heating and the cooling functions In
4 pipe systems, 2 separate solenoid

valves are used, one for the heating


and the other for the cooling
function

RADIANT PANEL SYSTEMS


In radiant panel systems it will be
necessary to install, after the pump,
a three-way mixing valve capable

Three-way
mixing valve

Zone
solenoid valve

Actuators
Circuit breaker

of mixing the water, so that the


maximum temperature limit set is
not exceeded The mixing valve is
managed by a central unit supplied
by the manufacturer of the radiant

panel system
To the zone radiant panels

230 Vac
To other
devices

Circulation
pump

248 MY HOME Energy management

Mixing valve
management central unit

Power supply

Wiring diagrams

Legend of symbols
To make the reading of the diagrams shown in the following pages easier, the various symbols and their functions are summarised.

General valve symbol

Radiators

Electric radiator

Boiler

Radiant panels

Fan-coil

Chiller

ON/OFF solenoid valve

M
Open/close solenoid valve

Non-return valve

Pump

Three-way mixing valve (*)

(*) NOTE: In radiant heating panel systems this valve has the function of mixing water, to ensure that the water itself, and therefore also the floor, remain below a certain
temperature limit. For this reason, the mixing valve must be controlled by a control unit supplied by the radiant heating panel system supplier.

Energy management MY HOME 249

Wiring diagrams

4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 1 HEATING WITH RADIATORS

C4

C3

C2

C1

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

ZONE 4

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

Solenoid valve

-3

F430/4

-2 -1

+1

Solenoid valve

OF

+3
+2

ZONE 3

-3

4692

4692

-2 -1

+1

Solenoid valve

OF

+3
+2

ZONE 2

-3

BUS

E46ADCN

4692

18.0C

ZONE 1
Solenoid valve

23.7C
13 : 38

Ven

07

Gen

OK

4695

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

F430/2
L
N

C1

Circulation pump
Boiler

250 MY HOME Energy management

Central unit/probe configuration


18.0C

23.7
13 : 38

Ven

07

Gen

OK

The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/

the system conguration operations

HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875,

correctly.

as well as managing the whole of the

As an alternative the TiThermo Basic

temperature control system, contains

application dedicated to this version

a temperature probe which must

of control unit can be used.

be congured physically like the

For these operations refer to the

other system probes. Interact with

manual supplied with the products.

the Congure zones menu to end

Zone 1 Central unit/probe


[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

PROBES configuration

-3

Zone 2 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

+1

Zone 3 probe

Zone 4 probe

Actuators configuration
Zone actuator
1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Circulation pump actuator


[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

OFF

Energy management MY HOME 251

Wiring diagrams

4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 2 Heating with Radiant panels

C4

C3

C2

C1

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

-3

C1

C2 C3 C4

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

ZONE 4
F430/4

-3

4692

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

ZONE 3
4692

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

ZONE 2

-3

BUS

E46ADCN

4692

18.0C

23.7C

ZONE 1

13 : 38

Ven

07

Gen

OK

4695
1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

F430/2
Mixing valve
management central
unit

L
C1

Circulation
pump

Boiler
Distribution collector with
solenoid valves

252 MY HOME Energy management

Central unit/probe configuration


18.0C

23.7C
13 : 38

Ven

07

Gen

OK

The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/

correctly. As an alternative the

HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875,

TiThermo Basic application dedicated

as well as managing the whole of the

to this version of control unit can

temperature control system, contains

be used. For these operations refer

a temperature probe which must

to the manual supplied with the

be congured physically like the

products.

other system probes. Interact with


the Congure zones menu to end
the system conguration operations
Zone 1 Central unit/probe
[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

PROBES configuration

-3

Zone 2 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

+1

Zone 3 probe

Zone 4 probe

Actuators configuration
Zone actuator
1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Circulation pump actuator


[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

OFF

Energy management MY HOME 253

Wiring diagrams

4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 3 Heating with Radiant panels and heating units

C1

ZONE 1

C2

C3

4695

C4

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

18.0C

23.7

13
38
:

Ven

C1

07

C2

C3

C4

Gen

OK

F430/4
4692
-3

ZONE 2

-2 -1

OF

+1

+3
+2

BUS

-2 -1

OF

E46ADCN

+1

+3
+2

ZONE 4

-3

4692

4692
-3

ZONE 3

-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

+1

1 2 3 4

C1

Mixing valve management


central unit

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

F430/2

C2

F430/2

C1

Heating units distribution


collector

Circulation
pumps
Distribution collector with
solenoid valves

C1

254 MY HOME Energy management

C2

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C2

Boiler

Central unit/probe configuration


18.0C

23.7
13 : 38

Ven

07

Gen

OK

The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/

correctly. As an alternative the

HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875,

TiThermo Basic application dedicated

as well as managing the whole of the

to this version of control unit can

temperature control system, contains

be used. For these operations refer

a temperature probe which must

to the manual supplied with the

be congured physically like the

products.

other system probes. Interact with


the Congure zones menu to end
the system conguration operations
Zone 1 Central unit/probe
[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

PROBES configuration

-3

Zone 2 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

+1

Zone 3 probe

Zone 4 probe

Actuators configuration

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4

C1

1 2 3 4

C1

C2 C3 C4

Zone actuator

ART. F430/2

ART. F430/2

ART. F430/4

C1

C2

Circulation pump actuator

C2

HEATING UNITS actuator

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

Energy management MY HOME 255

Wiring diagrams

4 zone villa - Climaveneta fan-coil


DIAGRAM 4 HEATING AND COOLING WITH CLIMAVENETA FAN-COIL

(*) NOTE: the Gateway is fitted inside the FAN-COIL


during manufacturing, and is already connected to the
FAN-COIL itself through the collector found at the top on
the front. Therefore, once the hydraulic connection has
been completed, all that is needed is to connect the BUS.

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

4692FAN

-3

(*) ZONE 4

GATEWAY

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

4692FAN

-3

(*) ZONE 3

GATEWAY
(*) ZONE 2

-3

BUS

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

4692FAN
GATEWAY
(*) ZONE 1

FAN-COIL connection

-3

3550

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

4692FAN

E46ADCN

GATEWAY
OK

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

GATEWAY

CHILLER

256 MY HOME Energy management

99 zone central unit configuration

OK

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

The 99 zone control unit item 3550

As an alternative the TiThermo

does not need physical congurators

application can be used. For these

but, to end the system conguration

operations refer to the manual

operations, interact with the

supplied with the products.

Congure zones menu.

3
6
9

Configuration of probes for fan-coil

-3

Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

Zone 3 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

+1

Zone 2 probe

HEATING AND COOLING WITH


CLIMAVENETA FAN-COIL

Gateway

Zone 4 probe

Electric diagram and configuration

all other zones, perform the same

of the GATEWAY installed inside the

type of connection, ensuring correct

Climaveneta fan-coil for the heating-

configuration of the actuator for

cooling of zone 2.

the specific zone, as shown in the

In order to control the fan-coils of

configuration tables.

Zone 1 gateway

Zone 3 gateway

[ZA]

[ZB]

[N]

[TYPE]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[N]

[TYPE]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[N]

[TYPE]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[N]

[TYPE]

Zone 2 gateway
BUS

climaveneta CHILLER

Zone 2 gateway

Wiring diagram and conguration

chiller. With one chiller, a system

of the gateway which controls the

can be slaved and operate both as


a heating system and as a cooling
system. The Gateway is connected
to the CLIMAVENETA chiller through

Climaveneta

the collector found at the top on the

CHILLER

front, and to the BUS through the


draw-out connection terminal.

Gateway
BUS

Gateway chiller
[ZA]

[ZB]

[N]

[TYPE]

Energy management MY HOME 257

Wiring diagrams

4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 5 HEATING AND COOLING WITH CLIMAVENETA AIR CONDITIONING AND COMBINATION BOILER

(*) ZONE 4

-3

FAN-COIL connection

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

4692FAN
GATEWAY

-3

(*) ZONE 3

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

4692FAN
GATEWAY

(*) NOTE: the Gateway is fitted inside the FAN-COIL during


manufacturing, and is already connected to the FAN-COIL itself
through the collector found at the top on the front. Therefore,
once the hydraulic connection has been completed, all that is
needed is to connect the BUS.
-3

(*) ZONE 2

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

4692FAN
GATEWAY

3550
E46ADCN

(*) ZONE 1

-3

OK

-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

+1

4692FAN
GATEWAY

F430/2

GATEWAY

C1

C2
ART. F430/2

1 2 3 4

Combination boiler

3 way
solenoid valve

258 MY HOME Energy management

CHILLER

next >>

Heating and cooling with


CLIMAVENETA FAN-COIL
Electric diagram and configuration

Correctly configures the gateway

of the GATEWAY installed inside the

corresponding to the zone as

heating/cooling Climaveneta fan-coil.

indicated in the configuration tables


of the following pages.

GATEWAY
BUS

CLIMAVENETA CHILLER
Wiring diagram of the gateway which

There is thus no need to install

The Gateway is connected to the

controls the chiller. A single chiller

radio probe item 3455 with its

CLIMAVENETA chiller through the

serves a system which can work

interface. The temperature datum

collector found at the top on the

both as heating and as cooling. The

is made available to the MY HOME

front, and to the BUS through the

attached outside temperature probe

temperature control system by

draw-out connection terminal.

is a device normally present in a

means of the gateway.

Climaveneta system of this type.

Climaveneta
CHILLER

5 C

GATEWAY
BUS

Energy management MY HOME 259

WIRING DIAGRAMs

4 zone villa
< previous

DIAgRAM DESCRIPTION
This diagram represents an example

Using TiThermo set the Outside

ON, Boiler OFF, valve open towards

of a heating and cooling system

Temperature (OT) value below which

the Chiller To sum up, the Chiller

made with Climaveneta unit and

the Boiler starts to work: for example

continues to work until the OT drops

Combination boiler

set 5C

below 5C; at this point the Boiler

By means of the TiThermo software

When OT is higher than 5C the

starts to work

the 99 zone control unit item 3550

Chiller manages the system When

It will stay on until the OT rises above

can be programmed to use the

OT is lower than 5C the following

7C, when the Chiller switches on

reading of the outside temperature

actions take place: Chiller OFF, Boiler

again

from the Climaveneta system to

ON and valve open towards the

manage systems with combination

Boiler

NOTE: for the TiThermo software setting details

boilers

The Boiler continues to work until

consult the documentation supplied with the product

Depending on the outside

OT rises above a value higher than

itself.

temperature the control unit

5C This selection is made to avoid

activates the most suitable and

device state oscillation phenomena

convenient heating system

If for example 7C is set as threshold

depending on the heat yield

value, when OT is higher than 7C the

During the spring and autumn

following actions take place: Chiller

rooms can be heated using the heat


generated by the Chiller This heat is
however not suf cient in the winter
when a Combination boiler, generally

TiThermo: example of an application window, indispensable for programming

supplied by gas, must be used

and setting the temperature thresholds and the automations.

The MY HOME temperature control


system switches between the
two sources of heat, using the
outside temperature as parameter
to discriminate between spring
and autumn and winter Actuator
F430/2 manages the switching ON
or OFF of the Boiler and changes
the valve state, while the Gateway
manages the Climaveneta Chiller In
the example given here the Chiller
continues to work as long as the
outside temperature (measured
by the Climaveneta outside
probe) remains higher than a set
threshold value; below this value the
Combination boiler starts to work

260 MY HOME Energy management

99 zone central unit configuration

OK

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

The 99 zone control unit item 3350

This device does not need physical

must be used to manage systems

congurators but, to end the system

with combination boiler. The

conguration operations, interact

function is not in fact available on

with the Congure zones menu

the 4 zone control unit item HC/

and with TiThermo applications. For

HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875.

these operations refer to the manual


supplied with the products.

PROBES configuration

-3

Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

Zone 3 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

+1

Zone 2 probe

Zone 4 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

GATEWAY FAN-COIL configuration


Zonef1 gateway

Zone 3 gateway

[ZA]

[ZB]

[N]

[TYPE]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[N]

[TYPE]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[N]

[TYPE]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[N]

[TYPE]

Zone 2 gateway

Zone 2 gateway

GATEWAY CHILLER configuration

6 C

Gateway chiller
[ZA]

[ZB]

[N]

[TYPE]

Boiler and solenoid valve actuator configuration


Boiler/solenoid valve actuator
1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

C2

RISCALDAMENTO

Energy management MY HOME 261

Wiring diagrams

3 zone villa
DIAGRAM 6 Heating with Radiant panels WITH WINDOW CONTACT MANAGEMENT

C4

C3

C2

C1
F430/4

(*)
1

T - C1 - C2

4692

C1

C2 C3 C4

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

+1

C2 C1

ART. F430/4

ART.F482

-3

C1

1 2 3 4 5

F482

(*)

4692
-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

C2

-3

ZONE 3

BUS

+1

3550

ZONE 2
(*)
T - C1 - C2

OK

-2 -1

+1

C2 C1

2
5
8
0

OF

+3
+2

ZONE 1

1
4
7

ART.F482

-3

C1

E46ADCN
4692
F

3
6
9

F482

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

Mixing valve management


central unit

C2

F430/2
L
C1

Circulation
pump

Boiler
(*) NOTE: the maximum length of the connections to the magnetic
contacts must not exceed 50 metres.

262 MY HOME Energy management

next >>

99 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT


CONFIgURATION
The 99 zone control unit item 3350

congurators but, to end the system

When setting the parameters for

must be used to use the magnetic

conguration operations, interact

the management of the magnetic

contact management function The

with the Congure zones menu

contacts, the TiThermo application

function is not in fact available on

As an alternative the TiThermo

must be used Two parameters may

the 4 zone control unit item HC/

application can be used For these

be set: the reaction time, and the

Hs/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875

operations refer to the manual

reactivation time

This device does not need physical

supplied with the products

REACTION
TIME

OK

1
4
7

REACTIvATION
TIME

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

Temperature central unit


item 3550

TiThermo screen

REACTION TIME
The reaction time can be set from

frame avoiding switching the

needed for the changes of air, for

0 to 2 minutes and is a sort of

corresponding temperature control

example opening a window to close

delay to the deactivation of the

zone OFF setting 0 minutes

or open the shutters, or opening the

temperature control zone During

deactivation is practically instant

entrance door to welcome a person

this time the system completely

This function is suitable for short

ignores the opening of the window

openings of windows or doors not

WINDOW
CLOsED

WINDOW
OPENING

WINDOW
CLOsING

WINDOW
CLOsED

t = 02
time can be set from
0 to 2 minutes

radiant panel ON

radiant panel
kept ON

radiant panel
kept ON

radiant panel ON

Energy management MY HOME 263

Wiring diagrams

3 zone villa
< previous

Reactivation time
The reactivation time can be set from

Even if it goes against the concept of

When the reactivation time is set on

5 to 55 minutes, or on unlimited.

energy saving this function is useful

unlimited the function is not active.

When the time set has elapsed the

when the windows have been left

system reactivates the temperature

open and the temperature set in the

control zone even if windows or

room must be kept the same.

doors are still open.

WINDOW
CLOSED

WINDOW
OPENING

WINDOW
LEFT OPEN
t = 5
time can be set from 5
minutes to unlimited

radiant panel ON

radiant panel OFF

radiant panel
back ON automatically

Contact interface
configuration
The contact interface is directly

Follow by connecting the AUX

address 1 to 99 of the device, within

connected to the temperature

configurator to the MOD1 and/or

the system. The coupling between

control bus. It autonomously and

MOD2 housings, for the activation

the interface contact line and the

independently manages the two

of the operating mode with

temperature control zone must

C1 and C2 lines. It is necessary to

temperature control system only.

be performed using the TiThermo

configure only the line used, and not

Then configure the Z1/2 and N1/2

application.

both of them.

housings, in order to assign the

Contact interface of zone 1 windows


T - C1 - C2
ART.F482

C2 C1

[Z1]

[N1]

[MOD1]

[Z2]

[N2]

[MOD2]

AUX

Contact interface of zone 2 and 3 windows

264 MY HOME Energy management

[Z1]

[N1]

[MOD1]

[Z2]

[N2]

[MOD2]

AUX

AUX

PROBES configuration

-3

Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

Zone 3 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

+1

Zone 2 probe

Actuators configuration
Zone actuator
1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

OFF

Circulation pump actuator


[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

OFF

Energy management MY HOME 265

Wiring diagrams

3 zone villa
DIAGRAM 7 Heating with Radiant panels WITH WINDOW CONTACT MANAGEMENT

FROM THE BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM

C4

C3

C2

C1

F430/4

F482
T - C 1 - C2

C1

C2 C3 C4

OFF

+3
+2

+1

C2 C 1

ART. F430/4

ART.F482

-3

C1

1 2 3 4 5

-2 -1

(*)

4692

ZONE 3

-2 -1

OFF

+3
+2

(*) C2

-3

4692
+1

3550

ZONE 2

T - C 1 - C2

E46ADCN

4692

OK

ART.F482

+1

C2 C 1

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

OFF

+3
+2

-3

-2 -1

(*)

C1

3
6
9

F482
ZONE 2

F422

F430/2
1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

(*) NOTE: the maximum length of the connections to


the magnetic contacts must not exceed 50 metres.
It is recommended that the balancing resistance is
installed nearby the last line contact.

C1

C2

ART.F422

OUT

3486
BUS
E46ADCN
OK

1
4
7

Mixing valve
management central
unit

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

4607

L
C1

Circulation
pump

Boiler

266 MY HOME Energy management

next >>

99 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT


CONFIgURATION
In this case the contact interface is

In order to use the function for

performed using the Configuration

connected to the burglar-alarm bus

the management of the magnetic

menu or the TiThermo application

only and communicates with the

contacts installed in the Burglar-

When setting the parameters for

temperature control bus by means of

Alarm system, item 3550 must be

the management of the magnetic

interface F422 The door or window

used in the

contacts, the TiThermo application

opening or closing signal is sent both

99 zone control unit temperature

must be used Two parameters may

to the burglar-alarm system and to

control system This device does

be set: the reaction time and the

the temperature control system, and

not require physical configurators

reactivation time

is used both for safety and energy

Configuration operations must be

saving purposes

REACTION
TIME

OK

REACTIvATION

1
4
7

TIME

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

Temperature central unit


item 3550

TiThermo screen

REACTION TIME
The reaction time can be set from

frame avoiding switching the

needed for the changes of air, for

0 to 2 minutes and is a sort of

corresponding temperature control

example opening a window to close

delay to the deactivation of the

zone OFF setting 0 minutes

or open the shutters, or opening the

temperature control zone During

deactivation is practically instant

entrance door to welcome a person

this time the system completely

This function is suitable for short

ignores the opening of the window

openings of windows or doors not

WINDOW
CLOsED

WINDOW
OPENING

WINDOW
CLOsING

WINDOW
CLOsED

t = 02
time can be set from
0 to 2 minutes

radiant panel ON

radiant panel
kept ON

radiant panel
kept ON

radiant panel ON

Energy management MY HOME 267

Wiring diagrams

3 zone villa
< previous

Reactivation time
The reactivation time can be set from

Even if it goes against the concept of

When the reactivation time is set on

5 to 55 minutes, or on unlimited.

energy saving this function is useful

unlimited the function is not active.

When the time set has elapsed the

when the windows have been left

system reactivates the temperature

open and the temperature set in

control zone even if windows or

the room must be kept the same.

doors are still open.

WINDOW
CLOSED

WINDOW
OPENING

WINDOW
LEFT OPEN
t = 5
time can be set from 5
minutes to unlimited

radiant panel ON

radiant panel OFF

radiant panel
back ON automatically

Contact interface
configuration
Then configure housings Z1/2 and
N1/2 depending on the requirements

Contact interface of zone 1 windows

and features of the burglar-alarm


system (see the burglar-alarm
technical guide).

[Z1]

[N1]

[MOD1]

[Z2]

[N2]

[MOD2]

(*)

(*)

(*)

(*)

(*)

Contact interface of zone 2 and 3 windows

The coupling between the interface

[Z1]

[N1]

[MOD1]

[Z2]

[N2]

[MOD2]

contact line and the temperature

(*)

(*)

(*)

(*)

(*)

control zone must be performed


using the TiThermo application.

(*) NOTE: The involved contacts are C1 and C2. Only the housings of the lines used must be configured; configure
housings MOD1 and/or MOD2 based on the type of contact an the operating mode to be used. See table.

T - C1 - C2
ART.F482

C2 C1

268 MY HOME Energy management

MOD1/MOD2

Type of contact and mode

NC

Balanced

NC - delayed

NC - Balanced - delayed

PROBES configuration

-3

Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

Zone 3 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

+1

Zone 2 probe

Actuators configuration
Zone actuator
1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

OFF

Circulation pump actuator


[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

OFF

Energy management MY HOME 269

Wiring diagrams

6 zone villa
DIAGRAM 8 Heating with Radiant panels
F430/4
1

F430/4

1 2 3 4 5

C1

C3

C4

C1

C2

C3

C4

C4

C1

4692

4692
-3

-2 -1

+1

-2 -1
+3
+2

+1

ZONE 3

ZONE 4
BUS

4692

4692

-3

-2 -1

+1

-2 -1
+3
+2

+1

ZONE 5

ZONE 2

4692

4692
-3

-2 -1

+1

-2 -1
+3
+2

ZONE 1

F430/2

+1

F430/2

1 2 3 4

C1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

2
5
8
0

OFF

+3
+2

OFF

3550

1
4
7

OFF

+3
+2

OFF

ZONE 6

OK

OFF

+3
+2

OFF

-3

C3

-3

C2

ART. F430/4

-3

C1

C2

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

E46ADCN

ART. F430/2

C2

C1

C2

3
6
9

Mixing valve
management central unit

Mixing valve
management central unit

C1

C2

Secondary circulation pumps

C1

Main circulation
pump

270 MY HOME Energy management

Boiler

C2

C3

C4

99 zone central unit configuration

OK

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

The 99 zone control unit item 3550

As an alternative the TiThermo

does not need physical configurators

application can be used. For these

but, to end the system configuration

operations refer to the manual

operations, interact with the

supplied with the products.

Configure zones menu.

PROBES configuration

-3

Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

Zone 4 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

Zone 5 probe

+1

Zone 2 probe
[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

Zone 3 probe

Zone 6 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

Actuators configuration
Zone actuator 1, 2, 3
1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

OFF

Zone actuator 4, 5, 6
[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

OFF

MAIN Circulation pump actuator


[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

OFF

Secondary circulation pumps actuator


[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

Energy management MY HOME 271

Wiring diagrams

6 zone villa
DIAGRAM 9 RADIANT PANELS HEATING AND COOLING AND DEHUMIDIFIER FAN-COIL
F430/4
1

F430/4

1 2 3 4 5

C1

C4

C1

C2

C3

C4

C4

C1

ZONE 3

-3

ZONE 2

BUS

OFF

+3
+2

-2 -1
+3
+2

4692

-3

+1

-2 -1
+3
+2

+1

4692

4692
-3

-2 -1
+1

-2 -1
+3
+2

OFF

+3
+2

OFF

+1

ZONE 6

Humidistat 1*

OFF

+3
+2

OFF

-3

+1

ZONE 5

-3

4692

OFF

4692

C2

-3

ZONE 4

4692

-2 -1

C3

C3

+1

C2

ART. F430/4

-2 -1

C1

C2

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

ZONE 1

Humidistat 1*

3550
F430/2 F430/2
E46ADCN
1

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

ART. F430/2

OK
C1

1
4
7

C2

C1

C2

3
6
9

1*

Mixing valve
management central unit

2
5
8
0

Mixing valve
management central unit

C1

C2

Secondary
circulation
pump

C1

C2

1*
L

Main circulation
pump
N

NOTE: 1* the dehumidifier system is not managed through the MY HOME system.

272 MY HOME Energy management

Chiller

Secondary
circulation
pump

C3

C4

99 zone central unit configuration

OK

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

The 99 zone control unit item 3550

As an alternative the TiThermo

does not need physical configurators

application can be used. For these

but, to end the system configuration

operations refer to the manual

operations, interact with the

supplied with the products.

Configure zones menu.

PROBES configuration

-3

Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

Zone 4 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

Zone 5 probe

+1

Zone 2 probe
[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

Zone 3 probe

Zone 6 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

Actuators configuration
Zone actuator 1, 2, 3
1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

OFF

Zone actuator 4, 5, 6
[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

OFF

MAIN Circulation pump actuator


[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

OFF

Secondary circulation pumps actuator


[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

Energy management MY HOME 273

Wiring diagrams

8 zone villa
DIAGRAM 10 HEATING WITH RADIATORS AND fan-coil COOLING

F430/4
1

F430/4

1 2 3 4 5

C1

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

ART. F430/4

C2 C3 C4

C1

C2 C3 C4

BUS

4692
-3

-2 -1

+1

-2 -1
3

F430/4

+1

1 2 3 4 5

F430/4

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C4

OFF

+3
+2

+3
+2

OFF

-3

4692

C4

ART. F430/4

C2 C3 C4

C1

C2 C3 C4

ZONE 7

ZONE 8
4692
-3

-2 -1

+1

-2 -1
+3
+2

+1

F430/4
1

F430/4
1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C3

OFF

+3
+2

OFF

-3

4692

C3

ART. F430/4

C2 C3 C4

C1

C2 C3 C4

ZONE 5

ZONE 6
4692
-3

-2 -1

+1

-2 -1
+3
+2

+1

F430/4
1

F430/4
1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C2

OFF

+3
+2

OFF

-3

4692

C2

ART. F430/4

C2 C3 C4

C1

C2 C3 C4

ZONE 3

ZONE 4
4692
-3

-2 -1

+1

-2 -1
+3
+2

+1

F430/4
1

1 2 3 4 5

F430/4
1

3550

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C1

OFF

+3
+2

OFF

-3

4692

C1

C2 C3 C4

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

E46ADCN
OK

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

C2
C1

F430/2
1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

Circulation
pump

CHILLER
RISCALDAMENTO

274 MY HOME Energy management

Boiler

C1

C2

next >>

HEATING
Wiring diagram for connecting the
solenoid valves of zones 2, 4, 6 and
8 to the heating actuator. To control
zones 1, 3, 5 and 7 replicate the same
connection between the solenoid

valves and the corresponding

to be controlled. In the example

actuator. The configuration must

given here, zone 2 is controlled by

be made correctly, maintaining the

contact C1 configured with [ZA] = 0

correlation between the actuator

and [ZB] = 2.

contact and the address of the zone

C4
C3

ZONE 6

ZONE 8

F430/4
1

1 2 3 4 5

C2
C1

C1

C2 C3 C4

L
N

ZONE 2

ZONE 4

ART. F430/4

COOLING
Wiring diagram for connecting the

To control the fan-coils belonging

correctly configuring the actuator

fan-coil to the actuator for zone 6

to zones 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 and 8

corresponding to the zone as

cooling.

replicate the same connection,

indicated in the configuration tables.

ZONE 6

C4
C3

F430/4
1

ART. F430/4

C2
C1

1 2 3 4 5

C1

C2 C3 C4

C1= fan-coil solenoid valve


C2= minimum ventilation speed
C3= average ventilation speed
C4= maximum ventilation speed

CIRCULATION PUMP
Wiring diagram for connecting
F430/2
1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

COOLING CIRCULATION

the circulation pumps to the

PUMP

corresponding actuator.

HEATING CIRCULATION

C2

PUMP
C1

The pumps of the two systems,


heating and cooling, are controlled
by a single actuator.

L N

Energy management MY HOME 275

Wiring diagrams

8 zone villa
< previous

99 zone central unit configuration

OK

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

The 99 zone control unit item 3550

As an alternative the TiThermo

does not need physical configurators

application can be used.

but, to end the system configuration

For these operations refer to the

operations, interact with the

manual supplied with the products.

Configure zones menu.

PROBES configuration

-3

Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

Zone 5 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

+1

Zone 2 probe

Zone 6 probe

Zone 3 probe

Zone 7 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

Zone 4 probe

Zone 8 probe

Heating system actuator configuration


Zone 1, 3, 5 and 7 actuator
1

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Zone 2, 4, 6 and 8 actuator

276 MY HOME Energy management

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Cooling system actuator configuration


Zone 1 cooling actuator
1

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

Zone 5 cooling actuator

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Zone 2 cooling actuator

Zone 6 cooling actuator

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Zone 3 cooling actuator

Zone 7 cooling actuator

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Zone 4 cooling actuator

Zone 8 cooling actuator

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Circulation pump actuator configuration


Circulation pump actuator
1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

C2

Energy management MY HOME 277

Wiring diagrams

Service sector, 12 zones


DIAGRAM 11 2 PIPE, 3 SPEED FAN-COIL, SINGLE HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM

BUS

F430/4
1

1 2 3 4 5

F430/4

ART. F430/4

-3

-3

-2 -1

OF

+1

+1

OF

+3
+2

-2 -1

+1

OF

-3

C2 C3 C4

+3
+2

ART. F430/4

C1

+3
+2

F430/4
1

-2 -1

C1

1 2 3 4 5

ZONE 10

C2 C3 C4

ZONE 12

ZONE 11

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

F430/4
1

1 2 3 4 5

F430/4

ART. F430/4

-3

-3

-2 -1

OF

+1

+1

OF

+3
+2

-2 -1

+1

OF

-3

C2 C3 C4

+3
+2

ART. F430/4

C1

+3
+2

F430/4
1

-2 -1

C1

1 2 3 4 5

ZONE 7

C2 C3 C4

ZONE 8

ZONA 9

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

F430/4
1

1 2 3 4 5

F430/4

ART. F430/4

-3

-3

-2 -1

OF

+1

+1

OF

+3
+2

-2 -1

+1

OF

-3

C2 C3 C4

+3
+2

ART. F430/4

C1

+3
+2

F430/4
1

-2 -1

C1

1 2 3 4 5

ZONE 4

C2 C3 C4

ZONE 5

ZONE 6

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

F430/4
1

1 2 3 4 5

F430/4

ART. F430/4

-3

-3

-2 -1

OF

+1

+1

OF
+3
+2

-2 -1

+1

OF

-3

C2 C3 C4

+3
+2

ART. F430/4

C1

+3
+2

F430/4
1

-2 -1

C1

1 2 3 4 5

C2 C3 C4

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

Circulation pump
3550

C1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

E46ADCN

OK

1
4
7

278 MY HOME Energy management

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

C1

C2

CHILLER

next >>

HEATING AND COOLING


Wiring diagram for connecting the

zones replicate the same connection,

fan-coil to the actuator for zone

correctly configuring the actuator

12 heating/cooling. To control the

corresponding to the zone as

fan-coils belonging to all the other

indicated in the configuration tables.

ZONE 12

C4
C3

F430/4
1

1 2 3 4 5

C2
C1

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

C1= fan-coil solenoid valve


C2= minimum ventilation speed
C3= average ventilation speed
C4= maximum ventilation speed

Circulation pump
Wiring diagram for connecting

A system which can provide both

the circulation pumps to the

heating and cooling is controlled by a

corresponding actuator.

single pump.

F430/2

C2
1

1 2 3 4

SINGLE CIRCULATION

ART. F430/2

C1

C2

PUMP

C1

L N

Energy management MY HOME 279

Wiring diagrams

Service sector, 12 zones


< previous

Central unit/probe configuration

OK

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

3
6
9

The 99 zone control unit item 3550

As an alternative the TiThermo

does not need physical configurators

application can be used. For these

but, to end the system configuration

operations refer to the manual

operations, interact with the

supplied with the products.

Configure zones menu.

PROBES configuration

-3

Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

Zone 7 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

+1

Zone 2 probe

Zone 8 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

Zone 3 probe

Zone 9 probe

Zone 4 probe

Zone 10 probe

Zone 5 probe

Zone 11 probe

Zone 6 probe

280 MY HOME Energy management

Zone 12 probe

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

Heating/cooling fan-coil actuator configuration


Zone 1 actuator
1

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

Zone 7 actuator

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Zone 2 actuator

Zone 8 actuator

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Zone 3 actuator

Zone 9 actuator

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Zone 4 actuator

Zone 10 actuator

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Zone 5 actuator

Zone 11 actuator

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Zone 6 actuator

Zone 12 actuator

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

Circulation pump actuator configuration


Circulation pump actuator
1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

OFF

C2

Energy management MY HOME 281

Wiring diagrams

Several homes, 4 zones


DIAGRAM 12 RADIATOR CENTRAL HEATING SYSTEM WITH Radiant panels OF Several homes, 4 zones

Home n

+1

-2 -1

+1

4692

ZONE 2

-3

-3

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

OF

+3
+2

ZONE 3

4692

18.0C

ZONE 1

23.7C
-3

ZONE 4

-2 -1

OF

+3
+2

13 : 38

Ven

07

Gen

OK

+1

4692

4695

Home 2

+1

-2 -1

+3
+2

+1

4692

OF

+3
+2

OF

ZONE 2

-3

-3

-2 -1

ZONE 3

4692

18.0C

23.7C

-3

ZONE 4

-2 -1

+3
+2

OF

13 : 38

+1

4692

Ven

07

ZONE 1

Gen

OK

4695

Home 1

Central boiler

282 MY HOME Energy management

next >>

Connection of the distribution collector and temperature control BUS system of home 2

Solenoid valve

C1

Solenoid valve

C2

C3

C4

F430/4
1

1 2 3 4 5

ART. F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

Solenoid valve

Solenoid valve

Meter
Mixing valve
Mixing valve
management
central unit

4 zone
control unit

F430/2

18.0C

23.7C
13 : 38

1 2 3 4

Main
Solenoid valve

ART. F430/2

C1

Ven

07

Gen

OK

E46ADCN

C2

C1

L
N

+1

-3

-2 -1

OF

OF

+3
+2

+1

+3
+2

-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

-3

4692
ZONE 2
-3

4692
ZONE 3

-2 -1

4692
ZONE 4

+1

The meter is used to measure the amount of heat consumed by each home.
NOTE: The temperature control BUS system, the connection of the solenoid valve, and the meter, are the same for all homes.

Energy management MY HOME 283

Wiring diagrams

Several homes, 4 zones


< previous

Central unit/probe configuration


18.0C

23.7
13 : 38

Ven

07

Gen

OK

The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/

the system conguration operations

HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875,

correctly. As an alternative the

as well as managing the whole of the

TiThermo Basic application dedicated

temperature control system, contains

to this version of control unit can

a temperature probe which must

be used. For these operations refer

be congured physically like the

to the manual supplied with the

other system probes. Interact with

products.

the Congure zones menu to end

Zone 1 Central unit/probe


[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

[ZA]

[ZB]

[SLA]

PROBES configuration

-3

Zone 2 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2

OF

+1

Zone 3 probe

Zone 4 probe

Actuators configuration

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/4

ART. F430/2

C1

C2 C3 C4

C1

Zone actuator 1, 2, 3 and 4

C2

Main solenoid valve actuator

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[ZB2]

[ZB3]

[ZB4]

[N]

[ZA]

[ZB1]

[N1]

[ZB2]

[N2]

OFF

284 MY HOME Energy management

TEMPERATURE CONTROL - ConfiguraTion

General concepts
The Temperature control system

Zone ZA and ZB

Probes address

must be appropriately configured so

Address of the devices belonging

The probes also have positions ZA

that it can work properly and so that

to a logical zone; as an example in

and ZB to define the address of the

each item can perform the required

a dwelling one can talk about night

devices which will receive the control

function.

area, day area and cellar.

(actuators). These positions have

Configuring basically means

numeric configurators which enable

interacting with the unit and actuator

Progressive zone number N

probes, thus defining:

Numeric identification of the single

For the probes and the 4 zone

actuator inside the same zone.

the device to send the control.

control unit:
a) the zone of belonging

Actuator address

b) any slave probes managed

The address of each actuator is

For the probes:


a) Master or Slave mode

uniquely defined by inserting the


numeric configurators from 0 to 9 in

(if necessary)

positions ZA and ZB. For each zone

For the actuators:

a maximum of 9 addresses can be

a) the zone of belonging

defined by inserting the numeric

b) the type of load to manage

configurators from 1 to 9 in position

c) the number of actuators

N; a maximum of 4 or 99 zones can be

belonging to the same zone

defined in a system, according to the

For the central units:

control unit used.

a) the zones of the system and

Up to 99 zones can be managed in a

their name

system; 2 configurators will thus be

b) the functioning mode of the

needed to define the zone number.

actuators (heating, cooling, ecc.)


c) the type of load to be controlled
(solenoid valves, fan-coil, etc.)
d) the pumps in the system
e) the control mode of the pumps
(heating, cooling, etc.)
f ) the startup delay of the pumps
(if necessary)

Energy management MY HOME 285

Configurazione

General concepts
The probe which controls zone 1 is combined in the 4 zone control unit.

ZONE 4
ZONE 3

07

Gen

+1

Ven

OF
+3
+2

13 : 38

ZA = 0
ZB = 1

-2 -1

18.0C

23.7C

-3

ZONE 2

ZONE 1

ZA = 0
ZB = 2

OK

4 zone central unit


18.0C
1

23.7C
13 : 38

Ven

07

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

Gen

C1

ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N =1

ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N =2

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C2

C1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C2

C1

ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N =3

C2

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

ZA = 0
ZB = 2
N =1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C2

C1

ZA = 0
ZB = 2
N =2

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C2

C1

ZA = 0
ZB = 2
N =3

C2

OK

1 9 max

1 9 max
BUS

The temperature control function can manage up to 99 zone addresses. For each zone up to 9 addresses dedicated to the actuators can be managed.
ZONE ...
ZONE 2

+1

-3

-2 -1

OF
+3
+2

-3

-2 -1

ZONE 1

OF
+3
+2

99 zone central unit

ZONE 99
F

ZA = 0
ZB = 1

+1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

OK

1
4
7

2
5
8
0

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

3
6
9

C1

C2

ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N =1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N =2

C2

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N =3

C1

C2

ZA = 9
ZB = 9

ZA = 9
ZB = 9
N =1

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

ZA = 9
ZB = 9
N =2

C2

1 2 3 4

ART. F430/2

C1

ZA = 9
ZB = 9
N =3

C2

C2

1 9 max
1 9 max
BUS

286 MY HOME Energy management

CONTENTS

MY HOME Air conditioning


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Energy management MY HOME 287

GENERAL FEATUREs

Air Conditioning
Integrating the MY HOME system

functions, which up to now were

If a probe configured as sLAVE of

with the management of the

performed using the remote control

the Temperature control system is

splitter air conditioning system

supplied with the device, to the

installed in a room, it will be possible

is now possible using the splitter

Touch screen or the Multimedia

to read the room temperature and

management interface, item 3456

Touch screen of the MY HOME

set the splitter operation

The interface transfers all the splitter

system

Touch Screen

Zone probe configured


as SLAVE

TV/SAT

TV/SAT

IPTV

IPTV

SCS/BUS

antifurto

termoregolazione

automazione
videocitofonia

diffusione
controllo
sonora

antifurto
lan

termoregolazione
controllo carichi

Splitter
management
interface

Splitter

Splitter

288 MY HOME Energy management

videocitofonia
energia

controllo
luci

lan
tvcc

Splitter
management
interface

controllowww
carichi

irrigazione
energia

MY HOME integration devices


SPLITTER MANAgEMENT

TOUCH SCREEN H4684 L4684

Advanced mode

INTERFACE, ITEM 3456

AM5864 AND MULTIMEDIA

Adjust the temperature

The splitter control interface is a

TOUCH SCREEN HD/HC/HS4690

device capable of controlling the

Using the Touch screens, it is possible

air conditioning system splitters

to send the following commands

position of the ventilation ns

by sending infrared commands,

based on the interface configuration

(sWING)

replacing the remote control of the

mode:

set the splitter speed (VEL);

splitter itself

Base Mode

select the operating MODE (OFF,

The association between the device

Recall up to 20 favourite controls,

(sETPOINT);

Adjust the oscillation and/or the

winter, summer, fan, dehumidier,


etc )

and the splitter remote control,

previously set during the

must be performed by connecting

association between the interface

All these controls may be included in

the interface to the programming

and the splitter In this mode,

an automation scenario saved on the

software PC

the controls can be recalled, as if

scenario module of the system (e g

The device may be installed inside

they were a scenario (without the

Exit for when one goes out: switching

flush mounted boxes, behind

need for being associated to the

of all the lights and splitters of the

traditional devices, in distribution

scenario module), also by other

home)

boards, without using a DIN rail space

devices, such as Local Display or

The advanced mode may also be

inside the splitter

scenario control This mode can be

used for the splitters included in the

It is fitted with an IR transmitter with

used with splitters of any brands

software database list

a two metre wire, for connection to


the splitter receiver
Multimedia Touch Screen

Touch Screen

Splitter
management
interface

Energy management MY HOME 289

290 MY HOME Energy management

CONTENTS

MY HOME Energy consumption display


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Energy management MY HOME 291

GENERAL FEATURES

Instantaneous power, water and gas consumption data


Using the My Home measurement

It is also possible to display the energy

format to make interpretation easy

devices it is possible to display on

produced on site from solar thermal

By setting tariff values it is pOssible to

several user interfaces (e g Local

and photovoltaic systems

display the data in the form of costs

Display, 3 5 and 10 Touch Screen,

The consumption can be displayed on

PC, or smartphone) not only the

the touch screen as instantaneous or

electric consumptions, but also water

cumulative data in graphical or table

and gas consumptions, as well as


the data from the heating central
accounting system

Dedicated icon on display


of the Touch Screen

292 MY HOME Energy management

Energy selection screen

Power consumption screen


(instantaneous / cumulative)

Monthly power consumption graph

Daily power consumption graph

Energy management MY HOME 293

GENERAL FEATURES

Displaying consumptions and the production data


The devices for the display of the

Thanks to the use of pulse counter

Using the power meters and the

consumptions can be integrated

interfaces and BUS meters with 3

pulse counter interfaces, it is possible,

directly on the bus of the

inputs for toroids, with the My Home

when a photovoltaic or a thermal

Automation/Temperature control

consumption display system it is

solar system is installed, to monitor

system, or be part of a dedicated

possible to display on the interfaces

how much power is being generated

system, as shown in the diagram

the consumptions for electricity, gas,

and how much water is being heated

below In this case, a power supply

and water, as well as the data from

will be necessary for the powering of

the heating accounting system

the BUS, as well as a display interface


(e g Local Display, Touch Screen,
Energy Data Logger, Webserver)
Touch Screen

Compact
power supply

Bus meter
with toroids

Pulse counter
interface

Pulse counter
interface

Local Display

Water meter
with pulse output
Gas meter
with pulse output

294 MY HOME Energy management

Thermal solar
panels

Photovoltaic
panel

Inverter

LAN network

Bus meter
with toroids

Hot water meter with


pulse output

Energy
Data Logger

Pulse counter
interface

Energy management MY HOME 295

GENERAL FEATURES

Measurement and display devices


PULSE COUNTER INTERFACE

BUS METER WITH 3 INPUTS FOR

ITEM 3522

TOROIDS - ITEM F520

The device detects, counts, and

The device measures up to three

The above described functions are

processes the information (water,

separate circuits, by connecting up

also valid to save the data coming

gas, etc ) received from meters with

to three toroids to the appropriate

from solar thermal and photovoltaic

pulse outputs; the data is then made

inputs

systems

available to the SCS bus, and displayed

The data is displayed on the Touch

The device is supplied with 1 toroid

on the Touch Screens The processing

Screens through the SCS Bus The

and corresponding connection

and accounting functions are:

processing and accounting functions

cable (item 3523); it is suitable for

instantaneous consumption

are:

installation inside distribution boards

instantaneous consumption of 3

and switchboards and requires the

(calculated as the average of 2

lines maximum;

pulses received during the time

space of 1 DIN module

cumulative hourly consumptions

unit);
hourly, daily, and monthly

for the last 12 months, daily

consumption (one year memory)

consumptions for the last 2 years,

The device may be installed in

monthly consumptions for the last

ush mounted boxes, behind

12 years

traditional type devices, or also


inside distribution boards, but
Bus meter with 3 inputs
for toroids

without taking up any DIN rail


space

Data deletion
pushbutton
Pulse counter interface

SCS/BUS
connection

230 Vac
connection
Pulse input

Opto isolated
repetition
(pulse input)

Configurator
socket

Toroid with
connection cable

Device
status
LED

SCS/BUS
connection
Configurator
socket door

296 MY HOME Energy management

DISPLAY DEVICES

SYSTEM INTERFACES

Central unit for load management, or

My Home offers several user

Local Display, 3 5, and 10 Touch

preventively force the load

interfaces for the display of

Screens are devices commonly used

The Touch Screen and Multimedia

consumption/production data:

for the control of the My Home

Touch Screen display can also be

System interfaces: (Local Display,

functions, but can also be used to

used to display consumption and

display energy consumptions, and to

production data for the last 12 years,

Energy data logger

control the loads Local Display can in

in chart or table format (hourly,

Portal

fact be used to display consumption

daily, or monthly representation)

Each interface is capable of

and production data for several

Using all the previous interfaces, it

energies It is possible to manage up

is also possible to associate several

to 10 lines, displaying on each line

measurement units (m3, l, kWh, etc )

the instantaneous, cumulative daily,

to the individual line/pulse counter

monthly, and annual consumptions,

interface, and the corresponding

including the corresponding

currency (Euro, $, , etc )

3 5 and 10 Touch Screen)

meeting several needs

economic values It is also possible


to operate the controlled loads,
reactivating a load disabled by the

Multimedia Touch Screen

Touch Screen

Local Display

Energy management MY HOME 297

GENERAL FEATURES

Energy data logger


The energy data logger is a device

Have a more detailed recording of

The web pages of the devices

that can be used to:

electric data: for each electric line,

show for each individual electric

Display on the PC or other device

the user can download an excel le

line or pulse counter interface the

every 15 minutes

instantaneous consumption, the

(e g Smartphone) consumption/

Set several time bands for a more

daily consumption, the monthly

detailed conversion of the electric

consumption, the average daily

power value into an economic

consumption for each month, the

consisting of 10 separate energy

value (e g two-hourly, three-hourly

total consumption for the last 12

lines maximum The lines can

tari ) For water and gas lines

years, in a chart or table format

be the electric power lines, by

there are monetary conversion

connecting F520 meters, or

values without time bands (single

an F521 Central unit for load

one-hour tari )

production data, recalling the web


pages using an Internet Browser
Concentrate and save data

management, or lines for water,

Export the data for each line/pulse

gas, or heat consumption, by

counter interface in individual

connecting 3522 pulse counter

excel les split by day, month, year

interfaces

Ethernet cable
connection

Power line/device
status LED
Pushbutton

Have a simple data backup: the


device features a housing for

SD memory card
housing door

an SD memory card, on which


consumption details for each
individual line are saved daily

SCS/BUS
connection

298 MY HOME Energy management

Portal
MY HOME WEB is a virtual platform
that can be used to control all the MY
HOME functions relating to comfort,
safety, savings, and communication
in your own home In developing the

The My Home portal is capable of

Fixed IP: in case of xed IP ADSL

saving the electric consumption

subscription

data on an hourly basis and, thanks

Variable IP: in case of variable IP

to the time bands settings, convert

ADSL subscription

the energy value into economic

Web Server Active Connection

MY HOME WEB portal, BTicino has

(W A C ): in case of private network

value For water and gas lines there

paid special attention to ensuring

connection, where the system

are monetary conversion values

high levels of protection of the data

cannot be directly reached by the

without time bands Thanks to

transferred through the network

Internet (e g Fastweb), or of non-

the calculation capabilities of the

from unwanted access The most

congurable router

portal it is possible to save and


display the consumption data

stringent protection criteria have


therefore been implemented, like:

For the energy management

without any limitations in terms

The use of the special https protocol,

functions the Portal gives the

of time and maximum number of

which makes it impossible to read at

possibility of monitoring the

lines The data saved are available

the origin any information transiting

controlled loads (load management),

for consultation as charts on

through the network, and the use of

and of displaying energy

web interface, inside the Energy

the 128 bit SSL (Secure Socket Layer)

consumptions Using the web pages

Management section of the Portal

protocol certified by the VerySign

of the portal, it is in fact possible to:

Certification Authority Through the

Force a load disabled by the central

Export an excel le after selecting


the time period the data should

portal, the user can control all the

unit for load management, or

refer to The generated export le

home automation functions installed

preventive forcing, as well as to

contains the consumption data

inside the home, including the

display the consumptions of the

and the corresponding economic

Energy Management function, from

controlled load (using item F522)

values

one single application, and remotely


using a PC or smartphone The

Display the consumption/


production data

service is compatible with all types of


connections:

Energy management MY HOME 299

300 MY HOME Energy management

CONTENTS

MY HOME Load control management


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Energy management MY HOME 301

GENERAL FEATURES

The end of the black-out


The My Home load control

It gives the possibility of disabling

Its devices (central unit and

management system manages

or re-enabling, using the display

actuators) only require the space

the maximum power used, by

interfaces, the priorities congured

of one DIN module This ensure

automatically disconnecting the

based on the changed needs of

optimisation of spaces inside the

least important appliances in case of

the customer

distribution boards

overload

It gives the possibility of checking

By conguring the actuators of the

The system:

on the display interfaces the

load control system in automation

Manages up to 63 loads

correct operation of the load using

mode, it is possible to use display

Displays on the display interfaces

the measurement of the earth

interfaces to set the time delays for

(e g Local Display, Touch Screen,

leakage current absorbed by the

the activation of the loads at set

Webserver) the instantaneous

same

times

and cumulative consumption on


hourly, daily, and monthly basis, of
the controlled phase In addition,
thanks to the actuator with sensor,
it is possible to measure the actual
consumption of the controlled
load

Dedicated icon on the screen


of the touch screen

302 MY HOME Energy management

Power consumption screen


(instantaneous / cumulative)

Monthly power consumption graph

Controlled loads screen

Controlled load consumption display


screen (with item F522)

Diagnostic icon

Energy consumption
display icon

Load control
management icon

Energy management MY HOME 303

GENERAL FEATURES

Operation
Using the external toroid, the central

and a number of devices depending

has configurator no 3 This load

unit measures the power used by

on the available supply current

therefore only disconnects after the

the loads connected and compares it

In the example shown, the oven, the

oven and the washing machine

with the value preselected during the

microwave oven, and the washing

The user can reactivate the

installation (using the configurators it

machine represent the loads

disconnected device at any time

is possible to select powers between

controlled using actuators, while

using the actuator pushbutton or

1 5 and 18 kW, with tolerances up to

the refrigerator, which operation is

the touch screen In this case, if

+/- 20%) An actuator is associated

imperative that is not interrupted,

the overload condition still exists,

to each appliance being controlled

is connected to his socket without

the central unit will enable the

The actuator receives the information

actuator

operation of the selected load, but

from the central unit and disconnects

In case of overload, the first

will disconnect the subsequent loads

the load from the network in case of

device that disconnects is the one

starting from the least important,

overload

considered the least important by

until the overload situation is

The disconnection sequence of

the user, in the example the oven,

resolved

the actuators is defined during

which actuator has configurator no

The operating status of the loads is

the installation using a simple

1 The microwave is on the other

notified both by the actuators and

configuration operation to be carried

hand the most important device,

the touch screens

out on the devices themselves

and the corresponding actuator

By configuring the actuators of the


load control management system

The central unit gives the possibility


of managing up to 63 priority levels,

Central unit for


load management

also in automation mode, it is


possible to use the touch screen to
set the time delays for the activation

Power meter

Electric distribution
board

of the loads at set times

BUS SCS

230 Vac
Non-controlled
socket

Flush mounted
actuator

Flush mounted
actuator

Flush mounted
actuator

230 Vac

Non-controlled load
NOTE: inside the electric distribution board it is installed the central unit for load management

304 MY HOME Energy management

Controlled load
with priority 1

Controlled load
with priority 2

Controlled load
with priority 3

DISPLAY FUNCTION

DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION

The central unit for load

Thanks to the actuator with probe

management is capable of measuring

(Item F522), it is possible to display,

the consumption of the controlled

in addition to consumptions, also the

line using the toroid supplied The

diagnostic, using the additional toroid

information is displayed on the touch

(item 3523) of the controlled load

screens, local displays, and on the


web pages of the web server and the
energy data logger
The processing and accounting
functions are:
instantaneous consumption of the
controlled line;
hourly, daily, monthly and last 12
months cumulative consumptions

Controlled loads
diagnostic display screen

Diagnostic
icon

Load OK

Load near the earth leakage


disconnection limit
Load problems
(e.g. device earth connection problems)

Energy management MY HOME 305

GENERAL FEATURES

Device selection criteria


CENTRAL UNIT FOR LOAD

ACTUATOR 16 A WITH CURRENT

MANAGEMENT F521

PROBE - ITEM F522

The device is capable of measuring

The processing and accounting

The device is an actuator with an

the input power from the electric

functions are:

integrated current probe for the

system and to control the status

instantaneous consumption of the

measurement of controlled load

of the actuators of the load

consumptions (instantaneous

controlled line;

management system, to prevent the

cumulative hourly consumptions

consumption and 2 independently

risk of tripping of the power meter

for the last 12 months, daily

resettable energy totalizers), and is

The central unit manages up to

consumptions for the last 2 years,

capable of performing both ENERGY

63 appliances or electric loads per

monthly consumptions for the last

MANAGEMENT and automation

each phase, measures currents

12 years

functions

and voltages, and processes these

The central unit is suitable for

When configured in ENERGY

data to provide energy and power

installation inside distribution boards

MANAGEMENT mode, it gives the

information

and switchboards and requires the

possibility of measuring the load

space of 1 DIN module

input power, the power and the


earth leakage current (through the

Actuator 16A
with current probe

connection of an external toroid, item


3523)
230 Vac
connection

The actuator is suitable for


installation inside distribution boards
and switchboards and requires the
space of 1 DIN module

Device status
LED

Central unit for load


management

230 Vac
connection

Device status
LED

16A actuator

Load forcing
pushbutton

230 Vac
connection

Configurator socket
door

Load forcing
pushbutton

Device status
LED

Load forcing
pushbutton

SCS/BUS connection
Configurator socket
door

Configurator socket
door

SCS/BUS connection

306 MY HOME Energy management

SCS/BUS connection

ACTUATOR 16A F523

FLUSH MOUNTED ACTUATOR 16 A

LOAD CONTROL PANEL

The device is an actuator capable

ITEMHC/HS/HD/L/N/NT4672N

HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4673

of performing both energy

Actuator conceived for installation in

The load control panel is a device that

management and automation

Living, Light, Light Tech and Axolute

enables displaying the status of the

functions The actuator is suitable for

flush mounted supports, intended

loads controlled by the load control

installation inside distribution boards

for the automation and/or ENERGY

central unit, item F521, and force

and switchboards and requires the

MANAGEMENT functions

their operation independently from

space of 1 DIN module

The device has:

the central unit itself It is therefore

a local load forcing pushbutton;

possible to:

a red/green two-colour LED for

Force the priority of the load

the notication of the status of the

during normal operation In this

actuator;

case the central unit cannot

central unit for load management


red disabling signalling LED

disable the load for 4 hours


Re-enable a load disabled by
the central unit, the duration of
this operation lasts for 4 hours,
unless the disabling key is pressed
manually
The functions that can be performed
by the load control panel can also be
performed by Local Display

Local pushbutton for load


forcing/local control

Load status red LED


Device status two-colour LED

(HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4685) With Local


Display it is however possible to
manage up to 20 loads

Flush mounted 16 A actuator

Forced load key


Local Display
Load/programming status
notification LED

Load control panel

Energy management MY HOME 307

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION

Load control management and consumption display


BUILDING LAYOUT

PHYSICAL LIMIT

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF

The BUS system layout for the

The maximum number of devices

ACTUATORS

installation of Load Control

that can be connected to the BUS

The Central Unit for Load

Management System and the Display

(central unit for load management,

Management can control up to 63

of Consumptions System offers the

actuator, power meter, and pulse

actuators (appliances or electric

following advantages:

counter interface) depends on the

loads)

Both for new systems, and

total absorption of the same, and on

If the system is solely dedicated to

installation in existing electric

the distance between the connection

Load Management, or if it shares the

systems, the BUS line can use

point and the power supply

same BUS line of the Automation/

the same conduits of the energy

Temperature control system, the

system used for the wiring of

If the system uses the same cable

number of actuators shall depend on

power sockets However, this is

as the Automation/temperature

the limit of the available current

only possible when using the BUS

control system, the calculation of the

cable, Item L4669, with insulation

maximum number of devices must

voltage 300/500 Vdc

be performed taking into account the

Depending on the needs of the

general absorption of the same

user and the type of building, the

For the purpose of the above

load control actuators may be

calculations, the table shows the

installed:

current absorbed by each device

1. in DIN distribution board, if it is not


required to display and reactivate
the load directly in the room where
the load is located;
2. near each current socket for the
load to be controlled, to ensure the
possibility of controlling the status
and/or forcing the load

ITEM

DEVICE

ABSORPTION FROM BUS

F521

Central unit for load management

28 mA

F522

Actuator with probe

30 mA

F523

Basic actuator

10 mA

HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4672N

Flush mounted actuator

10 mA

H4684 - L4684 - AM5864

Touch screen 3.5

80 mA

HD/HC/HS4690

Multimedia Touch screen 10

50 mA

F520

Bus meter with toroids

35 mA

3522

Pulse counter interface

7.5 mA

HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4673

Load control panel

7 mA

HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4685

Local Display

60 mA

F524

Energy data logger

30 mA

308 MY HOME Energy management

1. The length of the connection


between the power supply and the
furthest device cannot exceed 250 m
Actuator
Junction box
Home automation distribution
board
Furthest device

2. The total length of the connections


must not exceed 500 m (extended
cable)
Actuator
Junction box
Home automation distribution
board

Energy management MY HOME 309

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION

Load control management and consumption display


In order to ensure optimum distribution
of the currents on the BUS line, it is
recommended to position the power
supply in an intermediate position

PRI

E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

SCS

With E46ADCN power supply:

With E49 power supply:

=250 m max

=250 m max

=250 m max

=250 m max

A + B =500 m
The maximum current supplied
by the power supply is: 1200 mA
NOTE: If a UTP5 cable is used instead of a BUS L4669 cable, distances must halved.

310 MY HOME Energy management

A + B =500 m
The maximum current supplied
by the power supply is: 600 mA

CONFIGURATION

Load control management and consumption display


The load management control and

control actuators (Item F522, F523,

The products may be split in two

consumption display systems must

L/N/NT/HC/HS/ HD4672N) and

classes:

be correctly configured to ensure

consists in physically connecting

1. Pulse counter interface (item

that they can operate correctly,

the connection components, called

3522), Bus meter with 3 inputs for

and that each item can perform

configurators to the appropriate

toroids (item F520), Central unit for

the desired function The mode of

housings of the devices

load management (item F521) All

configuration must be the physical

The configurators have different

these devices have an address from

one The physical configuration

numbers, letters, colours, or graphics

1 to 127

entails interaction with the devices


- pulse counter interface (Item
3522), bus meter with 3 inputs for
toroids (Item F520), central unit for

CONFIGURATOR SOCKET

CONFIGURATORS USED

load management (Item F521), load

A1 is the configurator indicating the hundreds

0, 1

A2 is the configurator indicating the tens

From 0 to 9

A3 is the configurator indicating the units

From 1 to 9

A3-Ta

From 1 to 9 (a congurator must be in this housing)

A3-Tb

From 1 to 9

A3-Tc

From 1 to 9

WARNING: The 0 configurator in A3-Tb, A3-Tc indicates that the toroid input is not being used. A3 or A3Ta cannot
be equal to 0. In the case of the bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids, item F520, if only one toroid is used, this must
be connected to A3-Ta.
Configuration examples:
For bus meter with three inputs for toroids, item F520, and pulse counter interface, item 3522:

Pulse counter interface

Bus meter with toroids

VALUE OF CONFIGURATORS
A1
A2
A3-Ta
A3-Tb
A3-Tc

ADDRESSES
0
0
1
2
3

Toroid connected to Ta with address 001


Toroid connected to Tb with address 002
Toroid connected to Tc with address 003

WARNING: The devices in this class must be a different


address from each other: for example, there cannot be
a pulse counter interface and a bus meter with three
inputs for toroids with the same address. Also two
toroids cannot have the same address.
In case two consumption/load control devices are
installed on an automation or temperature control

A1
A2
A3-Ta
A3-Tb
A3-Tc

1
2
6
7
0

A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM

0
0
4

Toroid connected to Ta with address 126


Toroid connected to Tb with address 127
No toroid connected to Tc

bus, the configured addresses are not in conflict with


the other devices on the system: a temperature control
probe configured with address 11 is not in conflict with
a bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids with address 11.
It is possible to manage up to 20 lines (toroids)
maximum per power supply. Example: 6 meters for 3

Pulse counter interface address 004

lines plus 1 meter for 2 lines (total 20).

Energy management MY HOME 311

CONFIGURATION

Load control management and consumption display


2. Load control actuators:
The actuators may be used both as

mode requires a progressive address

programs in the touch screens, and

automation actuators and ENERGY

from 1 to 63

define the disconnection priorities for

MANAGEMENT actuators The

These addresses are used in the

the controlled load

configuration in automation mode

appropriate configuration software

follows the same rules outlined


in the automation guide (see the
device TECHNICAL SHEETS); the
configuration in Energy Management

CONFIGURATOR SOCKET

CONFIGURATORS USED

P1 is the configurator indicating the tens

From 0 to 6

P2 is the configurator indicating the units

From 0 to 9

Configuration examples:
For actuator 16 A with probe Item F522 and actuator 16 A Item F523:
VALUE OF CONFIGURATORS

ADDRESSES

WARNING: In the case of consumption display/

Actuator 16 A with probe


Actuator 16A

load control actuators installed on an automation


A
PL
M
P1
P2
PF

A
PL
M
G
P1
P2

or temperature control bus, and configured also in


0
1

Address priority 01

automation mode
(A, PL...), the load control actuator must not have
the same address as another actuator on the
automation bus. Example: if actuator F411/1N A =
1 PL = 1, then actuator F522 cannot be configured

Address priority 10

with PL=1.

1
0

SYSTEM EXPANSIONS
CONSUMPTION DISPLAY

LOAD CONTROL SYSTEM

The energy management system is a

CONFIGURATION

CONFIGURATION

very flexible system, for the installation

After installing the devices (Pulse

After installing the devices and

of the devices on the automation/

counter interface, item 3522, bus

configuring the actuators, it is

temperature control bus, or for

meter with 3 inputs for toroids,

necessary that the central unit

creating a system solely dedicated to

Item F520, central unit for load

for load management acquires

energy management, with dedicated

management, Item F521), an address

the actuators on the bus, and the

power supply in general, all energy

must be assigned using physical

corresponding priorities configured

management devices may be installed

configurators (A1, A2, A3) This

For more information see the

on each bus

address will then be used in the

technical sheet of the central unit

branch and on each expansion,

software for the configuration of

for load management, item F521,

provided this is allowed by the

the user interfaces (e g software for

and the TECHNICAL SHEET for the

absorption calculations The only

the configuration of the 3 5 touch

actuators

exceptions are the actuators, which,

screen)

when configured in automation mode,

For more information see the

during system expansions follow the

relevant product technical sheet

same rules of the automation bus


(automation technical guide)

312 MY HOME Energy management

AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

DEVICES
Power bus meter with
3 inputs for toroids

Central unit for


load management

Actuator 16 A
with current probe

Actuator 16A

Flush mounted
Actuator 16 A

Pulse counter
interface

SCS
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM

Load management
panel

IN

3522
OUT

Visualisation
Load control
Diagnostic 1)

NOTE 1): in combination with additional toroid, item 3523

AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

DEVICES
Local display

Touch screen 3,5

Touch screen 10

Energy data logger

Webserver

Visualisation
Load control
Diagnostic 1)

Energy management MY HOME 313

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Display of electricity, water and gas consumptions


ITEM

DESCRIPTION

WARNING

RCCD
MCB1
E49
F520
3523
Touch Screen
3522

General switch
4 A MCB switch
Compact power supply
Bus meter with three inputs for toroids
Toroid
Touch Screen 3.5/ Multimedia Touch Screen 10
Pulse counter interface

The following Touch Screens may be installed:

230 Vac

- H4684 AXOLUTE
- L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
- AM5864 MTIX
- Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid, item 3523
The general switch RCCD must be selected depending
on general absorption. For better safety and comfort,
the installation of an additional STOP&GO device is also
recommended.

N
L

N
L

To the other users

MGT1
4A

IG

Modem Router/
Switch

3523

E49

Touch Screen

F520

F524

PRI

A1
A2
A3TA
A3TB
A3TC

E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

SCS

=0
=0
=1
=0
=0

BUS/SCS
Switchboard or distribution board

3522

SCS
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM

IN

3522
OUT

A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM

=0
=0
=2
=0
=1
=0

3522

SCS
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM

Zener Barrier/Galvanic
insulation Barrier 1)

NOTES: 1) the barrier must meet the Atex requirements


and must be installed outside the Atex area.

314 MY HOME Energy management

Gas meter with


pulse output

Water meter with


pulse output

IN

3522
OUT

A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM

=0
=0
=3
=0
=3
=0

Display of electric consumptions on several lines


ITEM

DESCRIPTION

WARNING

E49
F520
3523
Touch Screen
RCCD
MCB1-5
MCB6

Compact power supply


Bus meter with three inputs for toroids
Toroid
Touch Screen 3.5/ Multimedia Touch Screen 10
General switch
Linear protection switch
4 A MCB switch

The following Touch Screens may be installed:


- H4684 AXOLUTE
- L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
- AM5864 MTIX
- Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
General MCB switches must be selected depending on
load absorption
Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid, item 3523

230 Vac

N
L

N
L

IG

MGT1

MGT2

MGT3

MGT4

The general switch RCCD must be selected depending


on general absorption. For better safety and comfort,
the installation of an additional STOP&GO device is also
recommended.

MGT5
3523

3523
Socket line 1

3523

Socket line 2
3523
Line 3
lighting
3523
Line 4
appliances
3523

MGT6
F881NA/4

E49
PRI

E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

SCS

Switchboard or
distribution board

Line 5
Temperature
control
(hot and cold)

F520
A1
A2
A3TA
A3TB
A3TC

Touch Screen

F520
=0
=0
=1
=2
=3

A1
A2
A3TA
A3TB
A3TC

=0
=0
=4
=5
=6

BUS/SCS
To other devices if present

Energy management MY HOME 315

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Display of produced and consumed energy


WARNING

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

E49
F520
3523
3522
Touch Screen
RCCD
MCB1-2

Compact power supply


Bus meter with three inputs for toroids
Toroid
Pulse counter interface
Touch Screen 3.5/ Multimedia Touch Screen 10
General switch
MCB protection switch

If a photovoltaic system and a thermal solar system for


the production of energy and hot water are installed,
by using energy measurement devices and the pulse
counter interface the user can display the energy
produced, or the amount of heated water on the touch
screen.

The following Touch Screens may be installed:


- H4684 AXOLUTE
- L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
- AM5864 MTIX
- Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
General MCB switches must be selected depending on
load absorption
Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid, item
3523, for current reading
The general switch RCCD must be selected depending
on general absorption. For better safety and comfort,
the installation of an additional STOP&GO device is also
recommended.

230 Vac
L N

Photovoltaic generator string

L
Input/output
meter

Wh

230 Vac

Wh

MGT1
IG
Inverter
3523

String distribution board

3523

N
MGT2

Touch Screen
E49

F520

F520

PRI

E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

SCS

A1
A2
A3TA
A3TB
A3TC

A1
A2
A3TA
A3TB
A3TC

=0
=0
=1
=0
=0

=0
=0
=2
=0
=0

BUS/SCS
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM

=
=
=
=
=
=

To other devices if present

0
0
3
0
3
0

Water meter with


pulse outout
SCS

3522

316 MY HOME Energy management

A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM

IN

3522
OUT

Storage battery

Display of produced and consumed energy


in exchange mode on location
WARNING

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

E49
F520
3523
Touch Screen
RCCD
MCB1-3

Compact power supply


Bus meter with three inputs for toroids
Toroid
Touch Screen 3.5/ Multimedia Touch Screen 10
General switch
MCB protection switch

In the presence of a photovoltaic panels system


configured for a delivery of energy in local exchange
mode, the bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids can be
installed as shown in the figure: one toroid measures
the current produced by the photovoltaic panels, the
other the home consumption.
WARNING: avoid fitting the measuring toroid directly
on the main bidirectional meter.

The following Touch Screens may be installed:


- H4684 AXOLUTE
- L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
- AM5864 MTIX
- Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
General MCB switches must be selected depending on
load absorption
Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid, item
3523, for current reading
The general switch RCCD must be selected depending
on general absorption. For better safety and comfort,
the installation of an additional STOP&GO device is also
recommended

Photovoltaic generator string

230 Vac
L N

Production
meter

Input/
output
meter

Wh
MGT1

Inverter

Wh
MGT2

String distribution board

3523

IG

3523

L
N
MGT3

Touch Screen
E49

F520

PRI

E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

SCS

A1 =
A2 =
A3TA =
A3TB =
A3TC =

0
0
1
2
0

BUS SCS

To other devices if present

Energy management MY HOME 317

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Display of the consumption of thermal power /


hot water by individual home
ITEM

DESCRIPTION

E46ADCN
...4695
...4692
F430/2
F430/4
3522
Touch Screen

Power supply
4 zone central units
probe with adjustment knob
2 relay DIN actuator
4 relay DIN actuator
Pulse counter interface
Touch Screen 3.5 / Multimedia Touch
Screen 10

In an establishment with central heating, by connecting a


Pulse counter interface to the pulse output of the meter of
a My Home system, it is possible to display on the touch
screen the data made available by the meter (water
consumption of the individual home, thermal power).
The meter must be have pulse outputs, and must be
installed at the input of the distribution manifold.

WARNING
The following Touch Screens may be installed:
- H4684 AXOLUTE
- L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
- AM5864 MTIX
- Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
The following 4 zone central units may be installed:
- HC/HS4695 AXOLUTE
- L/N/NT4695 LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHTECH
- AM5875 MATIX

Home n

The following probes with knob may be installed:


-3

-3

- HC/HS4692 AXOLUTE
- L/N/NT4692 LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHTECH
- AM5872 MATIX

ZONE 2

OFF

+1

-2 -1

+3
+2

+1

4692

ZONE 4

-2 -1

OFF

+3
+2

ZONE 3

4692

ZONE 1

18.0C
-3

23.7C

-2 -1

OFF

+3
+2

13 : 38

Ven

07

Gen

OK

+1

4692

4695

Home 2
-3

-3

ZONE 2

+1

-2 -1

+3
+2

OFF

+3
+2

OFF

+1

4692

ZONE 4

-2 -1

ZONE 3

18.0C
-3

23.7C

-2 -1

OFF

+3
+2

13 : 38

Ven

07

Solenoid valve

Solenoid valve

Solenoid valve
Meter

ZONE 1

Gen

OK

+1

4692

Solenoid valve

4692

4695

Home 1

Mixing
valve
Main solenoid
valve

Central boiler

E46ADCN

Mixing valve
management
central unit

F430/2
1

1 2 3 4

C2

1 2 3 4 5

...4695

ART. F430/4

ART. F430/2

C1

Touch Screen

F430/4

C1

C2 C3 C4

OK

230 Vac

-2 -1

-3

-3
F

+1

+1

...4692

-2 -1

OF

OF

+3
+2

-2 -1

+1

...4692

+3
+2

+3
+2

OF

...4692

-3

BUS/SCS

A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM

=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
1
0
2
0

3522

NOTE: the pulse counter interface is recommended (M=2) to detect the thermal power

318 MY HOME Energy management

SCS
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM

IN

3522
OUT

Load control management


with total consumption display
ITEM

DESCRIPTION

WARNING

E49
F521
F523
3523
Touch Screen
RCCD
MCB1
...4672N

Compact power supply


Central unit for load management
16 A 1 M DIN basic actuator
Toroid
Touch Screen 3.5 / Multimedia Touch 10
General switch
4 A MCB switch
Flush mounted actuator

The following Touch Screens may be installed:

230 Vac

- H4684 AXOLUTE
- L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
- AM5864 MTIX
- Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
The following 2 module flush mounted 16 A actuators
may be installed
- HC/HS/HD4672N AXOLUTE
- L/N/NT4672N LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHTECH
General MCB switches must be selected depending on
load absorption

N
L

The general switch RCCD must be selected depending


on general absorption. For better safety and comfort,
the installation of an additional STOP&GO device is also
recommended

N
L

MGT1

Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid,


item 3523, for current reading

MGT2

IG

N
L
3523

Load

Load

Load

...4672N

L N
F521

E49
PRI

E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

SCS

A1
A2
A3
P
TOL

=
=
=
=
=

0
0
1
0
5

F523
A
PL
G
M
P1
P2

Touch
Screen

F523
=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
0
2

A
PL
G
M
P1
P2

=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
0
1

A
PL
G
M
P1
P2

=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
0
3

BUS/SCS

Switchboard or distribution board

Energy management MY HOME 319

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Load control management with total display,


of loads and diagnostics
WARNING

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

E49
F521
F523
F522
3523
Touch Screen
RCCD
MCB1

Compact power supply


Central unit for load management
16 A 1 M DIN basic actuator
Actuator 16 A with probe
Toroid
Touch Screen 3.5 / Multimedia Touch Screen 10
General switch
4 A MCB switch

The following Touch Screens may be installed:


- H4684 AXOLUTE
- L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
- AM5864 MTIX
- Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
General MCB switches must be selected depending on
load absorption
Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid, item
3523, for current reading

230 Vac

N
L

The general switch RCCD must be selected depending


on general absorption. For better safety and comfort,
the installation of an additional STOP&GO device is also
recommended

N
L
MGT1

F522 actuator 16 A with integrated current probe,


capable of measuring the consumptions of the controlled
load. By connecting a toroid, item 3523 to the device,
it is possible to measure the earth leakage current and
display the load status on the Touch screen.

MGT2

IG

N
L
3523

Load

Load

Load

Load

L N

Touch Screen

E49
PRI

E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

SCS

F521
A1
A2
A3
P
TOL

=
=
=
=
=

0
0
1
0
5

F522
A
PL
M
P1
P2
PF

F523
=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
2
5

A
PL
G
M
P1
P2

F522
=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
0
1

A
PL
M
P1
P2
PF

F522
=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
3
0

A
PL
M
P1
P2
PF

=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
4
0

BUS/SCS

Switchboard or distribution board

320 MY HOME Energy management

Three-phase and one-phase load control management


ITEM

DESCRIPTION

WARNING

E49
F521
F523
3523
MCB
FC4A...

Compact power supply


Central unit for load management
16 A 1 M DIN basic actuator
Toroid
MCB switch
AC contactor

General MCB switches must be selected depending on


load absorption
The contactor must be selected depending on the
absorption of the load
The three-phase line must be balanced

380 Vac
R
S
T
N

R
S
T
N

MGT1

MGT2

Single-phase
load

R N
E49

F521

F523

A1
A2
A3
P
TOL

A
PL
G
M
P1
P2

PRI

E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

SCS

= 0
= 0
= 1
= 1)
= 1)

F523
=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
0
1

A
PL
G
M
P1
P2

=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
0
2

BUS/SCS 1

E49

F521

F523

PRI

A1
A2
A3
P
TOL

E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

SCS

= 0
= 0
= 1
= 1)
= 1)

A
PL
G
M
P1
P2

=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
0
1

R N
FC4A...
BUS/SCS 2

E49

F521

F523

PRI

E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

SCS

A1
A2
A3
P
TOL

= 0
= 0
= 1
= 1)
= 1)

A
PL
G
M
P1
P2

=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
0
1

Three-phase load

NOTE: 1) the configurators must be selected depending on the rated power


BUS/SCS 3

Energy management MY HOME 321

CONTENTS

MY HOME Sound system


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

GENERAL FEATURES

Sound system 2 wire stereo HI-FI


The stereo Sound System provides

audio/video mixers, it will be possible

perfectly integrated with the electric

sound selection and control, so that

to choose between mono and

system, that enable listening both to

high quality sound may be sent to

multichannel systems

the HI-FI system and the integrated

several rooms at the same time

The Sound System consists of

FM radio source

Thanks to the various available

amplifiers and loudspeakers,

Flush mounted diffuser

Flush mounted diffuser

Flush mounted
amplifier
Hi-Fi stereo system

stereo control

Line terminator

8-contact connector

324 MY HOME

Sound system

Thanks to its complete range and the

of expansion of the system, and

environments, such as general

many functions that it provides, it

the sound quality, mean in fact that

practitioners or dentist nurseries,

represents the ideal solution for both

it can be used both in domestic

shop, bars, restaurants and

home and service sector applications

environments (from the apartment

supermarkets

The performance, the possibilities

to the villa), and in service sector

Flush mounted diffuser

Flush mounted diffuser

Flush mounted
amplifier

Audio/Video node

Line terminator

Power supply

230 Vac
Bus

Sound system MY HOME 325

GENERAL FEATURES

Wide range of solutions


fOR THE RESIDENTIAL SEcTOR

fOR THE SERVIcE SEcTOR

Mono/multichannel sound system

Extendable to up to 140
loudspeakers

Wide range of loudspeakers

Possibility of using the

Elegant and refined designs

loudspeakers for intercom


purposes
Flush mounted diffuser

Possibility of also creating


monophonic systems

Management through PC
Ceiling mounted diffuser
Flush mounted amplifier
stereo amplifier

MULTIcHANNEL SETUP: IN EAcH


ROOM IT WILL BE POSSIBLE TO
LISTEN TO THE DESIRED MUSIc
In total freedom and with full control
The multichannel setup will in

will listen to the radio, while, in their

fact give the possibility to listen to

own bedroom, the parents will enjoy

different music in each room at the

a cd from the stereo system located

same time: in their bedroom, children

in the living room

up to 4 sound sources

dierent music for each room

multichannel matrix

otHer sourCes

note: the multichannel matrix has four more inputs, for the connection of entrance panels, video door entry systems, and/or cameras.
326 MY HOME

Sound system

Integration with other MY HOME applications


and the 2 wire video door entry system
The Sound System can be integrated with
other MY HOME applications and with
the 2 wire video door entry system, for
the creation of useful scenarios, such as:
1. With the simple pressure of one

2. Automatically lower the

3. Make a call from the video

key it will be possible to rise the

music volume to better hear

handset, with the voice carried

rolling shutter, and switch the radio

communications from the handset, or

through the loudspeakers, to look for

or the stereo on, to have the desired

the video door entry systems

people, or for verbal communication


in general

music playing in the background


example of implementation of scenario 1
Automation system:
lights and shutters

sCs/sCs interface:
to integrate the sound system with automation

= white BUS cable (for sound system)

sound system

= grey BUS cable (for automation)

example of implementation of scenarios 2 and 3


Video door entry system

Audio/video node or multichannel matrix:


common for video door entry system and sound system

sound system

= white BUS cable (common for video door entry system and sound system)

TWO WIRE SIMPLIcITY


The installation of the sound system

applications, also this system may be

The Sound System uses the same

is simple and accessible

easily expanded and modified at a

power supply and cable of the 2 wire

Just like all other MY HOME

later date

door entry system

Sound system MY HOME 327

GENERAL FEATURES

Installing a system
Irrespective of the solution selected,

To them, it will then be necessary

when installing a sound system the

to add all those devices, common

following components will always be

to every system, that enable the

required:

application to function: power

1. Audio/video mixers;

supply, sheathed pair, configurators,

2. Sound sources;

line terminals etc

3. Sound Amplifiers;
4. Control device;
5. Loudspeakers

1 AUDIO/VIDEO MIXERS

The choice of one of the four audio/

multichannel matrix:
for single channel systems with several sound sources used at the
same time.

video mixers depends on the type of


system being installed These devices
enable the distribution of the sound
from the sound sources through
the amplifiers located in the various

Audio/Video node:
for single channel systems
with several sound sources
used one at the time.

rooms

Video adapter:
for basic systems with only one
sound source.

Compact power supply:


this is a Video AdAPter integrated inside a power
supply. single device performing the audio/video mixer
and power supply functions. suitable for basic systems
with only one sound sources (max available current
600 mA). see dedicated diagram 1 in the section.
installation examples.

328 MY HOME

Sound system

2 SOUND SOURcES

Sound sources are devices

interfaces for connection of external

generating a stereo audio signal

sound sources (e g HI-FI system,

BTicino offers radio synthetisers and

IPOD with dock-station)


rCA input

radio tuner
source insulator
to be used with rCA input only,
when the sound source is not
battery powered
stereo control

3 AMPLIfIERS

Devices that amplify the audio


signal form the sound sources to the
loudspeakers found throughout the
system

stereo amplifier da incasso:


permette lamplificazione del segnale oltre a
tutte le funzioni di comando on/o, volume,
selez. sorgente, stazione o brano Cd

din stereo amplifier:


directly powered at 230 Vac, it enables the
creation of extended systems (up to 140
loudspeakers). suitable for service sector
environments, such as oces, restaurants,
supermarkets, etc...

Power amplifier:
enables to faithfully reproduce the sound signal.
Fitted with oLed display, for the displaying of all the
parameters. 10 settable equalisation levels, and 10
preset ones.

Sound system MY HOME 329

GENERAL FEATURES

Installing a system
multimedia touch:
multimedia station providing control of
the sound system and of all the my Home
applications, as well as the Bticino video
systems.

4 cONTROL DEVIcE

These devices are available in


several versions: from simple ones,

touch screen:
a simple touch of the screen
will be enough to manage the
sound system and all existing
my home applications

capable of managing ON/OFF and


volume adjustment controls from
the amplifiers that can be found in
the various rooms, to more advanced
products, for radio channel and
sound source selection, up to the
possibility of remote control of the
whole system
radio control:
management of all control
functions: useful for system
expansion

touch keys:
For stereo loudspeakers
on/o control and volume
adjustment

Local display:
comando a touch display per gestione
amplificatori, on/o, volume, selez. stazione

special control:
management of amplifiers, on/o
control, volume, radio station and Cd
track selection; design complemented
by appropriate key covers

Knob control:
on/o, volume, radio
station and cd track
selection

330 MY HOME

Sound system

radio remote control:


management of all control functions.
Preset for use by disabled people

nighter e whice soft touch control:


for stereo loudspeakers on/o
control and volume adjustment

ir remote control (infrared):


for the management of all control
functions

muLtiBoX flush mounted box:


suitable for the residential sector

5 LOUDSPEAKERS

The sound system can be used


with all 8 and 16 ohm loudspeakers
wall-mounted, slimline:
35 mm thickness, for
indoor use

available on the market


BTicino offers solutions that meet
the needs of all main installation
environments

Ceiling mounted 240 mm:


for the service sector

Ceiling mounted 100 mm:


for the service sector

Ceiling mounted,
60x60 mm panel:
for the service sector

Flush mounted box item 506e:


suitable for the residential sector

Sound system MY HOME 331

GENERAL FEATURES

Installation examples
This section of the guide shows some

3. With multichannel matrix -

8. Integration of the video door

examples of wire systems, providing

multichannel stereo system

entry system on the same branch -

some general information on the

4. Expansion with audio/video node

with flush mounted amplifiers

various types of installations that

or multichannel matrix - several inputs

9. Installation of monophonic

can be obtained Detailed wiring

5. Expansion with audio/video

systems

diagrams can be found later on, in a

node or multichannel matrix - several

10. Example with independent power

specific section of this guide

outputs with DIN amplifiers

amplifier - without My Home Bus

6. Expansion with audio/video

11. System with audio/video node

LIST Of SUGGESTED

node or multichannel matrix -

and floor distribution block

INSTALLATION EXAMPLES

several outputs with flush mounted

1. With compact power supply -

amplifiers

basic stereo system

7. Integration of the video door

2. With audio/video node -

entry system on the same branch -

single channel stereo system

with DIN amplifiers

1 EXAMPLE WITH cOMPAcT POWER SUPPLY - BASIc STEREO SYSTEM

Using the compact power supply

sound source in the system and flush

To assess the maximum number of

item 346030 you can build a basic

mounted or DIN rail amplifiers can be

amplifiers that can be installed, use

Sound system

connected in output (on one branch

the calculation method starting from

This solution lets you have just one

only)

600 mA

Loudspeaker

Loudspeaker

Loudspeaker

Amplifier

Amplifier

Line terminator

Loudspeaker

Bus

sound sources
Audio/video
mixer
2

Compact
power supply

2
radio tuner

332 MY HOME

Sound system

Bus

Bus

Bus with star wiring


Bus with in-out wiring
Bus with free wiring

2 EXAMPLE WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE - SINGLE cHANNEL STEREO SYSTEM

With the audio/video node, the

The example proposed includes:

sound sources can be mixed on its

2 sound sources (radio and RCA

Integrated video door entry


entrance panel and handset (the

4 outputs The node is suitable both

input for the connection of a stereo

volume of the music source is

for service sector environments and

system) that can only play music

automatically lowered in case of

small domestic environments

one source at the time

call, sending of voice messages


through the loudspeakers)

Loudspeaker

Loudspeaker

Amplifier

Amplifier
Bus

Handset

on

Line terminator

Loudspeaker

Line terminator

Loudspeaker

Bus
Bus

sound sourCes
sorGenti
sonore

Audio/video
node

Bus

Audio/video
mixer

Power supply

Bus

Bus

2
2

radio tuner

stereo

source insulator

rCA input

Sound system MY HOME 333

GENERAL FEATURES

Installation examples
3 EXAMPLE WITH MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX - MULTIcHANNEL STEREO SYSTEM

The multichannel matrix is the ideal

is particularly suited for residential

source) that may play music at the

solution for anyone who wants to

installations, such as villas, homes

same time;

have various sound sources active

and large apartments, where

in different rooms at the same

integration with the 2 WIRE video

integrated entrance panel, handset

time, guaranteeing full freedom

door entry system and other MY

and cameras for cctv functions

of listening and control With the

HOME applications is required

(the volume of the music source

multichannel matrix, the sound

The example proposed includes:

is automatically lowered in case

sources can be mixed on its 8

3 sound sources (radio, stereo

of call, sending of voice messages

Video door entry system including

control, and RCA input for external

outputs The multichannel matrix

room 1

through the loudspeakers)

room 2
Loudspeaker

Loudspeaker

Amplifier

Amplifier
Handset

on

Line terminator

Line terminator
Loudspeaker

Loudspeaker

2
Bus

Audio/video
mixer

Bus

Bus
Power supply

multichannel
matrix

Bus

2
2

Bus
Bus

2
2

Bus
Bus

entrance panel

334 MY HOME

Cameras

Sound system

sound sourCes

2
2

Bus
Bus
Bus

radio tuner

stereo control

rCA input

source insulator

4 EXAMPLE Of EXPANSION WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE OR MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX - SEVERAL INPUTS

The Sound System can be integrated

be connected to an additional audio/

Sound sources may not be installed

with the 2 wire video door entry

video node It is possible to connect

on the node connected in cascade

system This integration may cause

one additional audio/video node for

This solution gives the possibility of

the complete saturation of the mixers

each input of the audio/video node,

installing up to 16 entrance panels or

inputs If it is necessary to increase

or the main multichannel matrix (only

cameras, when a matrix is used as the

the number of inputs for cameras or

inputs dedicated to the video door

main mixer

entrance panels, these devices may

entry system)
Loudspeaker

Loudspeaker

Amplifier

Amplifier
Handset
Bus

2
on

Loudspeaker

Loudspeaker
Line terminator
Line terminator

2
Bus

Bus
Power supply

Audio/video
node
or multichannel
matrix
2
Bus

Bus

2
2

Audio/Video node

Bus

only cameras or
entrance panels may
be connected in this
branch

Bus

radio tuner

2
Bus
stereo

source insulator

rCA input

Bus

entrance panel

instALLAtion note: only audio/video nodes may be installed in cascade to the main mixer
wArninGs: if the addition of additional sources is
required (particularly cameras), or if the outputs of
the audio/video node (item F441), or the multichannel
matrix (item F441m) are not enough, the system
can be expanded. these expansions are obtained by
cascade connection of an additional audio/video node.

when performing a cascade connection, the following


must be taken into account:
Cascade connection of the multichannel matrix is
not possible;
Only one connection in cascade, providing more
inputs and outputs, is possible (it is not possible to

Cameras

extend the system with 3 or more nodes installed in


cascade);
Only 2 wire entrance panels and cameras may be
connected to the node installed in cascade. sound
sources cannot be connected.
Above are some examples that are normally possible.

Sound system MY HOME 335

GENERAL FEATURES

Installation examples
5 EXAMPLE Of EXPANSION WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE OR MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX - SEVERAL INPUTS WITH

DIN AMPLIfIERS
By connecting an audio/video node

module (item 346851), it is possible

only) Thanks to this solution, useful

on the output to another mixer,

to expand the system to up to 70

for service sector environments, up to

combining it to the system expansion

amplifiers (DIN amplifiers, item F502,

140 loudspeakers may be installed

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Amplifier

Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Amplifier

Line terminator

Line terminator

Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers

Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers

Line terminator

Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers

Amplifier

Line terminator

Amplifier

2
2

2
Audio/video
node

Patch cord
radio tuner
Audio/video
node
or
multichannel
matrix

system
expansion
module

Power supply

Patch
cord

Power supply

2
2

Bus

2
Bus
stereo

336 MY HOME

source
insulator

Sound system

rCA input

* din amplifiers, item F502, are powered by 230 Vac

6 EXAMPLE Of EXPANSION WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE OR MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX - SEVERAL INPUTS WITH

fLUSH MOUNTED AMPLIfIERS


By exploiting the setup shown above

to expand the system, enabling

8 flush mounted amplifiers with 16

and replacing the main audio/video

the installation of 4 flush mounted

ohm loudspeakers on the output of

node with a matrix, it is possible

amplifiers with 8 loudspeakers, or

the matrix and the audio/video node

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Amplifier

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Amplifier

Line terminator

Line terminator

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Line terminator

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Amplifier

Line terminator

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Amplifier

2
Audio/video
node

Power supply

system
expansion
module

matrix or
Audio/Video node

Patch cord

2
Bus

radio tuner

rCA input

source
insulator

stereo

Sound system MY HOME 337

GENERAL FEATURES

Installation examples
7 EXAMPLE Of INTEGRATION Of THE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM ON THE SAME BRANcH - WITH DIN AMPLIfIERS

Maximum 10 DIN rail amplifiers

The diagram below shows the

In the example, DIN rail amplifiers,

possibility of connecting both

item F502, are used

for each output of the audio/video

amplifiers and audio/video handsets

The calculation of consumptions

mixer

to the output of a mixer branch

remains unchanged:
Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Handset

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

on
*

Amplifier

Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers

Line terminator

Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers

Amplifier

Amplifier

Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers

*
Amplifier

2
2

Audio/video
node
or multichannel
matrix
Bus

Power supply

2
Bus

radio tuner

* din amplifiers, item F502, are powered by 230 Vac


entrance panel

338 MY HOME

Sound system

8 EXAMPLE Of INTEGRATION Of THE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM ON THE SAME BRANcH - WITH DIN AMPLIfIERS

The integration on the same output


branches of the mixers between
amplifiers and handsets can also be
performed with a flush mounted
amplifier
When calculating consumptions, the
following must be taken into account:

If an output branch is fitted with

If an output branch is fitted with

a flush mounted amplifier and

more than one flush mounted

a handset, the installation of an

amplifier, it will be necessary to

additional power supply is not

install an additional power supply

necessary

for each handset installed (any 2


wire handset)

Loudspeakers
Handset

Handset

on

extra
power supply
on

Amplifier

Loudspeakers

Loudspeakers

Amplifier

Amplifier

2
Power supply

matrix or
Audio/Video node

2
2

radio tuner
entrance panel

rCA input

source
insulator

stereo

Sound system MY HOME 339

GENERAL FEATURES

Installation examples
9 EXAMPLE Of INSTALLATION Of MONOPHONIc SYSTEMS

The Sound system has been mainly

The wiring of amplifiers remains

When a flush mounted amplifier

conceived for stereo systems

unchanged, following standard

is used, the sound system must be

However, should it become

installation requirements

connected to the + terminal of

necessary to install monophonic

When the item F502 DIN rail

one channel and to the - terminal


of another channel

systems, for example for the service

amplifier is used, it will be necessary

sector (supermarkets, shopping

to connect configurator 3 to the M3

When choosing these installation

centres, etc ), installation will still be

housing, and it will only be possible

solutions, it will only possible to

possible, by following some simple

to connect one loudspeaker, or

connect the range of loudspeaker

precautions:

two mono loudspeakers, on the

included in the BTicino catalogue

amplifier outputs
Loudspeaker

Loudspeaker

Loudspeaker

note: use 8 or 16
loudspeakers only

note: it is possible to connect a

Amplifier
Amplifier (rear view)

loudspeaker, or use both outputs by


Bus

installing two monophonic loudspeakers

(Configurator m3 = 3)

2
Line terminator

Bus

Line terminator
Audio/video
node

2
2
2
radio tuner

stereo
stereo control

340 MY HOME

Sound system

Power supply

10 EXAMPLE WITH INDEPENDENT POWER AMPLIfIER WITHOUT MY HOME BUS

Due to its qualities that ensure high

This use is suitable for broadcasting

DIN switchboards powered with

performances in terms of faithful

the sound signal from an MP3 reader,

110 - 230 Vac power line voltage,

reproduction of the signal, the F503

a CD, or similar device, in a small

with the sound signal connected

power amplifier may also be used

environments (individual rooms)

to the AUX audio input, through a

independently from the MY HOME

The installation requires that the

standard 3 5 mm stereo jack

BUS

amplifier is placed inside suitable

Loudspeaker

Loudspeaker

Sound system MY HOME 341

GENERAL FEATURES

Installation examples
11 EXAMPLE Of SYSTEM WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE AND fLOOR DISTRIBUTION BLOcK

By using this particular setup, it is

the item F441 audio/video node and

up to 40 DIN rail amplifiers in total,

possible to fully saturate the Sound

DIN rail amplifiers, item F520 (item

with up to 10 of them connected to

System using only one output of the

F502 amplifiers must be powered by

each individual output of the floor

audio/video node This particular

230 Vac power supply)

distribution block, item 346841

solution can only be achieved using

The solution proposed includes

Line terminator

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Floor
distribution
block

Amplifier
din

Line terminator
Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Amplifier
din

Line terminator
Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Amplifier
din

Amplifier
din

Line terminator
Floor
distribution
block

radio tuner

Bus

Audio/video
node

2
2

342 MY HOME

Sound system

Line terminator
Floor
distribution
block

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Amplifier
din

Line terminator
Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Amplifier
din

Line terminator
Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Amplifier
din

Amplifier
din

Floor
distribution
block

Line terminator
stereo control

Power supply

Bus

stereo

Sound system MY HOME 343

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION

Wiring
WIRING WITH AUDIO/VIDEO
NODE

remember some installation general

where the signals from the external

When wiring the sound system, by

rules: the distribution system is

stereo sources and the wirings from

means of the audio/video node,

made by means of star wiring,

the control devices and amplifiers


converge

in/out wiring.
- the outputs are connected to the audio/video node by means of in-out wiring.
- the audio/video used node outputs must be closed with the line terminator.
Line
terminator

Amplifier

special
control

ON

ON

OFF

Amplifier

ON

Local
display

OFF

OFF

Line
terminator

outputs
Bus with star wiring
BUS

Audio/video
node

Bus with in-out wiring

star centre

Bus with free wiring

inputs
SCS

Free wiring
- the Bus is connected with free wiring
- on this line it can connect the special controls and the sCs/sCs interfaces for combination with
the other my Home systems.
touch screen
Power supply

sound sourCes

BUS

ON

special control

OFF
OUT
F422

3495
IN

IN

ON

star wiring
- the sound sources are connected by means of star wiring
- one source per input.

344 MY HOME

sCs/sCs interface

OUT

Sound system

OFF

special control

WIRING WITH MATRIX

The first 4 inputs are dedicated to 2

The wiring of the multichannel matrix

wire entrance panels and cameras

has a star topology where all the

Each output can only manage one

procedure, the following must be

in/out wiring.
- the matrix outputs must be closed using the line terminal
- each output can only have one room
- the rooms must be in increasing order

ON

on the same output

room

taken into account:

Amplifier

It is not possible to have two rooms

dedicated to the sound sources

converge to During the wiring

increasing order (output 1 - room 1,


output 2 - room t, etc )

The subsequent 4 inputs are

signals of the sound system devices

The rooms must be connected in

special
control

room 1

room 2

Line terminator
terminatore
di linea

ON

Local
display

OFF

OFF

room 3

room 4

Amplifier

ON

Line terminator
OFF

room 8
outputs

Bus with star wiring


BUS

multichannel
matrix

Bus with in-out wiring

star centre

Bus with free wiring


inputs

Free wiring
- the Bus is connected with free wiring
- on this line it can connect the special controls and the sCs/sCs interfaces for combination with
the other my home systems.
touch screen
Power supply

sound sourCes

BUS

ON

special
control

OFF
OUT
F422

IN

ON

star wiring
- the first 4 inputs are dedicated to 2 wire entrance panels and cameras.
- the subsequent 4 inputs are dedicated to stereo sound sources
- only one source per input.

OFF

sCs/sCs
interface

special control

Sound system MY HOME 345

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION

Maximum distances
When sizing the system remember

the wiring of the BUS 2 wire Sound/

with suitable insulation (e g item

the following system limits as a

Video door entry System and

336904)

function of the type of amplifier

the accessory wirings (cables for

Failure to respect the above

installed and the impedance features

loudspeakers etc ) in separate piping

provisions may affect the quality of

of the loudspeaker used

from the power cables (230V line)

the audio signal reproduced

To keep the fidelity of the audio

The above wirings can only share

signal reproduced unaltered, lay

inside junction boxes using cables


230 Vac

Amplifier

Amplifier

- max. 30 m with cable 1.5 mm2


- max. 15 m with cable 0.5 mm2

ON

max. 10 m
OFF

Loudspeakers

Loudspeakers

max. 300 m
Power supply

max. 200 m
max. 300 m

Audio/Video node or
multichannel matrix

SCS

max. 200 m

max. 5 m

Generic audio source

MAX. DISTANcE BETWEEN THE DEVIcES (A)


Maximum cable length on the basis of the number of flush mounted amplifiers installed along an output of the audio/video Node

Using cable item 336904


Using cable item UTP cat.5E

loudspeaKer
impedance

wiTh no. 1
amplifier

wiTh no. 2
amplifiers

wiTh no. 3
amplifiers

wiTh no. 4
amplifiers

160 m

60 m

16

200 m

160 m

100 m

60 m

80 m

30 m

16

160 m

80 m

50 m

30 m

NOTE: - using amplifiers DIN item F502, a maximum of 10 amplifiers can be cabled for each audio/video node output,
- for the lengths of the Video door entry wirings, rfer to the Technical Communication Guide,
- total stretched cable max 800 m.

346 MY HOME

Sound system

System consumption calculation


The system absorption is always

System with multichannel matrix:

The maximum number of DIN

calculated whenever the diagrams

add together the maximum

rail amplifiers, item F502, can be

shown afterwards in the guide are

consumption of all sources (they

40 when the audio/video node is

not followed. When calculating

may all be on at the same time).

used, and 80 if the multichannel

the current absorbed by the

B) Calculation of the current

matrix is used. In any case, the

components, remember that the

consumed by flush mounted

maximum number will depend

maximum current which can be

amplifiers: item H4562, item L4562

on the consumption of the input

supplied by the power supply: 1200

and item AM5742 consider the

sources.

mA (600 mA if using item 346030).

consumption in the ON position

REQUIREMENTS:

for each type of load connected (see

output of the mixers must be below

A) Calculation of the current

table B on the following page).

600 mA continuous ma (example:

absorbed by the sound sources

C) When building a basic system

maximum 2 flush mounted

Systems with audio/video node:

(without expansions) remember that:

amplifiers with 8 ohm loudspeakers,

there must be a maximum of 100

or 4 flush mounted amplifiers with

add together the source with the


highest consumption in the on
position, and the consumption of
all other sources during standby

The maximum current of each

scs devices.

16 ohm loudspeakers.

The maximum number of


amplifiers item H/L4562 and
AM5742 must not exceed 8.

2 wire sound system

Use the 2 wire System guide *


Sound system combined with the 2 wire video door
entry system?

YES
* For quick reference see tables C and D
NO

You have 1200 mA available

System with multi-channel matrix item f441m

System with audio/video node item F441

Subtract the total absorption of the sources,


they could work simultaneously
(see table A)

Subtract the maximum absorption of the source


which absorbs most and subtract the absorption
In stand-by of the other sources in the system
(see table A)

When calculating the absorptions consider the amplifiers as well:


Flush mounted amplifiers item h/l4562 - am5742 (see table b)
DIN guide amplifiers item F502 subtract 5 mA for each amplifier
IF THE RESULT IS >=0 mA and at the output to the audio/video mixers the current is less than 600 mA continuous (for each branch) THE SYSTEM CAN BE CONSTRUCTED.
If not look at the system again using more DIN rail amplifiers and making each system expansion following the layout examples in this guide.

Sound system MY HOME 347

General rules for installation

System consumption calculation


Table A 2 wire Sound system component absorptions
Item
F441M
F441
346830 - 346030

Description
Multichannel matrix
Audio/Video node
Video adapter
Compact power supply
Radio tuner

F500 - F500COAX
F500 N

Absorption
60 mA
20 mA
0 mA
12 mA (stand-by)
50 mA (in ON)
5 mA (stand-by)
20mA (in ON)
12 mA (stand-by)
40 mA (in ON)
12 mA (stand-by)
30 mA (in ON)

L4561N

Stereo control

HC/HD/HS4560 L/N/NT4560 AM5740


F502

RCA input

H4562 - L4562 - AM5742

Flush mounted amplifier

Max. 10 amplifiers
for each mixer output
See table B

HW/H/L4684 - AM5864

Colour TOUCH SCREEN

80 mA

DIN amplifier

Item
H4651M2
L4651M2 - AM5831M2
HC/HD/HS4575
L/N/NT4575N
HC/HD/HS 4575SB
L/N/NT4575SB

Description
Special control
Special control
Radio interfaces

Absorption
6 mA
8.5 mA
22 mA

Radio interfaces

33 mA

HC/HD/HS4653/2/3

Soft Touch

15 mA

HC/HD/HS4563
L/N/NT4563

Knob control

5 mA

HC/HD/HS4654
L/N/NT4654N - AM5834
HC/HD/HS4657M3
HC/HD/HS4657M4
HC/HD/HS4685 - L/N/NT4685

IR receiver

8.5 mA

White glass controls, Nighter,


Whice
Local display

30 mA (3 mod.)
40 mA (4 mod.)
60 mA

Table B absorptions of the Flush mounted amplifiers H/L4562 - AM5742


Item
H4562
L4562
AM5742

Description
AXOLUTE flush mounted amplifier
LIVING, LIGHT and LIGHT TECH flush mounted amplifier
Mtix flush mounted amplifier

Absorption
Stand-by
ON

6 mA
250 mA with 8 ohm loudspeakers on 2 L-R outputs
130 mA with 8 ohm loudspeaker on 1 L-R output
130 mA with 16 ohm loudspeakers on 2 L-R outputs
90 mA with 16 ohm loudspeaker on 1 L-R output
40 mA (MUTE)

NOTE: when the 2 wire Sound system is combined with the 2 wire system calculate the absorption of the amplifiers in MUTE (40mA)

EXAMPLE 1
A calculation example considering

The layout is made with the multi-

sources must be considered as all

the diagram called Small house

channel matrix and in this case, to

active.

(diagram 2) is proposed below.

calculate the absorptions, the sound

Items which absorb current

QuantitY

Absorption (mA)

F500 Tuner
L4561N Stereo control
L4562 Flush mounted amplifier
F441M Multichannel matrix
L4575N Radio interface
TOTALE

1
1
6 (10 x 16 ohm Loudspeakers and 2 x 8 ohm Loudspeakers)
1
1

1 x 50 (in ON)
1 x 40 (in ON)
5 x 130 + 250
1 x 60
1 x 22
1072

EXAMPLE 2
To better understand the calculation

the small house but using the

of the absorptions using the multi-

audio/video node instead of the

channel matrix or the audio/video

multi-channel matrix.

node, we give the same example of


Items which absorb current

QuantitY

Absorption (mA)

F500 Tuner
L4561N Stereo control
L4562 Flush mounted amplifier
F441 Audio/Video node
L4575N Radio interface
TOTAL

1
1
6 (10 x 16 ohm Loudspeakers and 2 x 8 ohm Loudspeakers)
1
1

1 x 50 (in ON)
1 x 12 (in stand-by)
5 x 130 + 250
1 x 20
1 x 22
1004

348 MY HOME

Sound system

INTEGRATION WITH VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM


The tables below show the consumption data for video door entry system devices

Table C - Audio/video source absorption


Item
342150
342170

Description
SFERA Speaker module
SFERA Speaker module

Absorption
30 mA
30 mA

342200

SFERA Nameplate module

15 mA

342240
342510
342550
342600
342610
342630
342640
346991
346992
342708
342702

SFERA 4-key module


SFERA B/W Camera module
SFERA colour Camera module
SFERA Alphanumeric Pulse-dialling
SFERA Numeric Pulse-dialling
Speaker module with call SFERA graphics
Keypad for Pulse-dialling SFERA graphics
Universal Speaker module
Pushbutton extender
MINISFERA video
MINISFERA audio

15 mA
15 mA
15 mA
110 mA
15 mA
110 mA
15 mA
30 mA
15 mA
30 mA
30 mA

Item
342704
342911
342921
342931
342941
342971
342972
342951
342961
342981
342982
342991
342992
346150
346200
346230
346810
346850
346851
346851
347400

Description
MINISFERA keys
Audio LINEA 2000

Absorption
30 mA
30 mA

B/W and Colour Video LINEA 2000

30mA

B/W and Colour LINEA 2000 METAL

30 mA

8/2 WIRE interface


Actuator for generic loads
Door lock actuator
2 WIRE PABX interface
Apartment Interface (INT terminal)
Expansion module in MOD=5 (OUT terminal)
Expansion module in MOD=0 (OUT terminal)
COAX/2 WIRE interface

110 mA
10 mA
15 mA
15 mA
50 mA
15 mA

The absorption values for the individual source have been approximated to multiples of 5 mA
NOTE: The locally supplied entrance panels must not be considered in the absorption calculation.

Table D - Audio/video receiver absorption


Description
PIVOT audio handset/ Video handset
SWING audio handset/ Video handset
SPRINT audio handset/ Video handset
AXOLUTE VIDEO STATION
AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY
POLYX VIDEO STATION
POLYX VIDEO STATION
POLYX DISPLAY

Absorption
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
10 mA*
10 mA*
10 mA*
10 mA*
10 mA*

Description
Floor distribution block
Audio/Video node
Apartment interface (EXT terminal)
Expansion module in MOD=5 (IN terminal)
Expansion module in MOD=0 (IN terminal)
Door lock actuator
Door lock actuator
Light Actuator
Sound System Amplifier H4562 or L4562

Absorption
15 mA
20 mA
5 mA
5 mA
30 mA
15 mA
15 mA
15 mA
5 mA

* If they are locally supplied they absorb 5 mA


The absorption values for the individual receiver have been approximated to multiples of 5 mA

Sound system MY HOME 349

CONFIGURATION

General rules
2

To ensure that each device of the

This operation is completed by

Sound System performs the correct

connecting to the appropriate housings

function, it is necessary that it is

of the devices configurators identified

correctly configured The following

by a number or a letter

must be set:

the device address within the


system (device id);

the operating mode (what does it

A
PF
M

Legend
1. configurato socket
2. description of the configurator socket
3. tool for the connection of the configurator

note: for the specific configuration of each individual item refer to its technical data sheet (see the technical sheets section).

need to do)

ADDRESSING Of DEVIcES USING


THE MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX,
ITEM f441M
The use of the multichannel matrix

configured on output 1 (OUT 1),

entails a specific addressing order

the second room on output 2 (OUT

the connection of stereo sound

for the rooms It must be taken into

2), up to the eight room (OUT 8)

sources

account that in order to ensure

The subsequent 4 inputs are for

It is not possible to have several

Taking into account these

multichannel performance it is

rooms on the same matrix output

requirements, the configuration of

necessary that:

branch

the devices (function of the devices,

The order of the rooms must be


from 1 to 8, with the first room

The first 4 inputs are for the

single configuration, master-slave,

connection of 2 wire entrance

POint-point, etc ) remain unchanged

panels and cameras

in accordance with the indications on


the following pages

cORREcT MODE

A = 2
PF = 1

A = 2
PF = 9

ON

OFF

room 2
A = 1
PF = 9

OFF

A = 1
PF = 1

ON

OFF

room 1

room 4
room 5
room 6
room 7
room 8

OFF

OK
S = 1

350 MY HOME

Sound system

sound sources

OFF

room 3

s=4
s=3
s=2

2 wire video door entry system and cameras

A = 3
PF = 1

A = 3
PF = 9

WRONG MODE
one room per output

NO

one room per output


OFF

OFF

room 2

room 3

ON

OFF

room 1

room 2

room 8
room 3 (out 3) room 8 is in out 8

sources

sources

the first 4 inputs are for to 2 wire entrance panels and cameras

the last 4 are for sound sources

ADDRESSING Of DEVIcES
USING THE AUDIO/VIDEO NODE,
ITEM f441
The configuration of the devices
using the audio/video node does
not require special attention, as

Configure the sources in


chronological order

Taking into account these

shown on the matrix It is however

requirements, the configuration

recommended to follow these

of the devices (function of the

precautions:

devices, single configuration,

Separate the rooms (one room per

master-slave, POint-point, etc )

output)

If possible, maintain a chronological


order of the rooms (room 1 output

remain unchanged in accordance


with the indications on the
following pages

1, room 2 output 2, etc )

Sound system MY HOME 351

CONFIGURATION

General instructions
In order to understand the addressing logic of the devices, it is deemed appropriate to clarify some of the terms that occur
regularly in this guide.

Address of the local


amplifiers (H4562, L4562,
AM5742)

(PF) Loudspeakers

(A) = room

Numeric identification (0-9) of the

Group of amplifiers belonging to a


logic zone (in a home, for example,
the living room, the bedroom, etc.)

single amplifier inside the Room.

(M1 and M2) = mode

Modes for the addressing


of amplifiers
Type of control

housings for special configurations


Point-point

Amplifiers
Configurator socket

Value of the
configurators

A
PL/PF

19
19

Address of the special


controls (H4651M2, L4651M2,
AM5831M2)

(A) = room

(PF/PL) = Loudspeakers/light point

If correctly configured, it can

numeric indicator (0 - 9) of the

control either one single amplifier

individual amplifier inside the Room

(configurator 1 - 9), or a group

(A). When configured in a different

of amplifiers (AMB configurator),

way it can control the switching

or become a general switch-on

on of all amplifiers of the whole

control (GEN configurator) for all

room (the room is identified by the

amplifiers, even when these have

number from 1 to 9 connected to

been configured for different

housing A of the amplifier).

rooms.

(SPE)
To ensure operation of the Sound
System, number 8 must be
configured.

ADDRESS OF SOUND SOURCES

(S) = Source
Numeric identification (1-4) of the
individual sound source within the
Sound system.

352 MY HOME

Sound system

Procedure for the addressing


of special controls
Type of control Special control
Configurator socket

Value of the
configurators

Point-point

A
PL/PF

19
19

Room

A
PL/PF

ROOM

General

A
PL/PF

GEN

19

SINGLE CONFIGURATION
When the amplifiers only are used,
not controlled by special controls or
by Touch Screen, the configuration
of the devices is performed on the A
and PF housings.
ROOM 1

ON

OFF

A = 1
PF = 1

ROOM 2

ON

OFF

A = 1
PF = 2

ON

OFF

A = 2
PF = 1

ON

OFF

A = 2
PF = 2

Amplifiers
Single control

Master/Slave

ROOM 1

CONFIGURATION
Using 2 amplifiers configured with:

ON

1 amplifier: A=1, PF=1


st

2nd amplifier: A=1, PF=1, M1=SLA


If the volume is adjusted on one

OFF

Amplifiers
Master/Slave

A = 1
PF = 1

ON

OFF

A = 1
PF = 1
M1 = SLA

amplifier, it will also automatically


adjust on the other one. Any control
performed on one amplifier, will also
apply to the other one.
This function only applies to flush
mounted amplifiers.

Sound system MY HOME 353

CONFIGURATION

General instructions
POint-point CONFIGURATION
This configuration is achieved using

By configuring the special control:

special controls, or a Touch Screen for

A=1

remote control of the amplifiers.

PL/PF=1

SPE=8 sound system mode)


when the special control is used,
the device will send its own control
to the amplifier configured:
A=1
PF=1

ROOM 1
ON

Point-point control
OFF

Amplifiers

354 MY HOME

A
= 1
PL/PF = 1
SPE = 8

A = 1
PF = 1

Sound system

ON

OFF

ROOM 2
A
= 1
PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8

A = 1
PF = 2

ON

ON

OFF
OFF

A
= 2
PL/PF = 1
SPE = 8

A = 2
PF = 1

ON

ON

OFF
OFF

A
= 2
PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8

A = 2
PF = 2

room control
configuration
Configuration performed only

Configuring the device:

on special controls, or during the

A=ROOM

By pressing the device keys, all

programming of the TOUCH SCREEN.

PL/PF=1

amplifiers configured with A equal

All management controls found on

SPE=8

to the number of the configurator on

flush mounted amplifiers can be

PL/PF of the device will be affected

performed.

(in this case all amplifiers with A=1)

ROOM 1
ROOM
control 1

ON

OFF

ON

Point-point control
OFF

Amplifiers

ON

A
= 1
PL/PF = 1
SPE = 8

A = 1
PF = 1

OFF

ROOM 2

A
= AMB
PL/PF = 1
SPE = 8

ON

OFF

ON

ROOM
control 2

A
= 1
PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8

A = 1
PF = 2

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

A
= 2
PL/PF = 1
SPE = 8

A = 2
PF = 1

A
= AMB
PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8

ON

OFF

ON

A
= 2
PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8

A = 2
PF = 2

OFF

CONFIGURATION FOR GENERAL


CONTROL
Configuration performed only

Configuring the device:

This configuration enables the

on special controls, or during the

A=GEN

device to control the operation

programming of the TOUCH SCREEN.

PL/PF=(in this configuration pl/pf

of all amplifiers within the

It is possible to perform all controls


as for the room control configuration,

is not configured)

SPE=8

room, irrespective of the type of


configuration of the amplifier itself.

with the exception of volume control.

Sound system MY HOME 355

CONTENTS

MY HOME Wiring diagrams


1 - Residential sector - apartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
2 - Residential sector - small house 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
3 - Residential sector - small house 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
4 - Residential sector - villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
5 - Service sector: doctors surgery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
6 - Service sector: restaurant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
7 - Service sector: supermarket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
8 - Service sector: hotel room 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
9 - Service sector: hotel room 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
10 - Residential sector: villa with automation system . . . . . . . . 376
11 - Residential sector: with 2 wire video door entry system. . . 378
12 - System expansion:
sound system / 2 wire video door entry system integration. . 380
13 - System expansion:
system with interface item 346851 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
14 -Integration with multimedia interface:
System with multimedia interface and LAN network . . . 384

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Residential sector - apartment


Below is shown an apartment, on a

An amplifier with 4 pushbuttons is

track or choose the favourite radio

single floor, with four rooms where

installed in each room This amplifier

station from those saved

the music is to be played with the

can switch the loudspeakers on and

Two flush mounted loudspeakers

2 wire Sound System The stereo

off, adjust the volume, cycle the

with 8 Ohm impedance are

control can play the music from the

sound sources available (if there is

connected to the amplifier

Hi-Fi stereo inside the apartment

more than one) and change the CD

iTem

descripTion

QuanTiTY

346000
F441
L4561N
L4562
L4567
L4911BF
L4911AI
3499
33698...(2/3/4)

Power supply
Audio video node
Stereo control
Flush mounted amplifier
Wall mounted loudspeakers
Right pushbutton cover
Left pushbutton cover
Line terminator
8-contact connector

1
1
1
4
8
4
4
4
1

note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mtiX series

358 MY HOME

Sound system

DIAGRAM 1 apartment - 4 Flush mounted amplifier - 8 X 8 ohm LOUDSPEAKERS


L4567

L4567

ON

OFF

L4562

ON

A =1
PF = 1

OFF

L4562

L4567

ON

A =2
PF = 1

OFF

L4562

ON

A =3
PF = 1

OFF

3499

3499

3499

Hi-Fi stereo system

L4567

L4562
A =4
PF = 1

3499

Cables supplied
346000
L4561

F441

S =1

SCS

230 Vac

Patch cord
supplied

BUS

230 Vac
33698...(2/3/4)

Sound system MY HOME 359

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Residential sector - small house 1


The example gives an AXOLUTE

The system is also managed by a

activate and the loudspeakers will

system but it can also be made with

colour TOUCH SCREEN and special

switch on, first with a low sound

items of the other domestic series

configured controls: one to activate

level then increasing Touching the

For the Sound system inside a house

the whole system (general control)

TOUCH SCREEN or the amplifier OFF

you can position an amplifier in each

and the other to activate all the

pushbutton, the alarm clock switches

room and by using the multi-channel

amplifiers of a room (room control),

off

matrix you can listen to up to 4 sound

such as the living room amplifiers

sources simultaneously Remember

Thanks to a TOUCH SCREEN function

that when using the matrix each

the Sound system can be used as

output is a separate room Flush

an alarm clock In fact by setting the

mounted and DIN rail amplifiers are

time on the TOUCH SCREEN to the

used to make the system

set time the sound source set will

iTem

descripTion

QuanTiTY

346000
Power supply
1
F441M
Multichannel matrix
1
F500
Radio tuner
1
L4561N
Stereo control
1
HS4560
RCA input
1
H4562
Flush mounted amplifier
4
H4651M2
Special control
2
F502
DIN amplifier
2
H4684
Colour TOUCH SCREEN
1
HS4565
Flush mounted loudspeaker
6
H4570
Flush mounted loudspeaker
4
16104
MULTIBOX boxes for H4570
4
L4569
Outdoor loudspeaker
2
HS4911BF
Right pushbutton cover
6
HS4911AI
Left pushbutton cover
6
3499
Line terminator
4
3494...(14/15)
8-contact connector
1
336904
Twisted cable with 2 conductors
1
note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mtiX series

360 MY HOME

Sound system

DIAGRAM 2 small house - 3 Flush mounted AMPLIFIERS AND 2 DIN RAIL AMPLIFIERS - 6 X 16 ohm
AND 6 X 8 ohm LOUDSPEAKERS
NOTE: the DIN amplifiers item F502 are supplied with 230 Vac
F502

F502

BUS

A =1
PF = 1

ROOM 1

A =1
PF = 2

230 Vac

230 Vac

L4569

H4651M2

H4651M2

A = GEN
SPE = 8

A = AMB
PF = 1
SPE = 8

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

H4562
A =1
PF = 3

3499

HS4565

H4570

H4570

ROOM 2
ON

OFF

H4562
A =2
PF = 1

3499

Room 4

HS4565

HS4565

ROOM 3

H4684
ON

OFF

H4562
A =3
PF = 1

ON

H4562
A =4
PF = 1

OFF

3499
3499
F441M
F500N

Hi-Fi stereo system

346000

S =1

230 Vac

BUS

L4561N
S =2

HS4560
Patch cord supplied

S =3

3494...(14/15)

230 Vac
Cables supplied

Sound system MY HOME 361

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Residential sector - small house 2


The example shown is the same as
the previous page, but with the use,
in room 1, of three power amplifiers,
to ensure a detailed and optimum
management of sound levels, for
comfortable listening

iTem

descripTion

QuanTiTY

346000
Power supply
1
F441M
Multichannel matrix
1
F500
Radio tuner
1
L4561N
Stereo control
1
HS4560
RCA input
1
H4562
Flush mounted amplifier
3
H4651M2
Special control
5
F502
DIN amplifier
2
H4684
Colour TOUCH SCREEN
1
HS4565
Flush mounted loudspeaker
6
L4569
Outdoor loudspeaker
6
HS4911BF
Right pushbutton cover
8
HS4911AI
Left pushbutton cover
8
3499
Line terminator
4
3494...(14/15)
8-contact connector
1
336904
Twisted cable with 2 conductors
1
note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mtiX series

362 MY HOME

Sound system

DIAGRAM 3 small house - 3 Flush mounted amplifier AND 3 POWER AMPLIFIERS - 6 x 16 ohm and 6
x 8 ohm loudspeakerS
L4569

ROOM 1

L4569

L4569

L4569

L4569

L4569

H4651M2
F503

PRI

LEFT

A =1
PF = 1

OK

RIGHT

AUX
OUT

F503

PRI

LEFT

A =1
PF = 2

OK

RIGHT

A = AMB
PF = 1
SPE = 8

AUX
OUT

PRI

LEFT

ON

OK

RIGHT

AUX
OUT

F503
A =1
PF = 3

OFF
AUX
IN

SCS

AUX
IN

SCS

AUX
IN

SCS

HS4565

ROOM 2

ON

OFF

H4562
A =2
PF = 1

H4651M2

H4651M2

H4651M2

H4651M2

A = GEN
PF =
SPE = 1

A =1
PF = 1
SPE = 8

A =1
PF = 2
SPE = 8

A =1
PF = 3
SPE = 8

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

3499

3499
HS565

HS4565

ROOM 3
ON

OFF

Room 4

H4684

H4562
A =3
PF = 1

ON

OFF

H4562
A =4
PF = 1

3499
BUS
3499
F441M
Hi-Fi stereo system

346000

F500N
S =1

230 Vac

Patch cord supplied


HS4560
S =3

L4561N
230 Vac

S =2

3494...(14/15)

Sound system MY HOME 363

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Residential sector - villa


The example given in the following

This solution uses the multi-channel

manage the HI-FI system, (or an IPod

layout refers to a villa where the

matrix as main audio/video mixer and

with dock-station) and an RCA input

Sound system absorption limits must

the audio/video nodes are secondary

to connect a further sound source

be exceeded Thanks to this solution

mixers which, used with item 346851,

The radio tuner must be installed in

several stretches can be made

can expand the system

a zone with enough signal to receive

and the whole house covered in a

The sound sources installed are the

the radiophonic emitters

capillary way

FM RDS ratio tuner, a stereo control to

iTem

descripTion

QuanTiTY

346000
F441M
F441
346851
L/N/NT4560
L4561N
F500
L4562
L/N/NT4565
3499
33698...(2/3/4)
336904

Power supply
Multichannel matrix
Audio/Video node
System expansion module
RCA input
Stereo control
Radio tuner
Flush mounted amplifier*
Flush mounted loudspeaker
Line terminator
8-contact connector
Twisted cable with 2 conductors

3
1
2
2
1
1
1
16
32
8
1
1

note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mtiX series
* to be completed with corresponding key covers

364 MY HOME

Sound system

DIAGRAM 4 VILLA - SYSTEM USING THE INTERfAcE ITEM 346851


L4565

L4565

L4565

L4562
A =1
PF = 1

L4562
A =1
PF = 2

L4565

L4562
A =1
PF = 5

L4562
A =1
PF = 6

3499
L4565

L4565

3499

L4565

L4562
A =2
PF = 1

L4562
A =1
PF = 3

L4565

L4562
A =1
PF = 8

L4565

L4562
A =2
PF = 5

ON

OFF

L4562
A =2
PF = 6
3499

3499

L4565

L4562
A =1
PF = 7

L4565

L4562
A =2
PF = 2

3499
L4565

L4562
A =1
PF = 4

L4565

L4565

L4562
A =2
PF = 4

3499

L4565

L4562
A =2
PF = 3

ON

OFF

L4565

L4562
A =2
PF = 8

L4562
A =2
PF = 7

ON

OFF

3499

3499

Line 3 - room 2

Line 2 - room 1

F441

346851

346000

346851

346851

ON

346851

ON

OFF

ON

SCS

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

SCS

230 Vac

M =1

346851

346851

ON

OFF

Line 5

346851

346851

ON

ON

Line 4

F441 346000

230 Vac

M =2

M =3

M =4

Line 1
Hi-Fi stereo system
F500n
S =1

F441m

346000

230 Vac
230 Vac
L4561n
S =2

L4560
S =3

33698... (2/3/4)

GENERAL LIMITS
Total length of stretched wire first stretch is 800m
Maximum length of wire between system expansion
module and last amplifier:
200 m con ush mounted amplier
300 m with ampliers on DIN rail

Sound system MY HOME 365

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Service sector - doctors surgery


This solution is ideal in surroundings

An amplifier on DIN rail is used in

in general mode to activate all the

where the amplifiers and sound

the waiting room, the Hi-Fi system

loudspeakers of the doctors surgery,

sources should only be controlled by

is positioned in the reception

the other configured to control the

authorised personnel The example

(so that the source is directly

loudspeakers in the waiting room

shows a doctors surgery with a

controlled by the secretary or

In the visiting rooms there are two

waiting room, the reception and two

doctor) and there are two special

flush mounted amplifiers for local

visiting rooms

controls: one control configured

management of the amplifiers

iTem

descripTion

QuanTiTY

346000
F441
L/N/NT4560
L4562
F502
L4651M2
L4567
3495
L/N/NT4911BF
L/N/NT4911AI
3499
336904

Power supply
Audio/Video node
RCA input
Flush mounted amplifier
Amplifier per Service sector
Special control
Wall mounted loudspeakers
Source insulator
Right pushbutton cover
Left pushbutton cover
Line terminator
Twisted cable with 2 conductors

1
1
1
2
1
2
6
1
4
4
3
1

note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mtiX series

366 MY HOME

Sound system

DIAGRAM 5 DOcTORS SURGERY - 2 fLUSH MOUNTED AMPLIfIERS+ 1 DIN AMPLIfIER - 3 ROOMS


doCtors surGery no. 1

doCtors surGery no. 2

L4567

L4567

L4562

ON

OFF

L4562

ON

A = 2
PF = 1

A = 3
PF = 1

OFF

3499

3499

wAitinG room
L4567

230 Vac
F502
A = 1
PF = 1

3499

L4651m2
Hi-Fi stereo system

A = GEN
SPE = 8

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

L4651m2
A
= 1
PF/PL = 1
SPE = 8

F441

346000

SCS

L4560

230 Vac

S = 1

Bus
Cable supplied
230 Vac

3495

reCePtion

Sound system MY HOME 367

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Service sector - restaurant


The example has two rooms, a bar

amplifiers), two loudspeakers in the

Various scenarios can be saved using

area and bathrooms for men and

bar area and four loudspeakers in the

a scenario module (programmed by

women A sound system can be

bathrooms The system is managed

the TOUCH SCREEN): for example the

constructed inside a restaurant by

by a TOUCH SCREEN and 3 special

loudspeakers can be switched on in

installing Wall mounted loudspeakers

controls

the rooms with different sound levels

for each room (connected to DIN

iTem

descripTion

QuanTiTY

346000
F441
L/N/NT4560
3495
L4561N
F502
L4567
L4651M2
L4684
F420
L/N/NT4911BF
L/N/NT4911AI
3499

Power supply
Audio/Video node
RCA input
Source insulator
Stereo control
Amplifier per Service sector
Wall mounted loudspeakers
Special control
TOUCH SCREEN
Scenario module
Right pushbutton cover
Left pushbutton cover
Line terminator

1
1
1
1
1
9
18
3
1
1
3
3
4

33698...(2/3/4)
336904
L/N/NT4575SB
L4572SB
L/N/NT4919SB

8-contact connector
Twisted cable with 2 conductors
Radio interface
Radio control
Pushbutton covers

1
1
1
1
2

note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH and mtiX
series

368 MY HOME

Sound system

DIAGRAM 6 RESTAURANT - 9 AMPLIfIERS ON DIN RAIL - 18 X 8 OHM LOUDSPEAKERS


* NOTE: the din amplifiers item F502 are supplied with 230 Vac

L4567

BAr

F502
A = 4
PF = 1

L4575sB

L4651m2

L4651m2

L4651m2

A
PF
M1
SPE

A
= AMB
PF/PL = 1
SPE = 8

A
= AMB
PF/PL = 2
SPE = 8

A
SPE

=
=
=
=

4
1
1
8

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

L4684

= GEN
= 8

L4572sB
3499
L4567

L4567

F502

L4567

F502

A = 1
PF = 1

L4567

F502

A = 1
PF = 2

F502

A = 1
PF = 3

A = 3
PF = 2

LAdies
BAtHroom

room 1
3499
L4567

L4567

F502
A = 2
PF = 1

3499

L4567

F502

L4567

F502

A = 2
PF = 2

F502

A = 2
PF = 3

A = 3
PF = 1

GentLemens
BAtHroom

3499

room 2

346000

Hi-Fi stereo system

F420
A = 0
PL = 1

L4561n
S = 1

F441

230 Vac

Bus

L4560
230 Vac

Patch cord
supplied

S = 2

reCePtion
33698...(2/3/4)

Sound system MY HOME 369

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Service sector - supermarket


The sound system inside a

loudspeakers) can be reached

manage all the amplifiers, an RCA

supermarket (large area) can be

The configuration of the amplifiers is

input to play the audio signal from a

made using a maximum of 40 DIN

done monophonically

Hi-Fi system and one or more PIVOT

amplifiers (80 ceiling-mounting

Thus, this configuration can be

handsets (using key 4 of the handset)

loudspeakers) with just one audio/

achieved by placing configurator 3 in

to call personnel by means of the

video node Using the system

the M3 socket of the amplifier

loudspeakers inside the supermarket

expansion module up to 70 DIN

The solution presented is made

or installed near the cash desks

amplifiers (140 ceiling-mounting

by installing a TOUCH SCREEN to

iTem

descripTion

QuanTiTY

346000
F441
346851
L/N/NT4560
F502
L4566
L4684
3495
344082
3499
336904

Power supply
Audio/Video node
System expansion module
RCA input
DIN amplifier
Ceiling mounted loudspeakers
TOUCH SCREEN
Source insulator
Polyx audio handset
Line terminator
Twisted cable with 2 conductors

1
2
1
1
40+30
80+60
1
1
1
4+3
1

note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mtiX series

370 MY HOME

Sound system

DIAGRAM 7

SUPERMARKET - 2 NODES IN cAScADE AND UP TO 140 LOUDSPEAKERS MONOPHONIc


TRANSMISSION

* NOTE: the din amplifiers item F502 are supplied with 230 Vac
L4566

F502

A = 3
PF = 9
M3 = 3

F502

F502

F502

A = 6
PF = 1
M3 = 3

A = 6
PF = 9
M3 = 3

A = 3
PF = 1
M3 = 3
3499

3499

L4566

L4566

F502

A = 1
PF = 1
M3 = 3

F502

A = 1
PF = 9
M3 = 3

F502

A = 4
PF = 1
M3 = 3

F502

A = 4
PF = 9
M3 = 3

3499

3499

L4566

L4566

F502

A = 2
PF = 1
M3 = 3

F502

F502

A = 2
PF = 9
M3 = 3

F502

A = 5
PF = 1
M3 = 3

A = 5
PF = 9
M3 = 3

3499

3499

L4684

346000

Hi-Fi stereo system

F441

230 Vac

346000

230 Vac

F441
Bus

346851

230 Vac
Cable
supplied

L4560
S = 1

344082

M = 43
346851
M = 1

Sound system MY HOME 371

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Service sector - hotel room 1


The example consists of hotel rooms,

and the bathroom) with four flush

Display and the flush mounted

each with a basic sound system, with

mounted loudspeakers connected to

amplifier, bathroom through the

the radio tuner as the only source

two flush mounted amplifiers

flush mounted amplifier

From the Video adapter extends one

The system is managed as follows:

single branch (both for the bedroom

bedroom and hall through Local

iTem

descripTion

QuanTiTY

N4562
N4685
N4565
346830
F500
346000
3499
346904

Flush mounted amplifier*


Local display
Flush mounted loudspeaker
Video adapter
Radio tuner
Power supply
Line terminator
Twisted cable with 2 conductors

2
1
4
1
1
1
1

note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mtiX series
* to be completed with corresponding key covers

372 MY HOME

Sound system

DIAGRAM 8 HOTEL ROOM- TWO ROOMS: BEDROOM AND BATHROOM - VIDEO ADAPTER AND POWER SUPPLY
Bedroom

BAtHroom

n4565

n4565

n4562

ON

n4562

ON

A = 1
PF = 2

A = 1
PF = 1
OFF

OFF

3499

F500n
s1 = 1
346830
BUS
TK

346000

BUS
PI

n4685
ON

RDS

PS

106.70

A = 1
PF =
FUN = 2

OFF

230 Vac

Sound system MY HOME 373

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Service sector - hotel room 2


The example consists of hotel rooms,

supply, with four flush mounted

is no longer required, saving 8 DIN

each with a basic sound system,

loudspeakers connected to flush

modules The system is managed

with the radio tuner as the only

mounted amplifiers, means that the

through the two amplifiers

source The use of the 2 DIN power

10 DIN power supply, item 346000,

iTem

descripTion

QuanTiTY

N4562
N4565
346030
F500
3499
346904

Flush mounted amplifier*


Flush mounted loudspeaker
Compact power supply
Radio tuner
Line terminator
Twisted cable with 2 conductors

2
4
1
1
1
1

note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mtiX series
* to be completed with corresponding key covers

374 MY HOME

Sound system

DIAGRAM 9 HOTEL ROOM - TWO ROOMS: BEDROOM AND BATHROOM - cOMPAcT POWER SUPPLY
Bedroom

BAtHroom

n4565

n4565

n4562

ON

ON

A = 1
PF = 1
OFF

n4562

A = 1
PF = 2
OFF

3499

230 Vac
F500n
s1 = 1
346030
PRI

346030
PRI: 220 - 240V~
185-175mA
50/60Hz
SCS A-V
SCS

27Vdc
600mA

SCS A-V

SCS

Sound system MY HOME 375

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Residential sector: villa with automation system


The two wire sound system can also

Both the sound system and the

The system proposed has automation

be used with MY HOME automation

automation system can be managed

controls, a series of amplifiers and

This is brought about by using an

by the innovative TOUCH SCREEN

loudspeakers, a stereo control to

SCS/SCS interface item F422, where

Video (15 touch monitor) which

control a Hi-Fi system, a radio tuner

the sound system BUS is connected

reproduces the home layout on

and an RCA input Using a scenario

in output (OUT) and the automation

the monitor and, by means of icons

module you can: save the switching

BUS is connected in input (IN)

which can be customised, controls all

on of the sound system, switch

(the interface does not require

the devices

on the lights and raise the rolling


shutters with just one pushbutton

configurations)

iTem

descripTion

QuanTiTY

346000
F441
L/N/NT4560
L4561N
F500
L4562
L/N/NT4565
H4687
F422
3499
33698...(2/3/4)
336904

Power supply
Audio/Video node
RCA input
Stereo control
Radio tuner
Flush mounted amplifier*
Flush mounted loudspeaker
Video Touch Screen
SCS/SCS interface
Line terminator
8-contact connector
Twisted cable with 2 conductors

1
1
1
1
1
7
14
1
1
3
1
1

note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mtiX series
* to be completed with corresponding key covers

376 MY HOME

Sound system

DIAGRAM 10 VILLA - SOUND SYSTEM cOMBINED WITH 2 WIRE AUTOMATION SYSTEM


Video
touCH sCreen
e46AdCn

AutomAtion
L4651m2

For the
Video touCH sCreen
connection
please refer to the
system integration
and control section

F454

A
= AMB
PF/PL = 3
SPE = 8

ETHERNET

ON

OFF
SCS AI

SCS AV

346020

230 Vac

L4565

L4565

L4565

2 wire sound system

L4562
OFF

L4562

A = 1
PF = 1

A = 2
PF = 1

L4262

ON

A = 2
PF = 2

OFF

OFF

3499
L4565

L4565

L4562

L4565

L4562

ON

A = 3
PF = 1

ON

A = 3
PF = 2

OFF

L4565

OFF

L4562

L4562

A = 3
PF = 3

A = 3
PF = 4

3499

Hi-Fi stereo system

346000

out

SCS

F441

230 Vac

Bus

Patch cord supplied

230 Vac

F422
I4 = 1

F500n

L4561n

S = 2

S = 1

33698...
(2/3/4)
Cables supplied

in

L4560
S = 3

Sound system MY HOME 377

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Residential sector:
villa with 2 wire video door entry system
The two wire sound system can

means of the multichannel matrix,

The audio will return to its original

be combined with the two wire

are installed in the system When

volume when the handset is

video door entry system A colour

the entrance panel is activated, the

replaced Using the 4-pushbutton

TOUCH SCREEN and flush mounted

sound system reduces the volume of

block installed in the video door

amplifiers, 1 entrance panel and

the stereo sources so that the sound

entry units the loudspeakers in the

2 PIVOT handsets, combined by

of the bell can be heard

home can be used to page people

iTem

descripTion

QuanTiTY

346000
F441M
L/N/NT4560
L4561N
F500
L4562
L/N/NT4565
L4684
343001
344163
342510
342170
3499
33698...(2/3/4)
336904

Power supply
Multichannel matrix
RCA input
Stereo control
Radio tuner
Flush mounted amplifier*
Flush mounted loudspeaker
Colour TOUCH SCREEN
Linea 2000 Metal Entrance Panel
Polyx memory station
Camera Entrance panel
One-family speaker unit
Line terminator
8-contact connector
Twisted cable with 2 conductors

1
1
1
1
1
6
12
1
1
2
1
1
3
4
1

note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mtiX series
* to be completed with corresponding key covers

378 MY HOME

Sound system

DIAGRAM 11 Villa - SOUND SYSTEM COMBINED WITH 2 wire VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM AND TOUCH
SCREEN

344163
N = 2
P =
M =

L4565

L4565

ON

L4565

L4684
ON

OFF

L4562

ON

A = 1
PF = 1

OFF

L4562

ON

A = 1
PF = 2

OFF

L4562
A = 1
PF = 2
M1 = SLA

3499

344163
L4565

L4565

N = 1
P =
M =

L4565

OFF

ON

L4562

ON

A = 2
PF = 1
OFF

L4562

ON

A = 2
PF = 2

A = 3
PF = 1

OFF

OFF

3499

3499

F441M
P
N
T
S

343001

=
=
=
=
=
=9

L4562

346000

230 Vac

F500N

BUS

L4561N

S = 1

S = 2

33698...
(2/3/4)
L4560
S = 3

Hi-Fi stereo system

Cables supplied
230 Vac

NOTE: configure the video handsets using the software supplied

Sound system MY HOME 379

WIRING DIAGRAMS

System expansion
DIAGRAM 12 sound system / 2 wire video door entry system integration

L4565

L4565

ON

OFF

L4565

L4562

L4562

ON

A =1
PF = 1

L4565

OFF

L4562

ON

A =1
PF = 2

L4565

ON

A =1
PF = 3

OFF

OFF

L4562

L4565

L4562

ON

A =1
PF = 4

A =1
PF = 5

OFF

ON

OFF

3499

3499
349310

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT4

F441

A = 1
PF = 6

3499

230 Vac

N =1
A =2
PF = 1

346851

L4562

346020

346000

OUT

IN
ON

ON

OFF

M = 1

IN4

SCS

230 Vac

346850

To others 346850

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

OUT4

F422

346000

F441

I4 = 1

OUT

IN
ON

ON

OFF

IN1

343001

MOD= 5
N =

P = 1
S = 9

IN2

IN3

IN4

SCS automation

SCS

230 Vac

391657

33698...
(2/3/4)

L4561N
S = 1

380 MY HOME

Sound system

Hi-Fi stereo system

L4565

L4565

ON

OFF

L4562

L4565

ON

A = 3
PF = 1

OFF

L4565

L4562

ON

A = 3
PF = 2

OFF

L4562

L4565

L4562

ON

A = 3
PF = 3

L4565

OFF

3499

346851
OUT2

OUT3

230 Vac

346851

346851
OUT

OUT

ON

IN

OFF

ON

IN1

Rif.

Description

346000
346020
F422
F441
L4561N
33698...(2/3/4)
346851
346850
L4562
391657
343001
349310
3499

Power supply
Additional power supply
SCS interface
Audio/Video node
Stereo control
8-contact connector
System expansion module
Apartment interface
Flush mounted amplifier
Camera
Linea 200 metal Entrance Panel
Axolute Video Station
Line terminator

IN2

IN3

A =3
PF = 6

OUT4

OUT

M = 2

OFF

L4562

346020

346000

F441
OUT1

ON

3499

3499
349310

IN

A = 3
PF = 5

OFF

N =2
A =4
PF = 1

ON

L4562

ON

A =3
PF = 4

IN4

IN

ON
ON

ON

OFF

OFF

CS
S
SSC

230 Vac

M = 3

M = 4

WARNING

Sound sources cannot be connected to the inputs of


the audio/video nodes used to expand the system.
For a video door entry system add an additional
power supply on each VIDEO STATION monitor
allowing best management of the Sound system.
More than 3 interfaces or system expansion modules
cannot be connected consecutively.
This type of system does not provide for operation of
the intercom.

NOTE: the above system can also be achieved with AXOLUTE,


LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH and MTIX series

Sound system MY HOME 381

WIRING DIAGRAMS

System expansion
DIAGRAM 13 system with interface item 346851 for 2 wire video door entry system
integration
Using this type of system the 2 systems, 2 wire Sound system and 2 wire system, can be combined, also at different
moments. In fact this solution has two separate circuits which are combined using module item 346851. The advantage of
using a system made in this way is that of performing the differentiated calculation of the limits for single systems.
349310

349310
230 Vac

349310

349310

230 Vac
346020

230 Vac

230 Vac
346020

346020

346020
N = 1
A = 4
PF = 1

N = 2
A = 4
PF = 2

N = 3
A = 4
PF = 3

MOD = 5
N = XX

F441

346850

EXT

346000

346850

INT

ON

N = 4
A = 4
PF = 4

ON

OFF

SCS

230 Vac

F422
P = 2
P

N = 1
P = 1
S = 9

343001

XX = No. of apartment

382 MY HOME

Sound system

391662

HC4565

ON

OFF

HC4565

HC4562

HC4562

ON

A = 1
PF = 1

HC4565

A = 1
PF = 2

OFF

ON

OFF

HC4565

HC4562

ON

A = 2
PF = 1

OFF

3499

346851

HC4562

ON

A = 2
PF = 2

OFF

HC4565

HC4562

ON

A = 3
PF = 1

OFF

3499

F441

HC4562
A = 3
PF = 2

3499

346000

M = 1
346851

ON
ON

OFF

SCS

230 Vac

F500N

HC4560

S = 1

S = 3

HC4560*
S = 2

Rif.

Description

346000
346020
F422
F441
F500N
HC4560
346851
346850
HC4562
391662
343001
349310
3499

Power supply
Additional power supply
SCS interface
Audio/Video node
Radio tuner FM
RCA input
System expansion module
Apartment interface
Flush mounted amplifier
Camera Entrance panel
Linea 2000 metal Entrance Panel
Axolute Video Station
Line terminator

* intended for battery powered devices


WARNING

For the system limits of the sound system, see the


section General rules for installation.
For a video door entry system add an additional
power supply on each VIDEO STATION monitor
allowing best management of the Sound system.
NOTE: the above system can also be achieved with AXOLUTE,
LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH and MTIX series

Sound system MY HOME 383

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Integration with multimedia interface


DIAGRAM 14 SYSTEM WITH MULTIMEDIA INTERfAcE AND LAN NETWORK
This connection DIAGRAM shows a sound system with multichannel matrix, integrated with a multimedia interface and
home LAN network

L4569

L4569

room 1

Hd4565
ON

OFF

Hd4565

room 3

room 2

H4562

Hd4565

Hd4565

A = 1
PF = 1

H4562

ON

3499

ON

A = 2
PF = 1

OFF

H4562
A = 3
PF = 1

OFF

3499

3499

room 4

Hd4565

ON

Hd4565

H4562
A = 4
PF = 1

OFF

3499

Hi-Fi stereo system

F441m
343001

346000

P = 1
S = 2

230 Vac

F500n
S = 1

mP3 reader
mP3
Cables supplied

384 MY HOME

Sound system

Hd4560
S = 2

iTem

descripTion

QuanTiTY

H4562
L4569
HS4565
3499
H4684
F500
L4561N
F441M
346000
3494...(14/15)
HS4560
3465

Flush mounted amplifier


Outdoor loudspeaker
Flush mounted loudspeaker
Line terminator
Touch screen
Radio tuner
Stereo control
Multichannel matrix
Power supply
8-contact connector
RCA input
Multimedia interface

4
2
6
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1

note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mtiX series
www

PC

modem

PC
etHernet
switCH

Bus

H4684

3496

Hd4690

230 Vac
346020

sCs
Audio
out

Sound system MY HOME 385

386 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

CONTENTS

MY HOME - Video door entry and home video


surveillance system
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 387

GENERAL FEATURES

System composition
The 2 wire video door entry system

safety level, it is possible to connect

of trespassing, both the camera

uses the same SCS BUS technology of

2 wire indoor and outdoor cameras,

and the video handset will activate

all the MY HOME applications

the which images will be displayed

automatically In order to complete

Regardless of system complexity, the

directly on the video handsets (home

a 2 wire video door entry system, in

functions needed, and the number

video surveillance function) If a

addition to the Outdoor pushbutton

of video handsets, all the devices are

higher level of safety is required, it

panel and the handsets, a few

connected using the same 2 wire

will be possible to associate an IR

accessory will be needed, connected

cable, and are configured univocally

sensor of the burglar-alarm system

to the 2 wire BUS

In order to increase the system

to each sensor In this way, in case

3
riser (2 WirES)

Electric distribution board or My Home Flatwall

Floor shunt

1
2

System expansion module


Entrance panel

388 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

1. ENTrANCE pANEL:

rOOM 1

sends the call to the video handset(s)


(available in various look and
installation models)
2. SYSTEM EXpANSION MODuLE:
it can be used to increase the
performance of the system, for

Polyx Memory display


Video handset

example to increase the distance

between the outdoor pushbutton

rOOM 2

panel and the video handsets


3. ELECTrIC DISTrIBuTION

BOArD Or MY HOME
FLATWALL:
2

It enables the user to install DIN

rOOM 3

devices:
SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY: powers the
BUS and all the devices

5
2

AUDIO/VIDEO NODE: mixes the


audio and video signals from external

rOOM 4

sources (entrance panels, cameras,


sound sources ) and retransmits
them on the 2 WIRE riser (in
Apartment interface

alternative the audio/video matrix


2

can also be used)


4. FLOOr SHuNT:
used for star-connecting 4
apartments, hence saving a lot of

Axolute Eteris Video display

cable In addition, it lets you reach the


maximum extension of the system

The apartment interface enables creating an independent


system inside the apartment.
in this way, it is possible to install apartment handsets with
simultaneous switching on, entrance panels and dedicated
cameras.

5. ApArTMENT INTErFACE:
used for isolating the apartment
from the riser In this way, inside
the apartment it will be possible

Axolute Nighter video station

to install an independent system

with the corresponding MY HOME


applications

6. VIDEO HANDSETS:
audio-video terminal which enables
you to receive calls and to see who
2

is calling Using the icons of the


OSD menu it is possible to manage
and control MY HOME applications
(Available in various look and
installation models)

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 389

GENERAL FEATURES

Simple installation
The 2 wire system can be used to

Furthest handset

create any type of systems, both for


the villa and the apartment complex

Entrance panel

600 metres

THE SYSTEM MAY INCLuDE:

3900
5
96

390 MY HOME

Apartments

3900

Handsets
for apartment
Video entrance panel

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

39

Apartment video
entrance panel
risers with indepedent
sound mode

Devices
ENTrANCE pANEL

Wall
entrance panel

Outdoor video pushbutton panel

outdoor Axolute
entrance panel

with colour camera It can be used


to call the video handsets and
to activate the associated door
lock Available in various look and
installation models
Flush mounted
entrance panel

Axolute Nighter & Whice


Video Station
Polyx memory display

VIDEO HANDSETS
Video handsets for the audio and
video reception of entrance panel
calls Their icons allow the user
to manage the video door entry
system, and the MY HOME functions
Available in various look and
installation models

Axolute video display

INDOOr CAMErAS
2 WIRE indoor colour camera that can

cameras with
front cover plates

be connected directly to the system


SCS BUS Microphone for the room
monitoring function Available in the
AXOLUTE, LIVING, LIGHT and LIGHT
TECH versions To be completed with
the corresponding front cover plates

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 391

GENERAL FEATURES

Devices

Apartment interface

SYSTEM EXpANSION MODuLE


Used to increase the number of video
handsets connected to the system
and to achieve maximum installation
distance

System expansion module

ApArTMENT INTErFACE
To create a dedicated system inside
the Apartment, separate from the
apartment complex riser
In the apartment, it will therefore be
possible to create a video door entry
system with dedicated entrance
panels and cameras, integrated with

outdoor camera

the other MY HOME systems

ACTuATOrS
Used for the control of electric locks,

door lock actuator

or the management of generic loads


(e g staircase lights, call repetition,

OuTDOOr CAMErA

etc )

2 WIRE outdoor colour camera with


6 mm fixed optics to be connected
directly to the SCS BUS
Protection index: IP65

Actuator
for generic loads

FLOOr SHuNT
The floor shunt can be used to
create star wiring systems Its use

Floor shunt

is compulsory for installation in


simultaneous switching on systems

392 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

Audio/video node

AuDIO/VIDEO NODE AND VIDEO


ADApTEr
Video adapter

They perform the function of audio/


video mixers, for the connection to
the system of entrance panels and
video handsets
The audio/video node can be used
to connect up to 4 entrance panels /
cameras and up to 4 risers
The video adapter on the other hand
can be used to connect 2 entrance
panels and 1 riser (or 1 entrance
panel and 2 risers)
during presetting, the inclusion of the
audio/video node is recommended,
to allow for future system expansions.

MuLTICHANNEL MATrIX
Multichannel matrix

It functions is that of an advanced


audio/video mixing device
It has 4 sound source inputs and 4
inputs for video door entry system/
cameras, which can be distributed
simultaneously
To be used in alternative to the
audio/video node, in MY HOME
systems with integrated video door
entry system and sound system

MuLTIMEDIA TOuCH SCrEEN


10" Touch Screen display for the
management and the control of MY
HOME applications
It can be used to answer video door
entry system calls, and to display
images from the cameras connected
to the system It manages audio,
video, and WEB multimedia contents
through the USB connection It has
an SD card slot, and LAN connection
To be completed with the surround
plate

Multimedia Touch Screen

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 393

GENERAL FEATURES

Example 1 - Villa
ONE-FAMILY VIDEO DOOr-ENTrY SYSTEM WITH INTErCOM BETWEEN VIDEO HANDSETS
Nighter Video Station

Whice Video Station

Audio/video node

Power supply

Entrance panel

394 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

LiViNg rooM

349320

=
=5
P =
M =

oN

rooM 1

349321
=
=4
P =
M =
N

BUS

rooM 2

OFF

349320
=
=2
P =
M =
N

OFF

BUS

KiTcHEN

349321
=
=3
P =
M =
N

BUS

rEcEPTioN rooM

OFF

349320
=
=1
P =
M =
N

OFF

BUS

BUS

F441
OUT1

OUT 2

O UT3

IN 1

I N2

IN 3

346000

OUT 4

OUT

343001

IN

=
=
N =
T =
S =9
P

IN 4

BUS 2 1

SC S

230 Vac
BUS

Item

DescrIptIon

QUAntIty

343001
F441
346000
349320
349321
S

Entrance panel
Audio/video node
Power supply
Nighter Video Station
Whice Video Station
Electrical door lock

1
1
1
3
2
1

Max. 5 handsets

Max. 200 metres between the entrance panel and the last handset
S = Electric door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current
NoTE 1: We recommend that the video handsets are configured using the software supplied with the product
NoTE 2: When a call is received, only the handset configured with n=1 comes on

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 395

GENERAL FEATURES

Example 2 - Villa
ONE-FAMILY VIDEO DOOr-ENTrY SYSTEM WITH OuTDOOr CAMErAS
Nighter Video Station

Whice Video Station

Polyx Memory display


Audio/video node

Power supply

outdoor camera

Entrance panel

396 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

Linving room

344163

ON

=
=1
P =
M =
N

=
=4
P =
M =
N

BUS

Room 2

ROOM 1

349321
OFF

349320
=
=2
P =
M =
N

OFF

BUS

KITCHEN

349321
=
=3
P =
M =
N

BUS

Reception room

OFF

349320
=
=5
P =
M =
N

OFF

BUS

BUS

BUS

F441

342991

=
=
=
N
=
T =
S =9
P

OUT1

OUT 2

O UT3

IN 1

I N2

IN 3

346000

OUT 4

OUT
IN

IN 4

BUS 2 1

SC S

230 V
S

P
N
Z
M
A
PL

=
=1
=
=
=
=
=

391670

Item

Description

342991
391670
F441
346000
349320
349321
344163
S

Entrance panel
Outdoor camera
Audio/video node
Power supply
Video Station Nighter
Whice Video Station
Polyx Memory Display
Electrical door lock

391670
P
N
Z
M
A
PL

QUANTITy
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1

=
=2
=
=
=
=
=

Max. 5 handsets

Max. 200 metres between the entrance panel and the last handset
S = Electric door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current
NotE 1: We recommend that the video handsets are configured using the software supplied with the product
Nota 2: The answering machine function is available only using the 344163 video handset, and can only be
activated on 1 video handset (the one configured with N=1)
Nota 3: When a call is received, only the Handset configured with N=1 comes on

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 397

GENERAL FEATURES

Example 3 - Apartment
ApArTMENT WITH DEDICATED ENTrANCE pANEL AND prIVATE CAMErAS

outdoor camera
indoor camera
Axolute Eteris Video display
Apartment
interface

Audio/video node

Power supply

Polyx Memory display

398 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

344163
ON

Apartment extension

=
=5
P =1
M =
N

344163

BUS

ON
=
=2
P =1
M =
N

349340

BUS

=
=4
P =1
M =
N

OFF

OK

344163

BUS

OFF
=
=1
P =1
M =
N

344163

BUS

=
=3
P =1
M =
N

OFF

BUS

F441
OUT1

OUT 2

O UT3

IN 1

I N2

IN 3

346000

OUT 4

OUT
IN

IN 4

BUS 2 1

SC S

230 Vac
391661
P

Building
riser

N
Z
M
A
PL

=
=1
N =
T =
S =9
P

BUS
346850

391670

ON

342991

OUT

=
=5
M =3
N

IN
ON

Building
riser

ON

OFF

Item

Description

QUANTITy

342991
391670
391661
346000
F441
346850
344163
349340
S

L2000 Entrance panel


Outdoor camera
Axolute indoor camera
Power supply
Audio/video node
Apartment interface
Polyx memory display
Eteris Video Display
Electrical door lock

1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1

P
N
Z
M
A
PL

=
=3
=
=
=
=
=

=
=2
=
=
=
=
=

Max 5 video handsets, 1 apartment EP and 2 apartment cameras


Note 1: We recommend that the video handsets are configured using
the software supplied with the product
NOTE 2: Configure the entrance panels and the apartment cameras
starting from (P=1)
NOTE 3: The audio/video answering machine can only be activated on
one 344163 video handset (the one configured with N=-1)

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 399

GENERAL FEATURES

Example 4 - Complexes of small houses


MuLTI-FAMILY SYSTEM WITH SINGLE INDEpENDENT DWELLINGS AND AT LEAST ONE COMMON ACCESS pOINT

Entrance panel

Apartment interface

400 MY HOME

Audio/video node

Power supply

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

Inside of the apartment


see previous diagram

Inside of the apartment


see previous diagram

SMALL HOUSE 35

SMALL HOUSE 99

346850

346850
=3
=5
M =3

=9
=9
M =3

OFF
OUT

IN
ON

OUT

ON

IN

OFF

ON

BUS

Inside of the apartment


see previous diagram

BUS

Inside of the apartment


see previous diagram

SMALL HOUSE 1

SMALL HOUSE 26

IN
ON

346850
=
N
=1
M =3

OUT

ON

OFF

346850
OFF

ON

=2
N
=6
M =3

OFF
OUT

ON

IN
ON

OFF

BUS

ON

OFF

BUS

S
F441

346000

346260
=
=
T =
M =
JMP
JMP
P
TMP PL

SCS
SCS

RC

NC NO/S+ S

max 50 m

BUS 2 1
230 Vac

BUS
=
=
S =
P

The EP must be configured and


programmed using the software
supplied with the product

Item

Description

QUANTITy

349140
339213
339313
F441
346000
346850
S
346260

Axolute entrance panel


Front cover plate
Flush mounted box
Audio/video node
Power supply
Apartment interface
Electrical door lock
Door lock actuator

1
1
1
1
1
1 - 99
1
1

349140

Max 99 apartment interfaces and 1 apartment complex entrance panel

Max 50 metres between entrance panel and audio/video node

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 401

GENERAL FEATURES

System functions

Communication

Call

Apartment 1

The handset rings and the


monitor switches on

Call

Apartment 2

The conversation
cannot be heard

All the handsets, on the same call, ring and switch


on the monitor.

THE CALL

CONVErSATION SECrECY

SIMuLTANEOuS SWITCHING ON

Pressing the call pushbutton on the

During the conversation between

With video handsets, simultaneous

entrance panel, the system generates

the entrance panel and the video

switching on of the monitor is also

a signal that is only recognised by the

handsets, all external panels and

possible: upon arrival of the call, all

video handsets the call is addressed

handsets that are not involved in

handsets ring and the monitors of all

to (the call will have to be answered

the conversation are temporarily

video handsets switch on When the

within 30 seconds from the moment

excluded in order to guarantee

call is answered, only the monitor of

the pushbutton is pressed)

the privacy of video door entry

the video handset communicating with

Each VIDEO handset is configured in

conversations When calling from an

the entrance panel will remain on

a unique specific way When the call

entrance panel that is temporarily

In order to set this function, all the

is received, the video handset rings

excluded, a time-out tone will be

video handsets but one must be

and the monitor switches on

heard, to indicate that the extension

powered locally using an additional

Press the

line is momentarily busy

power supply, item 346020

pushbutton to

establish the communication


(maximum duration of the
communication is 1 minute) with the
entrance panel Press

again to

stop the communication and switch


the monitor off

402 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

CL

AK

Call

Pressing the door lock key will open the gate associated
with the handset.

The staircase light function will switch on the system


lights connected to a special actuator

Each time the self-switching on key is pressed


the images displayed change.

DOOr LOCK puSHBuTTON

THE STAIrCASE LIGHT

SELF-SWITCHING ON

The video handsets are fitted with a

FuNCTION

puSHBuTTON

door lock pushbutton Pressing this

The video handsets are equipped

By pressing the self-switching on

pushbutton will open of one of the

with an icons menu

pushbutton while the videohandset

door locks of the system

This function activates a relay for the

is at rest, a connection will be

With the system at rest, the pressure

timed switching on of lights and the

established with the entrance panel

of the pushbutton will cause the

opening of the gate

associated with the handset during

opening of the door lock of the

The function can be performed by

the P configuration of the handset

entrance panel associated with the

installing the actuator item 346200,

itself

handset during the P configuration of

appropriately configured

Pressing repeatedly on the self-

the handset itself On the other hand,

switching on pushbutton, will scroll

if the pushbutton is pressed during

through the various entrance panels

the call, the door lock associated to

and the cameras connected to the

the entrance panel making the call

system

will be opened

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 403

GENERAL FEATURES

System functions
Apartment 1

INTeRCOM
call

Call

Slave

Master

item 346850 apartment interface enables the iNTErcoM


function between the devices within the one apartment and
the various apartments

Apartment 2

When a call is received, the MASTEr comes on, while the


SLAVE will only ring.

APArTMENT 2

MASTEr-SLAVE FuNCTION

INTErCOM

For multi-family installations the

The system offers an intercom

MASTER-SLAVE function is available:

function, with up to 3 minutes

when the call is received, all the

communications between

apartment handsets ring, but only

videohandsets:

the monitor of the video handset

From dierent apartments

configured as master comes on

Within the same apartment

When the auto-switching on key of

If the apartment has an apartment

a SLAVE is pressed, the monitor of

interface - item 346850 - or is

the MASTER handset turns off, while

a one- family apartment, each

the monitor of the SLAVE itself turns

videohandset of the apartment can

on (without necessarily establishing

be called individually The INTERCOM

communication with the entrance

connection can be established at

panel) If the connection key

the same time as other external

of a SLAVE is pressed, the MASTER

connections The INTERCOM

monitor turns off and communication

connection can be simultaneous to

with the audio-video entrance panel

other connections external to the

is established

apartment If the apartment does not


have an apartment interface - item
346850 - any apartment handset can
call all other apartment handsets
The INTERCOM connection will not
occur at the same time as external
connections Any call received by an
EP, even to any other apartment, will
terminate the INTERCOM connection

404 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

APArTMENT 1

We are currently out.....

Answering machine active

MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3
MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3

MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3

MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3

MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3

Playback of sounds and images recorded by the answering machine

VIDEO DOOr ENTrY SYSTEM


ANSWErING MACHINE
FuNCTION
Function available only using the
POLYX MEMORY DISPLAY video
handset, item 344163 It is possible
to record voice and images of a call
from an entrance panel
It is also possible to record an audio
message to play back on the entrance
panel following an unanswered call
The video door entry system message
can be recorded in 2 ways:

STILLS: the message includes


a picture of the visitor and the
recorded audio message (160
messages max)

VIDEOS: the message includes a


video feed (duration 16 seconds)
and the recorded audio message
(18 messages max)
Each message will be given a
progressive number, which will be
displayed on the video handset,
together with the date and time
information

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 405

GENERAL FEATURES

System functions

ir detector
and associated cameras

dinner
is served!

oN

uP

pAGEr FuNCTION IN SYSTEMS

SCENArIO CONTrOL FuNCTION

SWITCHING ON CAMErA

INTEGrATED WITH SOuND

IN SYSTEMS INTEGrATED WITH

FuNCTION IN SYSTEMS

SYSTEM

AuTOMATION SYSTEM

INTEGrATED WITH THE

By pressing the conversation

From the video handsets, it is possible

BurGLAr ALArM SYSTEM

pushbutton

to recall the scenarios saved in the

It is possible to associate a zone of the

F420 scenarios

burglar alarm to the cameras When

on the video

handsets, it is possible to broadcast


a message through all the

an alarm situation is detected, the

loudspeakers of the sound system

NoTE: function possible by configuring the video

images recorded by the camera are

The involved video handsets must be

handsets using the software supplied with the

displayed on the video handset

powered locally

product.
Using the appropriate icons of the

From the video handset menu it

menu of the video handset, it is

is possible to control and display

possible to monitor the status of the

the functions of the sound system

burglar-alarm system: for example,

through the icons of the menu itself

the status of the burglar-alarm


(armed/disarmed), active zones,

NoTE: function possible by configuring the video

alarms occurred

handsets using the software supplied with the


product.

NoTE: function possible by configuring the video


handsets using the software supplied with the
product.

406 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

CUCINA

20.5 C

off

22.5 (+2)
18.5C

CUCINA

20.5 C

off

22.5 (+2)
18.5C

SupErVISION FuNCTION IN
SYSTEMS INTEGrATED WITH
THE TEMpErATurE CONTrOL
SYSTEM
From the video handset menu, it is
possible to display the status of the
temperature control system
Using the appropriate icons it is
possible, for example, to change the
temperature parameters, and display
the status of the probes
NoTE: function possible by configuring the video
handsets using the software supplied with the
product.

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 407

General rules for installation

System composition
The system is classed as SELV (Safety

The conformity to SELV classification

BASIC ELEMENTS OF THE VIDEO

Extra Low Voltage) due to the fact

is only guaranteed only subject to

SYSTEM

that it is powered by non grounded

FULL COMPLIANCE with current

In order to install a system it is

safety double insulation independent

installation regulations and with the

necessary to purchase, in addition to

power supplies with a max. voltage

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION

the entrance panel and the handset,

of 25 Vac (effective) or 60Vdc non-

relating to each single device and

also the 346830 video adapter, or

inverted voltage.

cable, making up the installation.

the F441 audio/video node, and the

In addition, all BTicino devices are

346841 floor shunt with the function

double insulated.

of distributing the video signal.

Video adapter
The video adapter is used to connect

Video adapter

entrance panels and handsets to a 2


wire video system

2
Power supply

A maximum of 3 connections are


allowed on the video adapter.

BUS
TK

Video handset

BUS
PI

PS

Video adapter
Video entrance
panel

Entrance
panels

Handsets

BUS
TK

BUS
PI

PS

Power supply 346000


A maximum of 3 connections are allowed on the video adapter.
(*) Entrance panels Handsets

BUS
TK

Entrance panel Handsets

BUS
PI

BUS
TK

PS

Connection of 2 entrance panels and a riser


for the handsets

BUS
PI

PS

Connection of 1 entrance panel and 2 risers


for the handsets

(*) If either an interface is connected to the entrance panel, only one connection on the TK BUS terminal of the
video adapter is possible.

408 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

AuDIO/VIDEO NODE

Audio/VidEo NodE

Or VIDEO MATrIX
The F441 audio/video node and the
F441M video matrix must be used in

alternative to the video adapter when


more than 2 entrance panels must be

Video handset

installed in the system, or when more

SCS

Power supply

than 2 risers are needed


The use of the audio/video node
or the video matrix is however
recommended, to allow for future

Video entrance
panel

To the handsets

mY HOme integrations, system

Power supply
Audio/video node

expansions, and/or addition of


cameras.
Allow for one output of the audio/
video node, or the video matrix, for

SCS

each video door entry system video


To the entrance
panels/cameras

handset with table-top installation

FLOOr SHuNT

FLoor SHuNT

When creating video systems, the


use of the floor shunt, item 346841

Apartment 2

is recommended This will provide


important savings on the cable to

Apartment 3

Apartment 1

Apartment 4

be used This is particularly suitable


for multi-family systems, when more
than one living unit on the same floor
or in multi-family systems, where

riser

ART. 346841

max distance between the entrance


panel and all handsets is needed The
Floor shunt enables star connection

2 wire riser

of up to 4 apartments with a max


of 3 handsets for Apartment (max
1 handset per output, if set in
simultaneous switching on)
One output of the audio/video node

For each output:

max. 3 video handsets or bells in the same apartment

max. 1 video handset in simultaneous switching on

max. 1 table-mounted video handset

should be dedicated to each tablemounted video handset installed

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 409

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION

System composition
SYSTEM EXpANSION MODuLE
346851 IN MOD = 0
(SYSTEM EXpANSION MODE)
To be used for system expansion, in
order to:

Regenerate the video signal and have


a further 200 m available after the
interface (using the 336904 cable)

Increase the number of devices


connected to the BUS

Use a max of 3 modules, configured


using the MOD = 0 in cascade
As far as the system composition,
distances and topology are

Mod = 0

concerned, within the system 1


section, the system expansion
module item 346851 must be
considered as a handset On the
other side, within the system 2
section it should be considered as an
entrance panel
Entrance panel

System 1 section
2

System 2 section
2

F441

346851

346000

F441

346000

OUT

ON

IN
ON

OFF

SC S

SC S

200 m

200 m

346851

346851

346851

max. 1 item 346851


with Mod = 0 for each output

346851

346000
OUT

ON

IN
ON

OUT

IN

OFF

ON

Entrance panel

OUT

ON

IN

OFF

ON

OUT

ON

OFF

IN
ON

ON

OFF

SC S

F441

2
2
2

346000
The iN clamp of the system expansion modules configured with Mod = 0 must be
connected to a dedicated output of the F441 audio/video node or the 346841 floor
shunt (as a handset with local power supply).

SC S

F441

410 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

SYSTEM EXpANSION MODuLE


ITEM 346851 IN MOD = 5
(INDEpENDENT rISEr MODE)
This is used in buildings to have
risers with riser entrance panels
and independent audio and video
functions

Mod = 5

riser 1 system section (with independent audio)


riser 1

riser 2 system section (with independent audio)


riser 2

F441

346000

F441

SC S

SC S

riser entrance
panel

346851

346851

OUT

IN

common system section

ON

riser entrance
panel

346000

OUT

ON

IN

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

Entrance panel

F441

346000
in the common system section, for the purpose of system composition, distances and layout, the system
expansion modules must be treated as a handsets. on the other hand, in the riser system sections they must
be treated as entrance panels.

SC S

The building entrance panel must be made with alphanumeric or numeric call module

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 411

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION

System composition
ApArTMENT INTErFACE
ITEM 346850
This is used to have an apartment
system independent from the
building In this way, the apartment
system can have private cameras
and entrance panels and can be
integrated with all the MY HOME
applications
As far as the system composition,
distances and topology are
concerned, within the building
system, the interface item 346850
must be treated as a handset On
the other side, within the apartment
system, it should be treated as an
entrance panel configured with P = 0

Apartment block system section

Apartment system section


346850

For the completion of the system, any type of cable

F441

OUT

can be used (including existing cables). Maximum


IN

performance and distances are achieved using the

ON

Handset

346000

ON

OFF

SC S

336904 cable.

Entrance panel

F441

346000

Apartment
entrance panel
Apartment camera

SC S

412 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

Configuration
To configure means to program the
The configurators can be purchased in a case

system. This occurs assigning an


identification and operational mode
number to the devices.

II

This operation is made inserting

0-9

in the appropriate seats some


3501K

configurators (numbered from 0


or individually

to 9), using a clamp provided with


the power supply or contained in

1
1

2
2

3
3

3501/1

3501/2

3501/3

6
6

7
7

8
8

3501/6

3501/7

4
4

5
5

the case of the configurators or


using the configuration software
(recommended).
A seat is left empty corresponds to

3501/8

3501/4

3501/5
S
S
L
L
A
A

0
0

9
9
3501/9

3501/0

3501/SLA

the configuration of a zero.


Example of configured system and its operation

In the system exist two different


numerations to identify respectively

Apartment 1

the entrance panels (EP) and the

Apartment 25
=
=1
P =

handsets.

=2
=5
P =1

The numeration of the EP (0-96) is

generally identified by P, while the


address of the handsets (0-99) is
identified by N.

handset from which we would start


to call.
On the handsets in addition to the N
address, it is necessary to configure

Door lock and auto-switching ON


controls in pause from apartment 25

also the N address relating to the

Call apartment 25

Door lock and auto-switching ON


controls in pause from apartment 1

address it is necessary to configure

Call apartment

On the EP, in addition to the P

in P the EP associated to the same


handset, or the entrance panel
on which the door lock and auto-

=
=
S =
P

switching ON controls work when the

=
=1
S =
P

handset is switched OFF.


Should occur the need to modify the configuration
of a device, it is necessary, in addition to change the
configurators, take off the power supply to the whole
system, wait 1 minute, and then provide voltage again.
For each device exist also particular configurations
which will be detailed in the product technical sheet.

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 413

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION

Configuration
SYSTEM EXpANSION MODuLE
ITEM 346851

MOD = 0 for system expansion

The system expansion module can be

M = specific progressive number for interface

configured in 2 different ways:

346851

(the addresses in M with MOD = 0

Mod = 0
M =2

346851

and MOD = 5 do not conflict with

ON

ON

OFF

each other)
Video handset

2
Video handset
Entrance
panel

2
Mod = 0
M =1

346851

ON

ON

OFF

346851

Mod = 0
M =1

Mod = 0
M =2

346851

346851

ON

ON

OFF

Mod = 0
M =4

346851

ON

ON

346851

Mod = 0
M =3

346851

ON

OFF

ON

346851

ON

OFF

ON

346851
F441

SCS

Entrance
panel

414 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

OFF

346851

MOD = 5 for independent audio risers


M = specific progressive number indicating the riser number

common entrance
panel

iNdEPENdENT
2 WirE riSEr

346851

iNdEPENdENT
2 WirE riSEr

iNdEPENdENT
2 WirE riSEr

Mod = 5
M =1

346851

Mod = 5
M =2

Mod = 5
M = 39

346851

ON

ON
ON
ON
ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

346851

346851

346851

For the common entrance panel, the handsets have address M (riser number) x 100 + N (handset for the riser).
Es. Handset N = 20 of the riser 12 for the common EP = 12 x 100 + 20 = 1220

ApArTMENT INTErFACE 346850


The apartment interface is configured

correct configuration

Wrong configuration

as a normal handset The interface


must be configured in a specific
unique way No other handset can

N =7

N =6

be configured in N using the same


address, in the same system or on the
same riser with independent audio

2
N =6

The factory device is configured with

N =5

M=3
2

2
N =5

N =5
EXT
ON

SYSTEM

EXT
ON

ON
ON

2 WirE BuS

346850

INT

346850

INT

SYSTEM

OFF

OFF

346850

2 WirE BuS

346850

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 415

General rules for installation

The wiring
SYSTEM WIRING

STAR wiring

The systems can also be wired in 2

The star wiring is made connecting

modes:

the individual apartment to an

in-out wiring

output of the floor distribution block

STAR wiring with floor shunt

Item 346841.

346841 (recommended).
Each line must be terminated by
positioning the micro switch of the

In-out wiring
In-out wiring is connected directly
on the terminal of the appliances
which are connected to the system.
Each riser must be terminated by
positioning the micro switch of the
last handset to ON.
In-out wiring is particularly
indicated for one and two-family
systems and for vertical or horizontal
multi-family systems (with the homes
in rows).

last appliance to ON.


STAR wiring is particularly suitable
for multi-family systems, when more
than one living unit on the same floor
or in multi-family systems, where
max. distance between the entrance
panel and all handsets is needed.
On each output of the shunt it will be
possible to connect up to 3 handsets
maximum.
An output of the floor distribution
block must be dedicated to
each handset with simultaneous
switching on or table-top base
installation.

In-out wiring

STAR wiring
ON

ON

Apartment n

ON

Handsets BUS

Apartment 1

Apartment 5

ON
OFF

ON

Apartment 2

Apartment 2

Apartment 6

ON

ON

Apartment 3
OFF

OFF

Apartment 7

ON

Apartment 3

ON

Apartment 4

Apartment 8

Apartment 4

2 wire BUS

346841

346841

2 wire BUS

416 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

ON

COMBINED WIrING

Apartment n

Both wiring methods described


previously can be used together, for
the realization of more articulated
OFF

systems

Apartment 2

Apartment 3

The combined wiring (IN-OUT

ON

and Star) allows to execute wiring


systems in order to satisfy the

OFF

greatest quantity of requests


OFF

Floor distribution blocks outputs


can be used to connect a single
device or to generate an apartment
line (on which max 3 devices can
be connected, without using the
apartment interface item 346850)

Apartment 1

To the Bus handset can be connected


in IN-OUT floor distribution blocks or

ON

handsets

346841

The assignation of the handsets

ON

Entrance panel BuS

to the apartments occurs through


configuration (for further information
see technical sheets for the individual
devices)

ON

OFF

ON

Floor shunt

OFF

2
Video entrance
panel

200 m

OFF

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 417

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION

Installation of entrance panels, handsets and interfaces

346850

INT

EXT
INT
ON

EXT
ON

160 165 cm

ON

346850

OF F

ON

346850

INT

OF F

160 165 cm

EXT
ON

OF F

ON

OF F

ON

346851

ON

346851
ON

346851

OF F

ON

ON

ON

OF F

NO

HEIGHT OF THE HANDSET

INTErFACES ITEM 346850 AND

HEIGHT OF THE ENTrANCE

When installing the handsets, including

346851

pANEL

standard or video handsets, it is

The interfaces item 346850

When installing the Entrance

recommended that the devices are

(apartment interface) and item

panel, it is recommended that the

positioned at a height of 160 165 cm

346851 (system expansion module)

pushbutton panel is installed at a

(top edge)

cannot be installed in a manhole For

height of 160 165 cm (top edge)

their installation, a sealed electric

The camera must not be installed in

Note: recommended installation heights, unless

cabin with DIN rail must be used (DIN

front of light sources, or in places

otherwise required by local regulations.

switchboard)

where the subject being filmed is in


the shadow
If this condition cannot be respected,
the picture will not have much
contrast in the darker areas This
is because the brightness is selfregulated on the lighter part of the
picture
To solve these problems change the
camera installation height, normally
160 165 cm, to a height of 180 cm
and direct the lens downwards to
improve the quality of the shots
In scarcely lit areas, the installation
of an additional light source is
recommended

418 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

System performance
The following information provides

MAXIMUM DISTANCE LINE A ENTRANCE PANEL - FURTHEST HANDSET

The type of system considered is a

Cable section mm2

2 normal cables >


0.2 mm2 or L4669

336904

twisted telephone
pair 0.28 mm2

one pair of the


multi-pair data cable,
item C9881U/5E

general parameters on the maximum

single family system or system below

5 HANDSETS in/out

50 m

200 m

140 m

140 m

an apartment interface.

5 one-fam Handsets/OUTDOOR EP

50 m

200 m

100 m

70 m

5 one-fam Handsets/EP with local


power supply

50 m

200 m

140 m

170 m

distances that can be achieved, and


the features of the cables to be used.

WARNING: For installation solutions or types other than those shown,


the distances and the current absorptions can be calculated using the You
Diagram software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the

346851

346850

MOD = 0

346851

EXT
ON

ON

one pair of the


multi-pair data cable,
item C9881U/5E

346850
INT

twisted telephone
pair 0.28 mm2

Furthest video
handset

Cable section mm2

(2 wire system Technical Guide).

MAXIMUM DISTANCE LINE C POWER SUPPLY FURTHEST HANDSET

336904

diagrams). Also refer to the specific technical documentation

2 normal cables >


0.2 mm2 or L4669

website www.professionisti.BTicino.it technical service software and

5 Handsets in/out

50 m

110 m

70 m

50 m

5 Handsets (with shunts)

50 m

110 m

70 m

50 m

ON

OFF

ON

MOD = 5

OFF

PS

2 pushbuttons

50 m

200 m

115 m

90 m

OUTDOOR EP

20 m

50 m

30 m

20 m

Entrance panel with local power supply

50 m

200 m

140 m

120

LINE B *

SCS

one pair of the


multi-pair data cable,
item C9881U/5E

F441

twisted telephone
pair 0.28 mm2

BUS
PI

336904

LINE A*

BUS
TK

2 normal cables >


0.2 mm2 or L4669

346000

346000 346830

Cable section mm2

LINE C*

MAXIMUM DISTANCE LINE B ENTRANCE PANEL POWER SUPPLY

346850

MOD = 5

OFF

BTicino SCS cable item 336904

ON

ON

BTicino SCS cable item L4669

ON

OFF

0.28

MOD = 0
346851

EXT

ON

MAXIMUM DISTANCE LINE D ENTRANCE PANEL DOOR LOCK

346851

346850

INT

Cable section mm2

Entrance panel

S+ S- clamps

30 m

30 m

50 m

100 m

(*) Max. variable distance.


Note: in systems with apartment interfaces only (in/out connection) the distance of
LINE C to be taken into account is 200 m (with BTicino cable 336904)
LINE D*

Door lock

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 419

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION

System performance
SYSTEM WITH ApArTMENT
INTErFACE AND SYSTEM

Audio/video connection
between the entrance panel
and the video handset
(3 passages maximum) = oK

EXpANSION MODuLE
Up to 3 interfaces, items 346850
and 346851 may be installed in
cascade Cascade interfaces are
those crossed by an audio/video
connection (Entrance panel

max 200 m

Video entrance
panel

HANDSET) or (HANDSET HANDSET,


e g INTERCOM) Only 2 of these
interfaces (selected by the user)

346851

retransmit the signal for 200 metres

346851

ON

The maximum distance between

max. 200 m

EP and the furthest handset is 600

ON

metres Each LINE (EP INTERFACE),

2
346851

(INTERFACE INTERFACE) and

346851

(INTERFACE H) must be 200 metres

ON

ON

maximum (with BTicino cable

OFF

max. 200 m

336904)

The IN end cap of the system


expansion module configured with
M=0 MUST be wired and considered

max. 200 m

as a H with local power supply


2
346850

INT

It must also be connected to an

EXT
ON

ON

output of the Audio/video node

OFF

346850

F441, or the Floor shunt 346841

420 MY HOME

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

OFF

CONNECTION OF 16 AUDIO /VIDEO Entrance panels Or cameras

Video door entry system/apartment interface risers

F441
OUT1

OUT 2

O UT3

IN1

IN2

IN3

346000

OUT 4

OUT
IN

F441
OUT1

OUT 2

O UT3

IN4

BUS 2 1

SC S

F441

OUT 4

OUT1

OUT 2

O UT3

F441

OUT 4

OUT1

OUT 2

O UT3

F441

OUT 4

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

SC S

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

SC S

3499

4 entrance panels or cameras

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

SC S

3499

4 entrance panels or cameras

OUT1

OUT 2

O UT3

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT 4

IN4

SC S

3499

4 entrance panels or cameras

3499

4 entrance panels or cameras

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 421

WIRING DIAGRAMS

One-family system with 1 EP


and 5 intercommunicating video handsets
WArNiNg

dEVicE 3

configure the handsets starting from N = 1

configure and insert the Jumpers with the system

ON
=
N
=3
P =
M =

SWiTcHEd oFF. Also every time the configuration is


modified the power supply to the system must be switched
off and on again, waiting about 1 minute.

The intercom function is operating even with a lack of


entrance panel connection.

We recommend that the video handsets are configured


using the software supplied with the product.

dEVicE 5
OFF

BUS

=
=5
P =
M =

344163

dEVicE 2

344163
BUS

=
=2
P =
M =
N

OFF

344163

A use of the actuator is necessary for the staircase light


service or generic actuations.

dEVicE 4

B For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the 2

OFF

BUS

wire range can be used

=
N
=4
P =
M =

dEVicE 1
344163

c Move the micro switch of the last video or audio handset


at the end of the line to the oN position

d Fit a 9 configurator to be inserted in S on the

BUS

OFF

=
N
=1
P =
M =

344163

speaker module for the general call; do not insert any


configurator in N.

e The audio video answering machine can only be used on


1 video handset (the one configured with N=1)

BUS

Nota 3: When a call is received, only the Handset configured


with N=1 comes on

Electric distribution board or My Home Flatwall


F441

BUS PL S+ S-

OUT1

OUT 2

O UT3

346000

OUT 4

346200
OUT

PS
S1

PE

IN

A
IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

BUS 2 1

SC S

230 Vac

343001
=
=
=
N
=
T =
S =9

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

NC

NO

230 Vac

422 MY HOME

Item

DescrIptIon

343001
344163
346200
346000
F441
L
EP
PS
S1

Linea 2000 Metal EP


Polyx Memory Display video handset
Staircase light actuator (optional)
Power supply
Audio/video node
Staircase light
Entrance panel
Door lock release pushbutton (optional)
Electric door lock 18V 4A impulsive 250mA holding current

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

Two-family systems with 1 EP,


3 handsets per home and intercom between apartments
HoME 2

A
WArNiNg
ON
=
=2
P =
M =

configure and insert the Jumpers with the system

HoME 1

BUS

ON
=
=1
P =
M =

SLAVE
344163

SLAVE
BUS

344163

OFF

=
=2
P =
M =
N

BUS

OFF

=
=1
P =
M =

SLAVE

SWiTcHEd oFF. Also every time the configuration is


modified the power supply to the system must be switched
off and on again, waiting about 1 minute.

it is possible to install a maximum of 3 video handsets for


apartment.

We recommend that the video handsets are configured


using the software supplied with the product

configure Master and Slave devices using the software


When a call is received, the MASTEr rings and switches on,
while the SLAVE will only ring. if the call is answered from
a SLAVE unit, the master unit switches off again, while
the monitor of the SLAVE from where the call is answered
comes on."

344163

A Move the micro switch at the back of the last video or

audio handset at the end of the line to the oN position

SLAVE
344163

B For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the 2

BUS

BUS

OFF

=
=1
P =
M =

wire range can be used.

OFF

=
N
=2
P =
M =

c The audio video answering machine can only be used on

MASTEr

1 video handset (the MASTEr video handset)

344163

MASTEr
344163

BUS

c
Electric distribution board or My Home Flatwall
F441
BUS PL S+ S-

OUT1

OUT 2

O UT3

IN1

IN2

IN3

346000

OUT 4

OUT

PS
S1

PE

IN

IN4

BUS 2 1

SC S

230 Vac

343002
=
=
=
N
=
T =
S =
P

Item

DescrIptIon

343002
344163
346000
F441
EP
PS
S1

Two-family Linea 2000 Metal entrance panel


Polyx Memory Display video handset
Power supply
Audio/video node
Entrance panel (main)
Door lock release pushbutton (optional)
Electric door lock 18V 4A impulsive 250mA holding current

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 423

WIRING DIAGRAMS

One-family system with 2 EP and 2 outdoor cameras


dEVicE 2

349321

WArNiNg
BuS Pi
(5 handsets
max.)

OFF
=
N
=2
P =
M =

configure and insert the Jumpers with the system


SWiTcHEd oFF. Also every time the configuration is
modified the power supply to the system must be switched
off and on again, waiting about 1 minute.

We recommend that the video handsets are configured


using the software supplied with the product.

End with the micro switch of the last line/riser handset in


the oN position.

BUS

dEVicE 1

349321

A For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the

OFF

2 wire range can be used.

B Fit a 9 configurator to be inserted in S on the Entrance

=
=1
P =
M =
N

panel to make a general call.

BUS

Nota: When a call is received, only the Handset configured with


N=1 comes on

Electric distribution board or


My Home Flatwall
F441
OUT1

OUT 2

O UT3

IN1

IN2

IN3

346000

OUT 4

OUT
IN

IN4

BUS 2 1

SC S

230 Vac

PE

PE1

391670

391670
cam.1

BUS PL S+ SPS
=
=
=
N
=1
T =
S =9

PS1
S1

S2

342991

424 MY HOME

cam. 2

BUS PL S+ S-

342991

N
T
S

=
=1
=
=1
=
=9

P
N
Z
M
A
PL

=
=2
=
=
=
=
=

P
N
Z
M
A
PL

=
=3
=
=
=
=
=

Item

DescrIptIon

342991
349321
391670
346000
F441
PE-PE1
PS-PS1
S1-S2
Cam.1-Cam.2

Linea 2000 Metal entrance panel


Whice Axolute Video Station
2 wire outdoor camera
Power supply
Audio/video node
Entrance panel
Door lock release pushbutton (optional)
Electric door lock 18V 4A impulsive 250mA holding current
2 wire outdoor camera

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

One-family system with 5 video handsets


in simultaneous switching on
230 Vac

WArNiNg

344163

346020

ON

configure the handsets starting from N = 1

configure and insert the Jumpers with the system

PRI

346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz

SWiTcHEd oFF. Also every time the configuration is


modified the power supply to the system must be switched
off and on again, waiting about 1 minute.

We recommend that the video handsets are configured


using the software supplied with the product

SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

=
=5
P =
M =

1- 2

1
2
BUS

use of the actuator is necessary for the staircase light


service or generic actuations.
230 Vac
344163

346020

For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the 2


wire range can be used.

ON

Move to oN the microswitch, on the Video handset or


audio handset, which ends the line.

PRI

346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

=
=4
P =
M =

1- 2

1
2

Fit a 9 configurator to be inserted in S on the


speaker module for the general call; do not insert any
configurator in N.

BUS

The audio video answering machine can only be used on


1 video handset item 344163

230 Vac
344163
346020

ON

PRI

230 Vac

346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

1
2

344163

346020

=
=3
P =
M =

1- 2

ON

PRI

346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

1- 2

BUS

=
=2
P =
M =
N

1
2
BUS

F441
OUT1

OUT 2

O UT3

346000

OUT 4

346200

230 Vac

OUT

344163

346020

IN

OFF

PRI

346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

BUS 2 1

SC S

1- 2

5
1

230 Vac

6
2

7
3

8
4

230 Vac
343001
BUS PL S+ SPS

PE
S1

=
=
=
N
=
T =
S =9
P

NC

=
=1
P =
M =

NO

1
2
L

BUS

Item

DescrIptIon

343001

Flush mounted Linea 2000 Metal


entrance panel
Polyx Memory Display video handset
System power supply
Additional power supply
Audio/video node
Staircase light actuator (optional)
Door lock release pushbutton panel
Electrical door lock

344163
346000
346020
F441
346200
PS
S1

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 425

WIRING DIAGRAMS

One-family system with max 16 cameras


or entrance panels
dEVicE 1

To other handsets / apartment interfaces


=
N
=1
P =
M =

OFF

349320

To other handsets / apartment interfaces

BUS

B
F441
OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

IN1

IN2

IN3

346000

OUT4

OUT
IN

IN4

BUS 2 1

SCS

230 Vac

F441
OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

OUT4

OUT

IN

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

SCS

3499
P
N
T
S

PE

=
=
=
=1
=
=9

342991

BUS PL S+ SPS

N
Z
M
A
PL

=
=1
=
=
= 391670
=
=

P
N
Z
M
A
PL

=
=2
=
=
=
=
=

cam.2

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

391670

cam.3

391670

S1
cam.1

426 MY HOME

N
Z
M
A
PL

=
=3
=
=
=
=
=

Item

DescrIptIon

3499
349320
F441
346000
342991
391670
EP
PS
S1
Cam1-Cam3
Cam4-Cam7

Line terminator
Axolute Video Station Nighter
Audio/video node
Power supply
Linea 2000 Metal EP
2 wire outdoor camera
Entrance panel
Door lock release pushbutton (optional)
Electrical door lock
Outdoor camera
Indoor camera

WArNiNg
When the nodes are used in cascade, the distances of the
various lines are halved.
For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the 2
wire range can be used.
All the advanced video handsets of the 2 wire range may
be installed.
only use one output for each node and allow for a
terminator item 3499 to be connected to the ScS clamp
configure advanced handsets using a Pc and Software
supplied.
By entering oFF in the first seats of the P configurators,
the microphone of the 2 wire cameras is excluded
(this function is only possible for cameras 0 to 9. The
microphone cannot be excluded on the other cameras).

F441
OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

F441

OUT4

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

F441

OUT4

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

IN

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

SCS

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

SCS

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT4

IN4

SCS

3499
3499

3499
To other entrance panels or other common
cameras(configured with P= 8 P= 11)

cam. 5

cam. 4

P
N
Z
M
A
PL

=
=4
=
=
=
=
=

cam. 6

P
N
Z
M
A
PL

=
=5
=
=
=
=
=

To other entrance panels or other common


cameras(configured with P= 12 P= 15)

cam. 7

P
N
Z
M
A
PL

=
=6
=
=
=
=
=

P
N
Z
M
A
PL

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

oFF
7

coLoUr InDoor cAmerAs AVAILABLe In tHe FoLLoWInG FInIsHes:


391658
391659
391657
391663
391661
391662

LIGHT
LIGHT TECH
LIVING
AXOLUTE - WHITE
AXOLUTE TECH
AXOLUTE - ANTHRACITE

Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 427

428 MY HOME

Structured cabling system for the home sector

CONTENTS

MY HOME Structured cabling system for the home sector


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 429

GEnEraL FEaTUrES

What is the structured cabling system for the home sector?


The advancement of multimedia

of untested solutions, which may

Telephone System, and the Television

services, such as satellite TV and

have unpredictable results

and data signals

terrestrial digital systems, internet

always attentive to technological

a star system is used to connect the

telephone systems and television,

development and to the above stated

cables from the distribution board to

have highlighted the need for a

needs, BTicino offers an ideal and

the user sockets in the various rooms

specific cabling system inside the

convenient solution for the creation

of the house

house, ensuring the distribution of

of a communication area inside the

the available services across various

distribution board, which centralises

rooms, avoiding the implementation

the devices for the distribution of the


Communication area

remote
control device

TV/SAT

IPTV
Telephone line
Internet

IPTV
TV/SAT system

Communication area inside the


MY HOMe Flatwall distribution board

430 MY HOME

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME AUTOMATION
SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
The home structured cabling system

By integrating the Web Server to

allows the integration of devices

the network, it will be possible to

for the control of the MY HOME

remotely control the MY HOME

functions a Multimedia Touch

system using a computer or mobile

Screen can be connected to the data

phone connected to the internet

Data

TV/SAT

network to control all the home


automation functions from a room of
the house, allowing the user can take
advantage of multimedia contents

TV/SAT

(audio and video) stored inside


other PCs connected to the network

TV/SAT

Telephone system

IPTV

TV/SAT

Multimedia Touch Screen 10

Touch Screen 3,5

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 431

GEnEraL FEaTUrES

The devices for the distribution of data, telephone and tv

TV/SAT

IPTV

Telephone distribution frame


F555
it can be used to distribute 1
telephone line to 8 dierent sockets,
or 2 telephone lines to 4 sockets.

xDSL filter with telephone


distribution frame F558
to separate the ADSL data line
from the Telephone line. The
Telephone line is available on 3
independent outputs.

Power supply F552


it provides 9 V, 1.6 A, voltage for
the supply of active devices.

432 MY HOME

Structured cabling system for the home sector

wa

ate

sG

es
Acc

Access
Gateway

TV/SAT

IPTV

Patch module F550C6


for patching inside the user socket wiring
distribution board.
Wire and patch cord connections are
concealed inside the distribution board and
cannot be seen by the user.

Switch F551
for the distribution of 1 data line to 4
dierent rJ45 sockets.

TV/SAT

IPTV
6-way TV/SAT distribution frame
F553
for the distribution of the television
signal to 6 dierent TV jacks.

Web Server F454


for local and remote management of
MY HOMe applications.

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 433

GEnEraL FEaTUrES

application examples:
telephone, data, TV/SaT, iPTV and video door entry system
This drawing shows the possibility of

in order to make the iPTV signal

distribution board, of a special

distributing, in addition to telephone

available to the corresponding

Gateway access device supplied by

and data signals, also the iPTV service

decoder, it will be necessary to

the Supplier of the iPTV service

TV/SaT and digital signals

install, inside the communication

TV/SAT
TV/SATTV/SAT

IPTV

rJ45 sockets

Flatwall

TV/SAT

IPTV

TV/SAT jacks

434 MY HOME

Structured cabling system for the home sector

IPTV

IPT
IPT

The following devices are installed

MY HOMe
video door entry system

inside the distribution board:


Gateway access supplied by the
supplier of the iPTV service
data switch F551
TV/SaT distribution frame F553
Telephone distribution frame F555
Patch modules F550C6
xdSL filter with telephone
distribution frame F558

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 435

GEnEraL FEaTUrES

application examples: telephone, data and integration


with MY HOME for local and remote function control
This drawing shows the possibility

This solution makes it possible to use

if the network has an internet

of installing a data and telephone

the 10 Multimedia Touch Screen

connection, it will be possible to

distribution system integrated with

to control the home automation

control all the home automation

the MY HOME system, for local and

functions, and to share the

function also remotely, using a PC, or

remote function control

multimedia content of other storage

a mobile phone

integration is made possible by

devices connected to the data

The following devices are installed

using the Web Server device, which

network

inside the distribution board:

operates as a bridge between the

Gateway access supplied by the

BUS wiring of the MY HOME system,

supplier of the adSL service

and the data network wiring system

Web Server F454


data switch F551
TV/SaT distribution frame
F553 TV/SAT

IPTV

TV/SAT jacks
Multimedia Touch Screen 10

TV/SAT
TV/SAT

rJ45 sockets

DSL InTerneT SerVICe

remote control device

436 MY HOME

Structured cabling system for the home sector

IPTV
IPTV

xdSL filter with telephone


distribution frame F558
Telephone distribution frame F555
Patch modules F550C6

Flatwall

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 437

GEnEraL FEaTUrES

Cabling structure and components for the home sector


Home structured cabling requires

as well as all active information

in new or refurbished homes, where

a STar type structure: the user

management and distribution

the MY HOME FLaTWaLL solution has

socket connection cables meet in a

devices, are located in general, the

been selected as the general electric

central point called star centre or

communication area is created by

distribution board (for example, to

communication area

grouping together all the devices in

also centralise the MY HOME devices),

This is the area where the

an appropriate distribution board

the communication area must be

connections with the access networks

to be installed near the general

created inside the distribution board

for distribution of various services

distribution board of the home

itself

(Telephone system, TV/SaT),

User socket

User socket

User socket

Communication areas inside the MY HOMe


FLATWALL distribution board

438 MY HOME

Structured cabling system for the home sector

in addition to the distribution board


the following items can be identified:
Signal handling and distribution
devices;
Cables for the connection of the
devices to the various user sockets;
User sockets with connectors split
by service type

User socket

User socket

User socket

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 439

GEnEraL FEaTUrES

Cabling structure and components for the home sector


Switch F551

THE DEVICES FOR THE


DISTRIBUTION OF SIGNALS
The management of the data
network
To ensure the connection of several
computers to the data network
and the sharing of the internet
connection, the Switch device F551
must be used

The internet network connection


The connection to the internet
network requires an adSL modem,
which may also be supplied by the
internet Service Provider (iSP)

WIRING DIAGRAM

rJ45 socket

rJ45 socket
Patch modules
F550C6

L4665L20/L40
patch cord

TV/SAT

TV/SAT

IPTV
Switch
F551

To the ADSL modem

440 MY HOME

Structured cabling system for the home sector

IP

XDSL filter F558

The management of telephone


signals
The telephone signal does not
require any special management
devices, with the exception of a
special filter F558, which separates
the telephone signal from the digital
signal for the adSL modem The
device has 3 filtered outputs for
the connection of three telephone
jacks For more complex systems, a
distribution frame F555 can be used
to replicate one telephone line to

For a detailed description of the listed devices see the corresponding technical

eight output lines intended for the

sheets .

respective telephone connectors

WIRING DIAGRAM

Patch modules
F550C6

rJ45 socket

TV/SAT

IPTV

XDSL filter
F558

L4665L20/L40
patch cord

Telephone distribution
frame F555

rJ45 socket

TV/SAT

rJ45 socket

Telephone line

rJ45 socket

TV/

IPTV

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 441

GEnEraL FEaTUrES

Cabling structure and components for the home sector


Patch module F550C6

The management of the


television signals
The distribution of the television

if, on the other hand, the system

signal (both terrestrial and satellite),

provides two separate signals, one

to several TV jacks, is entrusted to

analogue and one digital, with

the TV/SaT distribution frame F553,

separate cables, one distribution

which has one input connector and

frame and the corresponding TV

six output connectors if the aerial

connectors shall be used for each

system provides mixed analogue and

signal

digital signals, only one device will be


needed

WIRING DIAGRAM

Patch module
F550C6

Socket rJ45

TV/SAT

Socket rJ45

IPTV

Patch cord
L4665L20/L40
Switch
F551

Telephone distribution
frame F555

Socket rJ45

TV/SAT

442 MY HOME

Socket rJ45

IPTV

Structured cabling system for the home sector

Signal patching

TV/SAT distribution frame


F553

With this operation it is possible


to reconfigure over time the
correspondence between the user
sockets and the devices in the
communication area it is performed
using special patch modules F550C6,
to which the wiring cables are
connected
The connection with the devices
is performed using patch cords
L4665L20 and L4665L40
The special geometrical conformation
of the device (vertical cable input)
means that the wiring and the patch
cords can be concealed inside the
communication distribution board

WIRING DIAGRAM

TV/SAT socket

TV/SAT socket

TV/SAT

IPTV

TV/SAT socket

TV/SAT

IPTV
TV/SAT distribution frame
F553

TV/SAT socket

TV/SAT socket

TV/SAT
TV/SAT

TV/SAT system

IPTV
IPTV
SAT decoder

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 443

GEnEraL FEaTUrES

Cabling structure and components for the home sector


THE WIRING

COAXIAL CABLE

in home structured cabling systems

The coaxial cable consists of a central

The Coaxial cable for Television

two types of cables are used:

rigid or flexible conductor, insulated,

applications has a characteristic

coaxial cables for the distribution

using dielectric material, from an

impedance of 75 Ohms and a

external cylindrical conductor called

diameter between 4 and 7 mm

of the television signal;


4 pair twisted cable for the

shield

transmission of telephone and


data signals
The CEi 306-2 (*) guide calls for a
so-called basic wiring characterised
by 1 cable with 4 symmetrical pairs

Cavo COAXIAL

and 1 Coaxial cable destined to the


corresponding rJ45 type connectors
for data transmission, and to coaxial
connectors for the television
The same guide recommends
a so called advanced wiring,
characterised by 2 cables with 4
symmetrical pairs for data/telephone
services, and 2 coaxial cables for TV
signals

CABLE WITH 4 SYMMETRIC


PAIRS

The performance in terms of

due to the current transmission

Used for data and telephone

maximum frequency of the

requirement, the CEi guide

transmission, this cable consists

transmitted signal, is expressed in

recommends 5e category cables

of 4 pairs of twisted cables it is

categories as below:

However, in order to prepare the

available with (STP, S-FTP) or without

Category 5: data transmission up to

network for future applications,

(UTP) external shield For both, the

100 Mbit/s

category 6 or 6a cables are

characteristic impedance is 100

Category 5e: data transmission up to

recommended The typical use

Ohms

1000 Mbit/s (100 MHz)

requires capping with rJ45

Category 6: data transmission up to

connectors

1000 Mbit/s (250 MHz)


Category 6a: data transmission up to
10 Gbit/s (500 MHz)
nOTe (*): CeI 306-2. Guide for
telecommunication and multimedia distribution
wiring inside residential buildings.

Unshielded cable (UTP)

Shielded cable (STP)

444 MY HOME

Structured cabling system for the home sector

THE USER SOCKET


in the system configuration described

TV COnneCTOrS

so far, each branch of the Star


HS4214D

centre reaches, and ends in, a user

L4202D

socket normally consisting of one or


more connectors
There are two types of connectors for
the home data network:
TV signal coaxial connector

HC4269F

rJ45 standard connector with 8


contacts for telephone system and
data signals
n4210D
L4269F

Shielded TV and SAT COnneCTOrS in die-cast enclosure

Data network and telephone system connectors

nT4279C6

L4279C6

AM5979C6

n4279C6

rJ45 connectors

For the connection of telephone devices with rJ11 connectors to


rJ45 type connectors, the use of the rJ45/rJ11 adapter cable,
L4664, is recommended

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 445

Main requirements
STANDARDS

DESIGN CRITERIA

DEFINITION OF THE FUNCTIONS

The design and installation of the

during the design of the home data

REQUIRED

home data network system must be

network system, it is important that

The design of the data network

performed following the indications

the following aspects are defined in

system requires a good knowledge

and requirements contained in the

orderly sequence:

of the multimedia functions to be

following documents:

Functions required (data, Telephone

installed around the home as a way

CEI 306-2: Guide for

system, TV);

of example, attached is the table of

telecommunication and multimedia

Selection of the installation solutions

CEi 306-2 guide For each application

distribution wiring inside residential

based on the features of the building

this table shows the features of the

buildings

irrespective of the type of system and

corresponding wiring setup to be

CEI 64-100/1: residential building

the required functions, it is necessary

implemented for the multimedia

Guide for the presetting of the

that the PLaniMETrY, as well as a

network

infrastructures for electric, electronic,

GEnEraL FUrniTUrE PLan, are made

and communication systems

available to the installer it must also

Part 1: Building risers

be considered that on a design and

CEI 64-100/2: residential building

installation point of view the creation

Guide for the presetting of the

of a home data network system is

infrastructures for electric, electronic,

not very different from that of a

and communication systems

traditional electric power system

Page 2: dwellings (apartments)


CEI EN 50173-1: information
technology - Structured cabling
systems
Part 1: General requirements
CEI EN 50173-4: information
technology - Structured cabling
systems Page 4: Homes

Selection of the cable by application type


CABLES

SERVICE

BAND

CABLE USED

TV
(terrestrial + satellite)

47...2150 Mhz

COAXIAL

Traditional telephone system*

1 Mhz

1 symmetric pair

LAN

1 Gb/s

4 symmetric pairs

* In order to take advantage of the exibility of the home wiring system, it is recommended that also for the telephone system service a 4 symmetrical pair
cable is used, connected to a RJ45 socket, instead of the traditional twisted pair connected to the RJ11/12 socket.
In this case, the same rJ45 socket used to connect the pc to the local ethernet network can be reused, for example, to connect a standard analogue telephone to the telephone line,
without any intervention required on the horizontal wiring. The only action needed will be the patching of the termination of the corresponding cable in the Star centre, moving
the connector from the ethernet switch to the telephone distribution frame. To connect a telephone unit with rJ11 socket to the rJ45 socket, use the corresponding cable rJ11/
rJ45 L4664.

446 MY HOME

Structured cabling system for the home sector

Creation of the communication area


On an installation point of view,

it will therefore be necessary to

ZONE FOR HOME WIRING

it is recommended that the

also allow for partitions or similar

DEVICES

communication area is split in two

solutions for the separation of the

This area is occupied by the patch

specific zones:

systems

modules connecting the user

zone for the installation of

if the FLaTWaLL switchboard is used,

sockets to the Star centre, as well

a specific compartment is available

as all devices for the appropriate

for the installation of multimedia

distribution of the various signals to

devices

the sockets themselves

Gateway access devices


zone for home wiring devices

ZONE FOR GATEWAY ACCESS


DEVICES
This area is occupied by all active
and non active equipment, with
corresponding wiring for the
connection of the electric services
coming from the outside of the
home, such as:
Telephone line;
TV/SaT system from the central
unit downstream the aerials

Zone for home wiring devices

an example of active device for


this area is the adSL modem with
integrated switch, and if applicable
the Gateway device for the signals
coming from the optic fiber network
On the other hand, a non active
device can be the filter for the

Zone for Gateway Access devices

separation of the telephone signal


from the adSL data signal
For the operation of active devices, it
will be necessary to allow for
230 V power supply sockets, with the
corresponding disconnection and
protection devices in case of indirect
contact and overload
it must be considered that both
devices and wiring of the telephone
and data networks must be kept
separate from the 230 V electric
power supply devices and wiring

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 447

GEnEraL rULES FOr inSTaLLaTiOn

Positioning of the user sockets


it is recommended that 2 rJ45

the use of of the user sockets is not

also be installed, inside dedicated

sockets (data and telephone) and 1

prevented by the positioning of the

device holding boxes if no precise

TV jack are installed in each room,

furniture For the power supply of

design is available, the miminum

every 3 75 m of the perimeter of

the connected devices, on the side

requirements recommended for each

the room (ref CEi En 50173-4) The

of each user socket one or more

standard room of the house could be

number of sockets in each room

230 V power supply sockets must

as follows:

must, in any case, be such that


from each zone it will be possible
to reach the user point using a PC
or telephone connection cord not

ROOM TYPE

DEVICES TO BE USED

Kitchen

1 RJ45 socket (on worktop level) + 1 TV/SAT jack

Main bedroom

3 RJ45 sockets (2 of which for the telephone on bedside cabinets) + 1 TV/SAT jack

Second bedroom

2 RJ45 sockets (bedside cabinet and desk) + 1 TV/SAT jack

longer than 5 metres without causing

Living / sitting room

2 RJ45 sockets + 1 TV/SAT jack

any transit problems inside the

Study

2 RJ45 sockets

room Obviously, this requirement

Tavern

2 RJ45 sockets + 1 TV/SAT jack

must be assessed also taking into

Gym

1 RJ45 socket

account the current or future

Technical room
(laundry room/boiler room, etc.)

1 RJ45 socket

position of the furniture, so that

For the connection of telephone devices with rJ11 connectors to rJ45 type sockets, use the rJ45/rJ11 adapter cable
L4664.

DIAGRAM

Star centre distribution board

example of a possible home wiring system.

448 MY HOME

Structured cabling system for the home sector

User socket wiring


in order to ensure access to all types

service and those for the telephone

of services (data, telephone system,

system will be available on all the

and TV), the user socket must be

pins of the connector, as shown in

fitted with rJ45 connectors (female

the following table

Cat. 6 UTP
Connectors

type), and coaxial connectors for


aerial systems, with electric features
compatible with the ones of the
corresponding connection cables

RJ45 CONNECTORS
For the connection of modular rJ45
connectors to the 4 symmetric pair

RJ45 APPLICATION

data cable, two solutions can be


implemented, regulated by
Tia/Eia 568a or Tia/Eia 568B
standards respectively

PIN NUMBER
1

Telephone system
(analogue digital)
ISDN
Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mps

From the table it is clear that pins 7 and 8 are not used. However, there are
special applications that also require these pins.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TV COAXIAL SOCKET
rJ45 connector
cablato
EIA 568
Bsecondo
lo standard TIA/eIA 568B.

For the distribution of TV services


in the residential network wiring

These two standards are completely

system it is necessary to install

similar in terms of performance and

the Coaxial cable, which must be

supported applications The only

connected, in the user sockets, to

difference is that pair 2 and pair 3 are

the corresponding F or iEC type TV

switched
The main trend is to install systems

TV coaxial socket

jack (male type) The socket must be


compatible with the cable features

using the Tia/Eia 568B standard

and must assure the transmission,

connection requirements

without relevant attenuation, of the

By using this type of wiring, both the

television signal with frequencies

signals for the distribution of the data

up to 2 150 GHz BTicino has a wide


range of die-cast aluminium TV jacks
for the distribution of TV SaT and FM
radio signals

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 449

Wiring diagrams

System with 3 active telephone jacks and 4 active data sockets


(*)

RJ45 sockets

(*)

(*)

(*)

Star centre
F550C6

POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line

F550C6

F551

F552
Power

PLT1
F558

a b
IN

PLT1
OUT
a b
LINE

230 Vac
ADSL modem

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DIN MOD.

QUANTITY

F551
F552
F558
PLT1
F550C6
L4665L40/L20
See catalogue

Switch 10/100 Mbs


Power supply
ADSL filter
Protect. against lightning
Patch module
Patch cable
RJ45 connector

4
1
2
2
1

1
1
1
1
11
7
11

NotE (*): sockets preset for future patching

450 MY HOME

Structured cabling system for the home sector

System with 6 active telephone jacks and 6 active data sockets

(*)
RJ45 sockets

(*)

Star centre
F550C6

F550C6

F550C6

F550C6

F555
F552 F551
F551
Power

L1+L2
L1

L1

L2

L1

L2

POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line

PLT1

230 Vac

F558
a b
IN

PLT1
OUT
a b

ADSL modem
LINE

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DIN MOD.

QUANTITY

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DIN MOD.

QUANTITY

F558
PLT1
F555
F551

ADSL filter
Protect. against lightning
Tel. distribution frame
Switch 10/100 Mbs

2
2
4
4

1
1
1
2

F550C6
F552
L4665L40/L20
See catalogue

Patch module
Power supply
Patch cable
RJ45 connector

1
1

14
1
15
14

NotE (*): sockets preset for future patching

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 451

Wiring diagrams

System with Gateway access, 6 telephone jacks,


4 data sockets, 1 IPTV jack, and 6 TV/SAT jacks
RJ45 sockets

Star centre
F550C6

F550C6

F550C6

F555

F551

F552
Power

POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line

L1+L2
L1

L1

L2

L1

L2

230 Vac
PLT1

F558

a b
IN

Gateway access (*)

PLT1

IPTV output
OUT
a b
LINE

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

(*)

Access Gateway
ADSL filter
Protect. against lightning
Telephone distrib. frame
Hub TV
Switch 10/100 Mbs

F558
PLT1
F555
F553
F551

DIN MOD.

QUANTITY

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DIN MOD.

QUANTITY

2
2
4
4
4

1
1
1
1
1
1

F550C6
F552
L4665L40/L20
See catalogue
See catalogue

Patch module
Power supply
Patch cable
RJ45 connector
TV connecor

1
1

11
1
14
11
6

NotE (*): Device supplied by the supplier of the IPTV service

452 MY HOME

Structured cabling system for the home sector

Television set with integrated DTT decoder (if the


television is not fitted with one, connect it to the TV
jack using an external DTT decoder)

IPTV decoder

SAT receiver

TV jacks

type 4214D

F550C6

F553

Down from TV/SAT aerial

TV distribution board
with mixer

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 453

Wiring diagrams

System for distribution of telephone system,


data network, TV/SAT signal
RJ45 sockets

Star centre

F550C6

F550C6

F550C6

F550C6

F551

F555

F552

F551

Power

Power

POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line

L1+L2
L1

L1

L2

L1

L2

230 Vac

230 Vac

PLT1
F558

a b
IN

PLT1

ADSL Modem

OUT
a b
LINE

454 MY HOME

F552

Structured cabling system for the home sector

B variant

Down from
aerial
TV central unit

DTT decoder

Multiswitch

IF/IF central unit

SAT receiver

TV

TV jacks

type 4214D

F553

TO THE MY HOME VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DIN MOD.

QUANTITY

F558
PLT1
F555
F551
F550C6
F552
F553
L4665L40/L20
See catalogue
See catalogueo

ADSL filter
Protect. against lightning
Telephone distrib.frame
Switch 10/100 Mbs
Patch module
Power supply
Hub TV
Patch cable
RJ45 connector
TV connecor

2
2
4
4
1
1
4

1
1
1
2
11
2
1
13
11
6

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 455

Wiring diagrams

System with Wireless router modem external to the


distribution board for the management of 4 data sockets

RJ45 sockets

OUT

IN

RJ45 sockets

Star centre
F550C6

F550C6

F550C6

F552
F555

F551
Power

POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line

L1+L2
L1

L1

L2

L1

L2

230 Vac
PLT1
346020

a b
IN

PLT1
OUT
a b
LINE

Modem (*)

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DIN MOD.

QUANTITY

F558
PLT1
F555
F551
F552
F550C6
L4665L40/L20
See catalogue

ADSL filter
Protect. against lightning
Telephone distrib.frame
Switch 10/100 Mbs
Power supply
Patch module
Patch cable
RJ45 connector

2
2
4
4
1.5
1

1
1
1
1
1
12
12
12

456 MY HOME

Note (*): If the Modem has an RJ11 input connector use the
L4664 adapter cable

Structured cabling system for the home sector

Integration of the data and telephone system network


with the MY HOME system, for local or remote function control
RJ45 sockets

10 Multimedia Touch Screen


for local control

To the telephone system RJ45 sockets system


Star centre

F550C6

F550C6

F454

ETHERNET

F555

F552

F551

SCS AI

SCS AV

Power

L1+L2
L1

L1

L2

L1

L2

POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line

230 Vac
TO THE MY HOME SYSTEM
PLT1

ADSL modem

F558

a b
IN

PLT1
OUT
a b
LINE

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DIN MOD.

QUANTITY

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DIN MOD.

QUANTITY

F454
HC/HS4659
F558
PLT1
F555

Web server
Multimedia Touch Screen
ADSL filter
Protect. against lightning
Tel. distribution frame

10

1
1
1
1
1

F551
F550C6
F552
L4665L40
See catalogue

Switch 10/100 Mbs


Patch module
Power supply
Patch cable
RJ45 connector

4
1
1

1
9
1
10
8

2
2
4

Structured cabling system for the home sector

MY HOME 457

Wiring diagrams

Expansion of the number of data sockets


The number of RJ45 sockets for data transmission
shown in the electric diagrams can be extended by
using several F551 switches in cascade, as shown in the
example:

RJ45 sockets

F551

F551
RJ45 sockets

F551

ADSL modem

458 MY HOME

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DIN MOD.

QUANTITY

F551

Switch 10/100 Mbs

Structured cabling system for the home sector

CONTENTS

MY HOME System integration and control


General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .